Refrigeration Products Catalog

PUBL-5510

Google Docs
Google Drive
Download [pdf]
File Info : application/pdf, 240 Pages, 6.14MB
PUBL-5510 ?
Refrigeration Products Catalog

For the latest product updates, visit us online at johnsoncontrols.com,
search commercial refrigeration

BUILDING EFFICIENCY
Refrigeration Products Catalog
Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-17 Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-44 Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-59 Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-74 Temperature Control Sensors and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-79 Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-85 Single-Stage Electronic Pressure Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-103 Electromechanical Lube Oil and Differential Pressure Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . R-105 Electronic Lube Oil and Differential Pressure Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-111 Pressure Sensors and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-114 Refrigerant Sensors/Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-125 Liquid Level and Flow Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-127 Motor Speed Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-137 Valves and Valve Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-145 Relays and Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-190 System 450 Control Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-192 Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-223
R-1

R-2

Table of Contents

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls . . . . . . R-17
A11 Series Low Temperature Cutout Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-17
A19 Series Remote Bulb Control . . . . . . . . R-19
A19 Series High Range Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-21
A19 Series Thermostat for Crop Drying. . R-22
A19 Series Hot Water Temperature Control (Well Immersion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-23
A19 Temperature Control Less Enclosure (SPDT, Close Differential) . . . . . . . . . . R-24
A19 Series Thermostat for Hazardous Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-25
A19 Series Coiled Bulb Space Thermostat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-26
A19 Thermostat for Portable Heaters (Chain Mount and Drop Cord Electrical Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-27
A19 Thermostat for Portable Cooling Applications (Chain Mount and Drop Cord Electrical Connection) . . . . R-28
A19 Series Automatic Changeover with Strap-On Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-29
A19D Series Surface Mounted Temperature Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . R-30
A19 Flange Mounted Duct Thermostat . . . R-31
A19 Series Fan or Cutout Control (Liquid Expansion Bulb) . . . . . . . . . . . . R-32
A19 Temperature Control with Rainproof Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-33
A19 Agricultural/Industrial Thermostat with NEMA 4X Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-34
A19 Industrial Thermostat (Watertight and Dusttight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-35
A19 Temperature Control with NEMA 4X Enclosure (Remote Bulb). . . . . . . . . . R-36
A19 Water Chiller Control with Locked Cut-Out/Adjustable Cut-In . . . . . . . . . . R-37
A19 Defrost Duration and Fan Delay Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-38

A25 Series Warm Air Limit Control with Manual Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-39
A70 Series Four-Wire, Two-Circuit Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-40
A72 Series Two-Pole Heavy Duty Temperature Controls (Adjustable Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . R-41
A72 Series Cooling Tower or Evaporative Condenser Controls (Single-Stage Temperature Control with Outdoor Enclosure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-42
A72AA Coiled Bulb Space Thermostat (Cooling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-43
Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls . . . . . . R-44
A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-44
A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls with Integral Power Cord . . . R-47
A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls with Off-Cycle Defrost . . . . . R-50
A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls with Integral Cycle Timer . . . R-53
MR Series Defrost Control Modules . . . . . R-56 MR4PMUHV Electronic
Temperature/Defrost Control with Relay Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-58
Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls . . . . . . R-59
A28 Series Two-Stage Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-59
Two Stage Temperature Control . . . . . . . . R-59 A28 Series Two-Stage Flange Mounted
Duct Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-61 A28 Two-Stage Industrial Thermostat
(Watertight and Dusttight) . . . . . . . . . . R-62 A28 Two-Stage Temperature Control with
Weatherproof Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . R-63

R-3

Table of Contents

A28 Two-Stage Agricultural Thermostat with NEMA 4X Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-64
A36 Series Four-Stage Remote Bulb Thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-65
S26 Series Switching Subbase . . . . . . . . R-66 T22/T25/T26 Series Line Voltage Wall
Thermostat (Heating, Cooling, or Heating and Cooling) . . . . . . . . . . . . R-67 Typical Wiring Diagram and Electrical Ratings for Line Voltage Thermostats . R-69 T23 Series Fan Coil Thermostat (with Fan and System Selectors) . . . . . R-70 T28 Series Fan Coil Thermostat (with or without Fan Selector Switches) . . . . . . R-71 T46 Series Fan Coil Thermostat . . . . . . . R-72
Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls . . . . . . . R-74
MS Series Temperature Stage Control Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-74
MS Series Single-Stage Control Modules with Voltage Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-76
MS4PMUHVT Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Control with Relay Pack . R-78
Temperature Control Sensors and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-79
A99B Series Temperature Sensor . . . . . R-79 Bulb Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-80 G Series Thermostat and Humidistat
Guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-81 T22, T25, T26, T28, T46, and T91
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-83 T91 Series Room Temperature Sensor . . . R-84
Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls . . . . . . . . . . R-85
P10 Series Low Pressure Control . . . . . . . R-85 P20 Series Air Conditioning/Pressure
Cutout Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-86 P29 Series Low Pressure Control with
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-88

P47 Series Steam Pressure Limit Control. R-89 P67 Series Low Pressure Control . . . . . . R-90 P70, P72 Approximate Low Pressure
Settings for Typical Applications . . . . . R-91 P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for
Low Pressure Applications . . . . . . . . . R-92 P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for
High Pressure Applications . . . . . . . . . R-96 P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for
Dual Pressure Applications . . . . . . . . R-100
Single-Stage Electronic Pressure Controls . . . . . . . . . R-103
P470 Electronic Pressure Control with Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-103
Electromechanical Lube Oil and Differential Pressure Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-105
P28 Series Lube Oil Pressure Cutout Control with Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . R-105
P32 Series Sensitive Pressure Switch . . R-106 P45 Series Lube Oil Pressure Cutout
Control with Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . R-107 P74 Series Differential Pressure Control. R-108 P128 and P145 Series Lube Oil Pressure
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-109 P12 Series Differential Pressure
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-110
Electronic Lube Oil and Differential Pressure Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-111
P545 Series Electronic Lube Oil Control . R-111 CST29A Adaptor Block for Carlyle®
Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-113
Pressure Sensors and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-114
Replacement Timing Relays for P28 and P29 Lube Oil Controls . . . . . . . . . . . R-114

R-4

Table of Contents

P100 Series Encapsulated Pressure Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-115
P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-119
R310A Series Current Sensing Switch . . R-122 Universal Mounting Brackets . . . . . . . . . . R-123 SEC99A UltraCap Armored Capillary . . . R-124
Refrigerant Sensors/Monitors . R-125
RLD-H10PRO Refrigerant Leak Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-125
RLD Refrigerant Leak Detector Accessories and Replacement Parts . R-126
Liquid Level and Flow Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-127
F59 Series Sump Pump Switch . . . . . . . . R-127 F261 Series Fluid Flow Switches . . . . . . R-128 F262 Airflow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-130 F263 Series Liquid Level Float
Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-132 F61 and F62 Series Replacement
Paddles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-134 F92 Series Air Volume Controls for
Shallow Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-135 F93 Series Air Volume Controls for
Deep Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-136
Motor Speed Controls . . . . . . . . R-137
P266 Series Single-Phase Condenser Fan Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-137
P66/S66 Series Controls to P266 Series Controls Replacement Guide . . . . . . R-140
VFD68 Variable Frequency Drives . . . . . R-142
Valves and Valve Accessories . R-145
V43/V243 Series Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves . . . . . . . . . . R-145
V46 Series Pressure Actuated Water-Regulating Valve . . . . . . . . . . . R-151
V46N Series Reverse Acting Valve . . . . . R-154

V46 Series Valve Sizing Information--90% Open Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-155
V46 Series Valve Dimensions . . . . . . . . . R-156 V47 Series Temperature Actuated
Modulating Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47N Series Reverse Acting Valve. . . . . R-159 V48 Series Three-Way Water
Regulating Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160 V146 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated
Water-Regulating Valves . . . . . . . . . R-161 V148 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated
Water-Regulating Valves . . . . . . . . . R-166 V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated
Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants . . . . . . . R-171 V248 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants . . . . . . . R-181 STT Water Valve Renewal Kit for V46, V47, and V48 Series Valves . . . R-188 Companion Flanges and Gaskets for V43, V46, and V47 Series Valves . . . R-189
Relays and Transformers . . . . . R-190
Y63, Y64, Y65, Y66, and Y69 Series Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-190
System 450 Control Series . . . . R-192
System 450TM Series Modular Controls . R-192 System 450TM Series Control Module with
Network Communications . . . . . . . . R-203 System 450TM Reset Control Modules with
Real-Time Clock and Relay Output . . R-206 System 450TM Control Modules with
Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-208 System 450TM Control Modules with
Relay Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-210 System 450TM Control Module with
Hybrid Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . R-212 System 450TM Expansion Modules with
Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-214 System 450TM Expansion Modules with
Relay Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-216

R-5

Table of Contents

System 450TM Power Module . . . . . . . . . R-218
System 450TM Compatible Sensors, Transducers, and Accessories . . . . . R-219

Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-223
Ranco® Refrigeration Cross-Reference . R-223 ALCO® Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . R-231

R-6

Code Number Index

Numerics
210-604R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-87 246-423 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-153, R-158, R-189 246-424 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-189 246-425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-153, R-158, R-189 271-51 . . . . .R-88, R-107, R-109, R-112, R-123 426-424 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-153, R-158
A
A19AAB-10C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-21 A19AAB-4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-21 A19AAB-7C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-21 A19AAC-4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-19 A19AAC-9C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-21 A19AAD-12C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-19 A19AAD-5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-19 A19AAE-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-22 A19AAF-12C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-19 A19AAF-20C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-19 A19AAF-21C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-19 A19AAT-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-28 A19ABA-40C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-19 A19ABB-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-21, R-22 A19ABB-7C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-21 A19ABC-11C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-23 A19ABC-12C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-23 A19ABC-24C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-19 A19ABC-36C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-19 A19ABC-37C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-19 A19ABC-4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-19 A19ABC-74C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-19 A19ACA-14C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-19 A19ACA-15C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-19 A19ADB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-19 A19ADB-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-23 A19ADN-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-19 A19AGF-31C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-24 A19ANC-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-33 A19AUC-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-25 A19AUC-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-25 A19AUC-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-25 A19AUC-4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-25 A19BAB-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-26 A19BAC-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-26 A19BAF-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-26 A19BAG-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-27

A19BBC-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-26 A19BUC-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-25 A19CAC-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-29 A19CAC-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-29 A19DAC-10C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-30 A19DAC-12C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-30 A19DAC-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-30 A19DAC-9C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-30 A19DAF-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-30 A19EAF-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-31 A19EAF-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-31 A19EBA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-32 A19EBB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-32 A19EBC-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-32 A19EDB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-32 A19KNC-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-35 A19PRC-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-34 A19QSC-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-36 A19QSC-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-36 A19QSC-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-36 A19QSC-4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-36 A19ZBA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-37 A19ZBC-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-38 A25AN-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-39 A25AP-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-39 A25CN-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-39 A25CP-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-39 A28AA-28C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-59 A28AA-29C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-59 A28AA-36C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-59 A28AA-37C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-59 A28AA-4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-59 A28AA-9C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-59 A28AB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-59 A28AJ-4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-59 A28AK-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-61 A28AK-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-61 A28KA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-62 A28MA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-63 A28MA-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-63 A28PA-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-64 A28PJ-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-64 A36AHA-50C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-65 A36AHA-52C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-65 A36AHA-58C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-65 A36AHB-33C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-65 A421ABC-02C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-45

Note: Page numbers in italics denote pages where the product code number appears, but not as the main part.
R-7

Code Number Index

A421ABC-03C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-45 A421ABC-04C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-45 A421ABC-06C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-45 A421ABD-02C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-51 A421ABG-02C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-48 A421ABJ-02C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-48 A421ABT-02C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-54 A421AEC-01C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-45 A421AEC-02C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-45 A421AED-01C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-51 A421AED-02C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-51 A421AEJ-01C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-48 A421AET-01C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-54 A421GBF-02C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-45 A421GEF-01C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-45 A421GEF-02C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-45 A70GA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-40 A70GA-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-40 A70HA-14C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-40 A70HA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-40 A70HA-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-40 A70KA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-40 A72AA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-41 A72AA-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-41 A72AA-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-41 A72AA-4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-43 A72AE-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-42 A72AP-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-41 A72CE-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-42 A99BA-200C . . . . . . R-74, R-79, R-195, R-220 A99BB-200C . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-58, R-74, R-78,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-79, R-195, R-220 A99BB-25C . . . . . . . . . . . . R-79, R-195, R-220 A99BB-300C . . . . . . R-74, R-79, R-195, R-220 A99BB-500C . . . . . . R-74, R-79, R-195, R-220 A99BB-600C . . . . . . R-74, R-79, R-195, R-220 A99BC-1500C . . . . . . . . . . R-79, R-195, R-220 A99BC-25C . . . . . . . . . . . . R-79, R-195, R-220 A99BC-300C . . . . . . . . . . . R-79, R-195, R-220 A99BC-500C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-79 A99-CLP-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . R-79, R-196, R-220 ADP11A-600R . . . . . . . . . R-79, R-196, R-220
B
BKT16A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-85

BKT182-1R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-106 BKT229-1R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-106 BKT287-1R . . . . . . . . . . . R-195, R-204, R-207,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-208, R-210, R-213, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-214, R-216, R-218 BKT287-2R . . . . . . . . . . . R-195, R-204, R-207, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-208, R-210, R-213, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-214, R-216, R-218 BKT287-3R . . . . . . . . . . . R-195, R-204, R-207, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-208, R-210, R-213, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-214, R-216, R-218 BKT287-4R . . . . . . . . . . . R-195, R-204, R-207, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-208, R-210, R-213, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-214, R-216, R-218 BKT38A-600R . . . . . . . . . R-107, R-109, R-123 BKT38A-601R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-109 BKT48A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-72 BOX10A-600R . . . . . . . . . .R-79, R-195, R-220
C
C450CBN-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-195, R-210 C450CCN-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-195, R-210 C450CEN-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-195, R-204 C450CPN-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-195, R-208 C450CPW-100C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-195, R-213 C450CQN-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-195, R-208 C450CRN-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-195, R-204 C450RBN-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-195, R-207 C450RCN-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-195, R-207 C450SBN-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-195, R-216 C450SCN-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-195, R-216 C450SPN-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-195, R-214 C450SQN-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-195, R-214 C450YNN-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-195, R-218 CSE57A-600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-65 CST29A-600C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-113 CVR17A-620R . . . . . . . . . . . .R-40, R-41, R-43 CVR17A-621R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-40, R-41 CVR28A-617R . . . . . . R-20, R-21, R-23, R-24,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-26, R-29, R-60 CVR28A-618R . . . . . . R-20, R-21, R-23, R-24,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-26, R-31, R-32, R-60 CVR61A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-37 CVR88A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-72

Note: Page numbers in italics denote pages where the product code number appears, but not as the main part.
R-8

Code Number Index

D
DBK10A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 DBK10A-601R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147, R-148 DBK10A-602R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 DBK10A-603R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 DBK11A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 DBK11A-601R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 DBK11A-602R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 DBK11A-603R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 DPM17A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-188 DPM17A-601R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-188 DPM18A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 DPM18A-601R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 DPM18A-602R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 DPM18A-603R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 DPT2650-005D-AB . . . . . . . . . . . R-196, R-221 DPT2650-0R5D-AB . . . . . . . . . . R-196, R-221 DPT2650-10D-AB . . . . . . . . . . . . R-196, R-221 DPT2650-2R5D-AB . . . . . . . . . . R-196, R-221 DPT2650-R25B-AB . . . . . . . . . . . R-196, R-221 DSC16A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 DSC16A-601R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 DSC16A-602R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147, R-148 DSC16A-603R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147
F
F261KAH-V01C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-128 F261KEH-V01C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-128 F261KFH-V01C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-128 F261KFH-V02C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-128 F261MAH-V01C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-128 F261MAL-V01C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-128 F261MEH-V01C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-128 F261MFH-V01C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-128 F262KDH-01C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-130 F263MAC-V01C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-132 F263MAP-V01C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-132 F59A-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-127 F59A-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-127 F59H-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-127 FLG15A-600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-189 FLG15A-601 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-189 FTG13A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . R-20, R-21, R-37,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-41, R-59, R-80 FTG18A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-106

G
GRD10-1R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-81 GRD10A-600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-81 GRD10A-601 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-81 GRD10A-606 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-81 GRD10A-608 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-81 GRD10A-609 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-81
H
HE-6300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-76 HE-6310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-76 HE-67S3-0N00P . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-196, R-221 HE-67S3-0N0BT . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-196, R-221 HE-68N2-0N00WS . . . . . . . . . . . .R-196, R-221 HE-68N3-0N00WS . . . . . . . . . . . .R-196, R-221
K
KEY12A-600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-81 KIT14A-612 . . . . . . . . . . . R-153, R-158, R-189 KIT14A-613 . . . . . . . . . . . R-153, R-158, R-189 KIT14A-614 . . . . . R-146, R-153, R-158, R-189 KIT21A-600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-134 KIT21A-601 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-134 KITP545-82C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-112, R-113 KNB17A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-83 KNB20A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-83 KNB20A-602R . . . . . . . . . . . R-20, R-21, R-23,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-24, R-26, R-60 KNB26A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-72, R-83
M
MR1DR24-11C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-56 MR2DR24-11C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-56 MR2PM24-11C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-56 MR4DR24-12C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-56 MR4PM12C-12C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-58 MR4PM24-12C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-56 MR4PMUHV-12C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-58 MS1DR24T-11C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-74 MS1DR24V-11C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-76 MS2DR24T-11C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-74 MS2PM24T-11C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-74 MS4DR24T-11C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-74 MS4PM12CT-11C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-78

Note: Page numbers in italics denote pages where the product code number appears, but not as the main part.
R-9

Code Number Index

MS4PM24T-11C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-74 MS4PMUHVT-11C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-78
P
P10BC-7C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-85 P10BG-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-85 P10BJ-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-85 P10FC-4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-85 P10PA-11C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-85 P128AA-17C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-109 P128AA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-109 P128AA-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-109 P12AA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-110 P145NCA-12C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-107, R-109 P145NCA-82C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-107, R-109 P145NCB-12C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-107, R-109 P145NCB-82C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-107, R-109 P170AA-118C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-96 P170AA-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-97 P170AA-400C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-97 P170AB-12C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-93 P170AB-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-93 P170CA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-93 P170CA-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-96 P170CA-400C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-97 P170DA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-96 P170DA-400C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-97 P170EA-14C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-93 P170KA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-96 P170LB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-101 P170LB-6C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-100 P170MA-18C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-100 P170MA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-101 P170NA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-101 P170SA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-100 P20BB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-86 P20DB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-86 P20EB-18C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-86 P20EB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-86 P20EB-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-86 P20GB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-86 P28AA-17C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-105 P28AA-18C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-105 P28AA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-105 P28AA-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-105 P28AN-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-105

P28DA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-105 P28DN-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-105 P28GA-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-105 P28NA-5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-105 P29NC-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-88 P29NC-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-88 P29NC-49C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-88 P29NC-53C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-88 P29NF-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-88 P32AC-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-106 P32AC-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-106 P32AF-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-106 P32AF-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-106 P400AD-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-112, R-113 P400AD-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-112 P400BD-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-112 P45NAA-10C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-107 P45NAA-5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-107 P45NCA-12C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-107 P45NCA-82C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-107 P47AA-13C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-89 P47AA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-89 P47AA-4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-89 P47AB-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-89 P47BA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-89 P47BA-6C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-89 P47EA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-89 P47GA-9C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-89 P499RAP-101C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-197, R-222 P499RAP-101K . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-197, R-222 P499RAP-102C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-197, R-222 P499RAP-105C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-197, R-222 P499RAP-105K . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-197, R-222 P499RAP-107C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-197, R-222 P499RAP-107K . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-197, R-222 P499RAPS100C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-197, R-222 P499RAPS100K . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-197, R-222 P499RAPS102C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-197, R-222 P499RAPS102K . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-197, R-222 P499RCP-101C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-197, R-221 P499RCP-101K . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-197, R-221 P499RCP-105C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-197, R-221 P499RCP-105K . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-197, R-221 P499RCP-107C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-197, R-221 P499RCP-107K . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-197, R-221 P499RCP-401C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-197, R-221 P499RCP-402C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-197, R-221

Note: Page numbers in italics denote pages where the product code number appears, but not as the main part.
R-10

Code Number Index

P499RCP-404C . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-197, R-221 P499RCP-405C . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-197, R-221 P499RCPS100C . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-197, R-221 P499RCPS100K . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-197, R-221 P499RCPS102C . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-197, R-221 P499RCPS102K . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-197, R-221 P545NCB-22C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-111 P545NCB-25C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-111 P545NCB-82C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-111, R-113 P67AA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-90 P67CA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-90 P67EA-5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-90 P70AA-118C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-96 P70AA-119C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-97 P70AA-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-97 P70AA-400C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-97 P70AA-5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-93 P70AB-12C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-93 P70AB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-93 P70AB-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-93 P70BA-10C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-93 P70BA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-93 P70CA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-93 P70CA-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-96 P70CA-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-96 P70CA-400C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-97 P70CA-4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-93 P70CA-5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-97 P70DA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-96 P70DA-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-97 P70DA-400C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-97 P70EA-10C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-93 P70EA-14C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-93 P70GA-11C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-93 P70HA-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-93 P70KA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-96 P70KA-7C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-97 P70LA-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-101 P70LB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-100 P70LB-6C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-100 P70MA-18C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-100 P70MA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-100 P70MA-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-101 P70NA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-100 P70SA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-100 P72AA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-93 P72AA-27C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-96

P72AB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-93 P72CA-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-96 P72DA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-96 P72LA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-100 P72LB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-100 P72MA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-100 P72NA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-100 P74AA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-108 P74BA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-108 P74EA-10C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-108 P74EA-8C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-108 P74FA-10C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-108 P74FA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-108 P74FA-5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-108 P74JA-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-108 PLT112-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-134 PLT112-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-134 PLT213-6R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-83 PLT231-1R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-83 PLT333-12R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-72, R-83 PLT333-1R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-72, R-83 PLT333-2R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-83 PLT333-3R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-72, R-83 PLT333-4R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-83 PLT333-5R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-72, R-83 PLT344-1R . . . . . . . . . . . R-195, R-204, R-207,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-208, R-210, R-213, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-214, R-216, R-218
R
R310AD-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-112, R-122 R310AE-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-122 RLD-H10-100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-125, R-126 RLD-H10-101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-125 RLD-H10-102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-125 RLD-H10-103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-125 RLD-H10-105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-125 RLD-H10-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-125, R-126 RLD-H10-601R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-125, R-126 RLD-H10-602R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-125, R-126 RLD-H10-603R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-125, R-126 RLD-H10-604R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-125 RLD-H10-606R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-125, R-126 RLD-H10-607R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-125, R-126 RLD-H10PM-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-125 RLD-H10PRO-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-125

Note: Page numbers in italics denote pages where the product code number appears, but not as the main part.
R-11

Code Number Index

RLY13A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-114 RLY13A-602R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-114 RLY13A-608R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-114 RLY13A-609R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-114 RLY13A-610R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-114 RLY13A-613R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-114 RLY13A-616R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-114 RLY13A-617R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-114 ROD18A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 ROD18A-601R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 ROD18A-602R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 ROD18A-603R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147, R-148 ROD18A-604R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 RP4MRUHV-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-58 RP4MSUHV-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-78
S
S26AA-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-66 S26AH-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-66 S26DH-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-66 SCN10A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 SCN10A-601R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147, R-148 SEC37A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151 SEC37A-601R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151 SEC37A-602R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151 SEC99AA-18C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-124 SEC99AA-24C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-124 SEC99AA-36C . . . . . . . . R-124, R-151, R-152,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-154, R-160 SEC99AA-48C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-124 SEC99AA-60C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-124 SEC99AB-18C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-124 SEC99AB-24C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-124 SEC99AB-36C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-124 SEC99AB-48C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-124 SEC99AB-60C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-124 SEP107A-602R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151, R-160 SEP127A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151, R-160 SEP13A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 SEP13A-602R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 SEP13A-603R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 SEP50A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 SEP50A-601R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 SEP70A-601R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 SEP70A-604R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 SEP70A-605R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152

SEP77A-605R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-151, R-160 SEP81A-601R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-151, R-160 SEP81A-602R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-151, R-160 SEP86A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 SEP87A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 SEP88A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-147, R-148 SEP88A-601R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 SEP91A-600R . . . . . . . . . R-151, R-152, R-154 SEP91A-601R . . . . . . . . . R-151, R-154, R-160 SEP91A-602R . . . . . . . . . R-151, R-154, R-160 SEP91A-603R . . . . . . . . . R-151, R-154, R-160 SET29A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 SET29A-601R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 SET29A-602R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 SET29A-604R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 SET29A-605R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-157, R-159 SET29A-606R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 SET29A-622R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 SET29A-623R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 SET29A-624R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 SET29A-625R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 SET29A-626R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 SET29A-627R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 SET29A-629R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 SET29A-630R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 SET29A-632R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 SET29A-633R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 SET98A-621R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 SHL10A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-79 SHL10A-603R . . . . . . . . . .R-79, R-196, R-220 STT14A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 STT14A-600R . . . R-151, R-154, R-157, R-188 STT14A-601R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-152, R-188 STT14A-603R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 STT15A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 STT15A-602R . . . . . . . . R-151, R-154, R-157,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-159, R-188 STT15A-603R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-152, R-188 STT15A-605R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-160, R-188 STT16A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 STT16A-601R . . . . . . . . R-151, R-152, R-154,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157, R-159, R-188 STT16A-604R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-160, R-188 STT17A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 STT17A-604R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-160, R-188 STT17A-609R . . . . . . . . R-151, R-152, R-154,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-157, R-188

Note: Page numbers in italics denote pages where the product code number appears, but not as the main part.
R-12

Code Number Index

STT17A-610R . . . . . . . . . R-151, R-152, R-154, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157, R-159, R-188
STT17A-611R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152, R-188 STT17A-612R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152, R-188 STT17A-613R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152, R-188 STT17A-616R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160, R-188 STT17A-617R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160, R-188 STT18A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 STT18A-600R . . . .R-151, R-152, R-157, R-188 STT18A-601R . . . .R-151, R-152, R-157, R-188 STT18A-602R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152, R-188 STT19A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 STT19A-602R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 STT19A-603R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 STT19A-605R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 STT19A-606R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 STT19A-607R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147, R-148 STT19A-608R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 STT19A-609R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147
T
T22AAA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68 T22ABC-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68 T22ABC-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68 T22BBC-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68 T22CBC-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68 T22CBC-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68 T22JAA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68 T22JCC-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68 T22SDA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68 T22SEB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68 T22SFB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68 T22TFB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68 T23A-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-70 T23B-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-70 T25A-16C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68 T25A-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68 T26A-14C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68 T26A-15C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68 T26J-7C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68 T26J-9C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68 T26S-18C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68 T26T-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68 T28BD-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-71 T28CD-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-71 T28DA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-71

T28DB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-71 T28DD-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-71 T28DG-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-71 T46ABH-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-72 T46ADH-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-72 T46JBH-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-72 T46JDH-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-72 T46JEA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-72 T46SAA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-72 T46SAH-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-72 T46SDA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-72 T46SDH-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-72 T-800-1605 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-80 T-800-1606 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-80 T-800-1618 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-80 T-800-1620 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-80 T91BAA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-84 T91BBA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-84 T91BCA-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-84 TBG16A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-89 TE-6000-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-196, R-220 TE-6001-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-196, R-220 TE-6001-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-196, R-220 TE-631xx-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-196, R-220 TE-68NT-0N00S . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-196, R-221
V
V248GB1-001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181 V248GB1B001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181 V248GC1-001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181 V248GC1B001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181 V248GD1-001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181 V248GD1B001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181 V248GE1-001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181 V248GE1B001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181 V248GF1-001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181 V248GF1B001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181 V248GK1-001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181 V248GL1-001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181 V248GM1-001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181 V248HC1B001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181 V43AS-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-145, R-147 V43AS-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-145, R-147 V43AS-5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 V43AT-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-145, R-147 V43AT-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-145, R-147

Note: Page numbers in italics denote pages where the product code number appears, but not as the main part.
R-13

Code Number Index

V43AT-5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 V43AV-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-145, R-147 V43AV-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-145, R-147 V43AV-5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-145, R-147 V43AW-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 V43AW-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-145, R-147 V43AW-5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 V43BS-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 V43BS-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 V43BS-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-146, R-147 V43BS-6C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-145, R-147 V43BS-7C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-145, R-147 V43BT-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 V43BT-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 V43BT-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-146, R-147 V43BT-6C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-145, R-147 V43BT-7C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-145, R-147 V43BV-10C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-145, R-147 V43BV-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 V43BV-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 V43BV-4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-146, R-147 V43BV-5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 V43BV-6C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 V43BV-7C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-145, R-147 V43BV-8C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 V43BV-9C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 V43BW-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-146, R-147 V43BW-6C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 V43BW-7C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-146, R-147 V43CS-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-146, R-147 V43CS-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-146, R-147 V43CS-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 V43CT-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147 V43CT-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-146, R-147 V43CV-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-146, R-147 V43CV-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . R-146, R-147, R-148 V46AA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151 V46AA-50C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151 V46AB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151 V46AB-25C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151 V46AC-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151 V46AC-26C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151 V46AC-8C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46AD-13C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151 V46AD-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151 V46AD-4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46AE-17C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151

V46AE-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151 V46AE-4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46AJ-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151 V46AL-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151 V46AM-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151 V46AR-10C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151 V46AR-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151 V46AR-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46AS-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151 V46AS-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151 V46AS-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46AT-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151 V46AT-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151 V46AT-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46BA-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46BB-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46BC-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46BD-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46BE-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46BR-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46BS-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46BS-4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46BT-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46BT-4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46CJ-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46CN-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46CP-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46CQ-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46CR-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46CS-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46CS-4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46CT-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46CT-4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46DA-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152 V46EK-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151 V46NA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-154 V46NA-4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-154 V46NB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-154 V46NB-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-154 V46NC-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-154 V46NC-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-154 V46ND-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-154 V46ND-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-154 V46NE-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-154 V46NE-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-154 V47AA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AA-26C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

Note: Page numbers in italics denote pages where the product code number appears, but not as the main part.
R-14

Code Number Index

V47AA-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AA-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AB-27C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AB-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AB-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AB-4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AB-5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AC-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AC-40C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AC-4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AC-6C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AC-8C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AD-19C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AD-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AD-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AD-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AE-13C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AE-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AE-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AE-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AR-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AR-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AR-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AS-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AS-13C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AS-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AS-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AT-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AT-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47AT-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157 V47NB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-159 V47NC-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-159 V47NR-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-159 V48AB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160 V48AB-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160 V48AC-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160 V48AC-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160 V48AD-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160 V48AD-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160 V48AE-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160 V48AE-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160 V48AF-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160 V48AF-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160 V48AJ-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160 V48AL-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160 V48AM-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160 V48EK-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160

VFD68BBB-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143 VFD68BCB-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143 VFD68BDC-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143 VFD68BFD-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143 VFD68BGG-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143 VFD68BHG-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143 VFD68BJK-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143 VFD68BKL-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143 VFD68BLL-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143 VFD68BMP-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143 VFD68BNP-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143 VFD68CDF-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143 VFD68CFF-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143 VFD68CGG-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143 VFD68CHH-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143 VFD68CJJ-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143 VFD68CKL-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143 VFD68CLL-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143 VFD68CMP-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143 VFD68CNP-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143 VFD68DFM-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143 VFD68DGM-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143 VFD68DHM-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143 VFD68DJN-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143 VFD68DKN-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143 VFD68DLN-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143
W
WEL11A-601R . . . . . . . . . . . R-33, R-36, R-79, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-80, R-196, R-220
WEL14A-601R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-80 WEL14A-602R . . . . . . R-19, R-21, R-25, R-37,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-59, R-65, R-80 WEL14A-603R . . R-19, R-25, R-59, R-65, R-80 WEL16A-600R . . . . . . . R-25, R-35, R-62, R-80 WEL16A-601R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-19, R-80 WEL17A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-80, R-157 WEL17A-601R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-80, R-157 WEL17A-602R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-80 WEL17A-604R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-80 WEL18A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-80 WEL18A-601R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-159 WEL18A-602R . . . . . . . . . . R-80, R-157, R-159 WGT11A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-127 WGT11A-604R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-127

Note: Page numbers in italics denote pages where the product code number appears, but not as the main part.
R-15

Code Number Index

WHA-C450-100C . . . . . . R-195, R-204, R-207, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-208, R-210, R-213, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-214, R-216, R-218
WHA-P400-100C . . . . . . . . . . . . R-112, R-113 WHA-P400-125C . . . . . . . . . . . . R-112, R-113 WHA-P400-250C . . . . . . . . . . . . R-112, R-113 WHA-P400-400C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-113 WHA-P400-430C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-112 WHA-PKD3-200C . . . . . . R-119, R-197, R-222 WHA-PKD3-400C . . . . . . R-119, R-197, R-222 WHA-PKD3-600C . . . . . . R-119, R-197, R-222 WZ-1000-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-80 WZ-1000-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-80 WZ-1000-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-80
Y
Y63F22-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-190 Y63T22-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-190

Y63T31-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-190 Y64T15-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-191 Y64T21-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-191 Y64T22-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-191 Y65A13-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-190 Y65A21-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-190 Y65F13-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-190 Y65F42-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-190 Y65G13-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-190 Y65S13-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-190 Y65T31-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-190 Y65T42-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-190 Y65T54-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-190 Y66F12-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-191 Y66F13-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-191 Y66T12-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-191 Y66T13-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-191 Y69T15-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-191

Note: Page numbers in italics denote pages where the product code number appears, but not as the main part.
R-16

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls
A11 Series Low Temperature Cutout Controls

Code No. LIT-1927005

Description
A11 Series Low Temperature Cutout Controls are available with single-pole, single-throw (SPST) or single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) contact action. Typical applications include the sensing of low temperature conditions to avoid over cooling or icing of hydronic coils, cooling coils, and liquid-handing pipes. The controls are compact and sturdy, and have an adjustable temperature setpoint range with a fixed differential. The range adjustment screw is accessible at the bottom of the control, and at the top of the control when the cover is removed.
The A11 Controls are compact and sturdy and feature an adjustable range with a fixed differential. The range adjustment screw is accessible at the bottom of the control or at the top, when the cover is removed. A factory-set low temperature stop is available when specified.
Refer to the A11 Series Low Temperature Cutout Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-125010) for important product application information.

Features
· precision repeat accuracy remains unaffected by ambient temperature at the control diaphragm cup and 4 ft (1.2 m) capillary (20 ft [6.1 m] sensing bulb must be in the controlled area)
· trip-free manual reset allows the lever to reset. You must press and release the lever before operation resumes.
· precision snap-acting contacts in a dust protected enclosure enables the A11 Control to operate to the fullest potential
· direct reading scale provides easy-to-adjust setpoint. Adjustments can be made from the top or bottom of the control.
Repair Information
If the A11 Series Low Temperature Cutout Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Electrical Rating

Motor Rating Motor Description
AC Full Load Amperes AC Locked Rotor Amperes Non-Inductive Amperes Pilot Duty

120 V
16.0 96.0 16.0

208 V
9.2 55.2 9.2 125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

Selection Chart
Model
A11A A11B A11D A11E

Description
SPST, open low, manual reset SPST, open low, automatic recycle SPDT, manual reset SPDT, automatic recycle

A11 Series Low Temperature Cutout Control
240 V
8.0 48.0 8.0

()

()

()

()

() ()

()
() ()

()

()

()

()

()

() ()
()

()

()

()

A11 Series Low Temperature Cutout Controls Dimensions, in. (mm)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-17

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls
A11 Series Low Temperature Cutout Controls (Continued)

Technical Specifications

Product Codes
Range Cutout Differential
Ambient Temperature
Maximum Temperature at Bulb Sensing Element Capillary Length Switch Material
Finish Conduit Opening Mounting Bracket Shipping Weight
Electrical Rating Motor Ratings
Compliance

A11 Low Temperature Cutout Controls

A11A: SPST, open low, manual reset A11B: SPST, open low, automatic recycle A11D: SPDT, manual reset A11E: SPDT, automatic recycle

35 to 45°F (2 to 7°C)

A11A and A11D: Temperature must be 12°F (6.7°C) above cutout point before control can be reset. A11B and A11E: 12°F (6.7°C)

Minimum: 0°F (-18°C) Maximum: 140°F (60°C)

250°F (121°C)

1/8 in. x 20 ft (3 mm x 6.1 m) or 1/8 in. x 40 ft (3 mm x 12.2 m)

4 ft (1.2 m)

Snap-acting contacts in dust-protected enclosure

Case: 0.6 (2 mm) cold rolled steel Cover: 0.3 in. (1 mm) cold rolled steel

Galvanized steel

22 mm (9/10 in.) hole for 13 mm (1/2 in.) conduit

Standard on all controls

Individual pack: 1.8 lb (0.8 kg) Overpack of 20 units: 38 lb (17 kg)

Pilot Duty: 125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

AC Full Load Ampere: 120 V = 16.0 A, 208 V = 9.2 A, 240 V = 8.0 A AC Locked Rotor Ampere: 120 V = 96.0 A, 208 V = 55.2 A, 240 V = 48.0 A Non-Inductive Ampere: 120 V = 16.0 A, 208 V = 9.2 A, 240 V = 8.0 A

United States

UL Listed, File SA516, SDFY

FCC Compliant to CFR 47, Part 15 Subpart B, Class A

Canada

UL Listed, CSA Class No. 1222 01, File LR948

Industry Canada, ICES-003

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-18

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls
A19 Series Remote Bulb Control

Code No. LIT-1927010

Description
The A19 Series Controls are single-stage temperature controls that incorporate environmentally friendly liquid-filled sensing elements.
Refer to the A19 Series Hot Water Heating Controls Well Immersion Product Bulletin (LIT-125025) for important product application information.
Features
· wide temperature ranges available · constant differential throughout the entire
range · compact enclosure · fixed or adjustable differential available · variety of sensing element styles · unaffected by cross-ambient conditions
Applications
The A19 is suitable for temperature control in HVAC/R applications.

A19 Series
Y R
B
Action on Increase of Temperature
A19 Series Terminal Arrangement for Single-Pole,
Double-Throw (SPDT)

a19.eps

A19ABC-24 Remote Bulb Control

Selection Charts

A19 Series Remote Bulb Control1

Product Code Switch Range

Number

Action

°F (°C)

Differential F° (C°)

Bulb and Capillary

Bulb Well No. Range

(Order

Adjuster

Separately)

Max. Bulb Temp. °F (°C)

Adjustable Differential (Wide Range)

A19ABA-40C2

Single-Pole, -30 to 100 (-34 to 38) 3 to 12 (1.7 to 6.7) Single-Throw (SPST) Open low

3/8 in. x 4 in., 6 ft. capillary

WEL14A-602R Screwdriver Slot 140 (60)

A19ABC-4C SPDT

50 to 130 (10 to 55) 3-1/2 to 14 (1.9 to 8) 3/8 in. x 5 in., 8 ft. capillary

WEL14A-603R Knob

170 (77)

A19ABC-24C3 SPDT

-30 to 100 (-34 to 38) 3 to 12 (1.7 to 6.7) 3/8 in. x 4 in., 8 ft. capillary

WEL14A-602R Convertible

140 (60)

A19ABC-36C SPDT

-30 to 100 (-34 to 38) 3 to 12 (1.7 to 6.7) 3/8 in. x 4 in., 20 ft. capillary WEL14A-602R Convertible

140 (60)

A19ABC-37C SPDT

-30 to 100 (-34 to 38) 3 to 12 (1.7 to 6.7) 3/8 in. x 4 in., 10 ft. capillary WEL14A-602R Screwdriver slot 140 (60)

A19ABC-74C SPDT

-30 to 100 (-34 to 38) 3 to 12 (1.7 to 6.7) 3/8 in. x 4 in., 6 ft. capillary

WEL14A-602R Screwdriver slot 140 (60)

Fixed Differential

A19AAF-12C SPDT

25 to 225 (-4 to 107) 3-1/2 (1.9)

3/8 in. x 3 in., 10 ft. capillary WEL14A-602R Screwdriver slot 275 (135)

Fixed Differential (Case Compensated)

A19AAC-4C SPDT

0 to 80 (-18 to 27) 5 (2.8)

3/8 in. x 4 in., 6 ft. capillary

WEL14A-602R Screwdriver slot 140 (60)

A19AAD-12C SPST Open low

-30 to 50 (-34 to 10) 2-1/2 (1.4)

3/8 in. x 4 in., 7 ft. capillary

WEL14A-602R Screwdriver slot 140 (60)

Fixed Differential (Close)

A19AAD-5C4

SPST Open low

30 to 50 (-1 to 10) (Bulk Milk Cooler)

2-1/2 (1.4)

3/8 in. x 2-5/8 in., 6 ft. capillary

WEL16A-601R Screwdriver slot 190 (88)

A19AAF-20C SPDT

-30 to 100 (-34 to 38) 2-1/2 (1.4)

3/8 in. x 4 in., 6 ft. capillary

WEL14A-602R Screwdriver slot 140 (60)

A19AAF-21C SPDT

40 to 90 (4 to 32) 1-1/2 (0.8)

3/8 in. x 5-3/4 in., 6 ft. capillary WEL14A-603R Screwdriver slot 140 (60)

Manual Reset

A19ACA-14C SPST Open low

-30 to 100 (-34 to 38)

Manual reset

3/8 in. x 4 in. 6 ft capillary

WEL14A-602R Screwdriver slot 140 (60)

A19ACA-15C SPST Open low

-30 to 100 (-34 to 38)

Manual reset

3/8 in. x 4 in. 10 ft capillary

WEL14A-602R Screwdriver slot 140 (60)

A19ADB-1C

SPST

100 to 240

Open high (38 to 116)

Manual reset

3/8 in. x 3-1/2 in. 6 ft capillary

WEL14A-602R Knob

290 (143)

A19ADB-38C SPST

100 to 240

Open high (38 to 116)

Manual reset

3/8 in. x 4 in. 6 ft capillary

WEL14A-602R Screwdriver slot 290 (143)

1. Specify the control model code number, packing nut code number (if required), and bulb well code number (if required).

2. Replaces White-Rodgers® 1609-101

3. Replaces White-Rodgers 1609-12, -13; Ranco® 010-1408, -1409, - 1410, -1490, 060-110; Honeywell® L6018C-1006, L6021A-1005, T675A-1011, -1508, -1516, -1821, T4301A-1008, T6031A-1011, T6031A-1029

4. Case-Compensated

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-19

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls
A19 Series Remote Bulb Control (Continued)

Replacement Parts Product Code Number
CVR28A-617R CVR28A-618R KNB20A-602R

Description
Concealed adjustment cover Visible scale cover Replacement Knob Kit

Accessories
A packing nut is available for closed tank application. Specify the code number FTG13A-600R.
Bulb wells (WEL14A Series) are available for liquid immersion applications. See the selection chart or the Bulb Wells Catalog Page (LIT-1922135).

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings VAC

120

208

240

Wide Range  Adjustable Differential

AC Full Load A

16.0

9.2

8.0

AC Locked Rotor A

96.0

55.2

48.0

Non-Inductive A1

22 A, 120 to 277 VAC

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

Fixed Differential and Close Differential

AC Full Load A

6.0

3.4

3.0

AC Locked Rotor A

36.0

20.4

18.0

Non-Inductive A

10 A, 24 to 277 VAC

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

Case Compensated  Fixed Differential A19AAC-4

AC Full Load A

16.0

9.2

8.0

AC Locked Rotor A

96.0

55.2

48.0

Non-Inductive A1

22 A, 120 to 277 VAC

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

A19AAD-12

AC Full Load A

6.0

3.4

3.0

AC Locked Rotor A

36.0

20.4

18.0

Non-Inductive A

10 A, 24 to 277 VAC

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

Manual Reset

AC Full Load A

16.0

9.2

8.0

AC Locked Rotor A

96.0

55.2

48.0

Non-Inductive A

16.0

9.2

8.0

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

1. SPST and N.O. contact of SPDT control; SPDT N.C. contact- 16 amperes 120 to 277 VAC

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-20

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls
A19 Series High Range Temperature Control

Code No. LIT-1927015

Description
The A19 Series Controls are single-stage temperature controls that incorporate liquid-filled sensing elements.
Refer to the A19 Series Hot Water Heating Controls Well Immersion Product Bulletin (LIT-125025) for important product application information.
Features
· wide temperature ranges available · constant differential throughout the entire range · single-pole, single-throw (SPST) or single-pole,
double-throw (SPDT) snap-acting switches · fixed or adjustable differential available · unaffected by barometric pressure changes · unaffected by cross-ambient conditions · compact enclosure · variety of sensing element styles

A19 Series Y
R B
Action on Increase of Temperature
A19 Series Terminal Arrangement for SPDT

a19.eps

A19AAB Temperature Control

Applications
The A19s are suitable for temperature control in HVAC/R applications.

Selection Charts

A19 Series High Range Temperature Control

Product Code Switch

Range

Number1

Action

°F (°C)

Diff F° (C°) Bulb and (Factory Set) Capillary

Bulb Well No.

Range

(Order Separately) Adjuster

A19AAB-4C

SPST, open high

30 to 110 3-1/2 (1.9)

Remote Bulb Thermostat (-1 to 43)

3/8 in. x 5 in.

WEL14A-602R

copper 6 ft. capillary2

Screwdriver slot Visible scale

A19AAB-7C

SPST, open high Oven Thermostat

100 to 300 7 (3.9) (38 to 149)

3/16 in. x 9-1/2 in.



copper 6 ft. capillary

Knob Visible scale

A19AAB-10C

SPST, open high Oven Thermostat

200 to 550 10 (5.6) (93 to 288)

3/16 in. x 6 in.



copper 8 ft. capillary

Convertible

A19AAC-9C

SPDT

100 to 240 6 (3.3) (38 to 116)

3/8 in. x 3-1/2 in.

WEL14A-602R

copper 6 ft. capillary2

Screwdriver slot Visible Scale

A19ABB-2C A19ABB-7C

50 to 200

SPST, open high

(10 to 93)

Remote Bulb Thermostat 50 to 201

(10 to 94)

Adjustable 6 to 24 (3 to 13)

0.290 in. x 2-1/2 in.  copper 10 ft. capillary
7 x 64 mm copper 3m capillary

Knob Visible Scale

1. Specify code number, and closed tank fitting (Code Number FTG13A-600R), or bulb well, if required. 2. With 3-inch bulb support

Replacement Parts Product Code Number
CVR28A-617R CVR28A-618R KNB20A-602R

Description
Concealed adjustment cover Visible scale cover Replacement knob kit

Max Bulb Temp °F (°C)
140 (60)
350 (177) 620 (327) 290 (143) 240 (116) 240 (116)

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings VAC

120

208

240

AC Full Load A

16.0

9.2

8.0

AC Locked Rotor A

96.0

55.2

48.0

Non-Inductive A1

22 A, 120 to 277 VAC

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

1. SPST and N.O. contact of SPDT control SPDT N.C. contact - 16 A, 120 to 277 VAC

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-21

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls
A19 Series Thermostat for Crop Drying

Code No. LIT-1927020

Description
The A19 Series are single-stage temperature controls that incorporate liquid-filled sensing elements.
Refer to the A19 Series Utility Thermostats for Farm, Industrial, and Commercial Use Product Bulletin (LIT-125030) for important product application information.

Features
· designed for high temperature applications · narrow (2F° fixed) or wide adjustable
differentials
Applications
Crop drying thermostat energizes gas valve to maintain temperature.

Technical Specifications

The maximum bulb temperature for the A19AAE-3 is 200°F (93°C) and for the A19ABB-2 is 240°F (116°C).

Electrical Rating 120 VAC Motor Ratings VAC 120 208 240

A19AAE-3

AC Full Load A

6.0 3.4 3.0

AC Locked Rotor A

36.0 20.4 18.0

Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A (Not Lamp Loads)

10 A 120 to 277 VAC

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

A19ABB-2

AC Full Load A

10.0

 6.0

AC Locked Rotor A

60.0

 36.0

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

Repair Information
If the A19 Series Thermostat for Crop Drying fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

A19AAE-3 Thermostat

Selection Chart

Product Code Number

Switch Action

A19AAE-3C Single-Pole, Single-Throw (SPST) open high

A19ABB-2C SPST open high

Range Differential °F (°C) F°(C°)
80 to 180 2 (1.1) fixed (27 to 82)
50 to 200 6 to 24 (10 to 93) (3 to 13)
adjustable

Bulb and Capillary

Range Adjuster

1/8 in. x 1-1/4 in. Knob copper-coiled Ext. scale 10 ft capillary

0.290 in. x 2-1/2 in. 10 ft. capillary

Knob Ext. Scale

Max. Bulb Temperature °F (°C)
200 (93)
240 (116)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-22

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1927030

A19 Series Hot Water Temperature Control (Well Immersion)

Description
The A19 Series Temperature Controls are a universal replacement control for open high or single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) applications. The control is furnished with a well assembly for 1/2 in. tapping.
Refer to the A19 Series Hot Water Heating Controls Well Immersion Product Bulletin (LIT-125025) for important product application information.
Features
· liquid-filled element provides rapid response to temperature change
· adjustable differential · universal replacement
Applications
This operating control is ideal for hot water boilers.

Selection Charts

A19 Series Hot Water Temperature Control (Well Immersion)

Product Code Application

Switch

Range

Number

Action

°F (°C)

A19ABC-11C A19ABC-12C

Open high (R-B) Open low (R-Y)

Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT)

100 to 240 (38 to 116)

A19ADB-2C

High temperature lockout

Single-Pole, Single-Throw (SPST) Open high with lockout

100 to 240 (38 to 116)

Replacement Parts Product Code Number
CVR28A-617R CVR28A-618R KNB20A-602R

Description
Concealed adjustment cover Visible scale cover Knob kit

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC

120

AC Full Load A

10.0

AC Locked Rotor A

60.0

Pilot Duty

A19ABC-11 Temperature
Control

A19ABC-12 Temperature Control

Differential F° (C°)
6 to 24 (3 to 13)
Manual reset (locks out high)

Well Connector SizeNPT
1/2 in.
1/2 in.; 8 ft. capillary

Range Adjuster
Convertible

Max. Bulb Temp. °F (°C)
250 (121)
290 (143)

1/2 in.

Knob

250 (121)

240
6.0 36.0 125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-23

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1927035

A19 Temperature Control Less Enclosure (SPDT, Close Differential)

Description
The A19 Temperature Control Less Enclosure is an open-type temperature control for mounting in cases or enclosures.
Refer to the A19 Series Temperature Controls Less Enclosure Product Bulletin (LIT-125045) for important product application information.

A19 Series
Y R
B

Features
This control is designed with single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) contacts for open high or open low applications.
Applications
Use for panel-mounted temperature control for a packaged terminal air conditioner or for self-contained HVAC equipment.

Action on Increase of Temperature
A19 Series Terminal Arrangement for SPDT

a19.eps

Selection Charts

A19 Temperature Control Less Enclosure (SPDT, Close Differential)

Product

Switch

Range Differential Bulb and Range

Code

Action

°F (°C) F° (C°)

Capillary Adjuster

Number

A19AGF-31C

Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT)

40 to 90 (4 to 32)

1-1/2 (0.8)

3/8 x 5 in.; 5 ft. capillary

Shaft

Maximum Bulb Temp. °F (°C)
140 (60)

A19AGF-31 Temperature Control

Replacement Parts Product Code Number Description

CVR28A-617R

Concealed adjustment

CVR28A-618R

Visible scale

KNB20A-602R

Knob Kit

Technical Specifications
· back mounting · knob supplied by the customer

Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings VAC
AC Full Load A AC Locked Rotor A Non-Inductive Pilot Duty

120

208

240

6.0

3.4

3.0

36.0

20.4

18

10 A, 120 to 277 VAC

125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-24

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1927045

A19 Series Thermostat for Hazardous Locations

Description
The A19 Series Thermostat provides remote bulb or coiled bulb sensing for hazardous environments.
Refer to the Types A19AUC, A19BUC Fixed Differential Thermostat For Hazardous Location Product Bulletin (LIT-121035) for important product application information.
Features
· precision enclosed switch and a liquid-filled sensing element provides repeat accuracy that is unaffected by barometric pressure and cross-ambient temperature fluctuations
· single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) switch provides open high or close high action for heating or cooling
· electrical rating permits direct control of most equipment

Applications
These thermostats are designed for use in grain elevators, chemical and powder plants, mines, oil refineries, and similar sites. For use in Class I, Group D and Class II, Groups E, F, and G hazardous locations.

Repair Information
If the A19 Series Thermostat for Hazardous Locations fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings VAC 120 208 240 277

Full Load Amperes 16.0 9.2 8.0 

Locked Rotor Amperes

96.0 55.2 48.0 

Non-Inductive Amperes

22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

A19AUC Thermostat

A19BUC Thermostat

Selection Chart

Product Code Number
A19AUC-1C A19AUC-2C A19AUC-3C A19AUC-4C A19BUC-2C

Switch Range Action °F (°C)

Differential F° (C°)

SPDT -30 to 50 (-34 to 10) 5 (2.8)

20 to 80 (-7 to 27)

3-1/2 (1.9)

0 to 150 (-18 to 66) 6 (3)

100 to 250 (38 to 121) 6 (3)

20 to 80 (-7 to 27)

3-1/2 (1.9)

Bulb and Capillary
3/8 in. x 4-1/16 in., 6 ft. capillary 3/8 in. x 4-31/32 in., 6 ft. capillary 3/10 x 2-1/2 in., 10 ft. capillary 3/10 x 2-3/8 in., 10 ft. capillary Coiled

Bulb well (if required)
WEL14A-602R WEL14A-603R WEL16A-600R WEL16A-600R 

Range Adjuster
Knob

Maximum Bulb Temp. °F (°C)
140 (60) 140 (60) 190 (88) 290 (143) 140 (60)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-25

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls
A19 Series Coiled Bulb Space Thermostat

Code No. LIT-1927050

Description
The A19 Series Thermostat is a wide range temperature control with air coil sensing element.
Refer to the A19 Series Utility Thermostats for Farm, Industrial, and Commercial Use Product Bulletin (LIT-125030) for important product application information.
Features
· wide temperature range · NEMA 1 enclosure
Applications
Use for return air or space temperature sensing.

A19 Series Y
R B
Action on Increase of Temperature
A19 Series Terminal Arrangement for SPDT

a19.eps

A19BAC Thermostat

Selection Charts

A19 Series Coiled Bulb Space Thermostat

Product Switch

Range Differential Bulb and

Code

Action

°F (°C) F° (C°)

Capillary

Number

Range Maximum Adjuster Bulb Temp
°F (°C)

Ventilating, Heating

A19BAB-3C

Single-Pole, Single-Throw (SPST), open high

35 to 95 (0 to 35)

3 (1.7) fixed

1-3/8 in. x 2-1/4 in. Knob coiled

140 (60)

A19BAC-1C Single-Pole, 30 to 110 3-1/2 (1.9) Double-Throw (-1 to 43) fixed (SPDT)

1-3/8 in. x 2-1/4 in. Convertible coiled

A19BAF-1C SPDT

30 to 110 1-1/2 (0.9) (-1 to 43) fixed

1-3/8 in. x 2-1/4 in. Knob coiled

Cooling

A19BBC-2C 1 SPDT

-30 to 100 3 to 12 (-34 to 38) (1.7 to 7)

1-3/8 in. x 2-1/4 in. Convertible 140 (60) coiled

1. Replaces White-Rodgers® 201-16, -8, 2A37-1; Ranco® 010-1418, -1802, 016-594, C30-C1101; Honeywell® T631A, T696A, T6054 A1005.

Replacement Parts Product Code Number Description

CVR28A-617R

Concealed adjustment cover

CVR28A-618R

Visible scale cover

KNB20A-602R

Knob kit

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings VAC 120 208 240

A19BAB, A19BAC

AC Full Load A

16.0 9.2 8.0

AC Locked Rotor A

96.0 55.2 48.0

Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A1 (Not Lamp Loads)

22 A, 120 to 277 VAC

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

A19BAF

AC Full Load A

6.0

3.4 3.0

AC Locked Rotor A

36.0 20.4 18.0

Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A (Not Lamp Loads)

10 A, 120 to 277 VAC

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

Cooling - A19BBC

AC Full Load A

16.0 9.2 8.0

AC Locked Rotor A

96.0 55.2 48.0

Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A1 (Not Lamp Loads)

22 A, 120 to 277 VAC

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

1. SPST and only one side of SPDT control; SPDT - 16 A 120 to 277 VAC

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-26

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1927055

A19 Thermostat for Portable Heaters (Chain Mount and Drop Cord Electrical Connection)

Description
The A19 Series Thermostat is a sturdy compact thermostat designed especially for temporary installations.
Refer to the Type A19BAG Thermostat for Portable Heaters with Thermostat Extension Cord and Beaded Chain Hanger Product Bulletin (LIT-121040) for important product application information.

Applications
· on/off control of portable space heaters · agriculture
Repair Information
If the A19 Thermostat for Portable Heater fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Features

Technical Specifications

· 6-foot extension cord with piggyback style Electrical Ratings

plug

Motor Ratings VAC

120

· NEMA 1 enclosure

AC Full Load A

15

· chain mount

AC Locked Rotor A

90

A19BAG-1 Thermostat

Selection Chart

Product Code Switch Action Range

Number

°F (°C)

A19BAG-1C

Single-Pole,

35 to 95

Single-Throw

(2 to 35)

(SPST) open high

No-Heat position

Differential F° (C°)
3 (1.7) Non-adjustable

Maximum Bulb Temperature °F (°C)
140 (60)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-27

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1900402

A19 Thermostat for Portable Cooling Applications (Chain Mount and Drop Cord Electrical Connection)

Description
The A19 Series Thermostat is a sturdy compact thermostat designed especially for temporary installations.
Refer to the A19 Series Hot Water Heating Controls Well Immersion Product Bulletin (LIT-125025) for important product application information.
Features
· 6-foot extension cord with piggyback style plug
· NEMA 1 enclosure · chain mount · remote sensing bulb with 6 ft (1.8 m)
capillary tube

Applications
· on/off control of portable cooling applications
· home brewing

Repair Information
If the A19 Thermostat for Portable Cooling Applications (Chain Mount and Drop Cord Electrical Connections) fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC

120

AC Full Load Amperes

15

AC Locked Rotor

90

Amperes

Selection Chart

Product Code Number

Switch Action

Range °F (°C)

A19AAT-2C Single-Pole, Single-Throw 20 to 80 (-7 to 27) (SPST) open low

Differential F° (C°)
3-1/2 ± 2 (2 ± 1.11) Non-adjustable

Maximum Bulb Temperature °F (°C)
140 (60)

A19AAT-2 Thermostat

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-28

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1927060

A19 Series Automatic Changeover with Strap-On Mounting

Description
The A19 Series Changeover is a control for use with combination heating and cooling thermostats.
Refer to the A19CAC Type Automatic Changeover Control Product Bulletin (LIT-125065) for important product application information.

A19 Series
Y R
B

Features
This control automatically selects the correct thermostat function.
Applications
Recommended for convectors, fan coils, and blast coil units, and similar devices. The A19CAC-2 Control can be mounted directly on either a vertical or a horizontal pipe, using the can mounting strap supplied with control. The A19CAC-1 Control has a remote bulb for greater mounting convenience.

Action on Increase of Temperature
A19 Series Terminal Arrangement for SPDT

a19.eps

A19CAC-1 Control (Remote Bulb Model)

Selection Charts

A19 Series Automatic Changeover with Strap-on Mounting Product Code Number Switch Action Range °F (°C) Differential F°(C°) Mounting

A19CAC-1C

Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT)

60 to 90 (16 to 32) 10 (5.6)

42 in. Capillary

A19CAC-2C

SPDT

60 to 90 (16 to 32) 10 (5.6)

Direct

Replacement Parts Product Code Number
CVR28A-617R

Description
Concealed adjustment cover

Technical Specifications

· maximum case ambient temperature: 131°F (55°C)
· maximum bulb temperature: 250°F (121°C)

Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings VAC

120 240

AC Full Load A

10.0

6.0

AC Locked Rotor A

60.0

36.0

AC Non-Inductive A

10.0

6.0

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 240 VAC

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-29

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1927065

A19D Series Surface Mounted Temperature Controls

Description
The A19D Series Surface Mounted Temperature Controls are reliable, durable On/Off temperature controls with line-voltage single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) switches. The A19D Series Controls are designed primarily for fluid piping applications and include two adjustable mounting straps for mounting the control directly to a pipe.
Refer to the A19D Series Surface Mounted Temperature Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-125070) for important product application information.
Features
· SPDT switch action provides either high or low temperature detection.
· sealed, dust-protected switch provides reliable and durable On/Off control for commercial and industrial applications.
· color-coded electrical terminals simplify wiring the controls.
· sensing element insulated from the control case minimizes the effects of ambient temperature on the control setpoint.

· convertible range adjuster kit provides knob, screwdriver, or concealed adjustment options.
· multi-position mounting capability allows you to mount the control in any position on horizontal, vertical, or angled pipes.
· NEMA 1 enclosure provides protection against contact with the control's electrical components and protects the switch and electrical terminals from incidental contact.

Applications
Typical A19D control applications include high temperature detection on boiler applications and low temperature detection on unit heaters coil applications.

SPDT Switch Switch Action 6
Y

At Setpoint Y-R is open B-R is closed

R On Increase

Y-R closes

B

B-R opens

A19D Series Temperature Control
Repair Information
If the A19D Series Surface Mounted Temperature Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

FIG:6SPDT_chngHI

A19D Series Control Switch Action

Selection Chart

Product Code Number
A19DAC-1C A19DAC-9C A19DAC-10C A19DAC-12C A19DAF-2C

Description
100 to 240°F Temperature Range and Scale, 10 F° (± 2.8 F°) Differential, Visible Range Scale 40 to 120°C Temperature Range and Scale, 6 C° (± 1.0 C°) Differential, Visible Range Scale 40 to 120°C Temperature Range and Scale, 6 C° (± 1.0 C°) Differential, Concealed Range Scale 100 to 240°F Temperature Range and Scale, 10 F° (± 2.8 F°) Differential, Concealed Range Scale 200 to 240°F Temperature Range and Scale, 3-1/2 F° (± 2.0 F°) Differential, Concealed Range Scale

Technical Specifications

Product Code Number Adjustable Temperature Range Fixed Temperature Differential Maximum Ambient Operating Temperature Switch Contact Action
Terminal Screws Electrical Ratings
Enclosure Mounting Shipping Weight Compliance

A19D Series Surface Mount Temperature Controls

A19DAC: SPDT switch, standard differential A19DAF: SPDT switch, narrow differential

A19DAC: 100 to 240°F or 40 to 120°C A19DAF: 200 to 240°F (95 to 120°C)

A19DAC: 10 F° or 6.0 C° A19DAF: 3-1/2 F° (1.9 C°)

Controller Housing: 140°F (60°C) Sensor Element: 250°F (121°C)

SPDT, Snap Acting, Enclosed Dust Protected Pennswitch Red to Yellow Terminal Contacts Close on Temperature Increase Red to Blue Terminal Contacts Open on Temperature Increase

No. 8-32 x 1/4 in. Binder Head with Cup Washers

Motor Rating VAC Full Load Amperes Locked Rotor Amperes Non-Inductive Amperes Pilot Duty

A19DAC: Standard Differential 120 240 10.0 6.0 60.0 36.0 10.0 6.0
125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

A19DAF: Narrow Differential

120

240

6.0

3.4

36.0

20.4

6.0

3.4

125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

NEMA Type 1 General Purpose; Cold Rolled Steel, Gray Baked Enamel

Clamp-On (Straps Included)

1-1/5 lb (.54 kg)

UL Guide No. XAPX, File E6688 CSA Class No. 4813 02, File LR948 C-Tick

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-30

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls
A19 Flange Mounted Duct Thermostat

Code No. LIT-1927070

Description

Applications

The A19 Flange Mounted Duct Thermostat is a wide-range temperature control with a special air coil sensing element and an adjustable mounting flange.
Refer to the A19 Series Hot Water Heating Controls Well Immersion Product Bulletin (LIT-125025) for important product application information.

These duct thermostats are used on rooftop units, make-up heaters, duct heaters, and air handling systems of all types.

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings VAC 120 208 240

AC Full Load A

6.0

3.4

3.0

Features
· single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) snap-action switch
· unaffected by barometric pressure or cross-ambient temperatures
· flat flange mounting with the coil element permits positioning the sensing bulb in the appropriate portion of the air stream
Selection Charts

AC Locked Rotor A Non-Inductive Pilot Duty

36.0 20.4 18.0 10 A, 120 to 277 VAC 125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

A19 Flange Mounted Duct Thermostat

Product Code Switch

Range

Number

Action

°F (°C)

Differential Maximum Bulb

F° (C°)

Temperature °F (°C)

A19EAF-1C

SPDT

60 to 130 (16 to 54)

2 (1.1)

200 (93)

A19EAF-2C

SPDT

30 to 110 (-1 to 43)

2 (1.1)

140 (60)

Replacement Parts Product Code Number
CVR28A-618R

Description
Visible scale cover

A19EAF Thermostat

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-31

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1927075

A19 Series Fan or Cutout Control (Liquid Expansion Bulb)

Description
The A19 Series Fan or Cutout Control is a wide range temperature control with adjustable dial stops and mounting flange.
Refer to the A19E Series Warm Air Fan and Duct Controls Low or Line Voltage Product Bulletin (LIT-125075) for important product application information.
Features
· liquid charged element for fast response · may be mounted in any position

Applications
This control is designed for low or line voltage applications including warm air or furnace fan control.

Selection Chart

A19 Series Fan or Cutout Control (Liquid Expansion Bulb)

Product Code Application Switch

Range Differential F° (C°)

Number

Action

°F (°C) Min

Max

A19EBA-1C

Furnace Fan

Close high 50 to 250 9

36

Control

Single-Pole, (10 to 121) (5)

(20)

Single-Throw

(SPST)

A19EBB-1C

Warm Air

Open high

100 to 350 9

36

SPST

(38 to 177) (5)

(20)

A19EBC-1C

Counter-Flow

Single-Pole, 100 to 350 9

36

Warm Air Furnace Double-Throw (38 to 177) (5)

(20)

(SPDT)

A19EDB-1C1

Warm Air With Lock Out

Open high SPST

100 to 350 Manual Reset (38 to 177)

1. A19EDB-1 not for use as a limit control.

A19EBA, A19EBB, A19EBC A19EDB Cutout Controls
(A19EDB not for use as cutout control)

Adjustable Stop °F (°C)

Min

Max

145

250

(63)

(121)

Bulb Length
6 in.

Maximum Bulb Temperature °F (°C)
290 (143)

240 (116) 240 (116)
240 (116)

350 (177) 350 (177)
350 (177)

6 in.

375

(191)

6 in.

375

(191)

6 in.

375

(191)

Replacement Parts Product Code Number
CVR28A-618R

Description
Visible scale cover

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings VAC

120

208

240

277

A19EBA, A19EBB

AC Full Load A

16.0

9.2

8.0



AC Locked Rotor A

96.0

55.2

48.0



AC Non-Inductive A

22.0

22.0

22.0

22.0

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

A19EBC

AC Full Load A

16.0

9.2

8.0



AC Locked Rotor A

96.0

55.2

48.0



AC Non-Inductive A

16.0

16.0

16.0

16.0

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

A19EDB

AC Full Load A

16.0

9.2

8.0



AC Locked Rotor A

96.0

55.2

48.0



AC Non-Inductive A

22.0

22.0

22.0

16.0

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-32

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1927040

A19 Temperature Control with Rainproof Enclosure

Description
The A19 Temperature Control is a remote bulb temperature control with a rainproof (NEMA Type 3R) enclosure.
Refer to the A19 Series Hot Water Heating Controls Well Immersion Product Bulletin (LIT-125025) for important product application information.
Features
This control has a rainproof gasketed enclosure.

Applications
Use for control of cooling tower sump heaters.
Repair Information
If the A19 Temperature Control with Rainproof Enclosure fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart

Product Code Number

Switch Action

Range Diff. Bulb and °F (°C) F° (C°) Capillary

Bulb Well No. Range

(Order

Adjuster

Separately)

Max. Bulb Temp. °F (°C)

A19ANC-1C Single-Pole, 0 to 150 5 (2.8) 3/10 x 2-1/2 in. WEL11A-601R Double-Throw (-18 to 66) fixed 10 ft. capillary (SPDT)

Screwdriver 190 (88) slot

A19ANC-1 Temperature Control

Technical Specifications

· maximum bulb temperature: 190°F (88°C) · maximum ambient temperature: 140°F
(60°C)

Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings VAC
AC Full Load A

120

208

240

277

16.0

9.2

8.0

--

AC Locked Rotor A

96.0

55.2

48.0

--

Non-Inductive A

When connected Single-Pole, 22.0 Single-Throw (SPST)

22.0

22.0

22.0

When connected SPDT

16.0

9.2

8.0

6.9

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-33

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1927080

A19 Agricultural/Industrial Thermostat with NEMA 4X Enclosure

Description

Applications

The A19PRC is a single-stage temperature control designed for heating and ventilation applications. It features a raintight enclosure for use in agricultural and industrial applications that require compliance with Article 547 of the National Electrical Code. The A19PRC Thermostat has a rugged thermoplastic enclosure that meets NEMA 4X specifications.
Refer to the A19 Series Hot Water Heating Controls Well Immersion Product Bulletin (LIT-125025) for important product application information.
Features
· an O-ring sealed setpoint adjustment knob · exposed portion of the liquid filled sensing
elements are plated and plastic coated to resist damage in corrosive atmospheres

Typical applications include controlling ventilation or heating equipment in animal confinement or industrial buildings.

Repair Information
If the A19 Agricultural/Industrial Thermostat with NEMA 4X Enclosure fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings VAC 120 208 240

AC Full Load A

16.0 9.2 8.0

AC Locked Rotor A

96.0 55.2 48.0

Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A (Not Lamp Loads)1

22 A, 120/277 VAC

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

A19PRC Thermostat

1. Single-pole, single-throw (SPST) and only one side of single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) control; SPDT - 16 A, 120 to 277 VAC

Selection Chart

Product Code Number Switch Action

A19PRC-1C

SPDT

Range °F (°C)
30 to 110 (1 to 43)

Differential F° (C°) Bulb and Capillary

3 to 12 (1.7 to 6.7)

1-3/8 in. x 2 -1/4 in. Coiled

Range Adjuster
Knob

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-34

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1927085

A19 Industrial Thermostat (Watertight and Dusttight)

Description
The A19 Industrial Thermostat is a wide range temperature control with rainproof enclosure, single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) switch, and 5F° fixed differential.
Refer to the A19 Series Hot Water Heating Controls Well Immersion Product Bulletin (LIT-125025) for important product application information.
Features
· rugged steel enclosure · liquid filled sensing element (provides
uniform control)
Applications
Use for refrigeration, air conditioning, and heating applications that require a NEMA 4 watertight and dusttight enclosure.
Accessories
Order code number WEL16A-600R bulb well, if required.

Repair Information
If the A19 Industrial Thermostat (Watertight and Dusttight) fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings VAC

120 208 240

AC Full Load A

16.0 9.2 8.0

AC Locked Rotor A

96.0 55.2 48.0

Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A (Not Lamp Loads)

16.0 9.2 8.0

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

A19KNC-1 Thermostat

Selection Chart

Product Code Number
A19KNC-1C

Switch Action
SPDT

Range °F (°C)
0 to 150 (-15 to 65)

Differential Bulb and

F° (C°)

Capillary

5 (2.8) fixed 3/10 x 2-1/2 in. 10 ft. capillary

Bulb Well No. Range

(Order

Adjuster

Separately)

WEL16A-600R Knob

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-35

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1900403

A19 Temperature Control with NEMA 4X Enclosure (Remote Bulb)

Description
The A19 Temperature Control is a remote bulb temperature control with a watertight NEMA 4X enclosure.
Refer to the A19 Series Hot Water Heating Controls Well Immersion Product Bulletin (LIT-125025) for important product application information.
Applications
· cooling tower sump heaters · control of heating or ventilating equipment

Features
· watertight gasketed thermoplastic enclosure that meets NEMA 4X specifications
· concealed setpoint adjustment
Repair Information
If the A19 Temperature Control with NEMA 4X Enclosure (Remote Bulb) fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Technical Specifications

Maximum ambient temperature: 140°F (60°C).

Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings VAC

120

208

240

277

AC Full Load Amperes

16.0

9.2

8.0

--

AC Locked Rotor Amperes

96.0

55.2

48.0

--

Non-Inductive Amperes

When connected

22.0

Single-Pole, Single-Throw

(SPST)

22.0

22.0

22.0

When connected

16.0

9.2

8.0

6.9

Single-Pole, Double-Throw

(SPDT)

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

A19QSC Temperature Control

Selection Chart

Product Code Number
A19QSC-1C
A19QSC-2C
A19QSC-3C
A19QSC-4C

Switch Action
SPDT

Range °F (°C)
0 to 150 (-18 to 66) 100 to 250 (38 to 121) 200 to 350 (93 to 176) 0 to 190 (-18 to 88)

Differential F° (C°)
5±2 (2.82 ±1.11) fixed 6±2 (32 ±1.11) fixed 5±2 (2.82 ±1.11) fixed 5±2 (2.82 ±1.11) fixed

Bulb and Capillary
3/10 x 2-1/2 in.; 10 ft. capillary 3/10 x 2-3/8 in.; 10 ft capillary 3/10 x 2-1/4 in.; 10 ft capillary 3/10 x 2-1/2 in.; 20 ft capillary

Bulb Well No. Range Maximum Bulb

(Order

Adjuster Temperature

Separately)

°F (°C)

WEL11A-601R --

Concealed 190 (88) screwdriver 290 (143) slot
390 (199)

WEL11A-601R

190 (88)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-36

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1927090

A19 Water Chiller Control with Locked Cut-Out/Adjustable Cut-In

Description
The A19 Water Chiller Control is a remote bulb temperature control with limited setpoint range, adjustable differential, and adjustable cut-out. Refer to the A19ZBA Type Temperature Control Product Bulletin (LIT-121065) for important product application information.
Features
· adjustable cut-out (38 to 47°F) · wide differential adjustment range
Accessories
· includes Code No. FTG13A-600R Packing Nut as standard
· replacement cover: CVR61A-600R
Selection Chart

Applications
Use for water chillers.
Repair Information
If the A19 Water Chiller Control with Locked Cut-Out/Adjustable Cut-In fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Technical Specifications

Maximum bulb temperature is 140°F (60°C).

Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings VAC

120 208 240

AC Full Load A

16.0 9.2 8.0

AC Locked Rotor A

96.0 55.2 48.0

Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A (Not Lamp Loads)

16.0 9.2 8.0

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

Product Code Switch

Number

Action

A19ZBA-1C

Single-Pole, Single-Throw (SPST) Close high, open low

Range °F (°C)
38 to 80 (3 to 27)

Differential F° (C°)
8 to 40 (4 to 22) Adjustable

Bulb and Capillary
3/8 in. x 3-7/16 in. 6 ft. capillary

A19ZBA Water Chiller Control

Bulb Well No. (Order Separately)
WEL14A-602R

Range Adjuster
Knob

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-37

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls
A19 Defrost Duration and Fan Delay Control

Code No. LIT-1927095

Description
The A19 Defrost Duration and Fan Delay Control is a remote bulb control with adjustable defrost termination temperature and preset fan delay temperature.
Refer to the A19ZBC Type Temperature Control Product Bulletin (LIT-121071) for important product application information.
Features
· sensing element unaffected by barometer pressure and cross ambient temperature problems
· limited adjustment range
Applications
Use for defrost termination control for refrigerated display cases.

Repair Information
If the A19 Defrost Duration and Fan Delay Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Technical Specifications

· maximum bulb temperature: 140°F (60°C) · fan delay temperature: factory set at
25°F (-4°C)

Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings VAC

120 208 240

AC Full Load A

16.0 9.2 8.0

AC Locked Rotor A

96.0 55.2 48.0

Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A (Not Lamp Loads)

16.0 9.2 8.0

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

A19ZBC-2 Defrost Duration and Fan Delay Control

Selection Chart
Product Code Number
A19ZBC-2C

Switch Action
Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT)

Defrost Termination °F (°C)
45 to 85 (7 to 29)

Bulb and Capillary
19/64 in. x 3-1/8 in.; 6 ft. capillary

Range Adjuster
Knob

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-38

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1927105

A25 Series Warm Air Limit Control with Manual Reset

Description
The A25 Warm Air Control Locks out on a temperature increase to the control setpoint. Manual reset is required before the electrical contacts can be reclosed.
The A25 Control is normally located in a return air duct and is wired to shut down air conditioning or ventilating fans when the temperature of the air becomes excessively hot.
Refer to the A25 Series Warm Air Control with Manual Reset Product Bulletin (LIT-125118) for important product application information.
Applications
Use for high temperature cut-out.

A25 Series Y
R B
Action on Increase of Temperature
A25 Series Action Diagram

a25.eps

A25AN-1 Warm Air Limit Control

A25AP-1 Warm Air Limit Control

Features
· trip-free reset lever does not permit restarting until the reset lever is manually released
· the rod and tube type sensing element provides positive control action
Repair Information
If the A25 Series Warm Air Limit Control with Manual Reset fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Technical Specifications

The maximum element temperature is 300°F (149°C).

Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings VAC

120 208 240 277

AC Full Load A

16.0

9.2

8.0



AC Locked Rotor A

96.0 55.2 48.0



Non-Inductive A

16.0 A at 120/277 VAC

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

Selection Chart

Product Code Switch

Number

Action

Range Range °F (°C) Adjuster

Dial Stop °F (°C)

A25AN-1C

Single-Pole, Single-Throw (SPST), Open high

25 to 215 Knob (-4 to 102)

High limit set at 125 (52)

A25CN-1C

Single-Pole, 25 to 215 Knob Double-Throw (-4 to 102) (SPDT)

High limit set at 125 (52)

Factory Mutual Approved Models

A25AP-1C

SPST Open high

25 to 215 Concealed

High limit

(-4 to 102) screwdriver slot set at 125 (52)

A25CP-1C

SPDT

25 to 215 Concealed

High limit

(-4 to 102) screwdriver slot set at 125 (52)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-39

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1927140

A70 Series Four-Wire, Two-Circuit Temperature Control

Description
The A70 Series Temperature Control incorporates a vapor-charged sensing element. The A70G, A70H, and A70K have a four-wire, two-circuit contact block that contains two isolated sets of contacts.
The contacts are designed so that when the main contact opens, the auxiliary contact closes.
Refer to the A70, A72 Series Temperature Controls for Refrigeration and Heating Product Bulletin (LIT-125155) for important product application information.
Features
· long-life, snap-acting contacts · automatic or manual reset models

A70 Series Line 2
M2
M1 Line 1 Action on Increase on Temperature A70 Series Action Diagram

a70s.eps

A70GA-1 Temperature Control

Applications
Typical applications include energizing an indicator light after a low temperature cutout on a ventilating system.

Selection Charts

A70 Series Four-Wire, Two-Circuit Temperature Control

Product Code

Switch Action

Range

Number

Main Contacts Auxiliary Contacts °F (°C)

Differential F° (C°)

Bulb and Capillary

Maximum Bulb

Range

Temperature °F (°C) Adjuster

A70GA-1C1

15 to 55

5 (2.8)

(-9.4 to 12.8)

20 ft of 1/8 in. 400 (204.4) O.D. tubing

A70GA-2C

35 to 80 (1.7 to 26.7)

3 to 30

3/8 in. x 3 in.

(-16.1 to -1.1),

6 ft capillary

factory set at 12 (-11.1)

250 (121)

A70HA-1C1 A70HA-2C A70HA-14C

Open low

Close low

15 to 55 (-9.4 to 12.8)
35 to 80 (1.7 to 26.7)
15 to 55 (-9.4 to 12.8)

Manual reset

20 ft of 1/8 in. O.D. tubing
3/8 in. x 3 in. 6 ft capillary
20 ft of 1/8 in. O.D. tubing

400 (204.4) 250 (121) 400 (204.4)

Screwdriver slot

A70KA-1C

Open high

Close high

100 to 170 (37.8 to 76.7)

3/8 in. x 3 in. 240 (116) 6 ft capillary

1. On these models, the low cutout stop is set and sealed at 35°F (1.6°C). It cannot be set lower. The control responds only to the lowest temperature along any 14 to 16 in. section of the entire 20 ft element.

Replacement Covers Product Code Number
CVR17A-620R CVR17A-621R

Description
Automatic reset cover Manual reset cover

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings Pole Number

Motor Ratings VAC

120

AC Full Load A AC Locked Rotor A AC Non-Inductive A Pilot Duty  Both Poles 1. Not compressor motor loads.

16.0 96.0 16.0

LINE-M2 (Main)

LINE-M1 (Auxiliary)

208

240

277

4801

6001

120

208

240

277

9.2

8.0

--

5.0

4.8

6.0

3.4

3.0

--

55.2

48.0

--

30.0

28.8

36.0

20.4

18.0

--

9.2

8.0

7.2

--

--

6.0

6.0

6.0

6.0

125 VA, 120 to 600 VAC and 57.5 VA, 120 to 300 VDC

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-40

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1927145

A72 Series Two-Pole Heavy Duty Temperature Controls (Adjustable Differential)

Description
The A72 Series Temperature Controls incorporate a vapor charged sensing element and heavy duty contacts.
Refer to the A70, A72 Series Temperature Controls for Refrigeration and Heating (LIT-125155) for important product application information.
Features
The double-pole, single-throw (DPST) contact block contains two isolated sets of contacts that make or break simultaneously.
Applications
Use for automatic control of heavy electrical loads.

A72 Series
M1 Line1
M2 Line 2 Action on Increase on Temperature A72 Action Diagram

a27.eps

A72AA-3 Temperature Control

Selection Charts

Product Code Number
A72AA-1C
A72AA-2C

Switch Action
DPST Close high Open low
DPST Close high Open low

Range °F (°C)
-30 to 30 (-34 to -1)
15 to 55 (-9 to 13)

Differential F° (C°)
4 to 25 (2 to 14)
3 to 30 (1.7 to 17)

Bulb and Capillary
3/8 in. x 3 in.1 6 ft capillary
3/8 in. x 3 in.1 6 ft capillary

Maximum Bulb Temperature °F (°C)
200 (93)
200 (93)

Range Adjuster
Screwdriver slot
Screwdriver slot

A72AA-3C

DPST Close high Open low

50 to 90 (10 to 32)

3 to 30 (1.7 to 17)

11/16 in. x 6-3/4 in.

135

Cross ambient

(57)

6 ft capillary

Screwdriver slot

A72AP-1C2

DPST Close high Open low

-10 to 65 (-23 to 18)

4 to 40 (2 to 22)

11/16 in. x 6-3/4 in.

130

Cross ambient

(54)

6 ft capillary

Screwdriver slot

1. Packing nut assembly available for direct immersion applications, Code No. FTG13A-600R. 2. Equipped with manual PUSH TO START button. Manual start feature is especially desirable on milk cooler jobs; permits manual start of the compressor when
bulb temperature is between closing and opening setting of switch.

Replacement Covers Product Code Number
CVR17A-620R CVR17A-621R

Description
Automatic reset cover Manual reset cover

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings VAC

120

2081

Single-Phase Single-Phase

2401 Single-Phase

2201 Two-Phase

208

220

Three-Phase Three-Phase

Horsepower

2

3

3

5

5

5

AC Full Load A

24.0

24.0

24.0

15.0

15.9

15.0

AC Locked Rotor A

144.0

144.0

144.0

90.0

95.4

90.0

AC Non-Inductive A

24.0

24.0

24.0







DC Non-Inductive A2

3.0



0.5







Pilot Duty

125 VA, 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA, 120 to 300 VDC

1. These full load and locked rotor ampere (not horsepower) ratings apply to hermetic compressors only. 2. This rating does not apply to the A72AP-1C Control.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-41

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1927160

A72 Series Cooling Tower or Evaporative Condenser Controls (Single-Stage Temperature Control with Outdoor Enclosure)

Description

Features

The A72AE and A72CE are wide range temperature controls with heavy duty double-pole, single-throw (DPST) contacts and neoprene-coated sensing elements. Refer to the A72 Series Temperature Controls for Cooling Towers and Evaporated Condensers with Weather Resistant Enclosure Product Bulletin (LIT-125165) for important product application information.
Selection Chart

Open high or close high models are available.
Applications
Use for control of cooling tower fans; motorized valves or solenoid operated valves.
Repair Information
If the A72 Series Cooling Tower or Evaporative Condenser Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Product Code Number
A72AE-1C
A72CE-1C

Switch Action
DPST; close high DPST; open high

Range Differential Bulb and

°F (°C) F° (C°)

Capillary

Range Adjuster

25 to 90 4 to 25 (-5 to 30) (2.2 to 14)

11/16 in. x 6-3/4 in.

Internal

Neoprene-coated 6 ft cap. screwdriver slot

A72 Series Temperature Control

Technical Specifications
· ambient temperature limits: -65 to 150°F (-54 to 66°C)
· maximum bulb temperature: 170°F (77°C)

Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings VAC

120

2081

2401

Single- Single- Single-

Phase Phase Phase

2201 TwoPhase

208 ThreePhase

220 ThreePhase

Horsepower

2

3

3

5

5

5

AC Full Load A

24.0

24.0

24.0

15.0

15.9

15.0

AC Locked Rotor A

144.0

144.0

144.0

90.0

95.4

90.0

AC Non-Inductive A

24.0

24.0

24.0







DC Non-Inductive A

3.0



0.5







Pilot Duty

125 VA, 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA, 120 to 300 VDC

1. These full load and locked rotor ampere (not horsepower) ratings apply to hermetic compressors only.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-42

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1927150

A72AA Coiled Bulb Space Thermostat (Cooling)

Description
The A72 is a space sensing temperature control with heavy-duty contacts.
Refer to the A72 Series Temperature Controls for Cooling Towers and Evaporative Condensers with Weather Resistant Enclosure Product Bulletin (LIT-125165) for important product application information.
Applications
Use for compressor cycling for walk-in coolers and freezers.

Features
Double-pole, single-throw (DPST) contact block contains two isolated sets of contacts that make or break simultaneously.
Repair Information
If the A72AA Coiled Bulb Space Thermostat fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Accessories
For replacement cover, order code number CVR17A-620R.

A72AA-4 Thermostat

Selection Chart

Product Code Switch

Number

Action

A72AA-4C

DPST Close high, open low

Range °F (°C)
15 to 55 (-9 to 13)

Differential F° (C°)
3 to 30 (1.7 to 17)

Bulb and Capillary
Coiled copper bulb

Range Adjuster
Screwdriver slot

Technical Specifications

Maximum bulb temperature is 200°F (93°C).

Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings VAC

120

2081

2401

Single-Phase Single-Phase Single-Phase

2201 Two-Phase

208 Three-Phase

Horsepower AC Full Load Amperes

2

3

24.0

24.0

3 24.0

5

5

15.0

15.9

AC Locked Rotor Amperes

144.0

144.0

144.0

90.0

95.4

AC Non-Inductive Amperes DC Non-Inductive Amperes

24.0

24.0

24.0





3.0



0.5





Pilot Duty

125 VA, 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA, 120 to 300 VDC

1. These full load and locked rotor ampere (not horsepower) ratings apply to hermetic compressors only.

220 Three-Phase
5 15.0 90.0
 

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-43

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls
A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1900933

Description
The A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls are single-stage controls with a single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) output relay.
A421 Controls feature a bright backlit LCD with adjustable brightness and a three-button touchpad interface that can be set up to restrict user adjustments. An LED indicates the output relay's On/Off status. Standard A421 Series control modules have simple On and Off temperature settings for heating or cooling, an adjustable anti-short cycle delay, temperature setback, and sensor offset capability. The temperature control range is -40 to 212°F or -40 to 100°C.
The A421 controls are available either in Type 1 (NEMA), IP20 (CE), high-impact plastic enclosures suitable for surface or DIN rail mounting or in Type 4X (NEMA), IP67 (CE) watertight, corrosion resistant surface mount enclosures.
Refer to the A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011972) for important product application information.
Applications
The A421 Electronic Temperature Control can be used to control a wide variety of single-stage refrigeration or HVAC equipment.
Sample temperature control applications include:
· temperature monitoring and alarming · on/off control of boilers and chillers · boiler and chiller pump control · heating and cooling control · floating temperature control of damper and
valve actuators · cooling tower fan control based on water
temperature · supply, makeup, and mixed air temperature
control · temperature actuated valve control · supply and makeup air damper and fan
control · condenser fan control based on condenser
temperature

Features
· easy-to-read, bright, adjustable backlit LCD screen displays the temperature, parameters, and status clearly and allows you to adjust LCD brightness for the ambient light conditions. Custom icons on the display provide visual cues on system and control status.
· basic and advanced programming menus allow you to easily set up your control application on the LCD using a simple three-button touchpad interface.
· adjustable On and Off temperature setpoints enable easy to set up cooling or heating control applications on the three-button touchpad, eliminating the need to remove the cover and reposition jumpers for reverse or direct control actions.
· high and low temperature setpoint adjustment stops allow you to set up your application for your desired range of adjustment and restrict user adjustment to just the desired temperature adjustment range.
· displayed temperature offset allows you to adjust the displayed temperature to the actual sensed temperature in applications where the resistance error in long sensor cable leads cause a deviation in the displayed temperature from the actual sensed temperature.
· adjustable anti-short cycle delay keeps the output relay Off after the Off setpoint is reached for a user-defined time delay, which helps avoid short cycling, hard starts, and nuisance overload outages on compressors and other inductive applications.
· temperature setback/offset control enables the control to shift the On and Off setpoint values by a user-defined offset when an external switch closes the binary input control circuit. Using a switching timer enables you to set up occupied/unoccupied temperature setback schedules for your applications.
· high-impact, thermoplastic Type 1/IP20 or Type 4X (NEMA)/IP66 watertight, corrosion-resistant enclosures increase application options, allowing surface and snap-fit DIN rail mount, or watertight surface mount.

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Control
· parameter adjustment restriction allows you to lock the control's setup parameters and restrict user adjustments to just the On and Off temperature setpoint values within your defined setpoint adjustment range.
· low- and line-voltage control models provide industry standard control voltage options for most refrigeration and HVAC control applications.
Repair Information
If the A421 Series Electronic Temperature Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement A421 Control, contact the nearest Authorized Johnson Controls/PENN® Distributer or Sales Representative.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R44

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls
A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls (Continued)

Selection Chart

A421 Electronic Temperature Control Selection Chart

Product Code Number

Description

A421ABC-02C A421ABC-03C A421ABC-04C A421ABC-06C

Line-Voltage Type 1 Electronic Temperature Control: Type 1 (NEMA), IP20 standard enclosure for DIN rail and surface-mount applications. Rated for 120/240 VAC. Includes an A99BB-200C temperature sensor with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) cable.
Line-Voltage Type 1 Electronic Temperature Control: Type 1 (NEMA), IP20 standard enclosure for DIN rail and surface-mount applications. Rated for 120/240 VAC. Includes an A99BB-300C temperature sensor with 9 ft 9 in. (3.0 m) cable.
Line-Voltage Type 1 Electronic Temperature Control: Type 1 (NEMA), IP20 standard enclosure for DIN rail and surface-mount applications. Rated for 120/240 VAC. Includes an A99BB-400C temperature sensor with 13 ft 1-1/5 in. (4.0 m) cable.
Line-Voltage Type 1 Electronic Temperature Control: Type 1 (NEMA), IP20 standard enclosure for DIN rail and surface-mount applications. Rated for 120/240 VAC. Includes an A99BB-400C temperature sensor with 19 ft 6 in. (6.0 m) cable.

A421AEC-01C

Line-Voltage Type 4X Electronic Temperature Control: Type 4X (NEMA), IP67 weathertight enclosure for surface-mount applications. Rated for 120/240 VAC. Includes an A99BB-25C temperature sensor with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) cable.

A421AEC-02C

Line-Voltage Type 4X Electronic Temperature Control: Type 4X (NEMA), IP67 weathertight enclosure for surface-mount applications. Rated for 120/240 VAC. Includes an A99BB-200C temperature sensor with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) cable.

A421GBF-02C A421GEF-01C A421GEF-02C

Low-Voltage Type 1 Electronic Temperature Control: Type 1 (NEMA), IP20 standard enclosure for DIN rail and surface-mount applications. Rated for 24 VAC Class 2, Safety Extra Low Voltage. Includes an A99BB-200C temperature sensor with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) cable.
Low-Voltage Type 4X Electronic Temperature Control: Type 4X (NEMA), IP67 weathertight enclosure for surface-mount applications. Rated for 24 VAC Class 2, Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV). Includes an A99BB-25C temperature sensor with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) cable.
Low-Voltage Type 4X Electronic Temperature Control: Type 4X (NEMA), IP67 weathertight enclosure for surface-mount applications. Rated for 24 VAC Class 2 (SELV). Includes an A99BB-200C temperature sensor with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) cable.

A99 Temperature Sensors Compatible with the A421 Control1

Product Code Number

Description

A99BA-200C A99BB-25C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) shielded PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99BB-200C A99BB-300C A99BB-400C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9 ft 9-3/5 in. (3.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 13 ft 1-1/5 in. (4.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99BB-600C A99BC-25C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 19 ft 8-2/5 in. (6.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99BC-100C A99BC-300C A99BC-500C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 3 ft 3-3/5 in. (1.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)
PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9 ft 9-3/5 in. (3.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)
PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 16 ft 4-4/5 in. (5.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)

A99BC-1500C A99CB-200C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 49 ft 2-2/5 in. (15.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)
PTC Temperature Sensor: Extended probe 6 in. (15.2 cm) with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99CB-600C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Extended probe 6 in. (15.2 cm) with 19 ft 8-2/5 in. (6.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

1. When any A99 Series Temperature Sensor is connected to a standard temperature A421 Control model, the range of usable values is -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC).

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R45

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls
A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls (Continued)

Accessories for the A421 Controls

Product Code Number
BKT287-1R BKT287-2R PLT344-1R A99-CLP-1 SHL10-603R BOX10A-603R WEL11A-601R

Description
12 in. (305 mm) long DIN rail section 36 in. (914 mm) long DIN rail section Two End Clamps for DIN rail sections Surface Mounting Clip for A99B and A99C Series Temperature Sensors Sun Shield for A99B and A99C Series Temperature Sensors PVC Enclosure for A99B and A99C Series Temperature Sensors Immersion well for applying sensor in fluid applications

Technical Specifications

Power Consumption Supply Power Ambient Conditions
Temperature Control Range Input Signal Sensor Offset Range Output Relay Contacts Electrical Ratings
Enclosure Material Compliance

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls

1.8 VA maximum

Low Voltage Models: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC), 50/60 Hz, Class 2 or Safety Extra-Low Voltage Line Voltage Models: 110/120 or 208/230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz

Operating: Type 1 Models: -40 to 150°F (-40 to 66°C), 0 to 95% RH Noncondensing Type 4X Models: -40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C), 0 to 95% RH Noncondensing
Shipping and Storage: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C), 0 to 95% RH Noncondensing

-40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C)

1,035 ohm at 77F (25C) for A99 PTC temperature sensors

±5ºF or ±3ºC

24 VAC models: 100 VA, 30 VAC maximum, Class 2

120/240 VAC models:

Applied Voltage:

24 VAC

Horsepower N.O. (N.C.) :

--

Full Load Amperes N.O. (N.C.):

--

Locked Rotor Amperes N.O. (N.C.): --

Resistive Amperes N.O. (N.C.):

15 (10) A

Pilot Duty N.O. (N.C.):

125 (50) VA

120 VAC
1 (0.25) hp 16 (5.8) A 96 (34.8) A 15 (10) A
125 (125) VA

208 VAC
1 (0.33) hp 9.2 (4.0) A 55.2 (24) A 10 (10) A
125 (125) VA

240 VAC
1 (0.5) hp 8.0 (4.9) A 48 (29.4) A 10 (10) A
125 (125) VA

Type 1/IP20 high-impact thermoplastic or Type 4X/IP66 watertight, corrosion-resistant, high-impact thermoplastic

North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734, Vol. 1; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B
Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits Europe: CE Mark  Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC. Australia: Regulatory Compliance Mark (RCM)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R46

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1900934

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls with Integral Power Cord

Description
The A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls are single-stage controls with a single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) output relay, a bright backlit LCD, and a three-button touchpad interface that can be set up to restrict user adjustments. An LED indicates the output relay's On/Off status. The A421 Series Controls have simple On and Off temperature settings for heating or cooling, an adjustable anti-short cycle delay, and a temperature offset function.
The control range is -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C) for standard models. Models with a control range of -40 to 248°F (-40 to 120°C) are available in quantity orders. The controls feature remote sensing capability and interchangeable sensors. The A421 Controls are available in either Type 1 (NEMA)/IP20 high-impact plastic enclosure suitable for surface or DIN rail mounting or Type 4X (NEMA)/IP66 watertight, corrosion-resistant surface mount enclosures.
The A421ABG Controls Type 1 (NEMA)/IP20 enclosure feature factory-installed power cords with plug and receptacle to provide easy plug-in connection and control of 120 VAC plug-in cooling and heating equipment.
Refer to the A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011972) for important product application information.
Applications
The A421 Electronic Temperature Control can be used to control a wide variety of single-stage refrigeration or HVAC equipment.
Sample temperature control applications include:
· temperature monitoring and alarming · on/off control of boilers and chillers · boiler and chiller pump control · heating and cooling control · floating temperature control of damper and
valve actuators · cooling tower fan control based on water
temperature · supply, makeup, and mixed air temperature
control · temperature actuated valve control · supply and makeup air damper and fan
control · condenser fan control based on condenser
temperature

Features
· easy-to-read, bright, adjustable backlit LCD screen displays the temperature, parameters, and status clearly and allows you to adjust LCD brightness for the ambient light conditions. Custom icons on the display provide visual cues on system and control status.
· basic and advanced programming menus allow you to easily set up your control application on the LCD using a simple three-button touchpad interface.
· adjustable On and Off temperature setpoints enable easy to set up cooling or heating control applications on the three-button touchpad, eliminating the need to remove the cover and reposition jumpers for reverse or direct control actions.
· high and low temperature setpoint adjustment stops allow you to set up your application for your desired range of adjustment and restrict user adjustment to just the desired temperature adjustment range.
· displayed temperature offset allows you to adjust the displayed temperature to the actual sensed temperature in applications where the resistance error in long sensor cable leads cause a deviation in the displayed temperature from the actual sensed temperature.
· adjustable anti-short cycle delay keeps the output relay Off after the Off setpoint is reached for a user-defined time delay, which helps avoid short cycling, hard starts, and nuisance overload outages on compressors and other inductive applications.
· temperature setback/offset control enables the control to shift the On and Off setpoint values by a user-defined offset when an external switch closes the binary input control circuit. Using a switching timer enables you to set up occupied/unoccupied temperature setback schedules for your applications.
· high-impact, thermoplastic Type 1 (NEMA)/IP20 or Type 4X (NEMA)/IP66 watertight, corrosion-resistant enclosures increase application options, allowing surface and snap-fit DIN rail mount, or watertight surface mount.
· parameter adjustment restriction allows you to lock the control's setup parameters and restrict user adjustments to just the On and Off temperature setpoint values within your defined setpoint adjustment range.

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls with Integral Power Cord
· low- and line-voltage control models provide industry standard control voltage options for most refrigeration and HVAC control applications.
Repair Information
If the A421 Series Electronic Temperature Control with Integral Power Cord fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement A421 Control, contact the nearest Authorized Johnson Controls/PENN® Distributer or Sales Representative.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R47

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls with Integral Power Cord (Continued)

Selection Chart

A421 Electronic Temperature Control Selection Chart
Product Code Number Description

A421ABG-02C

Line-Voltage Type 1 Electronic Temperature Control with Dual Power Cords: Type 1 (NEMA), IP20 standard enclosure for DIN rail and surface-mount applications. Rated for 120 VAC. Control is factory wired with a 6 ft (1.8 m) cord with 120 VAC grounded external plug and a 1 ft (0.30) cord with 120 VAC grounded internal receptacle. Includes an A99BB-200C temperature sensor with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) cable.

A421ABJ-02C

Line-Voltage Type 1 Electronic Temperature Control with Single Power Cord and Piggyback Plug: Type 1 (NEMA), IP20 standard enclosure for DIN rail and surface-mount applications. Rated for 120 VAC. Control is factory wired with a 6 ft (1.8 m) cord with 120 VAC grounded piggyback plug. Includes an A99BB-200C temperature sensor with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) cable.

A421AEJ-01C

Line-Voltage Type 4X Electronic Temperature Control with Single Power Cord and Piggyback Plug: Type 4X (NEMA), IP67 weathertight enclosure for surface-mount applications. Rated for 120 VAC. Control is factory wired with a 6 ft (1.8 m) cord with grounded piggyback plug. Includes an A99BB-25C temperature sensor with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) cable.

A421AEJ-02C

Line-Voltage Type 4X Electronic Temperature Control with Single Power Cord and Piggyback Plug: Type 4X (NEMA), IP67 weathertight enclosure for surface-mount applications. Rated for 120 VAC. Control is factory wired with a 6 ft (1.8 m) cord with grounded piggyback plug. Includes an A99BB-200C temperature sensor with 6.6 ft (2.0 m) cable.

A99 Temperature Sensors Compatible with the A421 Control1

Product Code Number Description

A99BA-200C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) shielded PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99BB-25C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99BB-200C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99BB-300C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9 ft 9-3/5 in. (3.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99BB-400C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 13 ft 1-1/5 in. (4.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99BB-600C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 19 ft 8-2/5 in. (6.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99BC-25C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99BC-100C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 3 ft 3-3/5 in. (1.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)

A99BC-300C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9 ft 9-3/5 in. (3.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)

A99BC-500C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 16 ft 4-4/5 in. (5.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)

A99BC-1500C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 49 ft 2-2/5 in. (15.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)

A99CB-200C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Extended probe 6 in. (15.2 cm) with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99CB-600C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Extended probe 6 in. (15.2 cm) with 19 ft 8-2/5 in. (6.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

1. When any A99 Series Temperature Sensor is connected to a standard temperature A421 control model, the range of usable values is -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC).

Accessories for the A421 Controls

Product Code Number Description

BKT287-1R

12 in. (305 mm) long DIN rail section

BKT287-2R

36 in. (914 mm) long DIN rail section

PLT344-1R

Two End Clamps for DIN rail sections

A99-CLP-1

Surface Mounting Clip for A99B and A99C Series Temperature Sensors

SHL10-603R

Sun Shield for A99B and A99C Series Temperature Sensors

BOX10A-603R

PVC Enclosure for A99B and A99C Series Temperature Sensors

WEL11A-601R

Immersion well for applying sensor in fluid applications

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R48

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls with Integral Power Cord (Continued)

Technical Specifications
Power Consumption Supply Power Ambient Conditions
Temperature Control Range Input Signal Sensor Offset Range Output Relay Contacts Electrical Ratings
Enclosure Material Compliance

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls

1.8 VA maximum

110/120 VAC, 50/60 Hz

Operating: Type 1 Models: -40 to 150°F (-40 to 66°C), 0 to 95% RH noncondensing Type 4X Models: -40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C), 0 to 95% RH noncondensing
Shipping and Storage: All Models: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C), 0 to 95% RH noncondensing

-40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C)

1,035 ohm at 77F (25C) for A99 PTC temperature sensors

±5ºF or ±3ºC

120 VAC Model with Integral Power Cord:

Applied Voltage:

120 VAC

Full Load Amperes N.O.:

12 A

Locked Rotor Amperes N.O.:

72 A

Resistive Amperes N.O.:

12 A

Pilot Duty: 125 VA (N.O. contacts) at 24 to 120 VAC

NEMA 1/IP20 high-impact thermoplastic or NEMA 4X/IP66 watertight, corrosion-resistant, high-impact thermoplastic

North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734, Vol. 1; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R49

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1900935

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls with Off-Cycle Defrost

Description
The A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls are single-stage controls with a single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) output relay, a bright backlit LCD, and a three-button touchpad interface that can be set up to restrict user adjustments. An LED indicates the output relay's On/Off status. The A421 Series Controls have simple On and Off temperature settings for heating or cooling, an adjustable anti-short cycle delay, and a temperature offset function.
The control range is -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C) for standard models. Models with a control range of -40 to 248°F (-40 to 120°C) are available in quantity orders. The controls feature remote sensing capability and interchangeable sensors. The A421 Controls are available in either Type 1 (NEMA)/IP20 high-impact plastic enclosure suitable for surface or DIN rail mounting or Type 4X (NEMA)/IP66 watertight, corrosion-resistant surface mount enclosures.
A421 Controls with Off-Cycle Defrost (A421ABD and A421AED models) provide off-cycle defrost control with user-configurable defrost cycle duration and frequency.
Refer to the A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011972) for important product application information.
Applications
The A421 Electronic Temperature Control can be used to control a wide variety of single-stage refrigeration or HVAC equipment.
Sample temperature control applications include:
· temperature monitoring and alarming · on/off control of boilers and chillers · boiler and chiller pump control · heating and cooling control · floating temperature control of damper and
valve actuators · cooling tower fan control based on water
temperature · supply, makeup, and mixed air temperature
control · temperature actuated valve control · supply and makeup air damper and fan
control · condenser fan control based on condenser
temperature

Features
· easy-to-read, bright, adjustable backlit LCD screen displays the temperature, parameters, and status clearly and allows you to adjust LCD brightness for the ambient light conditions. Custom icons on the display provide visual cues on system and control status.
· basic and advanced programming menus allow you to easily set up your control application on the LCD using a simple three-button touchpad interface.
· adjustable On and Off temperature setpoints enable easy to set up cooling or heating control applications on the three-button touchpad, eliminating the need to remove the cover and reposition jumpers for reverse or direct control actions.
· high and low temperature setpoint adjustment stops allow you to set up your application for your desired range of adjustment and restrict user adjustment to just the desired temperature adjustment range.
· displayed temperature offset allows you to adjust the displayed temperature to the actual sensed temperature in applications where the resistance error in long sensor cable leads cause a deviation in the displayed temperature from the actual sensed temperature.
· adjustable anti-short cycle delay keeps the output relay Off after the Off setpoint is reached for a user-defined time delay, which helps avoid short cycling, hard starts, and nuisance overload outages on compressors and other inductive applications.
· integrated off-cycle defrost timer (defrost control models only) shuts off the refrigeration system for a user-defined defrost time interval at a user-defined frequency. This eliminates the cost and time to install a separate defrost timer in many refrigeration applications.
· temperature setback/offset control enables the control to shift the On and Off setpoint values by a user-defined offset when an external switch closes the binary input control circuit. Using a switching timer enables you to set up occupied/unoccupied temperature setback schedules for your applications.
· high-impact, thermoplastic Type 1 (NEMA)/IP20 or Type 4X (NEMA)/IP66 watertight, corrosion-resistant enclosures increase application options, allowing surface and snap-fit DIN rail mount, or watertight surface mount.

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Control with Off-Cycle Defrost
· parameter adjustment restriction allows you to lock the control's setup parameters and restrict user adjustments to just the On and Off temperature setpoint values within your defined setpoint adjustment range.
· low- and line-voltage control models provide industry standard control voltage options for most refrigeration and HVAC control applications.
Repair Information
If the A421 Series Electronic Temperature Control with Off-Cycle Defrost fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement A421 Control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R50

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls with Off-Cycle Defrost (Continued)

Selection Charts

A421 Electronic Temperature Controls Product Code Number Description

A421ABD-02C

Line-Voltage Type 1 Electronic Temperature Control with Off-Cycle Defrost Timer: Type 1 (NEMA), IP20 standard enclosure for DIN rail and surface-mount applications. Rated for 120/240 VAC. Includes integral timer for off-cycle defrost control. Includes an A99BB-200C temperature sensor with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) cable.

A421AED-01C

Line-Voltage Type 4X Electronic Temperature Control with Off-Cycle Defrost Timer: Type 4X (NEMA), IP67 weathertight enclosure for surface-mount applications. Rated for 120/240 VAC. Includes integral timer for off-cycle defrost control. Includes an A99BB-25C temperature sensor with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) cable.

A421AED-02C

Line-Voltage Type 4X Electronic Temperature Control with Off-Cyle Defrost Timer: Type 4X (NEMA), IP67 weathertight enclosure for surface-mount applications. Rated for 120/240 VAC. Includes integral timer for off-cycle defrost control. Includes an A99BB-200C temperature sensor with 6 ft 6 in. (2 m) cable.

A99 Temperature Sensors Compatible with the A421 Control1 Product Code Number Description

A99BA-200C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) shielded PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99BB-25C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99BB-200C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99BB-300C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9 ft 9-3/5 in. (3.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99BB-400C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 13 ft 1-1/5 in. (4.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99BB-600C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 19 ft 8-2/5 in. (6.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99BC-25C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99BC-100C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 3 ft 3-3/5 in. (1.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)

A99BC-300C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9 ft 9-3/5 in. (3.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)

A99BC-500C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 16 ft 4-4/5 in. (5.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)

A99BC-1500C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 49 ft 2-2/5 in. (15.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)

A99CB-200C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Extended probe 6 in. (15.2 cm) with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99CB-600C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Extended probe 6 in. (15.2 cm) with 19 ft 8-2/5 in. (6.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

1. When any A99 Series Temperature Sensor is connected to a standard temperature A421 control model, the range of usable values is -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC).

Accessories for the A421 Controls
Product Code Number Description

BKT287-1R

12 in. (305 mm) long DIN Rail section

BKT287-2R

36 in. (914 mm) long DIN Rail section

PLT344-1R

Two End Clamps for DIN Rail sections

A99-CLP-1

Surface Mounting Clip for A99B and A99C Series Temperature Sensors

SHL10-603R

Sun Shield for A99B and A99C Series Temperature Sensors

BOX10A-603R

PVC Enclosure for A99B and A99C Series Temperature Sensors

WEL11A-601R

Immersion Well for applying sensor in fluid applications

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R51

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls with Off-Cycle Defrost (Continued)

Technical Specifications
Power Consumption Supply Power Ambient Conditions Temperature Control Range Input Signal Sensor Offset Range Output Relay Contacts Electrical Ratings
Enclosure Material Compliance

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls

1.8 VA Maximum

24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Class 2: 108/110/115/120 or 208/230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz

Operating: -40 to 150°F (-40 to 66°C), 0 to 95% RH Noncondensing Shipping and Storage: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C), 0 to 95% RH Noncondensing

-40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C) or -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC), depending on the model selected

1,035 ohm at 77F (25C) for A99 PTC temperature sensors

±5ºF or ±3ºC

24 VAC Models: 100 VA, 30 VAC maximum, Class 2

120 VAC Model with Integral Power Cord:

Applied Voltage:

120 VAC

Full Load Amperes N.O. and N.C.: 12 A

Locked Rotor Amperes N.O. and N.C.: 72 A

Non-inductive Amperes N.O. and N.C.:12 A

Pilot Duty: 125 VA (N.O. contacts) at 24 to 120 VAC

120/240 VAC Models:

Applied Voltage:

120 VAC

208 VAC

Horsepower N.O. (N.C.) :

1 (0.25) hp 1 (0.33) hp

Full Load Amperes N.O. (N.C.): 16 (5.8) A 9.2 (4.0) A

Locked Rotor Amperes N.O. (N.C.): 96 (34.8) A 55.2 (24) A

Non-inductive Amperes N.O. (N.C.):15 (10) A 10 (10) A

Pilot Duty: 125 VA (N.O. contacts) at 24 to 240 VAC

125 VA (N.C. contacts) at 24 to 240 VAC

50 VA (N.C. contacts) at 24 VAC

240 VAC
1 (0.5) hp 8.0 (4.9) A 48 (29.4) A 10 (10) A

NEMA 1/IP20 High-Impact Thermoplastic or NEMA 4X/IP66 Watertight, Corrosion-Resistant, High-Impact Thermoplastic

North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734, Vol. 1; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B
Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits Europe: CE Mark  Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC. Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R52

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1900936

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls with Integral Cycle Timer

Description
The A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls are single-stage controls with a single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) output relay, a bright backlit LCD, and a three-button touchpad interface that can be set up to restrict user adjustments. An LED indicates the output relay's On/Off status. The A421 Series Controls have simple On and Off temperature settings for heating or cooling, an adjustable anti-short cycle delay, and a temperature offset function.
The control range is -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C) for standard models. Models with a control range of -40 to 248°F (-40 to 120°C) are available in quantity orders. The controls feature remote sensing capability and interchangeable sensors. The A421 Controls are available in either Type 1 (NEMA)/IP20 high-impact plastic enclosure suitable for surface or DIN rail mounting or Type 4X (NEMA)/IP66 watertight, corrosion-resistant surface mount enclosures.
The A421 Controls with Integral Cycle Timer provide On/Off control of ventilation fans in agriculture applications, warehouse and storage facilities, and other ventilation application that require air-exchange based on temperature or a ventilation schedule with a user-defined On-time and Off-time cycle.
Refer to the A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011972) for important product application information.
Applications
The A421 Electronic Temperature Control can be used to control a wide variety of single-stage refrigeration or HVAC equipment.
Sample temperature control applications include:
· temperature monitoring and alarming · on/off control of boilers and chillers · boiler and chiller pump control · heating and cooling control · floating temperature control of damper and
valve actuators · cooling tower fan control based on water
temperature · supply, makeup, and mixed air temperature
control · temperature actuated valve control · supply and makeup air damper and fan
control · condenser fan control based on condenser
temperature

Features
· easy-to-read, bright, adjustable backlit LCD screen displays the temperature, parameters, and status clearly and allows you to adjust LCD brightness for the ambient light conditions. Custom icons on the display provide visual cues on system and control status.
· basic and advanced programming menus allow you to easily set up your control application on the LCD using a simple three-button touchpad interface.
· adjustable On and Off temperature setpoints enable easy to set up cooling or heating control applications on the three-button touchpad, eliminating the need to remove the cover and reposition jumpers for reverse or direct control actions.
· high and low temperature setpoint adjustment stops allow you to set up your application for your desired range of adjustment and restrict user adjustment to just the desired temperature adjustment range.
· displayed temperature offset allows you to adjust the displayed temperature to the actual sensed temperature in applications where the resistance error in long sensor cable leads cause a deviation in the displayed temperature from the actual sensed temperature.
· adjustable anti-short cycle delay keeps the output relay Off after the Off setpoint is reached for a user-defined time delay, which helps avoid short cycling, hard starts, and nuisance overload outages on compressors and other inductive applications.
· temperature and timed ventilation control (integral cycle timer models only) enables you to set up timed ventilation or makeup air cycles independent from temperature controlled cycles. This eliminates the cost and time to install a separate interval timer in ventilation and makeup air applications.
· temperature setback/offset control enables the control to shift the On and Off setpoint values by a user-defined offset when an external switch closes the binary input control circuit. Using a switching timer enables you to set up occupied/unoccupied temperature setback schedules for your applications.
· high-impact, thermoplastic NEMA 1/IP20 or NEMA 4X/IP66 watertight, corrosion-resistant enclosures increase application options, allowing surface and snap-fit DIN rail mount, or watertight surface mount.

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Control with Integral Cycle Timer
· parameter adjustment restriction allows you to lock the control's setup parameters and restrict user adjustments to just the On and Off temperature setpoint values within your defined setpoint adjustment range.
· low- and line-voltage control models provide industry standard control voltage options for most refrigeration and HVAC control applications.
Repair Information
If the A421 Series Electronic Temperature Control with Integral Cycle Timer fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement A421 Control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R53

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls with Integral Cycle Timer (Continued)

Selection Charts

A421 Electronic Temperature Controls Product Code Number Description

A421ABT-02C

Line-Voltage Type 1 Electronic Temperature Control with Duty-Cycle Timer: Type 1 (NEMA), IP20 standard enclosure for DIN rail and surface-mount applications. Rated for 120/240 VAC. Includes integral timer for On/Off duty-cycle control. Includes an A99BB-200C temperature sensor with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) cable.

A421AET-01C

Line-Voltage Type 4X Electronic Temperature Control with Duty-Cycle Timer: Type 4X (NEMA), IP67 weathertight enclosure for surface-mount applications. Rated for 120/240 VAC. Includes integral timer for On/Off duty-cycle control. Includes an A99BB-25C temperature sensor with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) cable.

A99 Temperature Sensors Compatible with the A421 Control1 Product Code Number Description

A99BA-200C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) shielded PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99BB-25C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99BB-200C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99BB-300C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9 ft 9-3/5 in. (3.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99BB-400C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 13.1 ft (4.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99BB-600C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 19 ft 8-2/5 in. (6.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99BC-25C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99BC-100C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 3 ft 3-3/5 in. (1.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)

A99BC-300C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9 ft 9-3/5 in. (3.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)

A99BC-500C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 16 ft 4-4/5 in. (5.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)

A99BC-1500C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 49 ft 2-2/5 in. (15.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)

A99CB-200C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Extended probe 6 in. (15.2 cm) with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

A99CB-600C

PTC Temperature Sensor: Extended probe 6 in. (15.2 cm) with 19 ft 8-2/5 in. (6.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

1. When any A99 Series Temperature Sensor is connected to a standard temperature A421 control model, the range of usable values is -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC).

Accessories for the A421 Controls Product Code Number Description

BKT287-1R

12 in. (305 mm) long DIN rail section

BKT287-2R

36 in. (914 mm) long DIN rail section

PLT344-1R

Two End Clamps for DIN rail sections

A99-CLP-1

Surface Mounting Clip for A99B and A99C Series Temperature Sensors

SHL10-603R

Sun Shield for A99B and A99C Series Temperature Sensors

BOX10A-603R

PVC Enclosure for A99B and A99C Series Temperature Sensors

WEL11A-601R

Immersion well for applying sensor in fluid applications

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R54

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls with Integral Cycle Timer (Continued)

Technical Specifications
Power Consumption Supply Power Ambient Conditions Temperature Control Range Input Signal Sensor Offset Range Output Relay Contacts Electrical Ratings
Enclosure Material Compliance

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls

1.8 VA maximum

24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Class 2: 108/110/115/120 or 208/230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz

Operating: -40 to 150°F (-40 to 66°C), 0 to 95% RH noncondensing Shipping and Storage: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C), 0 to 95% RH noncondensing

-40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C) or -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC), depending on the model selected

1,035 ohms at 77F (25C) for A99 PTC temperature sensors

±5ºF or ±3ºC

24 VAC Models: 100 VA, 30 VAC maximum, Class 2

120 VAC Model with Integral Power Cord:

Applied Voltage:

120 VAC

Full Load Amperes N.O. and N.C.: 12 A

Locked Rotor Amperes N.O. and N.C.: 72 A

Non-inductive Amperes N.O. and N.C.:12 A

Pilot Duty: 125 VA (N.O. contacts) at 24 to 120 VAC

120/240 VAC Models:

Applied Voltage:

120 VAC

208 VAC

Horsepower N.O. (N.C.) :

1 (0.25) hp 1 (0.33) hp

Full Load Amperes N.O. (N.C.): 16 (5.8) A 9.2 (4.0) A

Locked Rotor Amperes N.O. (N.C.): 96 (34.8) A 55.2 (24) A

Non-inductive Amperes N.O. (N.C.):15 (10) A 10 (10) A

Pilot Duty: 125 VA (N.O. contacts) at 24 to 240 VAC

125 VA (N.C. contacts) at 24 to 240 VAC

50 VA (N.C. contacts) at 24 VAC

240 VAC
1 (0.5) hp 8.0 (4.9) A 48 (29.4) A 10 (10) A

NEMA 1/IP20 high-impact thermoplastic or NEMA 4X/IP66 watertight, corrosion-resistant, high-impact thermoplastic

North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734, Vol. 1; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B
Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits Europe: CE Mark  Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC. Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R55

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls
MR Series Defrost Control Modules

Code No. LIT-1900003

Description
The MR Series Controls are versatile, microprocessor-based, multifunction, programmable temperature controls. Depending on the model chosen, the MR Series Controls can also manage alarm, defrost cycle (active or passive defrost), and evaporator fan functions.
The MR Series Controls have large red LED displays. These compact controls are available in panel mount and DIN rail mount varieties. The MR Series Controls use the A99B temperature sensors, which allow remote mounting of the display unit.
All MR Series Controls perform temperature and alarm management. Some models have additional capabilities.
MR1 Series Controls
The MR1 Series provides temperature and alarm management functions. It can replace a temperature control and digital temperature readout.
MR2 Series Controls
The MR2 Series provides temperature, alarm, and defrost cycle management. The MR2 control performs defrost cycle management using time-based, passive, off cycle defrost. It can replace a temperature control, a digital temperature readout, and a defrost timer.
Refer to the MR Series Refrigeration Temperature Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-125199) for important product application information.

MR4 Series Controls
The MR4 Series provides temperature, alarm, defrost, and evaporator fan management. The MR4 Series provides defrost cycle management with hot gas or electric heat defrost and defrost termination based on time or temperature. The MR4 Series consolidates the functions of a temperature control, a digital temperature readout, a defrost cycle timer, and a defrost termination device.
Refer to the MR Series Refrigeration Temperature Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-125199) for important product application information.
Features
· programmable functions allow adjustment of control settings to meet application needs
· alarm management functions provide local alarm display and an alarm output relay that can be used to trigger a remote alarm or dial-out modem
· easily readable LED display displays temperature and other functions quickly and clearly
· programming button lockout allows user to disable programming buttons and deter accidental or unauthorized changes
· accurate, interchangeable temperature sensor provides accurate control performance with up to 300 feet of wiring (an adjustable temperature offset is provided for longer wiring)
· self-test procedure checks control operation by cycling all outputs and testing all LEDs

MR4 Series DIN Rail and Panel Mount Modules
Repair Information
If the MR Series Defrost Control Modules fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Applications
Application
Cooling tower pump control Space and return air temperature control Convenience store coolers Convenience store freezers Supermarket display cases for produce Reach-in coolers Walk-in coolers Freezers or coolers with passive defrost, time-based termination Freezers with hot gas defrost (temperature or time-based termination Freezers with electrical defrost (temperature or time-based termination)

MR1
  

MR2

   

MR4
     



Selection Chart

Product Code Number
MR1DR24-11C
MR2PM24-11C
MR2DR24-11C
MR4PM24-12C
MR4DR24-12C

Description

Ship. Wt. lb (g)

MR1 Single-Stage, DIN Rail Mount Defrost 0.75 lb Control, One A99BB-200C sensor included (340 g)

MR2 Two-Stage, Panel Mount Defrost

0.53 lb

Control, One A99BB-200C sensor included (240 g)

MR2 Two-Stage, DIN Rail Mount Defrost 0.79 lb Control, One A99BB-200C sensor included (360 g)

MR4 Four-Stage, Panel Mount Defrost

0.90 lb

Control, Two A99BB-200C sensors included (410 g)

MR4 Four-Stage, DIN Rail Mount Defrost 1.17 lb Control, Two A99BB-200C sensors included (530 g)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-56

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls
MR Series Defrost Control Modules (Continued)

Technical Specifications

MR Series Defrost Control Modules

Power Requirements

24 VAC, 50/60 Hz Class 2 (20 to 30 VAC)

Power Consumption

3.7 VA at 24 VAC

Accuracy

± 1.8F° (± 1°C)

Ambient Operating Conditions Storage

+14 to +140°F (-10 to +60°C); 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing) -22 to +176°F (-30 to +80°C); 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)

Dimensions Panel Mount (H x W x D) DIN Rail:

1.38 x 2.95 x 2.68 in. (35 x 75 x 68 mm) 4.65 x 2.76 x 2.07 in. (118 x 70 x 53 mm)

Agency Listings

UL Recognized: File E194024, CCN XAPX2 Canadian UL Recognized: File E194024, CCN XAPX8

Electrical Ratings of Contacts

Rating Category

120 VAC 240 VAC 24 VDC

Horsepower

1/4

1/2

---

Full Load Amperes

5.8

4.9

---

Locked Rotor Amperes

34.8

29.4

---

Inductive (Non-Motor)

8

Amperes

8

8

Pilot Duty VA

275

450

---

Note: Relay outputs must not exceed 20 Amperes total connected load. Open collector transistors on MR1 alarms have a maximum rating of 40 VDC 100 mA. Alarms require external power source.

Process Temperature Sensor

Sensor Binary Input Binary Common Common

Evaporator Alarm Temperature

Sensor S1 SC D CD S2

A1 A2

Terminal Not Used Internal to Control

V1 V2

C1 Fr

C3 Fn

C2 Df

Power Supply

Compressor Evaporator Fan

Defrost

Refer to Rating Table for more information

MR4 DIN Rail Control

Refer to Rating Table for more information

C Fr A1 Df Fn

Internal to Control V1 V2 D S1 SC S2

Common

Defrost Alarm Evaporator

Power Supply

Binary Input

Sensor Common

Compressor

Fan

Evaporator Temperature

Process Temperature Sensor

Sensor

MR4 Panel Mount Control

mr4panel.eps mr4dinrl.eps

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-57

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1927380

MR4PMUHV Electronic Temperature/Defrost Control with Relay Pack

Description
The MR Series temperature controls are designed for use with hot gas or electric heat defrost in both refrigeration and freezer units. Either time or temperature based defrost termination may be selected.
The MR Series incorporates control functions such as compressor control, defrost management, fan management, and alarm management.
Refer to the MR4PMUHV Electronic Temperature/Defrost Control with Relay Pack Product Bulletin (LIT-125190) for important product application information.
Features
· single package provides the functionality of multiple components at a cost-effective price
· mounting flexibility allows the control and relay pack to be mounted together or separately, facilitating multiple configurations

· accurate, interchangeable temperature sensor provides reliable control performance with up to 300 ft. of wiring (an offset is provided for longer wiring)
· easily readable temperature display can show either evaporator or process temperature at the touch of a button
· heavy-duty relays allow direct control of compressors, fans, defrost heaters, and alarms
· alarm management functions provide both local alarm codes and a relay closure that can be used to trigger a remote alarm or a dial-out modem
Applications
These relay pack mounted controls provide direct control of compressors up to 2 hp, electric heater loads of up to 20 amperes, and evaporator fan loads of up to 3/4 hp. The need for separate relays is eliminated in these applications.

MR4PMUHV Temperature Control
In addition, the MR4PMUHV controls combine the functionality of an electromechanical thermostat, mechanical clock, defrost termination device, and temperature readout device with the accuracy of electronic technology.

Selection Charts

MR4PMUHV Electronic Temperature/Defrost Control with Relay Pack
Product Code Number Description

MR4PMUHV-12C

Relay pack defrost control with two A99BB-200C sensors

Repair Parts Product Code Number
MR4PM12C-12C RP4MRUHV-1C A99BB-200C

Description
Replacement control for use in relay pack Relay pack without control Sensor, cable length: 6.5 ft/1.98m

Technical Specifications

MR4PMUHV Electronic Temperature/Defrost Control with Relay Pack (Part 1 of 2)

Frequency

60/50 Hz at 120/240 VAC

Power consumption

10 VA at 240 VAC, 5 VA at 120 VAC

Supply Level

120 and L1: 120 VAC +10%/-15% 240 and L1: 240 VAC +10%/-15%

Accuracy

± 1.8F°/± 1C°

A99 Sensor Cable

6.5 ft/1.98 m

Ambient MR4PMUHV-12C Operating Conditions

+14° to +111°F/-10° to +44°C; derating 6.25% per 1°C to 60° C; 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)

MR4PM12C-12C +14° to +140°F/-10° to +60°C; 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)

RP4MRUHV-1C

-40° to +111°F/ -40° to +44°C; derating 6.25% per 1°C to 60° C; 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)

Ambient MR4PMUHV-12C Storage Conditions MR4PM12C-12C

-22° to +176°F/-30° to +80°C 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)
-22° to +176°F/-30° to +80°C 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)

RP4MRUHV-1C

-40° to +185°F/-40° to +85°C 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)

Dimensions (H x W x D)

7.94 x 3.6 x 2.4 in./202 x 92 x 61 mm

Technical Specifications (Continued)

MR4PMUHV Electronic Temperature/Defrost Control with Relay Pack (Part 2 of 2)

Agency Listings

UL Listed (File SA516, UL Guide SDFY; cUL Guide SDFY7)

Shipping Weight

2.9 lb/1,320 g

Relay Electrical Ratings

24 120 208

SPST Compressor Relay

Horsepower Rating

--

1

1.5

AC Full Load Amperes

--

16

11

AC Locked Rotor Amperes

--

96

66

Pilot Duty (VA)

125

750

875

SPDT Fan Relay

Horsepower Rating

--

1/3

1/2

AC Full Load Amperes

--

7.2

5.65

AC Locked Rotor Amperes

--

43.2 33.9

Pilot Duty (VA)

50

325

450

SPST Defrost Heater Relay

Horsepower Rating

--

1

1.5

AC Full Load Ampere

--

16

11

AC Locked Rotor Amperes

--

96

66

Non-Inductive Load Amperes

--

20

20

Pilot Duty (VA)

125

750

825

SPST Alarm Relay

Non-Inductive Load Ampere

5

5

5

Pilot Duty (VA)

--

125

250

240
2 12 72 1,125
3/4 6.9 41.4 600
2 12 72 20 1,125
5 325

Relay Electrical Ratings Note: Ratings shown are for ambient operation at -40 to 44°C. Derate electrical ratings 6.25% per 1°C (1.8°F) between 44°C (111°F) and 60°C (140°F).

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-58

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls
A28 Series Two-Stage Temperature Control

Code No. LIT-1927110

Description
The A28 Series are two-stage temperature controls that incorporate a liquid-filled sensing element.
Refer to the A28 Series Two-Stage Temperature Controls with NEMA 1 Enclosure Product Bulletin Product Bulletin (LIT-125130) for important product application information.

A28 Series

Y

Y

R R

B B

High Stage Low Stage
Action on Increase of Temperature
A28 Action Diagram
Features
· wide temperature ranges available · constant differential throughout the entire range · single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) snap-acting switches · unaffected by changes in barometric pressure · unaffected by cross ambient conditions · compact enclosure · variety of sensing element styles

a28.eps

A28AA-4 Temperature
Control

A28AB-29 Temperature
Control

Applications
Use for temperature sensing applications requiring two-stage control of HVAC/R equipment.
Accessories
· packing nut assembly available for direct immersion applications (Code No. FTG13A-600R)
· remote bulb models include 5/8 in. mounting clip

Selection Charts

Product Code Switch

Number

Action

Range °F (°C)

Differential F° (C°)

Bulb and Capillary

Coiled Bulb-Fixed Differential

A28AA-4C

Two-SPDT 30 to 110 (-1 to 43)

3-1/2 (1.9) each stage 3 (1.7) fixed between stages

1-3/8 in. x 2-1/4 in. coiled

Case Compensated-Fixed Differential

A28AA-9C

Two-SPDT 20 to 80 (-7 to 27)

3-1/2 (1.9) each stage 3 (1.7) fixed between stages

3/8 in. x 5 in. 6 ft capillary1

Wide Range-Adjustable Interstage Differential

A28AA-28C

Two-SPDT 30 to 110 (-1 to 43)

3-1/2 (1.9) each stage 2 to 7 adjustable between stages

12 ft averaging bulb 6 ft capillary

A28AA-29C

Two-SPDT -30 to 100 (-34 to 38)

5 (2.8) each stage 2 to 7 adjustable between stages

3/8 in. x 4 in. 8 ft capillary1

A28AA-36C

Two-SPDT 40 to 90 (4 to 32)

3 each stage 2 to 7 adjustable between stages

3/8 in. x 5-3/4 in. 6 ft capillary

A28AA-37C

Two-SPDT 60 to 140 (16 to 60)

5 each stage 2 to 7 adjustable between stages

3/8 in. x 4 in. 6 ft capillary

A28AJ-4C

Two-SPDT 20 to 80 (-7 to 27)

2 each stage 2 to 7 adjustable between stages

3/16 in. x 22 in. 6 ft capillary

A28AB-1C

Two-SPDT2 20 to 80 (-7 to 27)

3-1/2 (1.9)

Changeover Control
3/8 in. x 5 in. 6 ft capillary

1. Packing nut assembly available for direct immersion applications (Code No. FTG13A-600R). 2. Switches within 1 F° (0.6 C°) of each other.

Bulb Well No. (Order Separately)

WEL14A-603R
 WEL14A-602R
 WEL14A-602R

WEL14A-603R

Range Adjuster
Convertible
Knob
Screwdriver slot Convertible Knob Knob Knob
Screwdriver slot

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-59

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls
A28 Series Two-Stage Temperature Control (Continued)

Replacement Parts Product Code Number
CVR28A-617R CVR28A-618R KNB20A-602R

Description
Concealed adjustment Visible scale Knob kit

Technical Specifications

Maximum bulb temperature of A28AA-37 is 230°F (110°C). For all others, maximum bulb temperature is 140°F (60°C).

Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings VAC

120

208

240

277

A28AA, A

AC Full Load A

16.0

9.2

8.0

---

AC Locked Rotor A

96.0

55.2

48.0

---

Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A

16.0

9.2

8.0

7.2

(Not Lamp Loads)

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC1

A28AJ

AC Full Load A

6.0

3.4

3.0

---

AC Locked Rotor A

36.0

20.4

18.0

---

Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A

15.0

9.2

8.0

7.2

(Not Lamp Loads)

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC1

A28AB

AC Full Load A

16.0

9.2

8.0

---

AC Locked Rotor A

96.0

55.2

48.0

---

Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A

16.0

9.2

8.0

7.2

(Not Lamp Loads)

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC1

1. When used as two-circuit control, the total connected load must not exceed 2,000 VA.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-60

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1927115

A28 Series Two-Stage Flange Mounted Duct Thermostat

Description
The A28AK is a two-stage temperature control with special air coil sensing element and adjustable mounting flange.
Refer to the A28 Series Two-Stage Temperature Controls with NEMA 1 Enclosure Product Bulletin (LIT-125130) for important product application information.

A28 Series

Y

Y

R R

B B

Features
· flat flange mounting with special coil element permits positioning of sensing bulb in the appropriate portion of the air stream
· two single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) snap-acting switches
· unaffected by barometric pressure or cross ambient temperatures
Applications
These duct thermostats are used on roof top units, make-up heaters, duct heaters, and air handling systems of all types.

High Stage Low Stage
Action on Increase of Temperature
A28 Action Diagram
Repair Information
If the A28 Series Two-Stage Flange Mounted Duct Thermostat fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

a28.eps

A28AK Thermostat

Selection Chart

Product Code Number

Number

of Stages

Switch Action

A28AK-1C

Two

A28AK-2C

Two

Two-SPDT switches Two-SPDT switches

Range °F (°C)
30 to 110 (-1 to 43) 60 to 130 (16 to 54)

Differential F° (C°) Fixed

Each Stage

Between Stage

2 (1.1)

3 (1.7)

2 (1.1)

3 (1.7)

Maximum Allowable Temperature at Bulb °F (°C)
140 (60)
200 (93)

Technical Specifications
Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings VAC
AC Full Load A AC Locked Rotor A Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A (Not Lamp Loads) Pilot Duty

120

208

240

277

6.0

3.4

3.0



36.0

20.4

18.0



10.0

9.2

8.0

7.2

125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

Note: When used as a two-circuit control, the total connected load must not exceed 2,000 VA.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-61

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1927120

A28 Two-Stage Industrial Thermostat (Watertight and Dusttight)

Description
The A28KA is a wide range temperature control with gasketed enclosure and two single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) switches.
Refer to the A19A, A19K, A28K Series Industrial Controls Remote Bulb Product Bulletin (LIT-125105) for important product application information
Features
· rugged steel enclosure · liquid-filled sensing element that provides
uniform control
Applications
This control is for refrigeration, air conditioning, and heating applications. This model incorporates a gasketed enclosure that can be used in a wide range of industrial and general purpose applications.

Repair Information
If the A28 Two-Stage Industrial Thermostat fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings AC

120 208 240

AC Full Load A

16.0 9.2 8.0

AC Locked Rotor A

96.0 55.2 48.0

Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A (Not Lamp Loads)

16.0 9.2 8.0

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

Note: When used as a two-circuit control, the total connected load must not exceed 2,000 VA.

A28AKA Industrial Thermostat

Selection Chart

Product Code Switch

Number

Action

A28KA-1C

Two-SPDT

Range °F (°C)
0 to 150 (-15 to 65)

Differential F° (C°)
5 (2.8) each stage 3 (1.7) fixed between stages

Bulb and Capillary
0.290 x 2-1/2 in. 10 ft capillary

Bulb Well No. (Order Separately)
WEL16A-600R

Range Adjuster
Knob

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-62

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1927125

A28 Two-Stage Temperature Control with Weatherproof Enclosure

Description
The A28MA Controls are wide range temperature controls with rainproof NEMA 3R enclosure and two single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) switches.
Refer to the A28MA Type Two-Stage Tower Fan Control Two-Stage Air Cooled Condenser Fan Control Product Bulletin (LIT-125135) for important product application information

Features
· rugged steel enclosure · liquid-filled sensing element provides
uniform control
Applications
· sump water temperature control for cooling towers and evaporative condensers
· fan cycling control for air-cooled condensers

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings

120 208 240

AC Full Load A

16.0 9.2 8.0

AC Locked Rotor A

96.0 55.2 48.0

Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A (Not Lamp Loads)

16.0 9.2 8.0

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

Note: When used as a two-circuit control, the total connected load must not exceed 2,000 VA.

Repair Information
If the A28 Two-Stage Temperature Control with Weatherproof Enclosure fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

A28MA Temperature Control

Selection Chart

Product Switch Code Action Number

Range Differential °F (°C) F° (C°)

Bulb and Capillary

Range Adjuster

A28MA-1C A28MA-2C

Two-Stage Two-SPDT Switches

40 to 120 (4 to 49)

Factory set 5 (2.8) each stage 8 (4.4) between stages

3/8 in. x 4 in.; Neoprene-coated 6 ft capillary
3/8 in. x 4-1/16 in.; 6 ft capillary

Screwdriver slot

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-63

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1927130

A28 Two-Stage Agricultural Thermostat with NEMA 4X Enclosure

Description
The A28PJ and A28PA are two-stage temperature controls with raintight and dusttight enclosures.

Applications
Designed for use in agricultural and industrial applications that require compliance with Article 547 of the National Electrical Code.

Refer to the A28 Series Two-Stage Temperature Controls with NEMA 1 Enclosure Product Bulletin (LIT-125130) for important product application information.
Features
· rugged thermoplastic gasketed enclosures that meet NEMA 4X specifications
· O-ring sealed setpoint adjustment knobs · range scale with oversized white markings
for easy readability in low light · exposed portion of liquid-filled sensing
elements are plated and plastic coated to resist damage in corrosive atmospheres

Repair Information
If the A28 Two-Stage Agricultural Thermostat with NEMA 4X Enclosure fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart

Product Code Number
A28PJ-1C
A28PA-2C

Switch Action
Two-SPDT
Two-SPDT

Range °F (°C) Differential F° (C°)

30 to 110 (-1 to 43)

2 (1.1) each stage 2 to 7 (1.1 to 3.9) adjustable between stages

30 to 110 (-1 to 43)

2 (1.1) each stage 2 to 7 (1.1 to 3.9) adjustable between stages

A28PJ, A28PA Thermostat

Bulb and Capillary
1-3/8 in. x 2-1/4 in. coiled
1-3/8 in. x 2-1/4 in. coiled

Range Adjuster
Knob
Knob

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings VAC

120

208

240

277

A28PJ

AC Full Load A

6.0

3.4

3.0



AC Locked Rotor A

36.0

20.4

18.0



Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A (Not Lamp Loads)
Pilot Duty

10.0

9.2

8.0

7.2

125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC1

A28PA

AC Full Load A

16.0

9.2

8.0



AC Locked Rotor A

96.0

55.2

48.0



Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A (Not Lamp Loads)
Pilot Duty

16.0

9.2

8.0

7.2

125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC1

1. When used as a two-circuit control, the total connected load must not exceed 2,000 VA.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-64

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1927135

A36 Series Four-Stage Remote Bulb Thermostats

S w itch D iffe r e n tia l
S w itch D iffe re n tia l
Switch D iffe r e n tia l
a36diff.eps

Description
The A36 series are four-stage thermostats with open construction for use in panel mounting.
Refer to the Type A36AHA 4-Stage Computer Environmental Temperature Control Product Bulletin (LIT-125145) for important product application information.

Interstage Differential

A36 Series Differential Diagram

Features
Screwdriver slot adjustment with calibrated dial enables movement of entire staging band within the range.

Applications
Use for cycling control for multiple refrigeration compressors or unloading type compressors.
Accessories
Order Enclosure CSE57A-600 separately, if required.

A36AHA-52 Remote Bulb Thermostat
Repair Information
If the A36 Series Four-Stage Remote Bulb Thermostat fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

a36 IN.eps

A36 Series Action Diagram

Selection Chart

Product Code Switch

Number

Action

Range °F (°C) Differential F° (C°) Fixed

A36AHA-50C1 A36AHA-52C1 A36AHA-58C2

Four Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT) switches

55 to 95 (13 to 35)
0 to 70 (-18 to 21)

Two each stage 1 1/2 (0.8) between stages
Three each stage 2-1/2 (1.4) between stages

A36AHB-33C1

Two each stage 2-1/2 (1.4) between stages

1. Calibrated at mid-switching point; computer room or comfort control. 2. Calibrated at low-switching point; special close control chiller applications.

Bulb and Capillary

Bulb Well No. (Order Separately)

3/8 in. x 5-1/4 in.

WEL14A-603R

18 in. capillary

w ith 12 in. nylon armor

3/8 in. x 4-3/4 in. 15 ft braid armor capillary

WEL14A-602R

Range Adjuster
Screwdriver slot with calibrated dial

Specifications

Maximum bulb temperature is 120°F (49°C) in operation and 140°F (60°C) when shipping.

Electrical Ratings (Per Switch) Motor Ratings VAC

120

208

240

277

A36AHA

AC Full Load A

10.0

6.9

5.0



AC Locked Rotor A

60.0

41.4

30.0



Non-Inductive A

16.0

9.2

8.0

7.2

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 120 to 227 VAC

A36AHB

AC Full Load A

6.0

3.4

3.0



AC Locked Rotor A

36.0

20.4

18.0



Non-Inductive A

10.0

5.7

5.0

4.3

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 120 to 227 VAC

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-65

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls
S26 Series Switching Subbase

Code No. LIT-1922250

Description
The S26 Series is a switching subbase used in conjunction with T26A, T26J, and T26S thermostats to provide system and fan switching capability.
The variety of switching configurations available with the S26 Series adds application flexibility to the T26 Series thermostats.
Applications
S26 Series subbases are available with a variety of system switch configurations for manual control of system operation and fan speed for heating, cooling, and combination heating/cooling equipment.

Selection Chart

Product Code System

Number

Switch

Fan Switch

S26AA-1

Heat-off-cool Low-med-high

S26AH-1

Heat-off-cool None

S26DH-1

Off-auto

None

Refer to the S26 Series Switching Subbase Product Bulletin (LIT-125610) for important product application information.
Features
· mounts directly to a two-gang electrical box
· wiring connections enclosed and isolated from the user
· smooth action multi-position slide switches for dependable service
· can be added to existing T26 Series thermostats (new style with plastic cover)
· high-impact plastic enclosure
Repair Information
If the S26 Series Switching Subbase fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement subbase, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

S26 Series Switching Subbase

Typical Wiring Configuration for Cooling S26

Technical Specifications

S26 Series System Switching Subbase

Finish Cover

Almond

Faceplate Gold metallic with dark brown border and lettering

Material Base

0.050 in. (1 mm) cold rolled steel

Cover

0.090 in. (2 mm) high impact PVC plastic

Mounting

Mounts to a 2-gang electrical box

Shipping Individual 7 oz (0.20 kg) Weight Pack

Overpack 10 lb, 4 oz (4.65 kg) of 20 Units

Wiring Connections Color coded No. 16 AWG wires, 8 in. (203 mm) long

Motor Ratings
AC full load A AC locked rotor A AC non-inductive A Pilot Duty

Electrical Ratings

120V 208V 240V 277V

12.0

6.9

6.0

5.2

72

41.4

36

31.2

6.5

6.5

6.5



125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

Gray

Gray

Black
T26S and S26AH (T46SAH) Heat-Off-Cool Selector Switch with Continuous Fan (Heating and Cooling)
Typical Wiring Configurations for Combinations Black Red

FIG:T46SAH

Black

Gray

H C H C

FIG:T4SDH

FIG:T46SAA

T26S and S26AA (T46SAA) Heat-Off-Cool Selector Switch with Fan Speed Control (Heating and Cooling)

T26S and S26DH (T46SDH) Off-Auto Selector Switch with Manual or Automatic Changeover Switch and Continuous Fan (Heating and Cooling)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-66

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1922255

T22/T25/T26 Series Line Voltage Wall Thermostat (Heating, Cooling, or Heating and Cooling)

Description
For line voltage control of residential, commercial, or industrial heating or year-round air conditioning. Heat or cold anticipators are not required. The liquid-charged temperature sensing element and highly efficient diaphragm and leverage provide close temperature control.
Refer to the following documents for important product application information:
· T22 Series Line Voltage Thermostats with Selector Switch Product Bulletin (LIT-125630)
· T25 Two-Stage Room Thermostat Product Bulletin (LIT-125640)
· T26 Series Line Voltage Thermostats Product Bulletin (LIT-125645)
Features
· attractive beige colored, high-impact plastic enclosure (T26 Series)
· close differential without the need for anticipators
· bi-metal thermometer supplied as standard except where indicated
· equipped with adjustable dial stops (T26 Series)
Specifications
Temperature range is 40 to 90°F (5 to 30°C), except energy conservation models.
Accessories
· replacement knobs and faceplates · for double trim plate for mounting two T22s
or T26s
Repair Information
If the T22/T25/T26 Series Line Voltage Wall Thermostat (Heating, Cooling, or Heating and Cooling) fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.
Applications
Use for line voltage control of heating and cooling equipment.

T22 Series Line Voltage Wall Thermostat

T25 Series Line Voltage Wall Thermostat

T25 Series Line Voltage Wall Thermostat

Series T25

Y

Y

SeriesT26 3

t28cd.eps t28cd.eps

B

B

2

R

R

1

High Stage

Low Stage

Action on Increase

Action on Increase

of Temperature

of Temperature

T25, T26 Series Action Diagrams

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-67

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

T22/T25/T26 Series Line Voltage Wall Thermostat (Heating, Cooling, or Heating and Cooling) (Continued)

Selection Chart

Product Code Number1

Type of

Application

Adjustment

Selector Switch

Differential Approximately C° (F°)

Heating

Cooling

Shipping Wt. (lb)

Heating

T22AAA-1C

Knob

Single-Pole, Single-Throw (SPST) Off-Auto

1-3/4 (1)



1.3

T22ABC-1C

Auto-Off-Fan

T22ABC-3C

Concealed

T22BBC-1C

Knob

SPST, medium duty

3 (1.7)

T22CBC-1C

SPST, heavy duty

T22CBC-3C

Concealed

T26A-14C

Knob

SPST, Energy Conservation Heating None

2 (1.1)

1.0

(No Thermometer)

model, max. setting 75°F (24°C)

T26A-15C (No Thermometer)

SPST, Energy Conservation Heating model, max. setting 65°F (18°C)

Cooling

T22JAA-1C

Knob

SPST

Off-Auto



2-1/4 (1.3)

1.3

T22JCC-1C

Auto-Off-Fan

T26J-7C (No Thermometer)

SPST, Energy Conservation Cooling None model, min. setting 75°F (24°C)

T26J-9C (No Thermometer)

SPST, Energy Conservation Cooling model, min. setting 78°F (26°C)

2 (1.1)

1.0

Heating and Cooling

T22SDA-1C

Knob

Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT), permits system shutdown at the thermostat

Off-Auto

1-3/4 (1)

2-1/4 (1.3)

1.3

T22SEB-1C

SPDT, used when the same device Heat-Off-Cool controls heating and cooling

T22SFB-1C2

SPDT, used to control separate loads on heating and cooling

T22TFB-1C2

SPDT, heavy duty, used to control separate loads on heating and cooling

3 (1.7)

3 to 4 (1.7 to 2.2)

T26S-18C3

SPDT

None

1-3/4 (1)

2-1/4 (1.3)

1.0

T26T-3C2

SPDT, heavy duty

3 (1.7)

3 to 4 (1.7 to 2.2)

Two-Stage

T25A-1C

Knob

Two SPDT switches

None

1-3/4 (1)

2-1/4 (1.3)

1.5

T25A-16C

Concealed

Two-stage heating, cooling or onestage heating and one-stage cooling

3 (1.7) between stages

1. For the thermostat guard, refer to G Series Thermostat and Humidistat Guards (LIT-1922145). 2. Can also be used where one unit provides both heating and cooling by adding a jumper between terminals 2 and 3. Refer to Typical Wiring Diagram and
Electrical Ratings for Line Voltage Thermostats (LIT-1922600). 3. Includes a faceplate for horizontal mounting. The plate is for on-the-job installation over a vertical plate.
Can field-convert to other configurations. The T26S-18 is a universal replacement for Honeywell T451A, -B, T651A; White-Rodgers 179-1, 180-1, 181-1, 182-101, -102; Robertshaw® TA500, TH71, -72, -79, -500, TX550. T26T-3 replaces: Honeywell T4051A, -B, T6051A; White-Rodgers 151-6, 152-9, 159-3, -5.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-68

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1922600

Typical Wiring Diagram and Electrical Ratings for Line Voltage Thermostats

Technical Specifications

Off

Off

h

Heat Cool Heat Cool 312

t22sfb.eps

H Cooling System
G

Heating System

T22SFB, T22TFB
Typical Wiring Diagram for Line Voltage Thermostat

Electrical Ratings T22A, T22J, T22S, T25A, T26A, T26J, T26S

Motor Ratings VAC

120

AC Full Load A

6.0

AC Locked Rotor A

36.0

AC Non-Inductive A

(1)

Pilot Duty

Note: T25A Non-Inductive Ratings are 10.0, 9.2, 8.0 and 7.2 A. T26A, T26S Non-Inductive Rating is 10.0 A, 120 to 277 VAC.

Electrical Ratings T22BBC

Motor Ratings VAC

120

AC Full Load A

10.0

AC Locked Rotor A

60.0

Pilot Duty

208

240

3.4

3.0

21

18.0

(1)

(1)

125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

208
6.9 41.4 125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

Electrical Ratings T22CBC1, T26T2

Motor Ratings VAC

120

208

Heat

Cool

Heat

Cool

AC Full Load A

16.0

8.0

9.2

8.0

AC Locked Rotor A

96.0

48.0

55.2

48.0

Non-Inductive Rating

120

240

AC Non-Inductive A

22.0

22.0

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 120 to 240 VAC

1. Heating rating only applies. Non-inductive ratings do not apply to Type T2CBC. 2. Non-inductive rating does not apply to the cooling side of T26T.

Electrical Ratings T22TFB Motor Ratings VAC
AC Full Load A AC Locked Rotor A Pilot Duty

Heat
16.0 96.0

120 Cool
8.0 48.0

208

Heat

Cool

9.2

8.0

55.2

48.0

125 VA, 120 to 240 VAC

277
  (1)

240
6.0 36.0

240

Heat

Cool

8.0

8.0

48.0

48.0

227

22.0

240

Heat

Cool

8.0

8.0

48.0

48.0

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-69

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1922260

T23 Series Fan Coil Thermostat (with Fan and System Selectors)

Description
This line voltage thermostat controls heating, cooling, or combination heating and cooling systems. It operates fan motors, relays, or valves on fan-coil units. All thermostats have a three-speed fan selector switch.
Refer to the T23 Series Line Voltage Fan Coil Thermostat Product Bulletin (LIT-125635) for important product application information.
Features
· dual voltage switching provided (120/240 VAC) without the need for anticipators to achieve close temperature control
· field-adjustable high and low dial stops · mounts on a standard double outlet box · attractive one-piece beige cover with inlaid
two-tone panel
Applications
· line voltage control of fan motors, relays, or valves on fan-coil units

2 2

3 3

Y Y

h h

MED MED

B

LO

HI

B

LO

HI

OFF OFF

5

6

4

5

6

R

R

AUTO HEAT

COOL

T23A Thermostat

2

3

MED

LO

HI

OFF

5

6

AUTO

Yh
B R

T23B Thermostat

t23b.eps

t23a.eps

T23A-1 Thermostat
Repair Information
If the T23 Series Fan Coil Thermostat (with Fan and System Selectors) fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart
Product Code Number
T23A-1C T23B-1C

Switches Fan
Low-Med-High Low-Med-High

Technical Specifications
Mounts on a standard double outlet box. Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings VAC
AC Full Load Amperes AC Locked Rotor Amperes Pilot Duty

System
Heat-Off-Cool Auto-Off
120
5.8 34.8

Range °F (°C)
50 to 90 (10 to 32)

Differential F° (C°)

Heating

Cooling

1-3/4 (1)

2-1/4 (1.3)

Shipping Weight (lb)
1.5

240
2.9 17.4 125 VA, 120 to 240 VAC

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-70

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1922265

T28 Series Fan Coil Thermostat (with or without Fan Selector Switches)

Description
This thermostat controls light duty line voltage fan coil or baseboard valves on heating, cooling, and heating-cooling systems. The thermostat can control one or two valves directly. These thermostats are rated for 120, 208, or 240 VAC at 50 to 60 Hz.
Refer to the T28 Series Fan Coil Thermostats Product Bulletin (LIT-125650) for important product application information.
Features
· precision, snap-acting contacts · heating and cooling anticipation · cooling and heating-cooling models have
an interlocked fan off position
Applications
Use for line voltage control of heating and cooling equipment.

t28cd.eps

HI MED h

OFF

LO

T28CD Heating-Cooling Thermostat with Off-Hi-Med-Lo Fan Switch

T28CD Thermostat

HI MED h

OFF

LO

T28DG Sequenced Heating-Cooling Thermostat
with Off-Hi-Med-Lo Fan Switch

t28dg.eps

Repair Information
If the T28 Series Fan Coil Thermostat (with or without Fan Selector Switches) fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart

Product Code Number Fan Switch

Shipping Weight, lb (kg)

Cooling

T28BD-1C

Off-Hi-Med-Lo

1.3 (0.59)

Heating-Cooling (Remote changeover, Single valve for heating and cooling)1

T28CD-1C

Off-Hi-Med-Lo

1.3 (0.59)

Heating-Cooling, Sequenced (Automatic changeover, Separate valves for heating and cooling)2

T28DA-1C

None

1.0 (0.45)

T28DB-1C1

Off-On

1.3 (0.59)

T28DD-1C1

Off-Hi-Med-Lo

1.3 (0.59)

T28DG-1C3

Off-Hi-Med-Lo

1.3 (0.59)

1. Off position of fan switch interlocks to turn off cooling. 2. For automatic changeover where one valve functions for heating or cooling, use A19CAC-2 Strap-On Changeover Control. 3. Off position of fan switch interlocks to turn off both heating and cooling.

Technical Specifications

The T28 mounts on a standard, double outlet box.

Nominal operating differential at 0.6°F (0.3 C°) heating, 1 F° (0.6 C°) cooling on standard 120 VAC fan coil valves. Sequenced models have 6 F° (3.3 C°) differential from heat on to cool on.

Electrical Ratings  Ampere VAC

Thermostat

Fan Switch

Cooling

Heating

Normal

Inrush

Normal

Inrush Full Load Amperes Locked Rotor Amperes

120

0.32

1.0

0.12

0.36

5.8

34.8

208

0.18

0.57

0.07

0.21

3.3

19.8

240

0.16

0.50

0.06

0.18

2.9

17.4

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-71

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls
T46 Series Fan Coil Thermostat

Code No. LIT-1922270

Description
The T46 Series Thermostat is used to control line voltage, fan coil, and heating zone valves on heating, cooling, and combination heating and cooling systems. Models are available with single-pole, single-throw (SPST) or single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) contact action for standard duty (nominal 1/4 hp, 6 A non-inductive) applications. Thermostats are available with or without fan speed control or built-in thermometers. Various system switch combinations are available, including fan speed selection.
Field-installable faceplate combinations of knob or concealed adjustment are possible. Also, the T46 is available with or without thermometer indication. These thermostats have plastic locking covers with an Allen-head screw to discourage unauthorized tampering. Standard models are supplied with the thermostat faceplate installed with knob adjustment and thermometer.
Refer to the T46 Series Fan Coil Thermostats Product Bulletin (LIT-125655) for important product application information.

Features
· knob or concealed setpoint adjustment · low and high temperature dial stops that
are concealed and adjustable throughout setpoint range · can be set for a locked dial · narrow differential without the need for anticipator · standard internal dual Celsius and Fahrenheit scales · switch mechanism and wiring connections go into the switch box to isolate electrical circuits from the sensing element · mounts on a standard double outlet box · separable mounting plate allows easy mounting and wiring without removing thermostat cover · locking cover reduces unauthorized tampering · high-impact plastic enclosure · smooth action multi-position slide switches for dependable service

T46 Thermostat
Applications
These thermostats control fan coil and zone heating valves on a wide variety of heating and cooling combinations for conditioned space.

Selection Charts

T46 Series Fan Coil Thermostat

Product Code System Fan

Number

Switch Switch

Heating

T46ABH-1C

Auto-off-fan None

T46ADH-1C

Off-auto

None

Cooling

T46JBH-1C

Auto-off-fan None

T46JDH-1C

Off-auto

None

T46JEA-1C

On-off

Low-med-high

Heating and Cooling

T46SAA-1C

Heat-off-cool Low-med-high

T46SAH-1C

Heat-off-cool None

T46SDA-1C

Off-auto

Low-med-high

T46SDH-1C

Off-auto

None

Technical Specifications

Range
Differential
Finish
Mounting Material
Sensing Element Shipping Weight
Thermometer Wiring Connections

Thermostat Thermometer Mechanical Operating Cover Faceplate
Base Cover
Individual Pack Overpack of 20 Units

Replacement Parts Product Code Number Description

CVR88A-600R

Thermostat Cover Assembly for knob adjustment models with thermometer, °F scale, faceplate supplied unassembled

KNB26A-600R

Plastic push on knob for thermostat

BKT48A-600R

Mounting plate for T46

Accessories

Product Code Number

Faceplate Selection1

Mounting Position

Type of Adjustment

PLT333-1R2

Vertical

Knob

PLT333-3R

Vertical

Concealed

PLT333-5R

Vertical

Knob

PLT333-12R

Vertical

Concealed

1. Faceplates must be ordered in multiples of ten. 2. Supplied with standard wholesaler models.

Thermometer Cutout
Yes
Yes Yes No

Temperature Scale
Fahrenheit
Fahrenheit Celsius 

T46 Series Fan Coil Thermostats
40 to 90°F (5 to 30°C) 50 to 90°F (10 to 30°C) Approximately 0.7°F (0.4°C) See next page Almond Gold metallic with dark brown border and lettering Double gang box, separable mounting plate 0.050 in. (1 mm) cold rolled steel 0.090 in. (2 mm) high-impact plastic Liquid-filled for positive trouble-free operation 1 lb (0.45 kg) 20 lb (9.07 kg) Bimetal type for accuracy and clarity, can be field-calibrated Color coded No. 16 AWG wires, 8 in. (203 mm) long

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-72

t46auht.eps

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls
T46 Series Fan Coil Thermostat (Continued)

Technical Specifications (Continued)

Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings

120 V 208 V 240 V

T46 System and Fan Switches

AC Full Load A

12.0

6.9

6.0

AC Locked Rotor A

34.8

19.1

17.4

AC Non-Inductive A

6.5

6.5

6.5

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

T46 Thermostat Only

AC Full Load A

6.0

3.5

3.0

AC Locked Rotor A

34.8

19.1

17.4

AC Non-Inductive A

6.5

6.5

6.5

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

Operating Differentials

277 V
5.2 14.4

  

5

Typical Wiring Application for Heating

L1 (Hot) Neutral

Grey

Black
Orange To Fan
Red To Heating
T46ABH Auto-Off-Fan Selector Switch with Continuous Fan (Heating Only)

Operating Differential C 0

Operating Differential F 0

4

2.2

Typical Wiring Application for Cooling

3

2 1 T46A, T46S Heating

1.1
Black L1 (Hot)

G re y

0

0

2

4

6

8

Amperage Load Operating Differential for T46A and Heating Side of T46S

t46heat.eps

Neutral

Orange To Fan
Blue To Cooling

T46JBH Auto-Off-Fan Selector Switch

5

with Continuous Fan (Cooling Only)

Operating Differential C 0

Operating Differential F 0

4

2.2

3

2

1.1

1 T46J, T46S Cooling

t46cool.eps

0

0

2

4

6

8

Amperage Load Operating Differential for T46J and Cooling Side of T46S

Note: The heavy line in each of the above figures is the nominal operating temperature differential. Production thermostats may vary from the norm, as indicated by the dotted line.

Typical Wiring Application for Combination Orange

To Fan

L1 (Hot)

Grey

Black

Fan

Off

Blue Red

Changeover Control
Y B R

Neutral

Valve

T46SDH Off-Auto Selector Switch. Used on Fan-Coil Unit with Cycling Valve and Continuous Fan.
Terminal Markings Shown for A19CAC Changeover Control (Heating and Cooling)

t46auco.eps

t46_2.eps

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-73

Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1900004

MS Series Temperature Stage Control Modules

Description
The MS Series Temperature Controls are versatile, microprocessor-based, multifunction, programmable temperature controls. They are designed for single and multiple-stage temperature control applications.
Depending on the model selected, the MS Series Controls can operate in the following modes:
· Direct mode · Reverse mode · Deadband mode · Independent Setpoint mode
The MS Series Controls have large, easy-to-read, red LED displays. These compact controls are available in panel mount and DIN rail mount models. MS Series Controls use the A99B temperature sensors, which allow remote mounting of the display unit.
Refer to the MS Series Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-125198) for important product application information.

Features
· programmable functions allow adjustment of control settings to meet application needs
· alarm management functions provide visible alarm codes on the display
· easily readable LED display shows temperature and functions quickly and clearly
· programming button lockout allows user to disable programming buttons to deter accidental or unauthorized changes
· accurate temperature sensors provide precise control performance with up to 300 feet of wiring (An adjustable offset is provided for longer wiring)
· self-test procedure checks control operation by cycling all outputs and testing all LEDs

MS4 Series Panel and DIN Rail Mount, Multi-Stage, Electronic Temperature Controls
Repair Information
If the MS Series Temperature Stage Control Modules fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Applications
Application
Rooftop heating or cooling units Boiler or pump control Convenience store coolers Space temperature control Cooling tower pump control Compressor or chiller staging Reach-in coolers Supermarket display cases for produce Restaurant and Convenience store walk-in coolers

MS1 Series Single-Stage
    

MS2 Series Two-Stage
   
   

MS4 Series Four-Stage
  
   

Selection Chart
Product Code Number
MS1DR24T-11C MS2DR24T-11C MS2PM24T-11C MS4DR24T-11C MS4PM24T-11C

Description
MS1 Single-stage, DIN Rail Mount Temperature Control, A99BB-200C sensor included MS2 Two-stage, DIN Rail Mount Temperature Control, A99BB-200C sensor included MS2 Two-stage, Panel Mount Temperature Control, A99BB-200C sensor included MS4 Four-stage, DIN Rail Mount Temperature Control, 2 A99BB-200C sensors included MS4 Four-stage, Panel Mount Temperature Control, 2 A99BB-200C sensors included

Accessories

Product Code Number
A99BB-200C A99BB-300C A99BB-500C A99BB-600C A99BA-200C

Description
Temperature Sensor: Range: -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C) Cable length and type: 6-1/2 ft (2 m) PVC
Temperature Sensor: Range: -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C) Cable length and type: 9-3/4 ft (3 m) PVC
Temperature Sensor: Range: -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C) Cable length and type: 16-3/8 ft (5 m) PVC
Temperature Sensor: Range: -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C) Cable length and type: 19-1/2 ft (6 m) PVC
Temperature Sensor: Range: -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C) Cable length and type: 6-1/2 ft (2 m) Shielded

Shipping Weight, lb (g)
0.75 (340) 0.79 (360) 0.53 (240) 1.17 (530) 0.90 (410)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-74

Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls
MS Series Temperature Stage Control Modules (Continued)

Technical Specifications

Power Requirements Power Consumption Accuracy Ambient Conditions
Agency Listings
Dimensions (H x W x D)

MS Series Temperature Stage Control Modules

24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Class 2 (20 to 30 VAC)

5 VA at 24 VAC

 1.8°F ( 1°C)

Operating

+14 to +140°F (-10 to +60°C); 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)

Storage

-22 to +176°F (-30 to +80°C); 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)

UL Recognized: File E194024, CCN XAPX2 Canadian UL Recognized: File E194024, CCN XAPX8

Panel Mount

1.38 x 2.95 x 2.68 in. (35 x 75 x 68 mm)

DIN Rail

4.65 x 2.76 x 2.07 in. (118 x 70 x 53 mm)

Electrical Ratings
Horsepower Full Load Amperes Locked Rotor Amperes Inductive (Non-Motor) Amperes Pilot Duty VA

120 VAC
1/4 5.8 34.8 8
275

240 VAC
1/2 4.9 29.4 8
450

24 VDC
------8
---

Note: Relay outputs must not exceed 20 Amperes total connected load. Open collector transistors on the MS1 Alarm Circuits have a maximum rating of 40 VDC 100 mA. Alarms require separate power source.

Refer to Ratings Table for more information

C 123 4

Internal to Control V1 V2 D S2 SC S1

Stage Stage

1

3

Stage Stage

Power Supply

Process

2

4

Binary

Sensor

Common

Input Binary/Sensor

Auxiliary Temperature Sensor

Common

MS4PM24T Panel Mount Control Wiring

Binary Input

Sensor Common Binary and Sensor Common

Process Sensor

Auxiliary Temperature Stage

Sensor

SC D CD S2

C2

Internal to Control

V1 V2 C1 1

C4

C3 3

Stage 1 Power Supply

Stage 4

Stage 3

See Ratings Table Terminal Not Used for more information

MS4DR24T Din Rail Mount Control Wiring

ms4pm24t.eps ms4dr24t.eps

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-75

Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1900009

MS Series Single-Stage Control Modules with Voltage Input

Description
The MS Series Controls are versatile, microprocessor-based, multifunction, programmable controls for humidity, pressure, or other 0 to 10 VDC input. They are designed for single- and multiple-stage control applications.
Depending on the model selected, the MS Series Control can operate in one of several modes: · Direct mode · Reverse mode · Deadband mode · Independent Setpoint mode
The MS Series Controls have large, easy-to-read, red LED displays. These compact controls are available in panel mount and DIN rail mount models.
Refer to the MS Series Multi-Stage Electronic Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-125502) for important product application information.

Features
· programmable functions allow adjustment of control settings to meet application needs
· alarm management functions provide visible alarm codes on the display and alarm relay contacts that can be used to activate a remote alarm or dial-out modem
· easily readable LED display shows condition and functions quickly and clearly
· programming button lockout allows user to disable programming buttons to deter accidental or unauthorized changes
· provides accurate control performance with up to 300 feet of wiring (an adjustable offset is provided for longer wiring.)
· self-test procedure checks control operation by cycling all outputs and testing all LEDs

MS1 Series DIN Rail Mount, Single-Stage, Electronic Pressure,
Temperator
Repair Information
If the MS Series Single-Stage Control Modules with Voltage Input fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Applications
Application
Rooftop heating or cooling units Boiler or pump control Convenience store coolers Space temperature control Cooling tower pump control

MS1 Series Single-Stage
    

Selection Chart
Product Code Number
MS1DR24T-11C MS1DR24V-11C

Description
MS1 Single-Stage thermostat, DIN Rail Mount Control; A99 sensor included MS1 Single-Stage, DIN Rail Mount Control; 0 to10 VDC input; no sensor included

Accessories
Product Code Number
HE-6300-3 HE-6310-3

Description
Humidity Sensor: 0 to 100% RH noncondensing 20 to 140°F (-29 to 60°C)

Technical Specifications
Power Requirements Power Consumption Accuracy

MS Series Stage Control Modules with Voltage Input
24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Class 2 (20 to 30 VAC) 5 VA at 24 VAC  1.8°F ( 1°C)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-76

Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls
MS Series Single-Stage Control Modules with Voltage Input (Continued)

Ambient Conditions
Agency Listings
Dimensions (H x W x D)

MS Series Stage Control Modules with Voltage Input

Operating

+14 to +140°F (-10 to +60°C); 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)

Storage

-22 to +176°F (-30 to +80°C); 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)

UL Recognized: File E194024, CCN XAPX2 Canadian UL Recognized: File E194024, CCN XAPX8

Panel Mount

1.38 x 2.95 x 2.68 in. (35 x 75 x 68 mm)

DIN Rail

4.65 x 2.76 x 2.07 in. (118 x 70 x 53 mm)

Electrical Ratings
Horsepower Full Load Amperes Locked Rotor Amperes Inductive (Non-Motor) Amperes Pilot Duty VA

120 VAC
1/4 5.8 34.8 8
275

240 VAC
1/2 4.9 29.4 8
450

24 VDC
------8
---

Note: Relay outputs must not exceed 20 Amperes total connected load. Open collector transistors on the MS1 Alarm Circuits have a maximum rating of 40 VDC 100 mA. Alarms require separate power source.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-77

Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls

Code No. LIT-1927375

MS4PMUHVT Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Control with Relay Pack

Description
The MS4PMUHVT Control is intended for multi-stage temperature control applications. This microprocessor based control offers innovative features and state-of-the-art technology to improve all your staged temperature control applications.
Refer to the MS4PMUHVT Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Control with Relay Pack Product Bulletin (LIT-125195) for important product application information.
Features
· four enclosed, line voltage relays provide direct control of motor loads without additional relays
· 120/240 VAC power supply eliminates need for separate transformers
· one control provides single-sensor multi-stage control or dual-sensor reset control, which reduces need for warehouse or truck to stock multiple controls for similar applications
· accepts A99 sensor signal, which is suitable for a wide range of applications

· Surface Mounted Design (SMD) technology assures high quality, reliable components in a compact package
· keypad lock deters accidental changes to parameter settings
· listed for use on refrigeration equipment in accordance with Canadian and U.S. National standards
Applications
This control is specifically designed for the control of four-stage applications in the following configurations: · four cooling stages with common setpoint · four heating stages with common setpoint · four stages with deadband (two heating
stages and two cooling stages with common setpoint) · two independent sets of two dependent stages (two heating stages and two cooling stages with independent setpoints)
Repair Information
If the MS4PMUHVT Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Control with Relay Pack fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

MS4PMUHVT Electronic Temperature Control

Selection Charts

MS4PMUHV Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Control with Relay Pack
Product Code Number Description

MS4PMUHVT-11C

Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Control with Relay Pack and One Temperature Sensor

Accessories and Maintenance Parts Product Code Number Description

A99BB-200C

Sensor with 6-1/2 ft/1.98 m Cable Length

MS4PM12CT-11C

Replacement Control (for use only with relay pack)

RP4MSUHV-1C

Replacement Relay Pack without Control

Electrical Ratings per Relay 24 VAC

HP

--

FLA (Ampere)

--

LRA (Ampere)

--

Non-Inductive (Ampere)

--

Pilot Duty (VA)

50

120 VAC
1/3 7.2 43.2 8 325

208 VAC
3/4 7.6 45.6 8 625

240 VAC
1 8 48 8 750

Technical Specifications

MS4PMUHVT Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Control with Relay Pack

Power Requirements

120 VAC ±10% or 240 VAC ±10%

Frequency

60/50 Hz

Power Consumption

10 VA at 240 VAC, 10 VA at 120 VAC

Sensor Range

-40 to 158°F (-40 to +70°C)

Accuracy

±1 F°/±1 C°

Ambient Operating Conditions

MS4PMUHVT-11C MS4PM12CT-11C

+14 to +140°F (-10 to +60°C); 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)
+14 to +140°F (-10 to +60°C); 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)

RP4MSUHV-1C

-40 to +140°F (-40 to +60°C); 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)

Ambient Storage Conditions

MS4PMUHVT-11C MS4PM12CT-11C

-22 to +176°F (-30 to +80°C); 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)
-22 to +176°F (-30 to +80°C); 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)

RP4MSUHV-1C

-40 to +185°F (-40 to +85°C); 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)

Agency Listings

UL File SA516, Guide SDFY cUL File SA516, Guide SDFY7

Emissions Compliance

FCC (US), DOC (Canada)

Dimensions (H x W x D)

7.94 x 3-3/5 x 2-2/5 in. (202 x 92 x 61 mm)

Shipping Weight

2.9 lb (1,320 g)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-78

Temperature Control Sensors and Accessories
A99B Series Temperature Sensor

Code No. LIT-1900006

Description
The A99B Series Temperature Sensors are passive PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) sensors. The A99B sensors are splashproof and are designed to measure temperature in a variety of refrigeration applications. Several accessories allow easy tailoring of the temperature sensor to various mounting configurations.
Applications include temperature sensing for freezers and coolers, as well as in defrost termination sensing, space and return air temperature sensing, and condenser fan cycling.
Refer to the A99B Series Temperature Sensors Product Bulletin (LIT-125186) for important product application information.

Features
· variety of lead lengths available to encompass most application requirements and simplify wiring sensors
· an assortment of mounting hardware provides configurations for many applications
· exceptional accuracy of sensing element provides excellent performance in a wide variety of control applications
· stainless steel sensing bulb allows use in more applications than other types of bulbs without corrosion
· lead length may be extended up to 800 ft (244 m)

A99B Temperature Sensors
Repair Information
If the A99B Series Temperature Sensor fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement sensor, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart

Product Code Number
A99BA-200C A99BB-25C A99BB-200C A99BB-300C A99BB-500C A99BB-600C A99BC-25C A99BC-300C A99BC-500C A99BC-1500C

Description
PTC Silicon Sensor with Shielded Cable; Cable length 6-1/2 ft (2 m); Range: -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C)
PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable length 9-3/4 in. (0.25 m); Range: -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C)
PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable length 6-1/2 ft (2 m); Range: -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C)
PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable length 9-3/4 ft (3 m); Range: -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C)
PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable length 16-3/8 ft (5 m); Range: -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C)
PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable length 19-1/2 ft (6 m); Range: -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C)
PTC Silicon Sensor with High Temperature Silicon Cable; Cable length 9-3/4 in. (0.25 m); Range: -40 to 248°F (-40 to 120°C)
PTC Silicon Sensor with High Temperature Silicon Cable; Cable length 9-3/4 ft (3 m); Range: -40 to 248°F (-40 to 120°C)
PTC Silicon Sensor with High Temperature Silicon Cable; Cable length 16-3/8 ft (5 m); Range: -40 to 248°F (-40 to 120°C)
PTC Silicon Sensor with High Temperature Silicon Cable; Cable length 49 ft (15 m); Range: -40 to 248°F (-40 to 120°C)

Accessories

Product Code Number
A99-CLP-1 ADP11A-600R
BOX10A-600R SHL10A-600R SHL10A-603R WEL11A-601R

Description
Surface Mounting Clip for the A99B Temperature Sensor 1/2 in. diameter EMT Conduit Adaptor (box of 10) for use with BOX10A-600R PVC Enclosure Sun Shield for Single Sensor Sun Shield for Two Sensors Immersion Well

Applications
The A99B temperature sensor line offers an economical solution for a wide variety of temperature sensing needs in refrigeration and HVAC applications. Typical temperature sensing applications and environments include:
· freezers · display cases · walk-in coolers · reach-in coolers · defrost termination temperature sensing · condenser fan cycling · space and return air temperature sensing · outdoor air sensing · process cooling and heating

Technical Specifications

A99B Series Temperature Sensor

Sensing Range A99BA A99BB

-40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C)

A99BC

-40 to 248°F (-40 to 120°C)

Reference Resistance

1,035 ohms at 77°F (25°C)

Accuracy

0.9°F (0.5°C) between 5 and 167°F (-15 and 75°C)

Sensor Construction

Stainless steel probe

Sensor Lead

A99BA

Wire Insulation A99BB

Shielded PVC cable PVC cable

A99BC

High temperature silicon cable

Lead Wire Gauge

22 AWG

Maximum Allowable Bulb Temperature

257°F (125°C)

Ambient Operating Conditions

A99BA A99BB
A99BC

-40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C); 0 to 100% RH, condensing
-40 to 248°F (-40 to 120°C); 0 to 100% RH, condensing

Ambient Storage Conditions

A99BA A99BB
A99BC

40 to 221°F (-40 to 105°C); 0 to 100% RH, condensing
-40 to 266°F (-40 to 130°C); 0 to 100% RH, condensing

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-79

Temperature Control Sensors and Accessories
Bulb Wells

Code No. LIT-1922135

FIG:Wel_2

FIG:Wel_3

FIG:FTG13A_600R

Description
Bulb Wells are used in conjunction with Remote Bulb Temperature Controls where bulb insertion into a vessel or container to sense temperature is required. These wells are used with TE-6000 and TE-6300 Series Sensors.
A variety of shapes, sizes, and materials are available for a wide range of applications. Refer to the appropriate temperature control for the exact bulb well required.

Repair Information
If the Bulb Wells fail to operate within thier specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement Bulb Well, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Accessories
The Code No. FTG13A-600R Packing Nut Assembly is used in applications where the temperature does not fall below -35°F (-37°C). The maximum liquid pressure limit is 150 psig (1,034 kPa). Use with Style 1, 3/8 in. diameter bulb for direct immersion application. A19s require models with support tube; A70s and A72s do not need support tubes.

WEL Series Bulb Wells

Packing Nut

Interlocking Retainer ½ in. N.P.T. Washers Adaptor

FIG:Wel_1

WEL Series Bulb Well

Style 1 Bulb Support Tube
FTG13A-600R

Selection Charts

WEL Series Bulb Wells

Product Code See

Number

Figure

Dimension, in.

A

B

Pipe Thread, in. Material

C Inside Outside Connector Tube

D

E

Maximum Maximum Type of Plating

Temp °F Pressure Solder

psig

Joint

WEL11A-601R1

2

2-3/8 2-5/16 .299



1/2 Brass

Copper 250

300

Soft



WZ-1000-22

1

5-1/4

1-1/4 .500 1/2

1/2 Stainless Stainless 300

400

steel

steel





WZ-1000-4

1

5-1/4

1-1/4 .500 1/2

1/2 Stainless Stainless 600

400

steel

steel





WZ-1000-52

2

2-3/8 2-5/16 .299



1/2 Malleable Brass

250

300





WEL14A-601R 3

3

7-9/16 1-13/16 .430



1/2 Brass

Copper 250

300

Silver Brite-Dip

WEL14A-602R 3

3

4-15/16 1-13/16 .430



1/2 Brass

Copper 250

300

Silver Brite-Dip

WEL14A-603R 3

3

5-13/16 1 13/16 .430



1/2 Brass

Copper 250

300

Silver Brite-Dip

WEL16A-600R1

2

2-3/8 1-5/16 .299



1/2 Brass

Copper 250

300

Soft



WEL16A-601R

2

2-13/16 1-13/16 .375



1/2 Brass

Copper 250

300

Soft



WEL17A-600R3

1

10-7/16 3/4

.763 1/2

3/4 Malleable Copper 250

250

Silver Tin

WEL17A-601R3

1

8-11/16 3/4

.763 1/2

3/4 Malleable Copper 250

250

Silver Tin

WEL17A-602R3

1

10-7/16 3/4

.753 1/2

3/4 Malleable Steel

250

540

Silver Tin

WEL17A-604R3

1

14-13/32 3/4

.763 1/2

3/4 Malleable Copper 250

250

Silver Tin

WEL18A-600R3

1

3-1/2

3/4

.773 1/2

3/4 Malleable Steel

250

150

Silver Tin

WEL18A-602R3

1

3-1/2

3/4

.773 1/2

3/4 Malleable Brass

250

150

Silver Tin

1. With phenolic bushing 0.093 in. slot 2. Includes thermal compound 3. For 11/16 in. diameter style 4 bulbs. Style 1 can be used, but is not fastened into well

T-800 Wells Product Code Description Number

T-800-1605

Brass well, 6-1/2 inch

T-800-1606

Stainless steel well, 5-1/4 inch

T-800-1618

Brass well, 9-1/2 inch

T-800-1620

Brass well, 9-1/2 inch

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-80

Temperature Control Sensors and Accessories
G Series Thermostat and Humidistat Guards

Code No. LIT-1922145

GRD10-1R Wire Guard

GRD10A-601 Cast Aluminum Guard

GRD10A-608 Large Clear Plastic Guard

GRD10A-609 Rectangular Clear Plastic
Guard

Description
The G Series Guards protect thermostats and humidistats from damage, vandalism, tampering, and unauthorized adjustment. They are available in plastic, cast aluminum, or wire construction.

Features
· clear plastic guards have tumbler-type key locks
· GRD10A-608 and -609 include a mounting ring for mounting to a wall or flat surface
· plastic baseplate and plastic mounting ring available
· the baseplate mounts to a flat surface or to a single or double outlet box
· the mounting ring permits mounting over a thermostat or humidistat already installed

Applications
Ideal for locations where locked protection is required, such as schools, warehouses, churches, hospitals, or offices.

Selection Chart

Product Code Number

Description

GRD10-1R GRD10A-600 GRD10A-601 GRD10A-606 GRD10A-608 GRD10A-609

Wire guard only Wire guard and baseplate Aluminum guard and baseplate Plastic guard with baseplate Plastic guard with baseplate, mounting ring Plastic guard with baseplate, mounting ring

Repair Parts Replacement key KEY12A-600 (set of two) is available.

Thermostat or Humidistat Series Number

T22

T25

T26

T28

T91

No Switches



--



--





--



--





--











--

























The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-81

Temperature Control Sensors and Accessories
G Series Thermostat and Humidistat Guards (Continued)

grd10a_dm.eps

3-5/8 (92)
4-1/5 (106)

3-3/8 (86)
6-1/5 (157)
6-3/4 (171)
1-2/5 (36)
(64) 2-2/3 (68)

7-2/3 (195)

3-2/3 (94)
6-3/8 (162)

(127)

2-7/8 (73)

4-3/4 (121)

1-5/8 (41)

3-1/3 (84)

4-3/4 (121)

1-5/8 (41)

6-3/4 (171)

5-4/5 (148)

4-1/5 (106)

2-2/3 (68)

5-1/3 (135)

4-2/3 (119)

6-5/9 (167)

3-1/3 (84)

1-5/8 (41)

G Series Dimensions, in. (mm)

grd10a_dm2.eps

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-82

Temperature Control Sensors and Accessories
T22, T25, T26, T28, T46, and T91 Accessories

Code No. LIT-1922285

Description
Replacement Knob and Cover Kits
Replacement Knob Kit numbers KNB17A-600R, KNB20A-600R, and KNB26A-600R are designed as direct replacements for original equipment knobs.
Faceplates
Faceplates are available with metal or plastic covers.

Thermostat Trim Plates
Trim plate PLT231-1R is for mounting two wall thermostats such as T22, T25, T26, T58, T91 or one thermostat and one humidistat on a three-gang electrical box. The PLT61A-600 is a similar three-gang plate but with one cutout and a 3/8 in. hole for mounting accessory switches.
These plates are finished in tawny silver to complement the design of the thermostat and humidistat.

PLT61A-600 Faceplate

Selection Charts

Replacement Knob and Cover Kits Product Code Number Description

KNB17A-600R

Includes two plastic knobs

KNB20A-600R

Includes one plastic knob

KNB26A-600R

Includes one plastic knob with trim disc

Replacement Knob For
T91, T22, T25, and T26 with metal knob and metal cover T26 and W43 with plastic knob and metal cover T26, T46, and W43 with plastic cover

Faceplates

Product Code Mounting

Number

Position

PLT213-6R

Vertical

PLT333-1R PLT333-2R PLT333-3R PLT333-4R PLT333-5R PLT333-12R

Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Vertical

Type of Adjustment

Cutout for Thermometer

Use With

Faceplates for T22, T25, T26, T80, T91, and W43 with Metal Cover

Concealed

No

T26, T91BA, W43 with metal cover

Faceplates for T26, W43 AND W45 with Plastic Cover

Knob

Yes

T26, T46

Knob

Yes

T26

Concealed

Yes

T26, T46

Concealed

Yes

T26

Knob

Yes

T26, T46

Concealed

No

T26, T46, and W43

Temperature Scale
None
Fahrenheit Fahrenheit Fahrenheit Fahrenheit Celsius None

Trim Plates Product Code Number
PLT231-1R

Description
Tawny silver trim plate

Replacement Trim Plate For
T22, T25, T26, T28, T58, T91, W42, W43

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-83

Temperature Control Sensors and Accessories
T91 Series Room Temperature Sensor

Code No. LIT-1922280

Description
The T91 Series Temperature Sensor is a solid state thermistor sensor detects temperature changes in a room or similar space.
Series T91 Sensors may be used directly with Series M100Q Motor Actuators.
Refer to the T91 Thermistor Room Temperature Sensor Product Bulletin (LIT-125675) for important product application information.
Applications
Use for room or space temperature sensing to position sequencers or actuators for heating and/or cooling systems.

Features
· highly sensitive thermistor sensing element
· fast response · integral Fan and System switch options · vertical or horizontal mounting · three types of adjusters: external knob,
concealed knob, or provisions for remote setpoint · easy to install and wire · separable mounting plate with screws saves installation time
Repair Information
If the T91 Series Room Temperature Sensor fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement sensor, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

T91 Series Room Temperature Sensor

Selection Chart

Product Code Number1

Range °F (°C)

T91BAA-1C

40/90 (5/32)

T91BBA-1C

40/90 (5/32)

T91BCA-1C

40/90 (5/32)

1. Supplied with vertical faceplate installed.

Thermometer
No No Yes

Setpoint Adjustment
Remote Concealed Knob

Switches Fan
  

System
  

Technical Specifications
Ambient Temperature Baseplate Cover
Electrical Rating for Switches Wiring Connections

T91 Series Room Temperature Sensor
-40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C) 0.050 in. (1 mm) cold rolled steel with dichromate dip finish 0.025 in. (1 mm) cold rolled steel. Baked on tawny silver finish. Faceplate is aluminum with dark brown and light brown finish. Letters and markings are bright aluminum surface. 5 A at 24 VAC 6 in. No. 18 color coded wire leads

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-84

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls
P10 Series Low Pressure Control

Code No. LIT-1927175

Description
The P10 Series Pressure Controls open or close electrical circuits from a change in operating air pressure. R to Y terminals make (cut-in) on pressure rise
Refer to the P10 Series Low Range Pressure Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-125400) for important product application information.
.

Features
· visible calibrated adjustable range scale · snap-acting switch in a dust protected
enclosure · easily accessible wiring terminals
Applications
· pneumatic systems · control of pumps or small air compressors

P10 Series Y

R

B

B

Y

R

Action on Increase of Pressure
P10 Series Action Diagram

p10.eps

Accessories
· universal mounting bracket No. BKT16A-600 as well as a barbed fitting supplied as standard
· model P10FC-4 has a jumper installed on the common terminals
Repair Information
If the P10 Series Low Pressure Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

P10BC-7 with Bracket No. BKT16A-600R

Selection Chart

Product No. of Contact

Code

Stages Action

Number

Range psi (kPa)

Factory Setting psig (kPa)

Switch Diff psi (kPa)

P10BC-7C 1

Single-Pole, 3 to 20 (21 to 138) 12 (R to Y Cut-in)

2

Double-Throw

(SPDT)

P10BG-3C 1

SPDT

2 to 20 (15 to 138) 12 (R to Y Cut-in)

0.2

P10BJ-1C 1

SPDT

3 to 20 (21 to 138) 12 (R to Y Cut-in)

2

P10FC-4C 2

SPDT

3 to 20 (21 to 138) (R-Y Cutout) Low Stage (R-Y Cut-in) High Stage Low Stage High Stage

8 (55)

12 (82)

2 (14)

2 (14)

P10PA-11C 3

SPST

3 to 20 (21 to 138) Stage One Open High 6 (41)

Stages Two & Three Open High 18 (120)

Stage One Stages Two

3 (21)

& Three

0.4 (3)

Pressure Connector
Barbed Fitting
1/8 in. Internal NPSF 1/8 in. Internal NPSF 1/8 in. Barbed Fitting
1/8 in. Barbed Fitting

Technical Specifications

· model P10BJ-1 is rated for 24 A non-inductive when used as a single-pole, single-throw (SPST) (R-Y). (See Electrical Ratings chart below.)
· maximum allowable pressure is 150 psig (1,034 kPa) · maximum ambient temperature is 140°F (60°C)

Electrical Ratings (Part 1 of 2)

Motor Ratings VAC

120 208 240 277 600

P10BC-7

AC Full Load A

16.0 9.2

8.0

7.0



AC Locked Rotor A

96.0 55.2 48.0 42.0 

Non-Inductive A

16.0 9.2

8.0

7.2



Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

P10BG-3

AC Full Load A

6.0

3.4

3.0





AC Locked Rotor A

36.0 20.4 18.0





Non-Inductive A

6.0

3.4

3.0

2.6



Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

P10BJ-1

AC Full Load A

16.0 9.2

8.0

7



Electrical Ratings (Part 2 of 2)

Motor Ratings VAC

120 208 240 277 600

AC Locked Rotor A

96.0 55.2 48.0 42



Non-Inductive Double Throw

A

Single Throw

16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

P10FC-4

AC Full Load A

16.0 9.2

8.0

7.0



AC Locked Rotor A

96.0 55.2 48.0 42.0 

Non-Inductive A

16.0 9.2

8.0

7.2



Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC On two- and three-stage models, maximum connected load shall not exceed 2,000 VA

P10PA-11

AC Full Load A

6.0

3.4

3.0





AC Locked Rotor A

36.0 20.4 18.0





Non-Inductive A

6.0

3.4

3.0





Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC On two- and three- stage models, maximum connected load shall not exceed 2,000 VA

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-85

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls

Code No. LIT-1927180

P20 Series Air Conditioning/Pressure Cutout Control

Description
The P20 Series are field replacement high and low pressure controls for non-corrosive refrigerants. They include a dust-tight contact unit with quick connect connectors, and a 36 in. or 42 in. capillary with 1/4 in. sweat section. The setpoint is screwdriver adjustable.
Refer to the P20, P21 Series Air Conditioning Limit Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-125415) for important product application information.

Features
· accurate repeatability · compact size · trip-free manual reset
Applications
· air conditioning high/low pressure control · refrigeration high/low pressure control · head pressure control
Repair Information
If the P20 Series Air Conditioning/Pressure Cutout Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

SPST Construction

SPDT Construction

Red
Blue (Open High)
Yellow (Open Low)

Red
Yellow (Open Low)
Blue (Open High)

Low Range

High Ranges

Seal

White: Open Low Control Red: Open High Control

Control action is identified by colored sealing compound or terminal markings on switch.

p20spst.eps

P20DB-1 Air Conditioning/ Pressure Cutout Control

Selection Chart

Product Code Number1

Pressure Connections

Switch Action

Range psi (kPa)

Differential psi (kPa)

Factory Setting, psig (kPa)

Opens

Closes

P20BB-1C2 36 in. capillary 1/4 in. sweat tube
P20DB-1C3

Open on fall Open on rise

7 to 150 (48 to 1,034) 100 to 425 (690 to 2,930)

Manual reset Manual reset

40 (276) 400 (2,758)

Lockout Lockout

P20GB-1C

42 in. capillary 1/4 in. sweat tube

Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT) Open on rise

100 to 425 (690 to 2,930)

Manual reset

360 (2,482)

Lockout

P20EB-1C4 36 in. capillary

SPDT

1/4 in. sweat tube

7 to 150 (48 to 1,034)

30 (172) fixed 40 (276)

70 (448)

P20EB-18C 42 in. capillary

SPDT

1/4 in. sweat tube

7 to 150 (48 to 1,034)

22 (152) fixed 15 (103)

37 (255)

P20EB-2C5 36 in. capillary

SPDT

1/4 in. sweat tube

100 to 425 (690 to 2,930) 75 (483) fixed 400 (2,758)

324 (2,275)

1. Mounting bracket supplied on all models. 2. Replaces Ranco® G20-4412; Robertshaw® 3126-216, 3160-212 3. Replaces Ranco G23-5253; Robertshaw 3127-220, 3161-205; Honeywell® P430X-1250, 1268, 1292, 1300 4. Replaces Ranco G20-4050; Robertshaw 3126-116, 3160-012, 3160-014; Honeywell P431X-1092, 1100 5. Replaces Ranco G23-5052; Robertshaw 3127-140, 3127-414, 3161-009; Honeywell P430X, 1235, 1243, 1276, 1284

Max. Bellows Max.

Pressure

Temp.

psig (kPa)

250 (1,724)

140°F

450 (3,103)

450 (3,103)

250 (1,724) 250 (1,724) 450 (3,103)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-86

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls
P20 Series Air Conditioning/Pressure Cutout Control

Accessories
Product Code Number
210-604R

Description
Black phenolic resin spring clip snap-on insulated terminal cover

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC

120

208

240

277

AC Full Load A

16.0

9.2

8.0

7.0

AC Locked Rotor A

96.0

55.2

48.0

42.0

SPDT

16.0

16.0

16.0



Pilot Duty

125 VA at 24 VAC, 720 VA at 120 to 277 VAC

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-87

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls

Code No. LIT-1927190

P29 Series Low Pressure Control with Time Delay

Description
P29NC is a low pressure control with time delay and lockout, which requires manual reset. A drop in pressure energizes the time delay relay and opens a contact after the time delay, shutting down the equipment. The time delay prevents nuisance shutdowns due to momentary fluctuations in system pressures.
Refer to the P29 Series Low Pressure Cutout Control with Time Delay Relay Product Bulletin (LIT-125425) for important product application information.

Applications
· chiller low temperature · industrial equipment, oil pressure
lubrication · low suction pressure
Technical Specifications
· pilot duty rating of 750 VA, 120/240 VAC · external step down transformer for 440 and
550 VAC applications must be of sufficient capacity to supply 15 VA at 120 VAC or 30 VA at 240 VAC for time delay

Features
· direct reading scale indication · dust-protected snap action switch · trip-free manual reset · replacement timing relays available

Accessories
· universal mounting bracket (271-51) · replacement timing relays (Refer to
Replacement Timing Relays for P28 and P29 Lube Oil Controls Catalog Page [LIT-1927395].)

P29 Series Low Pressure Control
Repair Information
If the P29 Series Low Pressure Control with Time Delay fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart

Product Code Switch

Number

Action

Pressure Range

P29NC-2C P29NC-3C

Single-Pole, 20 in. Hg Vacuum

Single-Throw to 100 psig

(SPST)

(-68 to 690 kPa)

P29NC-49C

P29NC-53C

P29NF-1C1

1. With alarm contacts

Differential psi (kPa)
2.2 ±1.5 (15.2 ±10.3)

Max Overpressure psig (kPa)
325 (2,241)

Max Working Pressure Pressure

psig (kPa)

Connection

250 (1,723)

1/4 in. external flare fitting

36 in. copper capillary tube with 1/4 in. flare nut

Time Delay Setting
60 seconds (factory set)
120 seconds 90 seconds 120 seconds

Example: Setpoint at 10 psig. On a rise in pressure, the timing circuit opens at 10 psig and time out ends. On a fall in pressure, the timing circuit energizes at 6 to 9 psig and the time out begins. If the pressure fails to reach 10 psig within the 60 second time delay, the main contacts open, shutting down the controlled equipment.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-88

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls
P47 Series Steam Pressure Limit Control

Code No. LIT-1927205

Description
The P47 Controls are available with single-pole, single-throw (SPST), double-pole, single-throw (DPST), or four-wire, two-circuit contacts for line voltage or low voltage. The pressure connector is 1/4 in. external NPT (0 to 15 psi only) or 1/4 in. internal NPT (for all other ranges).
Refer to the P47 Series Steam Pressure Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-125450) for important product application information.
Features
· long-life contact structure with high contact force
· easy-to-adjust single sight set scales show both cut-in and cut-out settings

Applications
P47 steam pressure controls are designed for high limit or operating control applications. A typical use is as a limit control on steam heating systems. Models that close on a pressure increase are used on steam unit heaters to avoid blower operation when steam pressure is below the point required for adequate heating. The P47 can be used with steam, water, air, or noncombustible gases that do not harm iron or copper.
Accessories
The Part No. TBG16A-600 Siphon is supplied with all controls except models with 0 to 15 psi range.

Selection Chart

Product Code Number

Switch Action

Range psi (kPa)

Diff psi (kPa) Min. Max.

Max. Over-pressure psig (kPa)

Contacts Open On Rise  Automatic Reset

P47AA-1C SPST

0 to 15 (0 to 103)

2 (14) 8 (55) 50 (345)

P47AA-4C

20 in. Hg to 50 (-68 to 345) 5 (34) 35 (241) 180 (1,241)

P47AA-13C

0 to 150 (0 to 1,034)

12 (83) 50 (345) 325 (2,241)

Contacts Close On Rise  Automatic Reset

P47BA-1C SPST

0 to 15 (0 to 103)

2 (14) 8 (55) 50 (345)

P47BA-6C

0 to 150 (0 to 1,034)

12 (83) 50 (345) 325 (2,241)

Four-Wire, Two Circuit1  Automatic Reset

P47GA-9C1 Main open high; 0 to 150 (0 to 1,034) Auxiliary open low

12 (83) 50 (345) 325 (2,241)

P47AB-3C SPST

50 to 240 (345 to 1,655)

Manual reset

300 (2,069)

P47EA-1C SPDT

50 to 240 (345 to 1,655)

10 (69) Fixed

300 (2,069)

1. The main contacts (Line-M2) open on rise, as the auxiliary contacts (Line-M1) close.

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings for P47AA, P47AB, and P47BA

Motor Ratings VAC

120

208

240

277

AC Full Load A

16.0

9.2

8.0



AC Locked Rotor A

96.0

55.2

48.0



AC Non-Inductive A

16.0

16.0

16.0

16.0

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA, 120 to 300 VDC

Electrical Ratings for P47EA

Motor Ratings VAC

120

208

240

277

AC Full Load A

16.0

9.2

8.0



AC Locked Rotor A

96.0

55.2

48.0



AC Non-Inductive A

16.0

10.0

10.0

10.0

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 120 to 227 VAC

Electrical Ratings for P47GA Pole Number

Line-M2 (Main)

Line-M1 (Auxiliary)

Motor Ratings VAC

120 208 240 277 120 208 240 277

AC Full Load A

16.0 9.2

8.0



6.0

3.3

3.0



AC Locked Rotor A

96.0 55.2 48.0



36.0 19.8 18.0



AC Non-Inductive A

16.0 9.2

8.0

7.2

6.0

6.0

6.0

6.0

Pilot Duty: Both Poles

125 VA, 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA, 120 to 300 VDC

P47AA-1 Steam Pressure Limit Control
Repair Information
If the P47 Series Steam Pressure Limit Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.
P47AA
Opens on Pressure Rise P47BA
Closes on Pressure Rise SPST
P47GA
Four-Wire, Two-Circuit Action on Pressure Rise

p47ga_2.eps

p47ga_1.eps

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-89

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls
P67 Series Low Pressure Control

Code No. LIT-1927215

Description

Features

P67 pressure controls are used to close or open an electrical circuit, based on a predetermined air pressure signal. The operating point of the control and the differential, are easy to adjust with the externally located adjustment screws on the top of the control enclosure. The pressure controls incorporate a non-metallic diaphragm that is positioned by air pressure changes. The diaphragm, in turn, actuates a heavy-duty electrical contact block using a lever mechanism.

· long-life contact structure, high contact force
· easy-to-adjust settings: single sight-set scales show both cut-in and cut-out settings
Applications
Typical applications include the control of air compressors, fans, pilot lights, resistance heating elements, and other devices.

Refer to the P67 Series Low Range Pressure Control Product Bulletin (LIT-121445) for important product application information.

Selection Chart

Product Control Code Action Number

Scale Temp. Range Range psi1 (kPa)

Diff.

Maximum Connector

psi (kPa) Over-

pressure

psig (kPa)

P67AA-1C Double-Pole, Single-Throw

3 to 30 32 to

1-1/2-20 50 (345)

(DPST) opens on pressure drop (21 to 140°F (10 to 138)

P67CA-1C DPST opens on pressure rise 207) 0 to 60°C Adjustable

Angle Barbed Fitting

P67EA-5C L-M2 contacts connect on pressure rise and simultaneously the L-M1 contacts break

1/8 in. External NPT

1. Range is minimum cut-out to maximum cut-in on Open Low controls. It is minimum cut-in to maximum cut-out on Open High controls.

P67 Series Low Pressure Control with 271-350 Mounting Bracket
Repair Information
If the P67 Series Low Pressure Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings for P67AA and P67CA

Motor Ratings VAC

1 Phase

2 - 3 Phase

120 208 240 277 208 240

AC Full Load A

12.0 12.0 12.0

 12.0 12.0

AC Locked Rotor A

72.0 72.0 72.0

 72.0 72.0

AC Non-Inductive A

12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 



DC Non-Inductive A

3.0

0.5

0.5







Pilot Duty

125 VA, 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA, 120 to 300 VDC

Electrical Ratings for P67EA and P67FA

Pole Number

LINE-M2 (Main)

LINE-M1 (Auxiliary)

Motor Rating VAC

120 208 240 277 120 208 240 277

AC Full Load A

16.0 9.2 8.0  6.0 3.3 3.0 

AC Locked Rotor A 96.0 55.2 48.0  36.0 19.8 18.0 

AC Non-Inductive 16.0 9.2 8.0 7.2 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 A

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA, 120 to 300 VDC

Line

Line

M2

Line

M1

Line

Load

p67wir.eps p67dim.eps

Action on Pressure Increase

P67 Wiring Diagram (no alarm)

P67 Dimensions, in. (mm)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-90

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls

Code No. LIT-1927220

P70, P72 Approximate Low Pressure Settings for Typical Applications

Vacuum - in. Hg Application

Approximate Temperature
°F

Cut-Out

Ice Cube Maker - Dry Type Coil

-11

Sweet Water Bath - Soda

20

Fountain

Beer, Water, Milk Cooler, Wet

17

Type

Ice Cream Trucks, Hardening

-16

Rooms

Eutectic Plates, Ice Cream Truck

-21

Walk In, Defrost Cycle

9

Reach In, Defrost Cycle

20

Vegetable Display, Defrost Cycle

7

Vegetable Display Case - Open

12

Type

Beverage Cooler, Blower Dry

11

Type

Retail Florist - Blower Coil

29

Meat Display Case - Defrost

19

Cycle

Meat Display Case - Open Type

4

Dairy Case - Open Type

2

Frozen Food - Open Type

-32

1. Conversion factor: 1 psig = 6.9 kPa

Cut-In 14 31
31
10
-11 37 39 38 45
37
45 38
28 38 -9

R-12

Cut-Out Cut-In

4

17

21

29

19

29

2

15

1

4

14

34

19

36

13

35

16

42

15

34

28

42

17

35

11

27

10

35

7

5

R-22

Cut-Out Cut-In

16

37

43

56

Pressure - psig1

Refrigerant

R-502

Cut-Out Cut-In

22

45

52

66

40

56

48

66

13

34

18

41

11

16

16

22

32

64

40

75

40

68

48

78

30

66

38

77

35

77

44

89

34

64

42

75

55

77

65

89

37

66

45

77

27

53

35

63

26

66

33

77

4

17

8

24

R-717

Cut-Out Cut-In





33

45

R-134A

Cut-Out Cut-In

2

15

18

26





16

26

5

24

0

13

4

8

1

2

23

55

12

32

30

57

16

36





10

34





14

40

24

55

12

32

44

67

26

40





15

34





8

25





16

34





10

3

Note: These settings represent approximate starting values. Actual values may vary widely, depending on application-specific guidelines.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-91

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls

Code No. LIT-1900170

P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for Low Pressure Applications

Description
The P70, P72, and P170 Controls for low pressure applications are designed primarily for low pressure cut-out control, pump-down control, and capacity control on commercial refrigeration and air conditioning applications.
These controls are available in several pressure ranges and are compatible with most common refrigerants. They may also be used on other non-corrosive fluid applications. Ammonia-compatible models are also available.
Controls also are available in several different electrical ratings and switch configurations. The P72 models provide direct control of 208 to 240 volt single-phase motors up to 3 horsepower, and 208 to 220 volt three-phase motors up to 5 horsepower.
Refer to the P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for Low Pressure Applications Product Bulletin (Part No. 24-7664-2608) for important product application information.
Features
· all-steel case and cover built to provide long lasting, rugged protection for internal components
· sight-set calibrated pressure adjustment displays a visible pressure scale, fully adjustable through the range without removing the cover (on NEMA 1 enclosure models)

· MICRO-SETTM differential option allows for precise control on critical low pressure applications
· manual reset lockout option provides trip-free low pressure lockout that cannot be overridden or reset until pressure returns to specified level
· limited knob adjustment option restricts control adjustment ranges and deters tampering and over-adjustment
Applications
NEMA 1 enclosures are standard on most models.
· P70A and P170A models with single-pole, single-throw (SPST) Open Low switch action are the most popular models, and are typically used for low pressure cut-out and pump-down control.
· P70 and P170 models are also available with SPST Open High switch action, and are typically used for capacity control. Models with single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) or four-wire, two-circuit switch action allow users to install alarm devices or other control circuits.
· P72 models have a double-pole, single-throw (DPST) switch with load-carrying contacts that can provide direct control of 208 to 240 V single-phase motors up to 3 horsepower, and 208 to 220 V 3-phase motors up to 5 horsepower. See the DPST Electrical Ratings (P72A, B, C, and D Models) that follow.

P70AB-12 MICRO-SET Low Pressure Control
Repair Information
If the P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for Low Pressure Applications fail to operate within their specifications, replace the units. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-92

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls

P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for Low Pressure Applications (Continued)

Selection Chart for Standard P70, P72, and P170 Controls for Low Pressure Applications

Product Code Number

Switch Action

Range psi (kPa)

Differential psi (kPa)

Pressure Connection

Max.

Max. Working Limited Knob

Overpressure Pressure

Adjustment

MICRO-SET Controls (For Non-Corrosive Refrigerants)

P70AB-12C SPST open low P170AB-12C

12 in. Hg to 80 Minimum 5 (34) 36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut 525 psig

(-41 to 551) Maximum 35 (241) 1/4 in. external flare connector

(3,617 kPa)

80 psig (551 kPa)

Supplied, but not assembled

P70EA-14C SPDT P170EA-14C 1 to 3 open low
1 to 2 close low

36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut 1/4 in. external flare connector

None

All-Range Controls (For Non-Corrosive Refrigerants)

P70AB-1C P70AB-2C P70BA-1C P70BA-10C

SPST open low

20 in. Hg to 100 (-68 to 690)

Minimum 7 (48) 1/4 in. external flare connector 325 psig Maximum 50 (345) 36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut (2,239 kPa)

Manual reset lockout

1/4 in. external flare connector

100 psig (690 kPa)

Supplied, but not assembled
None

P70EA-10C SPDT 1 to 3 open low 1 to 2 close low

5 (34) fixed

P72AA-1C P72AB-1C P170AB-2C

DPST open low SPST open low

Minimum 7 (48) 36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut Maximum 50 (345)
1/4 in. external flare connector

Mounted on differential screw

P70CA-1C SPST open high

36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut

None

P170CA-1C

1/4 in. external flare connector

All-Range Controls (Ammonia-Compatible)

P70AA-5C P70CA-4C P70GA-11C P70HA-3C

SPST open low
SPST open high
Four-wire, Two-circuit Line M1 close low Line M2 open low

20 in. Hg to 100 (-68 to 690)

Minimum 7 (48) 1/4 in. SS Internal NPT Maximum 50 (345)
Manual reset lockout

325 psig (2,239 kPa)

100 psig (690 kPa)

None

Note: To order models not listed in the selection chart, please contact Johnson Controls/PENN® Refrigeration Application Engineering at 1-800-275-5676.

Technical Specifications

Single Pressure Controls Switch Action, Low Event, High Event, and Models

Switch and Action

Low Event

High Event

SPST Open Low

Cut-Out (Opens Line to M1)

Cut-In (Closes Line to M1)

SPST Open High

Cut-In (Closes Line to M1)

Cut-Out (Opens Line to M1)

SPDT

Opens 1 to 2 and closes 1 to 3

Closes 1 to 2 and Opens 1 to 3

Four-Wire, Two-Circuits, 1 N.O., 1 Cut-Out

Cut-In

N.C. Open Low

(Opens M2 to Line and Closes M1 to Line) (Closes M2 to Line and Opens M1 to Line)

Four-Wire, Two-Circuits, 1 N.O., 1 Cut-In

Cut-Out

N.C. Open High

(Closes M2 to Line and Opens M1 to Line) (Opens M2 to Line and Closes M1 to Line)

DPST Open Low

Cut-Out (Opens M1 to Line and M2 to Line)

Cut-In (Closes M1 to Line and M2 to Line)

DPST Open High

Cut-In (Closes M1 to Line and M2 to Line)

Cut-Out (Opens M1 to Line and M2 to Line)

Models
P70A, P70B, P170A P70C, P70D, P170C, P170D P70E, P70F P70G, P70H P70J, P70K, P170K P72A, P72B P72C, P72D

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-93

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls
P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for Low Pressure Applications (Continued)

L1 L2
Line

Load M1
Open-Low switch action: opens on pressure drop.
(A and B Models)

L1 L2
Load

M1

p7s_wir_spst.eps

Line

Open-High switch action: opens on pressure rise.
(C and D Models)

Typical Wiring for SPST Open Low Switch and Open High Switch (P70A, B, C, D, and P170A, C, D, Models)

L1 L2

Alarm 2

Load

p7s_wir_spdt.eps

1

3

1 to 3 opens, and 1 to 2 closes on pressure rise.
Typical Wiring for SPDT Switch (P70E, F Models)

L1 L2
Alarm

M1 Line

Line

M2

Alarm Circuit Power
Load

p7s_wir-4-2.eps

Main circuit (Line to M2) opens and auxiliary circuit (Line to M1) closes on pressure rise.

Typical Wiring for Four-Wire Two-Circuit Switch (P70G and H Models)

L1 L2 L3*

M2 Line
M1 Line

Load

p7s_wir_dpst.eps

Line to M1 and Line to M2 open on pressure drop. *(L3 is third supply line in three-phase applications.)
Typical Wiring for DPST Switch (P72A and B Models)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-94

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls

P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for Low Pressure Applications (Continued)

Technical Specifications (Continued)

2-15/16 (74)
3-1/4 (83)

Two Mounting Holes 10-32 UNF-2B Thread

3-1/4 (83)

1-11/16 (43)

5/16 (8)

5/16 (9) 5/16 (8)
1 (25)
1-1/8 (29)

13/16 (20)

1-3/4 (44)

3/16 Diameter (5)

Capillary or Connector as Specified
3/16 (5)

3/16 Diameter (5) Mounting Hole

1-7/8 (48)

3/8

X

3/16 (5)

Diameter

p70_low_NEMA1_dims.eps

15/16 (24)

1-1/4 (32)

1-5/16

(34) 3-1/16

1/16

(77) 4

7/8 (22)

or

1-1/8 (28)

(1/2 in. or 3/4 in. Trade Size) Conduit Hole

Dimensions for Low Pressure Controls with NEMA 1 Enclosure, in. (mm)*

SPST Electrical Ratings (P70A, B, C, and D, and P170A, C, and D Models)
Single-Phase Ratings

Standard

Hermetic Compressor

120 208 240 208/240

VAC VAC VAC

VAC

Motor Horsepower

2

3

3

--

Motor Full-Load A

24 18.7 17

20

Motor Locked-Rotor A

144 112.2 102

120

Non-Inductive A

22 22 22

--

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 120 to 600 VA; 57.5 VA, 120 to 300 VDC

SPDT Electrical Ratings 1hp Switch (P70E Models) Standard Single-Phase Ratings

120 208 240 VAC VAC VAC

277 VAC1

Motor Full Load A

16.0 9.2 8.0

7.0

Motor Locked Rotor A 96.0 55.2 48.0

42.0

Non-Inductive A

16.0 9.2 8.0

-

Pilot Duty

125 VA at 120 to 600 VAC

125 VA at 24 to 600 VAC

1. Rating for P70EC models only

5/8 (16)

4-1/16

(103)

(79)

5/8 (16)

SPDT Electrical Ratings 1/4 hp Switch (P70F Models) Standard Single-Phase Ratings

120 VAC 208 VAC 240 VAC

Motor Full Load A

6.0

3.3

3.0

Motor Locked Rotor A

36.0

19.8

18.0

Non-Inductive A

6.0

6.0

6.0

Pilot Duty

125 VA at 24 to 240 VAC

4-1/16

7/16

(103)

(11)

2-11/16

(68)

1/2

3/8 (10)

3/4-NPSM Threaded Rigid Conduit

(13)

(70)

2-15/16

3/16

Connector

(74)

(5)

(25)

Four Mounting Holes 5/16 Diameter (8)

1-1/4 (32)

1-9/16

1-3/4

(44)

1/2

(13)

Dimensions for Low Pressure Controls with NEMA 3R Enclosure, in. (mm)*

* These dimensions are nominal and are subject to accepted
manufacturing tolerances and application variables.

p70_low_NEMA3R_dims.eps

Four-Wire, Two-Circuit Electrical Ratings (P70G, H, J, and K, and P170K Models)
Standard Single-Phase Ratings

Line-M2 (Main Contacts)

Line-M1 (Auxiliary Contacts)

120 208 240 277 120 208 240 277 VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC

Motor Full Load A

16.0 9.2 8.0 -- 6.0 3.3 3.0 --

Motor Locked Rotor A

96.0 55.2 48.0 -- 36.0 19.8 18.0 --

Non-Inductive A

16.0 9.2 8.0 7.2 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0

Pilot Duty for both sets of contacts

125 VA at 24 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA at 120 to 300 VDC

DPST Electrical Ratings (P72A, B, C, and D Models) Standard Ratings

Hermetic Compressor Ratings

120 VAC,

208 VAC,

240 VAC,

208 VAC,

220 VAC,

208 VAC,

240 VAC,

Single-Phase Single-Phase Single-Phase Three-Phase Three-Phase Single-Phase Single-Phase

Motor Horsepower

2

3

3

5

5

--

--

Motor Full-Load A

24

18.7

17

15.9

15

24

24

Motor Locked-Rotor A

144

112.2

102

95.4

90

144

144

AC Non-Inductive A

24

24

24

24

24

--

--

DC Non-Inductive A

3

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

--

--

Pilot Duty

125 VA at 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA at 120 to 300 VDC

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-95

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls

Code No. LIT-1900171

P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for High Pressure Applications

Description
The P70, P72, and P170 Controls for high pressure applications are designed primarily for high pressure cut-out control, head-pressure control, and condenser fan cycling control on commercial refrigeration and air conditioning applications.
Controls are available in several pressure ranges and are compatible with most common refrigerants. They may also be used on other non-corrosive fluid applications. Ammonia compatible models are also available.
Several different electrical ratings and switch configurations are available. The P72 models provide direct control of 208-240 volt single-phase motors up to 3 horsepower, and 208-220 volt 3-phase motors up to 5 horsepower.
Refer to the P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for High Pressure Applications Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-125454) for important product application information.
Features
· all-steel case and cover provides long lasting, rugged protection for internal components
· sight-set calibrated pressure adjustment displays a visible pressure scale, fully adjustable through the range without removing the cover (on NEMA 1 enclosure models)

· manual reset lockout option provides trip-free lockout that cannot be overridden or reset until pressure returns to specified level
· variety of available pressure connection styles allows greater flexibility when mounting control and adapting pressure connections to field application requirements
Applications
· P70C, P70D P170C and P170D models with single-pole, single-throw (SPST) Open High switch action are the most popular models, and are typically used for high-pressure cutout. The C models are automatic reset. The D models have a manual reset lockout mechanism. Some P70C, P70D P170C and P170D models are UL Listed as refrigeration pressure limiting controls.
· P70A and P170A models are available with SPST Open Low switch action, and typically are used for condenser fan cycling control.
· P70 and P170 models with single-pole, double-throw (SPDT), or four-wire, two-circuit switch action allow users to install alarm devices or other control circuits.

P70CA-3 High Pressure Cutout Control
· P72 models have a double-pole, single-throw (DPST) switch with load-carrying contacts that can provide direct control of 208-240 V single-phase motors up to 3 horsepower, and 208-220 V 3-phase motors up to 5 horsepower. See the DPST Electrical Ratings (P72A, B, C, and D Models) that follow.
NEMA 1 enclosures are standard on most models.
Repair Information
If the P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for High Pressure Applications fail to operate within their specifications, replace the units. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart (Part 1 of 2)

Product Code Switch

Number

Action

Range psi (kPa)

Differential psi (kPa)

Pressure Connection

Max. Working Pressure

Condenser Fan Cycling Controls (for Non-Corrosive Refrigerants)

P70AA-118C P72AA-27C

SPST Open Low DPST Open Low

100 to 400 (690 to 2,758)

Minimum 35 (241) Maximum 200 (1,379) 36 in. Capillary with 1/4 in. Flare Nut

475 psig (3,275 kPa)

P170AA-118C SPST Open Low

1/4 in. External Flare Connector

All Range Controls (for Non-Corrosive Refrigerants)

P70CA-2C1 P70CA-3C1 P70DA-1C1

SPST Open High

50 to 500 (345 to 3,448)

Minimum 60 (414); Maximum 150 (1,034) 1/4 in. External Flare Connector 525 psig

36 in. Capillary

(3,620 kPa)

Manual Reset Lockout

with 1/4 in. Flare Nut

P70KA-1C

Four-wire, Two-circuit Line-M1 Close High Line-M2 Open High

P72CA-2C1

DPST Open-high

Minimum 60 (414); Maximum 150 (1,034)

P72DA-1C1

Manual Reset Lockout

P170CA-3C1 SPST Open High

Minimum 60 (414); Maximum 150 (1,034) 1/4 in. External Flare Connector

P170DA-1C

Manual Reset Lockout

P170KA-1C

Four-wire, Two-circuit Line-M1 Close High Line-M2 Open High

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-96

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls

P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for High Pressure Applications (Continued)

Selection Chart (Part 2 of 2)

Product Code Switch

Number

Action

Range psi (kPa)

Differential psi (kPa)

Pressure Connection

Max. Working Pressure

Models for High Pressure Non-Corrosive Refrigerants2

P70AA-2C P170AA-2C

SPST Open Low

0 to 150 (0 to 1,034)

Minimum 10 (69); Maximum 70 (483)

36 in. Cap. with 1/4 in. Flare Nut 325 psig 1/4 in. External Flare Connector (2,241 kPa)

P70AA-400C P170AA-400C

100 to 470 (689 to 3,241)

Minimum 35 (241); Maximum 200 (1,379) 36 in. Cap. with 1/4 in. Flare Nut 690 psig 1/4 in. External Flare Connector (4,757 kPa)

P70CA-400C1 SPST Open High P170CA-400C1

200 to 610 (1,379 to 4,206)

Minimum 60 (414); Maximum 150 (1,034) 36 in. Cap. with 1/4 in. Flare Nut 1/4 in. External Flare Connector

P70DA-400C1

Manual Reset Lockout

36 in. Cap. with 1/4 in. Flare Nut

P170DA-400C1

1/4 in. External Flare Connector

Ammonia Compatible Models

P70AA-119C SPST Open Low

50 to 300 (345 to 2,068) Minimum 20 (138); Maximum 120 (827)

400 psig (2,758 kPa)

P70CA-5C1 P70DA-2C1 P70KA-7C

SPST Open-High
50 to 500 Four-wire, Two-circuit (345 to 3,448) Line-M1 Close-high Line-M2 Open High

Minimum 60 (414); Maximum 150 (1,034) 1/4 in. SS Internal NPT
Manual Reset Lockout

525 psig (3,620 kPa)

1. UL Listed as refrigeration pressure limiting controls 2. Compatible with R410A refrigerant.

Note: To order models not listed in the selection chart, please contact Johnson Controls/PENN Refrigeration Application Engineering at 1-800-275-5676.

Technical Specifications

Single Pressure Controls Switch Action, Low Event, High Event, and Models

Switch and Action

Low Event

High Event

SPST Open Low

Cut-Out (Opens Line to M1)

Cut-In (Closes Line to M1)

SPST Open High

Cut-In (Closes Line to M1)

Cut-Out (Opens Line to M1)

SPDT
Four-wire, Two-circuits, 1 N.O., 1 N.C. Open Low
Four-wire, Two-circuits, 1 N.O., 1 N.C. Open High
DPST Open Low
DPST Open High

Opens 1 to 2 and closes 1 to 3
Cut-Out (Opens M2 to Line and Closes M1 to Line)
Cut-In (Closes M2 to Line and Opens M1 to Line)
Cut-Out (Opens M1 to Line and M2 to Line)
Cut-In (Closes M1 to Line and M2 to Line)

Closes 1 to 2 and Opens 1 to 3
Cut-In (Closes M2 to Line and Opens M1 to Line)
Cut-Out (Opens M2 to Line and Closes M1 to Line)
Cut-In (Closes M1 to Line and M2 to Line)
Cut-Out (Opens M1 to Line and M2 to Line)

Models
P70A, P70B, P170A P70C, P70D, P170C, P170D P70E, P70F P70G, P70H
P70J, P70K, P170K
P72A, P72B P72C, P72D

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-97

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls

P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for High Pressure Applications (Continued)

L1 L2
Line

Load M1
Open-Low switch action: opens on pressure drop.
(A and B Models)

L1 L2
Load

M1

Line

Open-High switch action: opens on pressure rise.
(C and D Models)

Typical Wiring for SPST (P70A, B, C, D, and P170A, C, D, Models)

p7s_wir_spst.eps

L1 L2
Alarm

M1 Line

Line

M2

Alarm Circuit Power
Load

p7s_wir-4-2.eps

Main circuit (Line to M2) opens and auxiliary circuit (Line to M1) closes on pressure rise.
Typical Wiring for Four-Wire Two-Circuit Switch used for a High Pressure Cutout Application with an Alarm Circuit (P70J, K, and P170K Models)

L1 L2

Alarm 2

Load

p7s_wir_spdt.eps

1

3

1 to 3 opens, and 1 to 2 closes on pressure rise.
Typical Wiring for SPDT Switch (P70E, F Models)

L1 L2 *L3

Line

M2

Line

M1

Load

p7s_wir_dpst.eps

Line to M1, and Line to M2 open on pressure rise. *(L3 is third supply line in 3-phase applications.)
Typical Wiring for DPST Switch (P72C, and D Models)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-98

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls

P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for High Pressure Applications (Continued)

Technical Specifications (Continued)

2-15/16

Two Mounting Holes 10-32 UNF-2B Thread

3-1/4 (83)

5/16 (8)

5/16

(8)

3-1/4 (83)

15/16 (24)
15/16 (24)

3/16 (5)

Diameter

5/16 1-11/16
(43)

1 (25)
1-1/16 (29)

Capillary or Connector as speci?ed
3/16 (5)

3/16 Diameter (5) Mounting Hole

1-7/8 (48)

3/8 (10)

X

3/16 (5)

Diameter

Mounting Hole

p7shi_dim1.eps

2-1/16 (53) 15/16 (24)

1-5/16

(34) 3-1/16

1/16 (2)

(77) 4 101

1-1/4 (33)

7/8 (22)

or

1-1/8 (28)

(1/2 in. or 3/4 in. Trade Size)

Dimensions for High Pressure Controls with NEMA 1 Enclosure, in. (mm)*

SPST Electrical Ratings (P70A, B, C, and D, and P170A, C, and D Models)
Single-Phase Ratings

Standard

Hermetic Compressor

120 208 240 208/240

VAC VAC VAC

VAC

Motor Horsepower

2

3

3

--

Motor Full-Load A

24 18.7 17

24

Motor Locked-Rotor A 144 112.2 102

144

Non-Inductive A

22 22 22

--

Pilot Duty

125 VA at 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA at 120 to 300 VDC

SPDT Electrical Ratings 1hp Switch (P70E Models) Standard Single-Phase Ratings

120 208 240 VAC VAC VAC

277 VAC1

Motor Full Load A

16.0 9.2 8.0

7.0

Motor Locked Rotor A 96.0 55.2 48.0

42.0

Non-Inductive A

16.0 9.2 8.0

-

Pilot Duty

125 VA at 120 to 600 VAC

125 VA at 24 to 600 VAC

1. Rating for P70EC models only

5/8 (16)
4-1/16 (104)
5/8 (16)

3-1/8 (79)

4-1/16

5/8 (15)

(104)2-11/16 (68) 1

3/8 (10)

1/2 (12)

3/4-NPSM

Threaded

Rigid Conduit

2-3/4 (70)
2-15/16 (74)

3/16 (5)

(25)

Connector

Four Mounting Holes

5/16 (8)

Diameter

1-1/4 (31)

1-9/16 (40)

15/16

(24)

1/2

(13)

Dimensions for High Pressure Controls with NEMA 3R Enclosure, in. (mm)*

* These dimensions are nominal and are subject to accepted
manufacturing tolerances and application variables.

p7shi_dim3.eps

SPDT Electrical Ratings1/4 hp Switch (P70F Models) Standard Single-Phase Ratings

120 VAC 208 VAC 240 VAC

Motor Full Load A

6.0

3.3

3.0

Motor Locked Rotor A

36.0

19.8

18.0

Non-Inductive A

6.0

6.0

6.0

Pilot Duty

125 VA at 24 to 240 VAC

Four-wire, Two-circuit Electrical Ratings (P70G, H, J, and K, and P170K Models)
Standard Single-Phase Ratings

Line-M2 (Main Contacts)

Line-M1 (Auxiliary Contacts)

120 208 240 277 120 208 240 277 VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC

Motor Full Load A

16.0 9.2 8.0 -- 6.0 3.3 3.0 --

Motor Locked Rotor A 96.0 55.2 48.0 -- 36.0 19.8 18.0 --

Non-Inductive A

16.0 9.2 8.0 7.2 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0

Pilot Duty for both sets of contacts

125VA at 24 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA at 120 to 300 VDC

DPST Electrical Ratings (P72A, B, C, and D Models) Standard Ratings

Hermetic Compressor Ratings

120 VAC,

208 VAC,

240 VAC,

208 VAC,

220 VAC,

208 VAC,

Single-Phase Single-Phase Single-Phase Three-Phase Three-Phase Single-Phase

240 VAC, Single-Phase

Motor Horsepower

2

3

3

5

5

--

--

Motor Full-Load A

24

18.7

17

15.9

15

24

24

Motor Locked-Rotor A

144

112.2

102

95.4

90

144

144

AC Non-Inductive A

24

24

24

24

24

--

--

DC Non-Inductive A

3

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

--

--

Pilot Duty

125 VA at 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA at 120 to 300 VDC

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-99

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls

Code No. LIT-1900172

P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for Dual Pressure Applications

Description
The P70, P72, and P170 Controls for Dual Pressure Applications are designed primarily for use as combination high and low pressure controls on commercial refrigeration and air conditioning applications.
These controls are available in several pressure ranges and are compatible with most common refrigerants. Ammonia compatible models are also available.
These controls respond directly to system pressure changes on both high and low sides, and can provide single-device control of the compressor.

· MICRO-SETTM differential option allows for precise control on low pressure applications
· independent high and low pressure switches (P70S and P170S Models) satisfies a variety of dual pressure application wiring requirements with a single versatile control
· convertible high pressure resetauto reset or manual reset lockout (P70S and P170S Models) reduces inventory--one control can be adapted to several dual pressure applications in the field
Applications

Controls are available in several different electrical ratings and switch configurations, including independent high and low pressure switches (on P70S and P170S models). The P72 models provide direct control of 208 to 240 volt, single-phase motors up to three horsepower, and 208 to 220 volt, three-phase motors up to five horsepower.
Refer to the P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for Dual Pressure Applications Product Bulletin (LIT-125455) for important product application information.
Features
· all-steel case and cover built to provide long lasting, rugged protection for internal components
· sight-set calibrated pressure adjustment displays a visible pressure scale, fully adjustable through the range without removing the cover (on NEMA 1 enclosure models)

· P70S and P170S models have independently operated high and low pressure single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) switches that can be wired to satisfy a variety of control requirements. These adaptable controls also come with a high pressure manual reset lockout mechanism that may be converted to automatic reset.
· P70L, M, N, and P170L, M, N models have a single-pole, single-throw (SPST) switch. Models are available with automatic or manual reset lockout options. Models with manual reset are available with either high-side-only manual reset, or low-side and high-side manual reset. Ammonia-compatible models are also available (P70L and P70M only).
· P72 models have a double-pole, single-throw (DPST) switch with load-carrying contacts that can provide direct control of 208 to 240 VAC, single-phase motors up to 3 hp, and 208 to 220 VAC, three-phase motors up to 5 hp. See the DPST Electrical Ratings (P72L, M, and N Types) that follow.

P70MA-1 Dual Pressure Control
Some models are available with Limited Knob Adjustment, which restricts adjustment of the pressure settings and deters over-adjustment or tampering.
NEMA 1 enclosures are standard on most models. NEMA 3R enclosures are also available.
Repair Information
If the P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for Dual Pressure Applications fail to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart (Part 1 of 2)

Product Code Switch

Low Pressure Side psi (kPa) High Pressure Side psi (kPa)

Pressure Limited Knob

Number

Action

Range

Differential

Range

Differential (Non-Adjustable) Connector Adjustment

MICRO-SET Controls for Non-Corrosive Refrigerants

P70LB-6C1 P70MA-1C1 P70SA-1C1

SPST
Two independent SPDT

12 in.Hg to 80 (-41 to 552)

Minimum 5 (34) Maximum 35 (241)

100 to 500

Fixed approx. 65 (448)

(690 to 3,447) Lockout requires manual reset

Fixed at 65 (448) or Lockout requires manual reset

36 in.

Low cut-out

capillary with 1/4 in. flare None

nut

P170LB-6C1 P170MA-18C1 P170SA-1C1

SPST
Two independent SPDT

Fixed approx. 65 (448)
Lockout requires manual reset
Fixed at 65 (448) or Lockout requires manual reset

1/4 in.

Low cut-out

external flare connector None

All Range Controls for Non-Corrosive Refrigerants

P70LB-1C1 P70MA-1C1 P70NA-1C

SPST

20 in.Hg to 100 (-68 to 690)

Minimum 6 (41)

100 to 500

Maximum 50 (345) (690 to 3,447)

Fixed (manual reset)

Fixed Approx. 65 (448) Lockout Requires Manual Reset

36 in.

Low cut-out

capillary with 1/4 in. flare None

nut

P72LA-1C1 P72LB-1C1

DPST

Minimum 7 (48) Maximum 50 (345)

Fixed approx. 65 (448)

Low cut-out

P72MA-1C1

Lockout requires manual reset

None

P72NA-1C1

Fixed (manual reset)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-100

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls

P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for Dual Pressure Applications (Continued)

Selection Chart (Part 2 of 2)

Product Code Switch

Number

Action

Low Pressure Side psi (kPa) High Pressure Side psi (kPa)

Pressure Limited Knob

Range

Differential

Range

Differential (Non-Adjustable) Connector Adjustment

All Range Controls for Non-Corrosive Refrigerants

P170LB-1C1 P170MA-1C1 P170NA-1C

SPST

20 in.Hg to 100 (-68 to 690)

Minimum 7 (48)

100 to 500

Maximum 50 (345) (690 to 3,447)

Fixed (manual reset)

Fixed approx. 65 (448) Lockout requires manual reset

1/4 in.

Low cut-out

External flare connector None

All Range Ammonia Compatible Controls

P70LA-2C1 P70MA-2C1

SPST

20 in. Hg to Minimum 7 (48)

100

Maximum 50 (345)

(-68 to 690)

100 to 500

Fixed approx. 65 (448)

(690 to 3,447) Lockout requires manual reset

1/4 in.

None

Internal NPT

connector

1. Control models with high pressure side (only) that are UL Listed as Refrigeration Pressure Limiting Controls.

Note: For information on models not listed, please contact Johnson Controls/PENN® Refrigeration Application Engineering at 1-800-275-5676.

Technical Specifications
Maximum Pressures Pressure
Maximum Working Pressure Maximum Overpressure

Low Side All Range
100 psi (552 kPa) 325 psi (2,241 kPa)

MICRO-SET
80 psi (690 kPa) 525 psi (3,620 kPa)

High Side
500 psi (3,447 kPa) 525 psi (3,620 kPa)

p7sdual_wir_spst.eps p7sdual_wir_4-2.eps p7sdual_wir_pst.eps

L1 L2

High side opens Line to M1 on pressure rise.

High

Load

M1

Line
Low side opens Line to M1 on pressure drop. Low
Typical Wiring for SPST Switch (P70L, M, and N, and P170L, M, and N
Models)

L1 L2
High side opens Main circuit (Line to M2), and closes auxiliary circuit (Line to M1) on pressure rise.

Alarm High

Low side opens Main circuit (Line to M2), and closes auxiliary circuit (Line to M1) on pressure drop.

Line

M1

Line

M2

Low

Alarm Circuit Power
Load

Typical Wiring for Four-Wire, Two-Circuit Switch (P70P, Q and R Models)

L1
L2
L3*
High side opens High Line to M1 and
Line to M2 on pressure rise. M1

Line

M2

Load

Line Low

Low side opens Line to M1 and Line to M2 on pressure drop.

*(L3 is third supply line in 3-phase applications.)

Typical Wiring for DPST Switch (P72L, M, and N Models)

p7sdual_wir_2spdt_asdual.eps p7sdual_wir_2spdt_-diff.eps

L1 L2
1

Low Alarm
2
3

High Alarm

Load

3 1
2

Low
Low side switch opens 1 to 2 and closes 1 to 3 on pressure drop.

High
High side switch opens 1 to 2 and closes 1 to 3 on pressure rise.

Two SPDT Switches Wired as a Dual Pressure Control (Switching a Single Load with Optional High Side
Alarm and Low Side Alarm) (P70S and P170S Models)

L1 L2

High Alarm

High Load

3

1
High side switch opens 1 to 2 and closes 1 to 3 on pressure rise.
1 Low side switch opens 1 to 2 and closes 1 to 3 on pressure drop.

2 High
2
3 Low

Low Load

Low Alarm

Two SPDT Switches Wired to Control Two Different Loads (Optional High Side Alarm and Low Side Alarm)
(P70S and P170S Models)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-101

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls

P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for Dual Pressure Applications (Continued)

Technical Specifications (Continued)

DPST Electrical Ratings (P72L, M, and N Types)

Standard Ratings

Hermetic Compressor Ratings

120 VAC,

208 VAC,

240 VAC,

208 VAC,

220 VAC,

208 VAC,

Single-Phase Single-Phase Single-Phase Three-Phase Three-Phase Single-Phase

240 VAC, Single-Phase

Motor Horsepower

2

3

3

5

5

--

--

Motor Full-Load A

24

18.7

17

15.9

15

24

24

Motor Locked-Rotor A

144

112.2

102

95.4

90

144

144

AC Non-Inductive A

24

24

24

24

24

--

--

DC Non-Inductive A

3

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

--

--

Pilot Duty

125 VA at 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA at 120 to 300 VDC

p7sdual_dim1.eps

SPST Electrical Ratings (P70L, M, and N, and P170L, M, and N Types)
Single-Phase Ratings

Standard

Hermetic Compressor

120 208 240 208/240

VAC VAC VAC

VAC

Motor Horsepower

2

3

3

--

Motor Full-Load A

24 18.7 17

24

Motor Locked-Rotor A 144 112.2 102

144

Non-Inductive A

22 22 22

--

Pilot Duty

125 VA at 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA at 120 to 300 VDC

5/16 (15)
3-1/4 (83)
13/16 (20)
2-1/16 (53) 1 5/16
(33) 15/16 (24)

2-7/8 (73)
1-3/4 (44)
3/16 (4)

Reset Button for Controls

Two Mounting Holes

with both High and Low

10-32 UNF-28 Thread

Side Reset

3/16 Diameter

(5) Mounting Hole

5 (127)

1-11/16 (43)

5/16 (9)
5/16 (8)
1 (25) 1-1/8 (29)

15/16 (95)
1-11/16 (43)

11/16 (17)

15/16 (95)

Reset Lever for Controls with High Side Only Manual Reset (Except P70S and P170S Models)

1-15/16 (48)

5/16 (8)

3/16 (5)

3/8 (10)

X

3/16 (5)

Diameter Mounting

Hole

SPDT Electrical Ratings (P70S and P170S Types)
Standard Single-Phase Ratings

120 208 240 VAC VAC VAC

277 VAC

1-5/16 (33)
1/16 (2)

3-3/16

3

(80)

(76)

5-11/16

(144)

11/16 (18)

7/8 or (22)

1-1/8 (28)

(1/2 in. or 3/4 in. Trade Size) Conduit Hole

Dimensions for P70, P72, and P170 Dual Pressure Controls with NEMA 1 Enclosure, in. (mm)*

Motor Full Load A

16.0 9.2 8.0

7.0

Motor Locked Rotor A 96.0 55.2 48.0

42.0

Non-Inductive A

16.0 9.2 8.0

-

Pilot Duty

125 VA at 24 VAC; 720 VA at 120 to 277 VAC

Four-Wire, Two-Circuit Electrical Ratings

(P70P, Q, and R Types)

5/8

Standard Single-Phase Ratings

(16)

5/8

(16)

3-1/8 (79)

4-13/16

(122)

Motor Full Load A
Motor Locked Rotor A

Line-M2 (Main Contacts)

Line-M1 (Auxiliary Contacts)

120 208 240 277 120 208 240 277 VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC

16.0 9.2 8.0 -- 6.0 3.3 3.0 --

96.0 55.2 48.0 -- 36.0 19.8 18.0 --

5-13/16 (148) 4-7/16

2-3/4 (70)

(112) 2-3/4 (69) 1-1/4
(32)

3/8 (10)

3-3/8 (86)

Four Mounting Holes

5/16 Diameter

1/16 (2)

(8)

3/4-NPSM Threaded Rigid Conduit Connector

NonInductive A

16.0 9.2 8.0 7.2 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0

1-3/8 (35)

1-1/8

1-3/4 (44)

(29)

Pilot Duty 125VA at 24 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA at 120 to 300 VDC for both sets of contacts

Element as Specified

7/16

(10)

Dimensions for P70, P72, and P170 Dual Pressure Control with NEMA 3R Enclosure, in. (mm)*

p7sdual_dim3.eps

*These dimensions are nominal and are subject to accepted manufacturing
tolerances and application variables.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-102

Single-Stage Electronic Pressure Controls
P470 Electronic Pressure Control with Display

Code No. LIT-1900109

Description
The P470 Electronic Pressure Control with Display is a single-stage, On/Off, electronic pressure control with a single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) output relay. The control may be field set to operate in one of three pressure ranges (0 to 100 psi, 0 to 500 psi, or 50 to 750 psi), as either an open high or open low control.
The P470 Control features a large LCD that displays the sensed pressure and other system-status indicators, as well as the adjustable setpoints in the programming mode. The P470 Control has a lockable, three-button touchpad for adjusting setpoints, and a front-panel LED that indicates the output relay status.
The P470 Control uses a P499 Electronic Pressure Transducer in conjunction with a WHA-PDK3 Wiring Harness to sense system pressure. This arrangement virtually eliminates the chance of a refrigerant leak because there are no capillaries or bellows to break or fail.
Refer to the P470 Electronic Pressure Control with Display Product Bulletin (LIT-125528) for important product application information.

Features
· easy-to-read LCD · three field-selectable pressure ranges
between 0 to 750 psi · 24 VAC, and 120 or 208/240 VAC models · lockable, three-button, front-panel
touchpad · built-in, adjustable, anti-short cycle
time-delay · uses an economical and versatile
transducer and wiring harness
Repair Information
The P470 pressure control and P499 transducer are not field repairable. Perform the following procedures, in the order they are presented, to determine the problem. If the problem is with the control or transducer, contact a Johnson Controls/PENN® sales representative for a replacement.

P470 Pressure Control with Transducer and Wiring Harness (Control, Transducer,
and Harness Must be Purchased Separately)

Selection Chart

Item
P470 (Low-Voltage) Electronic Pressure Control with Display P470 (Line-Voltage) Electronic Pressure Control with Display P499 Electronic Pressure Transducers
Wiring Harnesses for P499 Transducers

Product Code Number
P470FB-1C
P470EB-1C
P499RAP-101C P499RAP-101K P499RCP-101C P499RCP-101K P499RAP-105C P499RAP-105K P499RCP-105C P499RCP-105K P499RAP-107C P499RAP-107K P499RCP-107C P499RCP-107K WHA-PKD3-200C WHA-PKD3-400C

Description
Low Voltage (less than 30 VAC) Electronic Pressure Control with Display Supply Voltage: 24 VAC Class 2 Transformer (See Technical Specifications for complete Relay Electrical Ratings.) Line Voltage Electronic Pressure Control with Display Supply Voltage: 120 or 208/240 VAC (See Technical Specifications for complete Relay Electrical Ratings.) 0 to 100 psi Pressure Transducer with 1/8 in. NPT External Fitting
0 to 100 psi Pressure Transducer with 1/4 in. SAE (Schrader®) Internal Fitting with integral valve depressor 0 to 500 psi Pressure Transducer with 1/8 in. NPT External Fitting
0 to 500 psi Pressure Transducer with 1/4 in. SAE (Schrader) Internal Fitting with integral valve depressor 0 to 750 psi Pressure Transducer with 1/8 in. NPT External Fitting
0 to 750 psi Pressure Transducer with 1/4 in. SAE (Schrader) Internal Fitting with integral valve depressor 6 ft 6-1/2 in. (2 m) 3-Wire Cable with Plug-in Connector for P499 Transducer 13 ft 3 in. (4 m) 3-Wire Cable with Plug-in Connector for P499 Transducer

WHA-PKD3-600C

19 ft 8 in. (6 m) 3-Wire Cable with Plug-in Connector for P499 Transducer

Note: P470 Controls do not include a transducer or wiring harness. P499 Transducer and wiring harness must be purchased separately. Transducer must be matched to the selected pressure range.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-103

Single-Stage Electronic Pressure Controls
P470 Electronic Pressure Control with Display (Continued)

Technical Specifications
Output Relay Contacts Electrical Ratings
Horsepower N.O. (N.C.) Full Load Ampere N.O. (N.C.) Locked Rotor Ampere N.O. (N.C.) Non-Inductive Ampere N.O. (N.C.) Pilot Duty

120 VAC
1 (1/4)

P470EB-1 208 VAC
1 (1/3)

16 (5.8)

9.2 (4.0)

96 (34.8)

55.2 (24)

15 (10)

10 (10)

125 VA (N.O.) at 24 to 240 VAC 125 VA (N.C.) at 120 to 240 VAC
50 VA (N.C.) at 24 VAC

240 VAC
1 (1/2) 8.0 (4.9) 498 (29.4) 10 (10)

P470 FB-1
24 VAC
100 VA, 30 VAC maximum,
Class 2

Operating Pressure Ranges Minimum Differential Pressure Displayed Resolution Control Accuracy Supply Voltage
Power Consumption Transducer Type Ambient Temperature at Control
Ambient Humidity at Operating Control Enclosure Agency Information

P470 Electronic Pressure Control with Display

0 to 100 psi

0 to 500 psi

5 psig

20 psig

1 psig

3 psig

+ 1.5% of selected Operating Pressure Range plus transducer accuracy

P470FB-1:24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Class 2 P470EB-1:120 or 208/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz

1.8 VA maximum

P499 Electronic Pressure Transducer

Operating: -30 to 140°F (-34 to 60°C) Shipping: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C)

0 to 95% RH noncondensing; Maximum dew point: 85°F (29°C)

Case and cover: NEMA 1 High-impact thermoplastic

UL: File SA516; CCN SDFY Canadian UL: File SA516; CCN SDFY7 FCC/DOC Part 15, Class A

50 to 750 psi 20 psig 5 psig

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-104

Electromechanical Lube Oil and Differential Pressure Controls Code No. LIT-1927185
P28 Series Lube Oil Pressure Cutout Control with Time Delay

Description
The P28 series provides dependable lube oil protection on pressure of lubricated refrigeration compressors by sensing low lube oil pressure. A built-in time delay switch, accurately compensated for ambient temperature, allows for pressure pick up on start and avoids nuisance shutdowns on pressure drops of short duration during the running cycle.
Refer to the P28 and P128 Series Lube Oil Controls with Built-in Time Delay Relay Product Bulletin (LIT-125420) for important product application information.
Features
· direct-reading scale indication · adjustable setpoint · trip-free manual reset · replacement timing relays available · dust-protected switch

Applications
· semi-hermetic compressors · P28 Control measures pressure available
to circulate oil though the lubrication system (Net oil pressure is the difference between oil gauge and crankcase pressure.)
Accessories
· all models listed on this page include a universal mounting bracket
· replacement timing relays-- refer to Replacement Timing Relays for P28 and P29 Lube Oil Controls Catalog Page (LIT-1927395)
Repair Information
If the P28 Series Lube Oil Pressure Cutout Control with Time Delay fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

P28AA Lube Oil Pressure Cutout Control

Selection Chart

Product Code Number
P28AA-1C2 P28AA-2C4

Time Delay
90 seconds
60 seconds

Time Delay Heater Circuit VAC
120/240

Type of Reset
Manual

Range1 psi (kPa)
8 to 70 (55 to 483)

Refrigerant (R)
Non-corrosive3

Pressure Connection
36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut

P28AA-17C5

120 seconds

P28AA-18C

45 seconds

P28AN-1C

90 seconds

120/240

Manual

8 to 70 (55 to 483) Ammonia

1/4 in. internal NPT

P28DN-1C P28DA-1C
P28GA-2C

90 seconds With Runlight and Alarm Terminals
90 seconds

120/240

Manual Automatic

8 to 70 (55 to 483) Non-corrosive3

36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut

P28NA-5C

120 seconds

24 VAC or VDC

Manual

1. Switch differential approximately 5 psig (34 kPa). Time delay relay energizes at 9 psig (61 kPa) pressure difference, de-energized at 14 psig (97 kPa) difference 2. Replaces Ranco® P30-3701 3. Non-corrosive refrigerants include R-12, R-22, R-134A, R-500, R-502 (R) 4. Replaces Ranco P30-3601 5. Replaces Ranco P30-3801

Technical Specifications

The maximum bellows pressure is 180 psig (2,241 kPa).

Electrical Ratings - Pilot Duty

Time Delay

Pilot Circuit

Heater Circuit

Alarm Circuit (must be same voltage as pilot circuit)

120/240 VAC 24 VAC or VDC

750 VA, 120/240 VAC
125 VA, 24 VAC 57.5 VA, 24 VDC

125 VA, 120/240 VAC
125 VA, 24 VAC 57.5 VA, 24 VDC

P28DA-1 Contact Rating 2 to 1: 2 to 3 (must be same voltage as time delay circuit)

Crankcase Heater: Term 2 to 1

Runlight: Term 2 to 3

10 A 120 VAC, 5 A 240 VAC

10 W

---

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-105

Electromechanical Lube Oil and Differential Pressure Controls Code No. LIT-1927195
P32 Series Sensitive Pressure Switch

Description
This differential pressure switch is used to sense pressure/air flow in ducts. Refer to the P32 Series Sensitive Differential Pressure Switch Product Bulletin (LIT-125435) for important product application information.
P32 Series Y
R
B
Action on Increase of Pressure
P28 Action Diagram

Features
· easy-to-read setpoint scale · versatile mounting options
Applications
· pressure/air flow proving with electric duct heaters, humidifiers, and other equipment
· maximum pressure/air flow control for variable volume systems
· reheat duct powered systems · clogged filter detection · detection of icing of air conditioning coils
and initiation of defrost cycle · sensitive pressure settings · dust-tight snap switch
Repair Information
If the P32 Series Sensitive Pressure Switch fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement switch, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

P32 Sensitive Pressure Switch

p32.eps bracket1.eps bracket2.eps bracket1.eps bracket2.eps

Selection Chart

Product Code Number

Ambient

Connector

Temperature

Min./Max.

P32AC-1C

Maximum Contact

Over-

Action

pressure

psig

(kPa)1

P32AC-2C2 -40°F (-40°C) min.
P32AF-1C 167°F (75°C) max.
P32AF-2C2

High Pressure connectors are metal 1/8 in. internal NPT inside, 1/2 in. NPSM outside for mounting
Low pressure connectors are molded, 1/8 in. internal NPT

1 (6.895)

SPDT

Range in. WC (kPa)

Sensitivity Setpoint at Min. Setpoint in. WC (kPa)

0.15 to 12

0.07

(0.037 to 2.99) (0.017)

0.04 (0.01)

0.05 to 5 (0.012 to 1.24)

0.025 (0.006)

Adjustable

Scale Mounting Bracket Plate (Included)
L BKT182-1
U BKT229-1
Yes L BKT182-1
U

1. Maximum overpressure at either connection 2. Supplied with 1/4 in. compression fitting, 4 in. extension tube, two mounting screws, and O-gasket (angle barbed fitting installed)

BKT229-1

Accessories

The switch can be mounted directly or with the supplied mounting bracket.

Product Code Number
FTG18A-600R

Description
Remote Mounting Kit: 4 in. flanged sensing tube, two barbed fittings, two No. 10 screws, and a gasket

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings VAC

120

208

240

Type P32AC (Standard Differential, 1/2 hp)

AC Full Load A

9.8

5.65

4.9

AC Locked Rotor A

58.8

33.9

29.4

Non-Inductive or Resistive Load

15 A, 24 to 277 VAC

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 VAC; 360 VA, 120 to 277 VAC

Type P32AF (Close Differential, 1/4 hp)

AC Full Load A

5.8

3.3

2.9

AC Locked Rotor A

34.8

19.8

17.4

Non-Inductive or Resistive Load

10 A, 24 to 277 VAC

Pilot Duty

125 VA, 24 VAC; 360 VA, 120 to 277 VAC

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-106

Electromechanical Lube Oil and Differential Pressure Controls Code No. LIT-1927200
P45 Series Lube Oil Pressure Cutout Control with Time Delay

Description
The P45 Control provides dependable, low lube oil pressure protection for refrigeration compressors. The low-adjustable factory-set pressure setting provides operation to the compressor manufacturer's specification. A built-in time delay relay, compensated for ambient temperature, allows for pressure pick-up on start and avoids nuisance shutdowns on short duration pressure losses during the running cycle.
Refer to the P45 Series Oil Pressure Cutout Controls with Built-in Time Delay Relay Product Bulletin (LIT-125445) for important product application information.
Features
· universal mounting · trip-free manual reset · ambient compensated time delay

Accessories
These controls are supplied without mounting brackets. If brackets are required, order kit number BKT38A-600R, which contains five 271-51 Angle Mounting Brackets with screws.

Applications
The P45 control is used on semi-hermetic compressors. It measures net oil pressure available to circulate oil through the compressor's lubrication system. (Net oil pressure is the difference between oil pump pressure and the crank case pressure.)

Repair Information
If the P45 Series Lube Oil Pressure Cutout Control with Time Delay fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

P45NCALube Oil Pressure Cutout Control

Technical Specifications

For all non-corrosive refrigerants.

Electrical Rating  Pilot Duty

Time Delay

Pilot Duty

Heat Circuit

120/240 VAC

750 VA, 120/240 VAC

24 VAC

125 VA, 24 VAC

Selection Chart

Product Code Number

Time Delay1

Heater Circuit Type of Maximum Bellows

VAC

Reset Pressure, psig (kPa)

Factory Setting, psi (kPa) Pressure

Fixed

Connection

Copeland® Compressors

P45NAA-5C P45NAA-10C P45NCA-12C3 P145NCA-12C4 P145NCB-12C5

120 seconds 24
90 seconds
120 seconds 120/240

Manual 425 (2,390)

9 (62)2

36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut
48 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut
36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut
1/4 in. external flare (Style 5)

Carlyle® Compressors

P45NCA-82C6
P145NCA-82C8 P145NCB-82C9

45 seconds 120/240

Manual 425 (2,390)

6.5 (45)7

36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut
1/4 in. external flare (Style 5)

1. Relay is not field-replaceable 2. Switch differential is approximately 5 psi (34 kPa). Time delay relay energizes at 9 psi (61 kPa) pressure difference, de-energizes at 14 psi (97 kPa) difference. 3. Replaces Ranco® P30-5826 4. Replaces Ranco P30-5827 5. Replaces Ranco P30-5827 (Includes alarm wire) 6. Replaces Carlyle/Carrier® Code No. HKCA-500, 6342050 7. Switch differential is approximately 4.5 psi (34 kPa). Time delay relay energizes at 6.5 psi (45 kPa) pressure difference, de-energizes at 11 psi (76 kPa)
difference. 8. Replaces Carlyle/Carrier Part No. HKCA-500, 6342050 with 36" SEC99A UltraCap® 9. Replaces Carlyle/Carrier Part No. HKCA-500, 6342050 with 36" SEC99A UltraCap (Includes alarm wire)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-107

Electromechanical Lube Oil and Differential Pressure Controls Code No. LIT-1927260
P74 Series Differential Pressure Control

Description
Series P74 measures the pressure difference between two sources: supply lines and return lines. A change in differential pressure will reposition the switching mechanism to cause corrective action of the supplementary control equipment.
Refer to the P47 Series Steam Pressure Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-125450) for important product application information.
Features
· field-proven Penn switch with a completely enclosed contact mechanism
· pressure differential setting is easily changed without removing the cover

Applications
· differential pressure sensing on chillers or water-cooled condensers
· lube oil failure cutout for refrigeration compressors (same as the P28, but does not incorporate time delay)
· positioning M100 Series motor-actuated valves (P74JA-2)
· to prove pump operation
Accessories
All models on this page include a universal mounting bracket.
Repair Information
If the P74 Series Differential Pressure Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

P74EA-8 Differential Pressure Control

Selection Chart

Product Code Switch

Number

Action

Range Pressure Differential Switch

psig (kPa)1

Differential

Pressure Connections

For All Non-Corrosive Liquids

P74AA-1C

Single-Pole, Single-Throw (SPST) closes on decreases in pressure difference

8 to 70 Adjustable (55 to 483)

8 to 30 Adjustable 36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut

P74BA-1C

SPST opens on decrease in pressure difference

P74EA-8C

Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT) (snap-acting) 2 to 26 Adjustable (14 to 207)

3.5 Fixed

36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut

P74EA-10C

1/4 in. external flare

P74FA-1C P74FA-5C

8 to 60 Adjustable (55 to 414)

1.5 Fixed

1/4 in. FNPT

P74FA-10C

2 to 26 Adjustable (14 to 207)

36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut

P74JA-2C

SPDT (floating)

8 to 60 Adjustable (55 to 414)

2.5 Fixed

1/4 in. external flare

1. Maximum continuous pressure to low pressure bellows - 180 psig (1,241 kPa)

Bellows Material
Stainless steel
Brass

Technical Specifications
Electrical Ratings Motor Ratings
AC Full Load A AC Locked Rotor A AC Non-Inductive A Pilot Duty
AC Full Load A AC Locked Rotor A AC Non-Inductive A Pilot Duty
AC Full Load A AC Locked Rotor A AC Non-Inductive A Pilot Duty

120 V

208 V

240 V

P74AA, P74BA - 1 Phase

20.0

18.7

17.0

120.0

112.2

102.0

22.0

22.0

22.0

125 VA, 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA, 120 to 300 VDC

P74EA

16.0

9.2

8.0

96.0

55.2

48.0

16.0

16.0

16.0

125 VA, 120 to 600 VAC

P74FA

6.0

3.4

3.0

36.0

20.4

18.0

10.0

10.0

10.0

125 VA, 120 to 277 VAC

P74JA

1 A; 24 VAC Class 2; 50/60 Hz

277 V
-- -- --
-- -- 16.0
-- -- 10.0

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-108

Electromechanical Lube Oil and Differential Pressure Controls Code No. LIT-1927280
P128 and P145 Series Lube Oil Pressure Controls

Description
The P128 and P145 Series Controls provide dependable low pressure lube oil cut-out for pressure lubricated refrigeration compressors. The P128 Series offer adjustable range settings.
The P128 and P145 controls feature a 1/4 in. external flare pressure connection which may be used with a refrigerant hose or cap tube such as SEC99 UltraCap.
Refer to the P28 and P128 Series Lube Oil Control with Built-in Time Delay Relay Product Bulletin (LIT-125420) for important product application information.
Features
· ambient compensated time delay relay · trip-free manual reset · industry standard · P128 is fully adjustable throughout its
range · P145 is factory set to compressor
manufacturer's specifications
Applications
Use these controls for lube oil cutout on hermetic and semi-hermetic compressors used in commercial air-conditioning and commercial and industrial refrigeration systems.

P128AA Lube Oil Pressure Control
Technical Specifications
Pressure controls P128 and P145 are designed to be used with SEC99 UltraCap. Product specifications for P128 are the same as P28 model. Refer to P28 Series Lube Oil Pressure Cutout Control (With Time Delay) (LIT-1927185). Product specifications for P145 are the same as P45 model. Refer to P45 Series Lube Oil Pressure Cutout Control (With Time Delay) (LIT-1927185). Also note the selection chart below.

P145NCA Lube Oil Pressure Control
Accessories
Some controls are supplied less mounting brackets. If brackets are required, order kit number BKT38A-600, which contains five 271-51 angle mounting brackets with screws; or BKT38A-601 which contains one mounting bracket with screws.
Repair Information
If the P128 and the P145 Series Lube Oil Pressure Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart

Product Code Number
P128AA-1C1 P128AA-2C2 P128AA-17C3 P145NCA-12C4 P145NCA-82C5 P145NCB-12C6 P145NCB-82C7

Time Delay

Heater Circuit Type of

VAC

Reset

90 seconds 120/240

Manual

60 seconds

120 seconds

45 seconds 120 seconds 45 seconds

Range psig (kPa) Adjustable Non-Adjustable
8 to 70 (55 to 483) ---

---

Factory Set 9 (62)

Factory Set 6.5 (45)

Factory Set 9 (62)

Factory Set 6.5 (45)

1. Replacement for P28AA-1*. Replaces Ranco® P30-3701. 2. Replacement for P28AA-2*. Replaces Ranco P30-3601. 3. Replacement for P28AA-17*. Replaces Ranco P30-3801. 4. Replacement for P45NCA-12*. (Copeland Model) Replaces Ranco P30-5826. 5. Replacement for P45NCA-82*. (Carlyle Model). 6. Copeland model with alarm circuit 7. Carlyle model with alarm circuit

Refrigerant
Non-corrosive
Non-corrosive

* SEC99 UltraCap Hose must be ordered separately.

Pressure Connection
1/4 in. external flared connection

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-109

Electromechanical Lube Oil and Differential Pressure Controls Code No. LIT-1900115
P12 Series Differential Pressure Controls

Description
The P12 Series Differential Pressure Controls are suitable for use with oil and/or non-corrosive refrigerants. The switch is actuated by a difference in pressure between the two sensing elements. The control is factory-set to open the switch (COM to 1) at a differential pressure of 18 psi (124 kPa) and close the switch (COM to 1) at a differential pressure of 12 psi (83 kPa). The control is not field-adjustable.
This control may be connected to a P28 Lube Oil Control, with time delay, to give complete monitoring of lubrication on two refrigeration compressors driven by one motor.
Refer to the P12 Series Differential Pressure Control Product Bulletin (LIT-997452) for important product application information.

Repair Information
If the P12 Series Differential Pressure Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

P12AA Differential Pressure Control

Selection Chart

Product Code Number
P12AA-3C

Differential Pressure

COM to 1 OPENS

COM to 1 CLOSES

18 psi (124 kPa)

12 psi (83 kPa)

Maximum

Enclosure

Overpressure, psi (kPa)

Fitting

500 (3,447)

NEMA1 Enclosure 1/4 in. external SAE flare fitting

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-110

Electronic Lube Oil and Differential Pressure Controls
P545 Series Electronic Lube Oil Control

Code No. LIT-1900355

Description
The P545 Series Electronic Lube Oil Control is designed for use on refrigeration compressors equipped with an oil pump that accepts a single-point differential pressure switch. The P400 switch continuously monitors net lube oil pressure and the P545 control locks out the compressor if lube oil pressure falls below the manufacturer's recommended net pressure for longer than the recommended lube oil time delay. Front-mount LEDs indicate the status of the lubrication system, and a user-selectable, minimum-off time delay can be set to minimize compressor short cycling.
A Johnson Controls/PENN® R310AD Current Sensing Switch, sold separately, may be used to disable the P545 control lockout circuit during abnormal compressor shutdowns.
Refer to the P545 Series Electronic Lube Oil Control Product Bulletin (LIT-12011012) for important product application information.
Features
· single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) relay contacts for liquid line solenoid and alarm applications allow liquid line solenoid to be closed if the P545 control shuts off the compressor due to low oil pressure and provides alarm indication, including circuits that use neon lights

· relay contact output for compressor provides reliable, long-lasting operation
· built-in test circuit verifies proper control operation quickly, without additional tools or equipment
· improved noise immunity exceeds immunity requirements of UL 991 for transient overvoltage: IEC 61000-4-3 for radiated Radio Frequency (RF) and IEC 61000-4-6 for RF-induced conducted disturbances
· jumper-selectable anti-short cycle time delays provide for a wide range of anti-short cycle strategies that meet most equipment requirements-- the anti-short cycle delay feature may allow for the elimination of an external short-cycle timer
· user-friendly display panel displays the status of the compressor lubrication system continuously
· backwards compatibility allows easy replacement of existing electronic lube oil controls
Repair Information
If the P545 Series Electronic Lube Oil Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Charts

P545 Series Electronic Lube Oil Control Product Code Number Lube Oil Delay (Seconds) P400 Switch

P545NCB-22C1

120

P400AD-2

P545NCB-25C1

90

P400BD-1

P545NCB-82C1

120

P400AD-1

1. Switch and wiring harness included

Wiring Harness
WHA-P400-100 WHA-P400-125 WHA-P400-100

Control and Sensor/Switch Compatibility

Test

P345 or P445 Control

with P400 Switch

P545 Control and P400 Switch

Wiring Harness1 Test Switch

WHA-P400-xxx Does not function2

WHA-P400-xxx Immediate

1. WHA-P400-xxx is the two-wire harness supplied with the P545 control and the P400 switch.
2. When the P445 Control is wired to a P400 Switch, the Test button may operate when first powered up; however, after a couple minutes of operation, the Test Switch function no longer works. All other control functions operate normally.

P545 Control with P400 Switch
Fits Compressors Manufactured by
Copeland Bitzer Carlyle

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-111

Electronic Lube Oil and Differential Pressure Controls
P545 Series Electronic Lube Oil Control (Continued)

Accessories

P400 Single-Point Differential Lube Oil Pressure Switch

Product Code

Open Point

Number1

(Differential Pressure)

P400AD-1C

7.0 ±1.0 psi

P400AD-2C

12.75 ±0.75 psi

P400BD-1C

10.0 ±1.5 psi

1. Wiring harness included

Close Point (Differential Above Open Point)
less than or equal to 2.0 psi
less than or equal to 1.5 psi
less than or equal to 3.0 psi

Wiring Harnesses and Other Accessories

Product Code Number

Description

KITP545-82C1

CST29A-600C Sensor Block; P545NCB-82 Control; P400AD-1C Switch; WHA-P400-100C Wiring Harness

WHA-P400-100C

3-1/3 ft (1 m) length wiring harness

WHA-P400-125C

4 ft (1-1/4 m) length wiring harness

WHA-P400-250C

8 ft (2-1/2 m) length wiring harness

WHA-P400-430C

14 ft (4-1/3 m) length wiring harness

R310AD-1C

Low-voltage Current Sensing Switch

271-51

Universal Mounting Bracket

1. Contact Carlyle Compressor Co. at 1-800-462-2759 to order Sensor Block Gasket 06DA680063.

Threads
3/4-16 UNF M20 x 1.5

Technical Specifications
Power Requirements Open Point (Differential Pressure)
Lube Oil Time Delay (Factory Settings)
Anti-Short Cycle Timer Type of Refrigerant Electrical Connections
Maximum Electrical Rating
Alarm Circuit (Relay)
Backplate Material Case and Cover Material Ambient Operating Conditions Ambient Storage Conditions Approximate Shipping Weight Agency Listings

P545NCB Electronic Lube Oil Control
120 or 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz +10%, -15%; power consumption: 3 VA
P545NCB-22/P400AD-2: 12.75 ± 0.75 psi (87.9 ± 5.17 kPa) P545NCB-25/P400BD-1: 10 ± 1.5 psi (68.9 ± 10.3 kPa) P545NCB-82 P400AD-1: 7 ± 1.0 psi (48.2 ± 6.9 kPa)
P545NCB-22: 120 ± 15 seconds P545NCB-25: 90 ± 12 seconds P545NCB-82: 120 ± 15 seconds
Four selectable positions: 0, 35, 65, and 100 seconds (nominal times)
Non-corrosive refrigerants only
Control: Screw type terminals on a barrier terminal strip Sensor: Snap-connect at sensor end, three-pin plug at control end
Isolated relay output to compressor contactor (M-1 and M-2) Pilot duty 375 VA at 120 VAC, 750 VA at 240 VAC
NOA contact: Pilot duty 125 VA at 120/240 VAC; 60 W tungsten at 120/240 VAC NCA contact: Pilot duty 125 VA at 120 VAC, 250 VA at 240 VAC
0.062 in. (1 mm) cold rolled steel High impact thermoplastic
-40 to 131°F (-40 to 5°C)
-40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C)
1.80 lb (0.82 kg)
UL Listed, File SA516, CCN SDFY UL Listed for Canada, File SA516, CCN SDFY7

Wiring Harness
WHA-P400-100
WHA-P400-125

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-112

Electronic Lube Oil and Differential Pressure Controls

Code No. LIT-1900111

CST29A Adaptor Block for Carlyle® Compressors

Description
The Johnson Controls/PENN® CST29A Adaptor Block is designed for use on Carlyle® compressors (models O6CC, O6D, and O6E) equipped with an oil pump. The adaptor block allows for the installation of the P400 single point differential pressure switch for use with the P545NCB-82 electronic lube oil control. Refer to the CST29A Adapter Block for Carlyle Compressors Product Bulletin (LIT-125730) for important product application information.
Selection Chart

Features
· simple installation-- provides easy conversion of electromechanical lube oil control system to electronic equivalent
· designed specifically for Carlyle applications-- applies to Carlyle compressor models O6CC, O6D, and O6E
Repair Information
If the CST29A Adaptor Block for Carlyle® Compressors fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement adaptor, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Product Code Number
CST29A-600C

Description
Adaptor Block for Carlyle Compressor Series O6CC, O6D, and O6E; Includes Allen-head bolts.

CST29A Adaptor Block

Accessories

Product Code Number Description

P545NCB-82C

Electronic Lube Oil Pressure Control, 120 second delay before lockout, with P400AD-1 switch and WHA-P400-100 switch cable

P400AD-1C

Replacement Differential Pressure Switch with WHA-P400-100 Wire Harness Open at 7 ±1.0 psi, Close Less than or Equal to 2.0 psig above Open Point

KITP545-82C

Single Pack P545 with Adaptor Block and Allen-head Bolts

WHA-P400-100C

3-1/3 ft (1 m) Length Wiring Harness

WHA-P400-125C

4 ft (1-1/4 m) Length Wiring Harness

WHA-P400-250C

8 ft (2-1/2 m) Length Wiring Harness

WHA-P400-400C

14 ft (4-1/3 m) Length Wiring Harness

Carlyle Supplied Parts

06DA6800631

Adaptor Block Gasket for Carlyle Compressor Series O6CC, O6D, and O6E

1. Order this part from a Carlyle distributor. For information on the nearest Carlyle distributor, contact Carlyle at 1-800-462-2759.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-113

Pressure Sensors and Accessories

Code No. LIT-1927395

Replacement Timing Relays for P28 and P29 Lube Oil Controls

Selection Chart
Product Code Number
RLY13A-616R RLY13A-613R RLY13A-609R RLY13A-608R RLY13A-602R RLY13A-600R RLY13A-617R RLY13A-610R

Voltage
120/240 VAC 12 VAC 24 VAC or DC 120/240 VAC 120/240 VAC 120/240 VAC 120/240 VAC 120/240 VAC

Reset
Manual Manual Manual Automatic Manual Manual Manual Manual

Alarm Circuit
No No No No No No No No

Timing (Seconds)
120 120 120 90 90 60 45 30

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-114

Pressure Sensors and Accessories
P100 Series Encapsulated Pressure Switches

Code No. LIT-1927275

Description
P100 Series switches are encapsulated, nonadjustable, single-pole, single-throw (SPST), direct-mount switches for use with non-corrosive refrigerants. The switches are available with automatic reset in both open low and open high configurations and manual reset with open high action.
Refer to the P100 Series Encapsulated Pressure Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-121485) for important product application information.

· use with all non-corrosive refrigerants · encapsulated switch, dust tight · 1/4 in. Internal flare fitting with built-in
Schrader type depressor is standard · electrical connections are made to 48 in.
leads
Applications
· low limit, high limit, and fan cycling control in commercial refrigeration
· ice machines · food service equipment

Features
· compact size and light weight allow for direct mounting
· trip-free manual reset (manual reset models); contacts cannot be overridden by continued depression of the reset button

Repair Information
If the P100 Series Encapsulated Pressure Switches fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement switch, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

P100 Series Encapsulated Pressure Switch

Technical Specifications

Standard Duty Electrical Contact Ratings

Switch Action-Model SPST-P100AA, AC, AG, AJ, CA, CC, CG, CJ, DA, and

Numbers

DC

Motor Ratings

120V

240V

AC Full Load Ampere

5.8

2.9

AC Locked Rotor

34.8

15.0

Ampere

Non-Inductive Ampere

-

-

Inductive Ampere

-

-

Pilot Duty

375 VA

Heavy Duty Electrical Contact Ratings

Switch Action-Model

SPST-P100AE and CE

Numbers

Motor Ratings

120V

240V

Contact Type

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

AC Full Load Ampere

13.0

13.0

10.0

10.0

AC Locked Rotor Ampere

65.0

60.0

45.0

45.0

Non-Inductive Ampere

13.0

25.0

10.0

25.0

Inductive Ampere

15.0

15.0

15.0

15.0

Pilot Duty

278 VA

125 VA

278 VA

125 VA

SPST-P100AP, CP

120V 6.0 36.0
-

375 VA

240V 6.0 36.0
-

SPDT-P100EE

N.O. 5.8 34.8

120V

N.C. 13.0 60.0

10.0 15.0 278 VA

25.0 15.0 125 VA

N.O. 2.9 17.4

240V

N.C. 10.0 45.0

5.0 15.0 278 VA

25.0 15.0 125 VA

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-115

R-116

www.johnsoncontrols.com

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Selection Chart (Part 1 of 3)

Product Code Number

Switch Action

Setpoints - psig (kPa)

Opens Closes

P100AC-1C2 P100AP-354C

5 (34) 20 (138) 5 (34) 30 (207)

Ranco MPL-7001
-

Robertshaw

Saginomiya

-

ACB-2UA318W

3100-002

-

P100AP-15C

10 (69) 25 (172) HR00011A1R702 3100-050 ACB-2UA97W

P100AP-201C

10 (69) 32 (221)

MPL-7011 3100-050 ACB-2UA101

P100AC-2C2 P100AP-356C P100AP-12C

15 (103) 30 (207) 20 (138) 45 (310) 25 (172) 50 (345)

MPL-7002 -

-

-

3100-003 ACB-2UA40W

-

ACB-2UA143

P100AP-9C

25 (172) 80 (551)

MPL-7003 3101-003

-

P100AP-105C

30 (207) 60 (413)

-

3100-004 ACB-2UA94

P100AP-2C

35 (241) 60 (414)

MPL-7004 3100-004

-

P100AP-10C P100AP-357C

Open on Pressure
Drop

40 (276) 40 (276)

60 (413) HR00011A1R704

-

80 (551)

-

3100-052

ACB-2UA354W

P100AP-361C P100AP-358C

50 (345) 90 (620)

-

75 (517) 100 (689)

-

-

-

-

ACB-2UA441W

P100AP-351C1 P100AP-352C1 P100AP-353C1
P100AP-3C1 P100AP-359C1
P100AP-4C1 P100AP-362C1 P100AP-200C1

75 (517) 120 (827)

110 (758)
126 (868)
150 (1,034)
165 (1,137)
170 (1,172)
195 (1,344)
195 (1,344)

170 (1,171)
264 (1,819)
225 (1,551)
215 (1,481)
250 (1,724)
240 (1,654)
275 (1,895)

MPF-7008 -

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

ACB-2UA685W

3100-215 ACB-2UA48W

-

ACB-2UA631W

3100-080

-

-

-

Danfoss
061F7523
-

Replaces:

Klixon
PS80-K2-F0305020-005 -
PS80-K2-F0307025-005

Supco

Wilspec

International Refrigeration
Products

SLP0520 HR201A020005D SLP0520

SLP0530

-

-

SLP1025 HR201A025010D SLP1025

Gemline -

-

SLP1032

-

SLP1032

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

SLP2045

-

-

-

PS80-K2-F0316050-005

SLP2550

HR201A050025D

SLP2550

-

PS80-K2-F0325080-005

SLP2580

HR201A080025D

SLP2580

-

-

-

-

SLP3560

-

-

SLP3560

-

SLP3560

-

-

-

-

-

-

PS80-K2-F0326080-005

SLP4080

HR201A080040D

SLP4080

-

PS80-KS-F0328090-005

SLP5090

HR201A090050D

SLP5090

-

-

-

-

SLP75100

-

-

SFC75120

-

-

-

-

SFC110170

-

-

SFC125265

-

-

SFC150225

-

-

-

-

-

SFC170250

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Pressure Sensors and Accessories
P100 Series Encapsulated Pressure Switches (Continued)

R-117

www.johnsoncontrols.com

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Selection Chart (Part 2 of 3)

Product Code Number

Switch Action

Setpoints - psig (kPa)

Opens Closes

Ranco

Robertshaw

Saginomiya

P100AP-354C1 P100EE-79C
P100AP-332C1 P100CP-157C P100CP-158C P100CP-159C P100CC-9C2 P100CP-91C P100CP-166C P100CP-140C P100CP-160C P100CP-161C P100CP-162C P100EE-78C
P100CP-1C P100CP-156C P100CP-163C
P100CP-2C P100CP-164C P100CP-38C P100CP-165C P100CP-85C

Open on Pressure
Drop
Open on Pressure
Rise

210 (1,447)
300 (2,068)
300 (2,068)
225 (1,550)
250 (1,723)
270 (1,860)
275 (1,896)
300 (2,067)
325 (2,239)
350 (2,412)
375 (2,584)
400 (2,756)
400 (2,756)
400 (2,756)
400 (2,758)
410 (2,825)
425 (2,928)
425 (2,930)
450 (3,101)
500 (3,447)
600 (4,134)
665 (4,585)

275 (1,895)
370 (2,551)
400 (2,758)
150 (1,034)
150 (1,034)
200 (1,378)
175 (1,207)
200 (1,378)
225 (1,550)
245 (1,688)
275 (1,895)
200 (1,378)
280 (1,929)
300 (2,068)
300 (2,068)
290 (1,998)
300 (2,067)
325 (2,241)
250 (1,723)
325 (2,241)
475 (3,273)
565 (3,895)

-

-

-

-

MPF7010

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

3100-112

-

-

-

-

-

3100-150

-

-

-

3100-152

-

-

-

-

MPH-7107 3100-151

-

-

-

-

MPH-7108 3100-100

-

-

-

-

HR00011B1R704

-

-

-

ACB-2UA319W -
ACB-2UA627W -
ACB-2UB724W ACB-2UB723W
ACB-2UB273W ACB-2UB191
ACB-2UB35 ACB-2UB282W -

Danfoss
061F7514 061F6080 061F3212 061F7509 061FS14 061F7517 -

Replaces:

Klixon -

Supco SFC210275

Wilspec -

International Refrigeration
Products
SFC210275

Gemline -

-

-

-

-

-

-

SFC300400

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

PS80-K1-0336250-150

SHP250150 HR202A250150D

SHP250150

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

PS80-K1-0341300-200
PS80-K1-0346320-230
PS80-K1-0348350-245

-

HR202A300200D

SHP325225 HR202A325230D

-

HR202A350245D

SHP300200 -
SHP350250

-

-

-

SHP375265

PS80-K1-0357400-200
PS80-K1-0358400-280

SHP400200 HR202A400200D SHP400280 HR202A400280D

SHP400200 SHP400280

-

-

-

-

PS80-K1-0359400-300

SHP400300 HR202A400300D

SHP400300

-

-

-

-

PS80-K1-0360425-300

SHP425300 HR202A425300D

SHP425300

-

SHP425325

-

-

PS80-K1-0363450-250

SHP450250 HR202A450250D

SHP450250

-

-

-

-

PC 151 PC 100 -

-

SHP600475

-

-

-

-

SHP665565

-

-

-

Pressure Sensors and Accessories
P100 Series Encapsulated Pressure Switches (Continued)

R-118

www.johnsoncontrols.com

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Selection Chart (Part 3 of 3)

Product Code Number

Switch Action

Setpoints - psig (kPa)

Opens Closes

Ranco

P100DA-35C

350 (2,413)

Lockout Manual Reset

-

P100DC-3C3

375 (2,586)

Lockout Manual Reset

-

P100DA-1C

410 (2,827)

Lockout Manual Reset

-

P100DA-100C

Open on

415 (2,859)

Lockout Manual Reset

-

Pressure

P100DA-101C

Rise

440 (3,032)

Lockout Manual Reset

-

P100DA-2C

475 (3,275)

Lockout Manual Reset

-

P100DA-86C

575 (3,964)

Lockout Manual Reset

-

P100DA-81C

630 (4,343)

Lockout Manual Reset

-

1. Models are designed for condenser fan cycling. 2. Includes conduit clamp for 3/8 in. flexible metal conduit. 3. Includes conduit box with opening for 1/2 in. conduit connector.

Robertshaw

Saginomiya

-

ACBPC45M

-

-

3100-103 ACBPB115M

3100-103

-

-

-

3100-106

-

-

-

-

-

Danfoss -

Replaces: Klixon -

Supco -

Wilspec -

International Refrigeration
Products

Gemline

-

-

-

-

-

SMR375

-

29PSL012-24 SMR410 HM202A410000D SMR410

PC 103

29PSL004-1

-

HM202A415000D SMR410

-

-

SMR440

-

SMR440

-

-

-

HM202A475000D

-

-

-

SMR575

-

-

-

-

SMR630

-

-

-

Pressure Sensors and Accessories
P100 Series Encapsulated Pressure Switches (Continued)

Pressure Sensors and Accessories
P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers

Code No. LIT-1900405

Description
The P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers are compact, economical, rugged, direct-mount pressure transducers designed for use in commercial refrigeration and air conditioning applications. These transducers produce an analog signal based on the sensed pressure.
The P499 Series transducers feature environmentally protected electronics with stainless steel construction. The digitally compensated P499 transducers are highly accurate over a broad temperature range, resisting the effects of wide ambient temperature swings, high humidity, condensation, and icing.
The pressure port is machined from a solid piece of 17-4PH stainless steel. No O-rings, organic materials, or welds are exposed to the pressure media, allowing for a leak-proof, all-metal, sealed pressure system.
The P499 Series transducers operate with any corrosive or non-corrosive pressure medium that is compatible with 17-4PH stainless steel, including water, condensate, carbon dioxide, glycol, most refrigerants (including ammonia), and many other compatible fluids and gases.
The P499 Series provides transducers in a variety of pressure ranges, covering most common refrigeration and air conditioning applications.
Features
· single-piece machined 17-4PH stainless steel pressure port provides a durable assembly that eliminates refrigerant loss due to O-ring or weld failures; resists damage due to physical shock, vibration, and pressure pulsations; enables use with non-corrosive or corrosive pressure media that is compatible with 17-4PH stainless steel.
· environmentally protected electronics withstand the effects of adverse conditions associated with typical HVAC/R applications, including freeze/thaw applications on suction lines.
· reliable, repeatable performance and long operating life minimizes service and replacement costs.
· many available pressure ranges provide a single line of transducers for all refrigeration and air conditioning application needs.
· 1% total error band provides high-accuracy performance. · slender body design facilitates use of deep-socket wrenches for
ease of installation; requires zero turning radius. · CE and UL agency listings allow for global applications.

P499 Electronic Pressure Transducers; Style 47 Fitting Shown on the Left and Style 49 Fitting Shown on the Right

Refer to the P449 Series Electronic Pressure Transducer Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011190) for important product application information.

Repair Information
If the P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducer fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement transducer, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Accessories

P499 transducers require wire harnesses for all models that do not have an integral cable.

Wire Harnesses with Packard Electrical Connectors Product Code Number1 Length

WHA-PKD3-200C WHA-PKD3-400C WHA-PKD3-600C

6-1/2 ft (2.0 m) 13 ft (4.0 m) 19-5/8 ft (6.0 m)

1. Wire harnesses for P399 transducers and P499 transducers are interchangeable.

Selection Chart

0.5 to 4.5 VDC Ratiometric P499 Transducer Models with Packard Electrical Connections, psis

Product Code Number Pressure Connection

Pressure Range1

Individual or Kit2

Minimum Pressure Maximum Pressure

(Pmin)

(Pmax)

P499RAPS100C P499RAPS100K

1/8 in. 27 NPT External Thread (Style 49)

-10 psis (-0.7 bar) [20 in. Hg]

100 psis (6.9 bar)

Individual Kit

P499RAPS102C

0 psis (0 bar)

200 psis (13.8 bar)

Individual

P499RAPS102K

Kit

P499RCPS100C P499RCPS100K

1/4 in. SAE 45 Flare Internal Thread (7/16-20 UNF) with Depressor (Style 47)

-10 psis (-0.7 bar) [20 in. Hg]

100 psis (6.9 bar)

Individual Kit

P499RAPS102C

0 psis (0 bar)

200 psis (13.8 bar)

Individual

P499RAPS102K

Kit

1. Transducer sealed and rated for IP67 harsh environments. 2. The Individual pack comes with a transducer only - you must order the wire harness separately. The Kit is packaged with a transducer, 6-1/2 ft (2 m) wire
harness, and technical documentation.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-119

Pressure Sensors and Accessories
P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers (Continued)

0.5 to 4.5 VDC Ratiometric P499 Transducer Models with Integral 2 m (6-1/2 ft) Shielded Cable, psis

Product Code Number Pressure Connection

Pressure Range1

Minimum Pressure
(Pmin)

P499RCSS101C

1/4 in. SAE 45 Flare Internal Thread (7/16-20 UNF) with Depressor (Style 47)

0 psis (0 bar)

1. Transducer sealed and rated for IP67 harsh environments.

Maximum Pressure
(Pmax)
100 psis (6.9 bar)

0.5 to 4.5 VDC Ratiometric P499 Transducer Models with Packard Electrical Connections, psi

Product Code Number Pressure Connection

Pressure Range

Minimum Pressure Maximum Pressure

(Pmin)

(Pmax)

Individual or Kit1

P499RAP-101C

1/8 in. 27 NPT External Thread (Style 49)

0 psi (0 bar)

100 psi (6.9 bar)

Individual

P499RAP-101K

Kit

P499RAP-102C

0 psi (0 bar)

200 psi (13.8 bar)

Individual

P499RAP-105C

0 psi (0 bar)

500 psi (34.5 bar)

Individual

P499RAP-105K

Kit

P499RAP-107C

0 psi (0 bar)

750 psi (51.7 bar)

Individual

P499RAP-107K

Kit

P499RCP-101C P499RCP-101K

1/4 in. SAE 45 Flare Internal Thread (7/16-20 UNF) with Depressor (Style 47)

0 psi (0 bar)

100 psi (6.9 bar)

Individual Kit

P499RCP-105C

0 psi (0 bar)

500 psi (34.5 bar)

Individual

P499RCP-105K

Kit

P499RCP-107C

0 psi (0 bar)

750 psi (51.7 bar)

Individual

P499RCP-107K

Kit

1. The Individual pack comes with a transducer only - you must order the wire harness separately. The Kit is packaged with a transducer, 6-1/2 ft (2 m) wire harness, and technical documentation.

0 to 10 VDC P499 Transducer Models with Packard Electrical Connections, psi

Product Code

Pressure Connection

Pressure Range

Number

Minimum Pressure

(Pmin)

Maximum Pressure
(Pmax)

Individual or Kit1

P499VAP-101C

1/8 in. 27 NPT External Thread (Style 49)

0 psi (0 bar)

100 psi (6.9 bar)

Individual

P499VAP-101K

Kit

P499VAP-105C

0 psi (0 bar)

500 psi (34.5 bar)

Individual

P499VAP-105K

Kit

P499VAP-107C

0 psi (0 bar)

750 psi (51.7 bar)

Individual

P499VAP-107K

Kit

P499VCP-101C P499VCP-101K

1/4 in. SAE 45 Flare Internal Thread (7/16-20 UNF) with Depressor (Style 47)

0 psi (0 bar)

100 psi (6.9 bar)

Individual Kit

P499VCP-105C

0 psi (0 bar)

500 psi (34.5 bar)

Individual

P499VCP-105K

Kit

P499VCP-107C

0 psi (0 bar)

750 psi (51.7 bar)

Individual

P499VCP-107K

Kit

1. The Individual pack comes with a transducer only, you must order the wire harness separately. The Kit is packaged with a transducer, 6-1/2 ft (2 m) wire harness, and technical documentation.

4 to 20 mA P499 Transducer Models with Packard Electrical Connections, psi (Part 1 of 2)

Product Code

Pressure Connection

Pressure Range

Number

Minimum Pressure Maximum Pressure

(Pmin)

(Pmax)

P499AAP-101C P499AAP-101K

1/8 in. 27 NPT External Thread (Style 49)

0 psi (0 bar)

100 psi (6.9 bar)

P499AAP-105C P499AAP-105K

0 psi (0 bar)

500 psi (34.5 bar)

P499AAP-107C P499AAP-107K

0 psi (0 bar)

750 psi (51.7 bar)

Individual or Kit1
Individual Kit Individual Kit Individual Kit

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-120

Pressure Sensors and Accessories
P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers (Continued)

4 to 20 mA P499 Transducer Models with Packard Electrical Connections, psi (Part 2 of 2)

Product Code

Pressure Connection

Pressure Range

Number

Minimum Pressure Maximum Pressure

(Pmin)

(Pmax)

Individual or Kit1

P499ACP-101C P499ACP-101K

1/4 in. SAE 45 Flare Internal Thread (7/16-20 UNF) with Depressor (Style 47)

0 psi (0 bar)

100 psi (6.9 bar)

Individual Kit

P499ACP-105C P499ACP-105K

0 psi (0 bar)

500 psi (34.5 bar)

Individual Kit

P499ACP-107C P499ACP-107K

0 psi (0 bar)

750 psi (51.7 bar)

Individual Kit

1. The Individual pack comes with a transducer only, you must order the wire harness separately. The Kit is packaged with a transducer, 6-1/2 ft (2 m) wire harness, and technical documentation.

Technical Specifications

P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers

Pressure Ranges

-10 to 100 psis, 0 to 100 psi, 0 to 200 psi, 0 to 500 psi, 0 to 750 psi

Maximum Working Pressure

2x Pressure Range; short duration; infrequent, abnormal condition

Burst Pressure

5x Pressure Range

Vacuum

30 microns (0.03 mm Hg); short term

Media Compatibility

All media compatible with 17-4PH stainless steel, including ammonia

Output Signal

0.5 to 4.5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA

Supply Voltage

0.5 to 4.5 VDC Ratiometric Output

5.0 ±0.25 VDC, Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) or Class 2

4 to 20 mA Output

9 to 30 VDC, SELV or Class 2

0 to 10 VDC Output

12 to 30 VDC, SELV or Class 2

Direct-Mount Pressure Connections

1/8 in. 27 NPT External Thread (Style 49), 1/4 in. SAE 45 Flare Internal Thread (7/16-20 UNF) with Depressor (Style 47)

Temperature and Humidity

Storage Operating

-40 to 257F (-40 to 125C) -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C)

Compensated Range

-4 to 185F (-20 to 85C)

Humidity

0 to 100% RH

Linearity

±0.25% Full Span best fit straight line

Accuracy

±1% Full Span (maximum) over compensated temperature range

Materials

Pressure Port

17-4PH stainless steel construction

Packard Connector

40% glass-filled Polyetherimide (PEI)

Vibration

20G, 20 to 200 Hz

Shock

200G/11 ms

Compliance

United States

UL Listed, File E29374, CCN NKPZ UL Recognized for Use in Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations, File E322274

Canada

UL Listed, File E29374, CCN NKPZ7 UL Recognized for Use in Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations, File E322274

Europe

CE Mark  Johnson Controls, Inc., declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC.

Australia/ New Zealand

C-Tick Mark, Emissions Compliant

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-121

Pressure Sensors and Accessories
R310A Series Current Sensing Switch

Code No. LIT-1900005

Description
The R310A Series Current Sensing Switch detects alternating current (AC) flow in a single circuit without being connected to that circuit. It may be used in any application where current detection is required.
The R310A replaces the R10A used with Johnson Controls/PENN® time delay oil failure cutout controls such as the P28, P45, and P445. These applications incorporate internal line breaking overload protection, where lockout due to overload cycling is unacceptable or undesirable. The R310A switch is not intended to detect breakage of belts.
The R310A is molded in a high dielectric material, which permits mounting inside a starter or contactor.
Refer to the R310A Series Current Sensing Switch Product Bulletin (LIT-121536) for important product application information.
Features
· small size allows mounting in small enclosure
· solid-state switching contains no moving parts to fail
· low 0.5 ampere activation allows monitoring of most small equipment circuit loads
· high 200 ampere monitoring capacity allows monitoring of heavy duty equipment
· large 0.70 in. (18 mm) diameter sensor hole accepts large diameter wire sizes and multiple coilings of smaller diameter wire sizes

Applications
The R310A Current Sensing Switch is designed to sense alternating current in a conductor that passes through its opening. The R310A sensor closes an electronic switch if the alternating current in the conductor exceeds 0.5 amperes. Thus, the R310A switch may be used for several purposes: · switch a pilot circuit · energize a run signal on a device such as a
fan, motor, or pump · monitor motors and electrical loads for
proper operation · monitor on/off status of process motors
The R310A Series Current Sensing Switch is available in two models. The R310AD-1 switch is for use in low-voltage applications, such as with the P445 Electronic Lube Oil Control. The R310AE-2 switch is for use in high-voltage applications, such as with the P28 and P45 Electromechanical Lube Oil Controls.
The R310A switch avoids nuisance lockouts by sensing the lack of current flow to the motor. Regardless of the reason for motor shutdown, the lube oil control time delay circuit is de-energized when the current flow in the motor supply line drops below 0.5 amperes.
In a typical application, the lube oil control does not lock out when the control circuit shuts off the compressor. However, if the compressor overheats and the internal thermal overload circuits open, the compressor shuts itself down, which causes the oil pressure to drop. This drop in oil pressure will energize the lube oil control heater (P28, P45) or timer (P445), causing a

R310A Series Current Sensing Switch
nuisance lockout. In this situation, the R310 switch senses the lack of current to the motor, and is used to de-energize the time delay heater (P28, P45) or electronic timer (P445) before a nuisance lockout occurs.
Repair Information
If the R310A Series Current Sensing Switch fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement switch, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart

Technical Specifications

Product Code Number Description

R310AD-1C

Current Sensing Switch Voltage switching capacity: 0 to 30 VAC Used with: P445 Electronic Lube Oil Control

R310AE-2C

Current Sensing Switch Voltage switching capacity: 120 to 240 VAC Used with: P28 and P45 Electromechanical Lube Oil Controls

R310A Series Current Sensing Switch

Switch Action

SPST, normally open

Current Sensing Range

R310AD-1C 0.5 to 200 Amperes R310AE-2C 0.75 to 200 Amperes

Switch Threshold R310AD-1C 0.5 Amperes

R310AE-2C 0.75 Amperes

Sensor Supply Voltage

Induced from monitored conductor, isolation 600 VAC RMS

Switching Capacity R310AD-1C 0.1A at 30 VAC/DC (General Purpose) R310AE-2C 0.5 at 250 VAC/DC

Output Polarity

Non-polarity sensitive output

Enclosure

NEMA 1

Ambient Operating Conditions

5 to 140°F (-15 to 60°C); 0 to 95% RH, noncondensing

Ambient Storage Conditions

-40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C); 0 to 95% RH

Dimensions (H x W x D)

2.34 x 1.85 x 0.875 in. (59 x 46 x 22 mm)

Sensor Hole Size

7/10 in. (17 mm) Diameter

Agency Listings

UL Guide NRNT cUL Guide NRNT7

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-122

Pressure Sensors and Accessories
Universal Mounting Brackets

Description
The 271-51 is the universal mounting bracket used with many Johnson Controls/PENN® products. BKT38A-601R contains one mounting bracket with screws. BKT38A-600R contains five 271-51 angle mounting brackets with screws.

Selection Chart

Product Code Number
271-51
BKT38A-600R

Description
Universal Mounting Bracket Five Universal Mounting Brackets with ten screws

Code No. LIT-1900108

271-51 Universal Mounting Bracket

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-123

Pressure Sensors and Accessories
SEC99A UltraCap Armored Capillary

Code No. LIT-1900131

Description
The SEC99A UltraCap Armored Capillary is designed for use as a pressure connection in refrigeration and air conditioning applications. This small-orifice capillary minimizes pressure pulsation, and the brass armor sleeve improves resistance to abrasion caused by vibration. The copper capillary inside the armored sleeve allows no effusion of refrigerant to the environment.
Selection Chart
Product Code Description Number
Schrader Depressor in One End
SEC99AA-18C Two straight fittings Length: 18 in. (457 mm)
SEC99AA-24C Two straight fittings Length: 24 in. (610 mm)
SEC99AA-36C Two straight fittings Length: 36 in. (914 mm)
SEC99AA-48C Two straight fittings Length: 48 in. (1,219 mm)
SEC99AA-60C Two straight fittings Length: 60 in. (1,524 mm)
Schrader Depressor in Both Ends
SEC99AB-18C One straight and one 90° fitting Length: 18 in. (457 mm)
SEC99AB-24C One straight and one 90° fitting Length: 24 in. (610 mm)
SEC99AB-36C One straight and one 90° fitting Length: 36 in. (914 mm)
SEC99AB-48C One straight and one 90° fitting Length: 48 in. (1,219 mm)
SEC99AB-60C One straight and one 90° fitting Length: 60 in. (1,524 mm)

UltraCap is designed for use with 1/4 in. SAE external flare fitting connectors, such as those found on the Johnson Controls/PENN® lines of pressure-actuated controls. Integral Schrader valve depressors are available.
UltraCap Armored Capillary is compatible with all common non-corrosive refrigerants. The UltraCap capillary is available in a variety of lengths, and in models with two straight fittings or with one straight fitting and one 90° elbow fitting.
Repair Information
If the SEC99A UltraCap Armored Capillary fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement capillary, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

SEC99AB and SEC99AA UltraCap Armored Capillaries

Technical Specifications

SEC99A UltraCap Armored Capillary

Capillary Diameters

Inside: 0.062 in. (1 mm); Outside: 0.125 in. (3 mm)

Temperature Range

-50 to 350°F (-46 to 177°C)

Burst Pressure

3,000 psig (20,685 kPa)

Maximum Working Pressure 600 psig (4,137 kPa)

Suggested Torque to Seal

8 to 10 lbft (10.9 to 13.6 Nm)

Fittings: Straight 90° Elbow Material

1/4 in. Internal Flare Connector with Schrader Depressor 1/4 in. Internal Flare Connector with Schrader Depressor Forged Brass Nut with Copper Stem

Agency Listings

UL Recognized: File SA9457, CCN SFCS2 UL Recognized for Canada: SA9457, CCN SFCS8

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-124

Refrigerant Sensors/Monitors
RLD-H10PRO Refrigerant Leak Detector

Code No. LIT-1900954

Description
The RLD-H10PRO is a professional-grade leak detector for use by refrigeration and air conditioning technicians. This detector senses all CFC, HCFC, and HFC refrigerants and blends, such as R12, R22, R134a, R404a, R410a, R502, and R507 among others. The RLD-H10PRO is self-powered with a rechargeable battery and provides both manual and automatic compensation for background levels of refrigerant. A full line of accessories and maintenance kits are also available, including replacement sensors, tuneup kits, probe extensions, battery chargers, and leak vial bottles.
Refer to the RLD-H10PRO Refrigerant Leak Detector Product Bulletin (LIT-12012073) for important product application information.
Features
· positive ion emission heated diode sensor provides the most sensitivity available today, while still detecting all halogenated refrigerant gases

Selection Chart
Product Code Description Number
RLD-H10PRO-1 Refrigerant leak detector and charger

Accessories

Product Code Description Number

RLD-H10-100 14 inch flexible probe extension

RLD-H10-101 120 VAC power supply adaptor

RLD-H10-102 Cigarette lighter adaptor

RLD-H10-103 Replacement battery charger

RLD-H10-105 Belt pack battery

RLD-H10-600R

Tuneup kit: includes sensor, 100 filters, three airflow balls, three rubber probe tips, and leak vial

RLD-H10-601R Replacement sensor

RLD-H10-602R

Maintenance kit: includes 100 filters, three airflow balls, three rubber probe tips, and leak vial

RLD-H10-603R Replacement leak vial

RLD-H10-604R Replacement for RLD-H10PRO internal battery

RLD-H10-606R Clear plastic probe tip

RLD-H10-607R Probe replacement assembly

· rechargeable battery with low and full charge LEDs enhances portability--no external power required
· high quality air pump supplies constant airflow to the sensor so it responds quickly to leaks; also helps the sensor recover quickly after exposure to a refrigerant so the leak can be verified
· switchable adjustment for manual or automatic balance allows users to choose their preferred method of compensation for background refrigerant levels
· visual and audible signal facilitates sensing in noisy equipment rooms with 360° visibility and a piercing tone. Frequency of noise and light indicates the magnitude of the leak.
· headset jack allows users to hear the leak detector response in noisy environments
· external calibration source and calibration indicators indicate when the sensor is working properly and serves as a reference point to judge leak size

RLD-H10PRO Refrigerant Leak Detector
Repair Information
If the RLD-H10PRO Refrigerant Leak Detector fails to operate within its specifications, contact Johnson Controls® application engineering at (414) 524-5535.

Technical Specifications

RLD-H10PRO Refrigerant Leak Detector

Power Requirements 12 VDC internal battery, or 100 to 240 VAC input/18 V output wall adaptor (included) (RLD-H10-101).

Sensing Element Type Positive ion emission heated diode

Approximate Sensitivity1

Stationary
Moving (Per SAE J2791)

0.006 oz./yr 0.1 oz./yr

Automatic Background Mode selection for automatic or manual background zeroing

Adjustment

Manual background zeroing provides the best sensitivity.

Leak Alarm

Audible alarm (through internal beeper or stereo headphone jack), visible red LED

Response Time

Approximately 1 second

Warmup Time

Approximately 2 minutes

Probe Length

Approximately 4-1/2 ft (1.4 m)

Ambient Operating Conditions

32 to 104°F (0 to 40°C); 5-90% RH, noncondensing

Ambient Storage Conditions

14 to 140°F (-10 to 60°C); 5-90% RH, noncondensing

Case

Rugged high-density polyethylene

Dimensions (H x W x D) 5-2/5 x 10-1/2 x 8-3/10 in. (137 x 267 x 211 mm)

Compliance

Europe: CE Mark Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC.

Shipping Weight

5.1 lb (2.3 kg)

1. Sensitivity for R12, R22, R134a, R410a, R404a, and R507 when unit is set to small leak setting, manual mode.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-125

Refrigerant Sensors/Monitors

Code No. LIT-1900116

RLD Refrigerant Leak Detector Accessories and Replacement Parts

Description
These parts are used on the RLD-H10G-1 and on the RLD-H10PRO-1.
Selection Chart
Product Code Number Description

Figure

RLD-H10-100

14 in. Flexible Probe Extension

RLD-H10-600R

Tune-up Kit; Includes:
One Sensor, 100 Filters, Three Airflow Indicator Balls, Three Probe Tips, One Leak Vial

RLD-H10-601R

Replacement Sensor

RLD-H10-602R

Maintenance Kit; Includes:
100 Replacement Filters, Three Airflow Indicator Balls, Three Probe Tips

RLD-H10-603R

Replacement Leak Vial

RLD-H10-606R

Replacement Clear Plastic Probe Tip

RLD-H10-607R

Replacement Probe Assembly

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-126

Liquid Level and Flow Controls
F59 Series Sump Pump Switch

Code No. LIT-1922325

Description
The F59 Series Controls are designed to start an electric motor on liquid level rise and stop the motor on liquid level drop. The control cuts in when upper weight is submerged approximately halfway, and cuts out when lower weight is approximately half-exposed. Each switch includes 36 in. cable and two weights.
Refer to the F59 Series Liquid Level Switch for Sump Operations Product Bulletin (LIT-125215) for important product application information.

Type F59A, F59H

Line

Line

F59A-2 Sump Pump Switch

F59H-1 Sump Pump Switch

f59.eps

M2

M1

Action on Rise in Liquid Level F59 Series Action Diagram

Features
F59D-5 is equipped with a power cord and a piggyback style plug. The external prongs plug into the wall outlet, and the sump pump cord plugs into the internal end of the plug.

Applications
Use for On/Off control of sump pumps.

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings

Volts

Horsepower

F59A-1

120 VAC

1 hp

240 VAC

1 hp

32 VDC

1/4 hp

F59A-2

120 VAC

1 hp

240 VAC

1 hp

32 VDC

1/4 hp

F59D-5

120 VAC

1/2 hp

F59H-1

120 VAC

1 hp

240 VAC

1 hp

32 VDC

1/4 hp

Selection Charts

Product Code Contact

Number

Action

F59A-1C

Double-Pole, Single-Throw (DPST)

F59A-2C

DPST

F59H-1C

DPST

Mounting
External mounting bracket

Range Adjuster
Drop cord wiring

External mounting  includes universal Drop cord wiring mounting bracket and 24 in. strap for quick, easy mounting on the motor, on the pedestal or on the discharge pipe.

External mounting bracket

Conduit wiring 7/8 in. conduit openings in case

Replacement Parts Product Code Replacement Weight Kit for F59 Series Number

WGT11A-600R

Two Weights (Floats), 40 in. Plastic Cable, Weights with 3 in. Polyethylene Cable

WGT11A-604R

Two Weights (Floats), 36 in. Monel Wire, Two Float Support Plates, Weights with 3 in. Monel Cable

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-127

Liquid Level and Flow Controls
F261 Series Fluid Flow Switches

Code No. LIT-1900948

Description
The F261 Series Flow Switches respond to fluid flow in lines carrying water, ethylene glycol, or other nonhazardous fluids. These models also work in applications with swimming pool water and lubricating oils.
F261 Series Standard Flow Switches use a variety of paddle sizes to respond to fluid flow rates in applications with pipe sizes greater than 1 inch trade size.
Refer to the F261 Series Fluid Flow Switches Product Bulletin (LIT-12011987) for important product application information.

Features
· Type 3R (NEMA) or Type 4 (NEMA) enclosure allows use in indoor or outdoor applications.
· Viton® diaphragms allow use in fluid lines carrying chlorinated water, treated water, or other nonhazardous fluids.
· low-flow operation on low-flow models actuates switch with less than 1.0 GPM (3.8 L/min) flow for water applications or 9.0 GPM (34.1 L/min) flow for steam applications.
· maximum fluid pressure of 290 psig (20 bar) permits use in a wide range of pressure flow conditions.

F261 Flow Switch

Repair Information

If the F261 Series Flow Switch fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement F261 Series Flow Switch, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart

F261 Series Standard Model Flow Switches Product Code Number Description

F261KAH-V01C

Standard model flow switch with Type 3R (NEMA) enclosure; 1 in., 2 in., 3 in., and 6 in. stainless steel paddles, lock-tooth washer, and stainless steel paddle screw supplied uninstalled

F261MAH-V01C

Standard model flow switch with Type 4 (NEMA) enclosure; 1 in., 2 in., 3 in., and 6 in. stainless steel paddles, lock-tooth washer, and stainless steel paddle screw supplied uninstalled

F261MAL-V01C

Standard model flow switch with Type 4 (NEMA) enclosure; 1 in., 2 in., 3 in., and 6 in. stainless steel paddles, lock-tooth washer, and stainless steel paddle supplied uninstalled.

F261 Series Low-Flow Model Flow Switches Product Code Number Description

F261KEH-V01C

Low-flow model flow switch with Type 3R (NEMA) enclosure; 1/2 in. x 1/2 in. External NPTF inlet and outlet

F261KFH-V01C

Low-flow model flow switch with Type 3R (NEMA) enclosure; 3/4 in. x 3/4 in. External NPTF inlet and outlet

F261KFH-V02C

Low-flow model flow switch with Type 3R (NEMA) enclosure; 3/4 in. x 3/4 in. External NPTF inlet and outlet

F261MEH-V01C

Low-flow model flow switch with Type 4 (NEMA) enclosure; 1/2 in. x 1/2 in. External NPTF inlet and outlet

F261MFH-V01C

Low-flow model flow switch with Type 4 (NEMA) enclosure; 3/4 in x 3/4 in. External NPTF inlet and outlet

Replacement Paddle Parts Product Code Number Description

KIT21A-600

Stainless steel three-piece paddle (3 in., 2 in., and 1 in. segments)

KIT21A-601

Stainless steel 6 in. paddle

PLT52A-600R

Stainless steel three-piece paddle (3 in., 2 in., and 1 in. segments) and Stainless steel 6 in. paddle

Technical Specifications

F261xxH Series Standard Controls Electrical Ratings Volts, 50/60 Hz

24

Horsepower



Full Load Amperes



Locked Rotor Amperes



Resistive Amperes

16

Pilot Duty VA

125

UL60730/UL1059

120

208

240

1

1

1

16

10

10

96

60

60

16

10

10

720

720

720

EN60730

24

230







8



48

16

16

77

720

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R128

Liquid Level and Flow Controls
F261 Series Fluid Flow Switches (Continued)

UL Conformity Declaration Information

Information

Description

Purpose of Control

F261 Fluid Flow Switch

Construction of Control

Electronic independently mounted control

Number of Cycles

100,000 cycles

Method of Mounting Control

Mounting to sensed media vessel/orientation

Type 1 or Type 2 Action

Type 1.C (Microinterruption)

External Pollution Situation

Pollution degree 4

Internal Pollution Situation

Pollution degree 2

Rated Impulse Voltage

4,000 VAC

Ball Pressure Temperature

Enclosure: 266°F (130°C) Switch Component: 252°F (122°C)

Control Adjustment Instruction

-

Field Wiring Rating

Wire/Cord Temperature Ratings: 140°F (60°C) only permitted when ambient air and media are less than 113°F (45°C) 167°F (75°C) only permitted when ambient air and media are less than 140°F (60°C) 194°F (90°C) only permitted when ambient air is less than 140°F (60°C) and media is less than 167°F (75°C) 302°F (150°C) permitted when ambient air is less than 140°F (60°C) and media is less than 249°F (121°C)

Vessel Pressure

F261 Fluid Flow Switch: 290 psi (20 Bar)

Switch Enclosure
Wiring Connections Conduit Connection Pipe Connector Maximum Fluid Pressure Minimum Fluid Temperature1 Maximum Fluid Temperature2 Ambient Conditions Compliance

F261 Series Fluid Flow Switches
Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT) UL: Type 3R or Type 4 CE: IP43 (IP23 with drain hole plug removed) or IP67 Three color-coded screw terminals and one ground terminal One 7/8 in. (22 mm) hole for 1/2 in. trade size (or PG16) conduit Standard: 1 in. 11-1/2 NPT Threads 290 psi (20 bar) -20°F (-29°C)
250°F (121°C)
-40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C) North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E6688; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits Europe: CE Mark  Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive. Australia/New Zealand Mark: RCM Compliant

1. Ensure that the low liquid temperature combined with the low ambient temperature does not lead to the freezing the liquid inside the body (or bellows, where appropriate). Please observe the liquid freezing point.
2. At higher ambient temperatures, the maximum allowed liquid temperature becomes lower. The temperature of the electrical switch inside should not exceed 158°F (70°C).

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R129

Liquid Level and Flow Controls
F262 Airflow Switch

Code No. LIT-1900949

Description
The F262 Airflow Switch detects airflow or the absence of airflow by responding only to the velocity of air movement within a duct. The single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) control can be wired to open one circuit and close a second circuit for either signaling or interlock purposes.
Airflow failure during the normal operation of air handling systems may cause overheating, coil icing, or other conditions that may be detrimental to the equipment.
Refer to the F262 Airflow Switch Product Bulletin (LIT-12011988) for important product application information.
Application
The F262 switch detects airflow or the absence of airflow by responding only to the velocity of air movement within a duct. The SPDT control can be wired to open one circuit and close a second circuit for either signaling or interlock purposes.

Failure of airflow during the normal operation of air handling systems may cause overheating, coil icing, and other conditions that may be detrimental to the equipment.
Typical applications include:
· Make-up air systems · Air cooling or heating processes · Exhaust systems The control has a Type 3R (NEMA) enclosure with an integral mounting plate. A mounting plate gasket is supplied with each switch.
Features
· Type 3R (NEMA) Polycarbonate enclosure allows use in indoor applications and provides dust protection and is approved for use in a plenum according to NEC
· dependable dust-protected SPDT snap-acting PENN switch detects the presence or absence of airflow
· large wiring space makes wiring convenient and easily accessible
· easily accessible range adjustment screw allows easy field adjustment

F262 Airflow Control
Repair Information
If the F262 Airflow Switch fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement F262 Airflow Switch, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Charts
F262 Airflow Switch Product Code Number
F262KDH-01C

Description
Airflow switch with a 2-1/8 in. wide x 6-7/8 in. long (54 mm x 175 mm) paddle installed and a 3-1/8 in. wide x 6-7/8 in. long (79 mm x 175 mm) paddle supplied with the control

Replacement Paddle Kits for F262 Switch Product Code Number Description

PLT112-1R

2-1/8 in. wide x 6-7/8 in. long (54 mm x 175 mm) paddle

PLT112-2R

3-1/8 in. wide x 6-7/8 in. long (79 mm x 175 mm) paddle

Technical Specifications
F262 Switch Electrical Ratings Volts 50/60 Hz
Horsepower Full Load Amperes Locked Rotor Amperes Resistive Amperes Plot Duty VA

UL60730

24

120

208

240



1

1

1



16

10

10



96

60

60

16

16

10

10

125

720

720

720

EN60730

24

230







8



48

16

16

125

720

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R130

Liquid Level and Flow Controls
F262 Airflow Switch (Continued)

Switch Enclosure
Wiring Connections Conduit Connection Paddle Material Maximum Air Velocity Maximum Duct Air Temperature Ambient Conditions Compliance

F262 Series Airflow Switch
SPDT UL: Type 3R CE: IP43 Three color-coded screw terminals and one ground terminal One 7/8 in. (22 mm) hole for 1/2 in. trade size (or PG16) conduit 0.006 in. (0.15 mm) stainless spring steel 2,000 FPM (10.16 m/s) 176°F (80°C) 32 to 104°F (0 to 40°C) North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E6688; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits Europe: CE Mark  Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive. Australia/New Zealand Mark: RCM Compliant

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R131

Liquid Level and Flow Controls
F263 Series Liquid Level Float Switches

Code No. LIT-1900950

Description
The F263 Series Liquid Level Float Switches are designed to maintain a liquid level in indoor or outdoor closed tanks that hold water or other nonhazardous liquids. When the liquid level in the tank rises above or falls below the required level, the single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) switch closes one circuit and opens a second circuit.
Refer to the F263 Series Liquid Level Float Switches Product Bulletin (LIT-12011989) for important product application information.
Application
Use F263 Series Float Switches in closed tanks where a liquid level is to be maintained. A change in the liquid level opens or closes an electrical circuit.
Use F263MAP switches on indoor or outdoor tanks that hold water or other nonhazardous liquids at temperatures greater than the liquid's freezing point and between -20°F (-29°C) and 212°F (100°C). The maximum allowable liquid pressure is 150 psig (1,035 kpa).

Use F263MAC switches on indoor or outdoor tanks that hold water or other nonhazardous liquids at temperatures greater than the liquid's freezing point and between -20°F (-29°C) and 250°F (121°C). The maximum allowable liquid pressure is 100 psig (690 kpa).
Note: Do not use these float switches with liquids that are lighter than water.
Features
· Viton® diaphragm allows use in fluid lines carrying chlorinated water, treated water, or other nonhazardous liquids.
· single-pole, double-throw switch provides control where liquid levels rise and fall
· sturdy Type 4 (NEMA) enclosure allows for use in indoor or outdoor applications; inhibits the formation of moisture in low temperature applications.
· solid polycarbonate float (F263MAP models) provides greater resistance to corrosion

F263 Liquid Level Float Switch
Repair Information
If the F263 Series Liquid Level Float Switch fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement F263 Switch, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart

Product Code Number
F263MAC-V01C
F263MAP-V01C

Description
SPDT float switch with Type 4 (NEMA) enclosure and copper float for liquid temperatures -20 to 250°F (-29 to 121°C); maximum liquid pressure 100 psig (690 kPa)
SPDT float switch with Type 4 (NEMA) enclosure and polycarbonate float for liquid temperatures -20 to 212°F (-29 to 100°C); maximum liquid pressure 150 psig (1,035 kPa)

Technical Specifications
F263 Switch Electrical Ratings Volts 50/60 Hz
Horsepower Full Load Amperes Locked Rotor Amperes Resistive Amperes Plot Duty VA

UL60730

24

120

208

240



1

1

1



16

10

10



96

60

60

16

16

10

10

125

720

720

720

EN60730

24

230







8



48

16

16

125

720

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R132

Liquid Level and Flow Controls
F263 Series Liquid Level Float Switches (Continued)

Switch Enclosure
Wiring Connections Conduit Connection Pipe Connector Minimum Tank Diameter Maximum Liquid Pressure
Liquid Temperature Range
Ambient Conditions
Compliance

F263 Series Liquid Level Float Switches
SPDT UL: Type 4 (NEMA) CE: IP67 Three color-coded screw terminals and one ground terminal One 7/8 in. (22 mm) hole for 1/2 in. trade size (or PG16) conduit 1 in. 11-1/2 NPT threads 9 in. (229 mm) 100 psig (690 kPa) for copper float 150 psig (1,035 kPa) for polycarbonate float Minimum: -20°F (-29°C) or liquid freezing point Maximum: 212°F (100°C) polycarbonate, 250°F (121°C) copper Minimum: -40°F (-40°C) Maximum: 140°F (60°C) North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E6688; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits Europe: CE Mark  Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive. Australia/New Zealand Mark: RCM Compliant

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R133

Liquid Level and Flow Controls
F61 and F62 Series Replacement Paddles

Selection Chart
Replacement Kit Number
KIT21A-600 KIT21A-601 PLT112-1 PLT112-2

Description
3-in-1 stainless steel paddle kit for F61 Series 6 in. stainless steel paddle kit for F61 Series Replacement paddle for F62AA-8 Replacement paddle for F62AA-9

Code No. LIT-1922525

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-134

Liquid Level and Flow Controls

Code No. LIT-1922350

F92 Series Air Volume Controls for Shallow Wells

Description
The F92 Series Air Volume Controls for Shallow Wells control the amount of air in the residential water storage tanks of shallow well water systems. Shallow wells are less than 25 ft. (7.6 m) deep.
F92 Series Controls automatically maintain air volume in the storage tanks of shallow well water systems by allowing room air to enter into the air charging section of the pump when the water level in the tank rises (loss of air volume).
F92 Controls open the air valve on a rise in tank water level to permit charging air into the storage tank with pressures up to 80 psig (552 kPa).
Refer to the F92 Series Air Volume Controls for Shallow Wells Product Bulletin (Part No. 24-7664-2993) for important product application information.
Features
· sturdy Noryl (high performance thermoplastic) body resists mechanical damage and corrosion.
· brass internal operating parts minimize corrosion. · pressure tested plastic float provides long operating life. · optional pressure gauge tapping allows mounting of a pressure
gauge.

F92 Series Air Volume Control for Shallow Wells
Application
Water storage tanks in residential water systems rely on a volume of air in the tank to provide system pressure, making it important to control the amount of air in the tank:
· Too little air in the tank results in rapid pump cycling -- a problem common in shallow well systems (less than 25 ft [7.6 m] deep).
· Too much air in the tank results in air entering the distribution system -- a problem common in deep well systems (more than 25 ft [7.6 m] deep).
Repair Information
If the F92 Series Air Volume Controls for Shallow Wells fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement F92 Series control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart

Product Code Number
F92A-4C F92B-1C
F92B-2C

Description
Air Volume Control for Shallow Wells, opens on pressure rise, barbed fitting on charger valve Air Volume Control for Shallow Wells, opens on pressure rise, 1/4-18 PTF SAE short gage tap, 0.016 in. (0.5 mm) valve orifice. Use this model in applications where excessive airflow may reduce water pumping capacity. Air Volume Control for Shallow Wells, opens on pressure rise, 1/4-18 PTF SAE short gage tap

Technical Specifications

Body Material Float Material Maximum Tank Pressure Shipping Weight
Tank Connector Size Air Flow Restrictor Orifice Snifter Line Connection

F92 Series Air Volume Control for Shallow Wells
30% glass-filled Noryl thermoplastic Plastic with brass rod 80 psig (552 kPa) Individual: 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) Bulk pack (30): 30.9 lb (4.08 kg) 1-1/4 in. external NPT F92B-1C Model: 0.016 in. (0.5 mm) Flare fitting for 3/16 in. (5 mm) tubing

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-135

Liquid Level and Flow Controls

Code No. LIT-1922355

F93 Series Air Volume Controls for Deep Wells

Description
The F93 Series Air Volume Controls for Deep Wells control the amount of air in the residential water storage tanks of deep well water systems. Deep wells are more than 25 ft (7.6 m) deep.
F93 Series Controls automatically maintain air volume in the storage tanks of deep well water systems by allowing air to escape from the tank and into the surrounding room when the water level in the tank drops (increase of air volume).
F93 deep well controls open the air valve on a fall in tank water level to bleed excess air from the tank at pressures up to 100 psig (690 kPa).
The F93H has a minimum pressure release valve to avoid lowering tank pressure below 25 psig (172 kPa). Use this model on applications where water may be rapidly drained.
Refer to the F93 Series Air Volume Controls for Deep Wells Product Bulletin (Part No. 24-7664-3000) for important product application information.
Features
· sturdy Noryl (high performance thermoplastic) body resists mechanical damage and corrosion.
· brass internal operating parts minimize corrosion. · pressure tested plastic float provides long operating life. · optional pressure gauge tapping allows mounting of a pressure
gauge. · certification for Federal Safe Drinking Water Act (SDWA) meets the
US Federal standards of the Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act.

F93 Series Air Volume Control for Deep Wells
Application
Water storage tanks in residential water systems rely on a volume of air in the tank to provide system pressure, making it important to control the amount of air in the tank:
· Too little air in the tank results in rapid pump cycling - a problem common in shallow well systems (less than 7.6 m [25 ft] deep).
· Too much air in the tank results in air entering the distribution system -- a problem common in deep well systems (more than 7.6 m [25 ft] deep).
Repair Information
If the F93 Series Air Volume Controls for Deep Wells fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement F93 Series control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart

Product Code Number
F93A-1C F93B-1C F93H-1C

Description
Air Volume Control for Deep Wells, opens on pressure drop, no gage tap, no pressure release valve Air Volume Control for Deep Wells, opens on pressure drop, 1/4-18 PTF SAE short gage tap, no pressure release valve Air Volume Control for Deep Wells, opens on pressure drop, 1/4-18 PTF SAE short gage tap, with 25 psig (172 kPa) minimum air pressure release valve. Use this model in applications where water may be rapidly drawn from the system.

Technical Specifications
Body Material Float Material Maximum Tank Pressure Shipping Weight
Tank Connector Size Compliance

F93 Series Air Volume Control for Deep Wells
30% glass-filled Noryl thermoplastic Plastic with brass rod 100 psig (690 kPa) Individual: 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) Bulk pack (30): 30.9 lb (4.08 kg) 1-1/4 in. external NPT United States Federal Safe Drinking Water Act (SDWA) Compliant, Underwriters Laboratories Classified in Accordance with NSF/ANSI 372 (File MH59894)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-136

Motor Speed Controls

Code No. LIT-1900595

P266 Series Single-Phase Condenser Fan Speed Control

Description
The P266 Series Single-Phase Condenser Fan Speed Control is a cost-effective, weather-resistant, durable motor speed control. The P266 Series Controls are designed for approved single-phase, Permanent Split-Capacitor (PSC) motors commonly used in a wide variety of refrigeration and air conditioning condenser fan applications.
The P266 Series Controls are designed to replace the Johnson Controls® P66 Series and P215 Series fan speed controls, providing additional features and flexibility, greater energy efficiency, and longer motor life in a compact, rugged, weather-resistant package.
P266 Series Controls are available for 208 through 575 VAC 50/60 Hz range applications. P266 Series controls have current ratings from 4 to 12 A, depending on the voltage and model.
Some P266 Series Controls provide optional control of up to three auxiliary (fixed-speed) fans or fan stages. In addition, some models provide two additional high-voltage triacs that allow you to split the source power to the main and auxiliary windings, and connect a low-speed capacitor to increase efficiency at low-speed operation.
Refer to the P266 Series Single-Phase Condenser Fan Speed Control Product Bulletin (LIT-12011534) for important product application information.

Features
· one or two durable, accurate, stainless steel, remote-mount pressure transducers
· available in 208/240 VAC (8 or 12 A), 380/460 VAC (4 A), or 460/575 VAC (4 A)
· wide, adjustable pressure throttling range · optional auxiliary fan control · optional low-speed capacitor mode · NEMA 3R, (IP54) enclosure with integral
metal heat-sink and stand-off mounting feet
Application
The P266 Series Single-Phase Condenser Fan Speed Control, in conjunction with a P266 Series Electronic Pressure Transducer, is a pressure-actuated, digital electronic motor speed control designed for approved single-phase, PSC motors used in a wide variety of HVAC/R applications.
The P266 Series Fan Speed Control regulates supply voltage to the fan motor in response to the condenser refrigerant pressure and maintains the appropriate fan speed (air movement) through the condenser regardless of the ambient temperature or air delivery variations.
The P266 Series control is housed in a NEMA 3R (IP54) rainproof enclosure for outdoor applications.
The P266 Series control is an energy efficient and effective alternative to On/Off fan-cycling controls, multiple-speed motors, temperature fan-speed controls, modulating air-damper systems, condenser flood-back systems, and other condenser pressure control methods.

P266 Series Single-Phase Condenser Fan Speed Control
P266 Series Fan Speed Control applications include:
· computer room air conditioning · commercial refrigeration · commercial air conditioning
Repair Information
If a P266 Series Single-Phase Condenser Fan Speed Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement P266 Series control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Charts

P266 Series Fan Speed Control Model and Kit Product Code Numbers, Descriptions, and Details (Part 1 of 2)

Product Code Description

Transducer

Voltage Maximum High

Number

Model Included

(VAC) Output VAC

in Kit

Amperes Triacs

P266AAA-100C2 P266 Fan Speed Control (only)

N/A

208/240 8

3

P266ABA-100C2 P266 Fan Speed Control (only)

N/A

208/240 8

3

P266ACA-100C2 P266 Fan Speed Control (only)

N/A

208/240 8

1

P266ADA-100C2 P266 Fan Speed Control (only)

N/A

208/240 8

1

P266BGA-100C2 P266 Fan Speed Control (only)

N/A

460/575 4

2

P266BHA-100C2 P266 Fan Speed Control (only)

N/A

460/575 4

2

P266BCA-100C2 P266 Fan Speed Control (only)

N/A

460/575 4

1

P266BDA-100C2 P266 Fan Speed Control (only)

N/A

460/575 4

1

P266CHA-100C2 P266 Fan Speed Control (only)

N/A

380/460 4

2

P266ABA-1K2 P266 Fan Speed Control with one P266 Pressure Transducer P266SNR-1C, 0 to 35 bar 208/240 8

3

and one 2 m (6.6 ft) cable

(0 to 508 psig)

P266ABA-3K2 P266 Fan Speed Control with one P266 Pressure Transducer P266SNR-2C, 0 to 52 bar 208/240 8

3

and one 2 m (6.6 ft) cable

(0 to 754 psig)

Available Auxiliary Fan Control Circuits1
0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 3 3
3

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-137

Motor Speed Controls
P266 Series Single-Phase Condenser Fan Speed Control (Continued)

P266 Series Fan Speed Control Model and Kit Product Code Numbers, Descriptions, and Details (Part 2 of 2)

Product Code Description

Transducer

Voltage Maximum High

Number

Model Included

(VAC) Output VAC

in Kit

Amperes Triacs

Available Auxiliary Fan Control Circuits1

P266ABA-2K2 P266 Fan Speed Control with two P266 Pressure Transducers P266SNR-1C, 0 to 35 bar 208/240 8

and two 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cables

(0 to 508 psi)

3

3

P266ABA-4K2 P266 Fan Speed Control with two P266 Pressure Transducers P266SNR-2C, 0 to 52 bar 208/240 8

and two 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cables

(0 to 754 psi)

3

3

P266BHA-1K2 P266 Fan Speed Control with one P266 Pressure Transducer P266SNR-1C, 0 to 35 bar 460/575 4

and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable

(0 to 508 psi)

2

3

P266BHA-3K2 P266 Fan Speed Control with one P266 Pressure Transducer P266SNR-2C, 0 to 52 bar 460/575 4

and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable

(0 to 754 psi)

2

3

P266BHA-2K2 P266 Fan Speed Control with two P266 Pressure Transducers P266SNR-1C, 0 to 35 bar 460/575 4

and two 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cables

(0 to 508 psi)

2

3

P266BHA-4K2 P266 Fan Speed Control with two P266 Pressure Transducers P266SNR-2C, 0 to 52 bar 460/575 4

and two 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cables

(0 to 754 psi)

2

3

P266EAA-1K2 P266 Fan Speed Control with Internal Transformer and one

P266SNR-1C, 0 to 35 bar 208/240 8

P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable (0 to 508 psi)

3

0

P266EAA-3K2 P266 Fan Speed Control with Internal Transformer and one

P266SNR-2C, 0 to 52 bar 208/240 8

P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable (0 to 754 psi)

3

0

P266EBA-1K2 P266 Fan Speed Control with Internal Transformer and one

P266SNR-1C, 0 to 35 bar 208/240 8

P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable (0 to 508 psi)

3

3

P266EBA-3K2 P266 Fan Speed Control with Internal Transformer and one

P266SNR-2C, 0 to 52 bar 208/240 8

P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable (0 to 754 psi)

3

3

P266ECA-1K2 P266 Fan Speed Control with Internal Transformer and one

P266SNR-1C, 0 to 35 bar 208/240 8

P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable (0 to 508 psi)

1

0

P266ECA-3K

P266 Fan Speed Control with Internal Transformer and one P266SNR-2C, 0 to 52 bar 208/240 8 P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable (0 to 754 psi)

1

0

P266EDA-1K2 P266 Fan Speed Control with Internal Transformer and one

P266SNR-1C, 0 to 35 bar 208/240 8

P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable (0 to 508 psi)

1

3

P266EDA-3K2 P266 Fan Speed Control with Internal Transformer and one

P266SNR-2C, 0 to 52 bar 208/240 8

P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable (0 to 754 psi)

1

3

P266EEA-1K2 P266 Fan Speed Control with Internal Transformer and one

P266SNR-1C, 0 to 35 bar 208/240 12

P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable (0 to 508 psi)

1

0

P266EEA-3K2 P266 Fan Speed Control with Internal Transformer and one

P266SNR-2C,

208/240 12

P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable 0 to 52 bar (0 to 754 psi)

1

0

P266EFA-1K2

P266 Fan Speed Control with Internal Transformer and one

P266SNR-1C, 0 to 35 bar 208/240 12

P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable (0 to 508 psi)

1

3

1. 24 VAC Class 2 at 1/4 A. 2. Factory default settings: Start Voltage is set to 40% of the supply line-voltage. End Voltage is set to 95% of the supply line-voltage. Start Pressure is set to 44%
of the P266 Transducer's total pressure range. End Pressure is set to 51% of the P266 Transducer's total pressure range.

P266 Series SNR Electronic Pressure Transducers Product Code Description Number

P266SNR-1C

Electronic Pressure Transducer: 0 to 35 bar (0 to 508 psi) total range with a 1/4 in. SAE Internal Flare connection and a 2 meter (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable.

P266SNR-2C

Electronic Pressure Transducer: 0 to 52 bar (0 to 754 psi) total range with a 1/4 in. SAE Internal Flare connection and a 2 meter (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-138

Motor Speed Controls
P266 Series Single-Phase Condenser Fan Speed Control (Continued)

Technical Specifications

Input Supply Power
Short Circuit Current Rating
Low-Voltage Power Supply
Ambient Operating Conditions
Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions Low-Voltage Connections Input Transducer Enclosure Type Case Construction Cover Construction Dimensions (HxWxD) Weight
Compliance

P266xxx-x Series Single Phase Condenser Fan Speed Controls
208/240 VAC 50/60 Hz, 380/460 VAC 50/60 Hz, or 460/575 VAC 50/60 Hz, depending on model (Refer to the label inside the P266 Series control housing cover for rated voltage range and model-specific wiring diagram.)
Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 5,000 rms symmetrical amperes, 600 Volts maximum when protected by Class H Fuses.
P266A, P266B, and P266C Types: External 24 VAC Class 2, 20 VA Supply Transformer P266E Types: Low-voltage power for P266 control is provided by an onboard transformer. Note: When auxiliary fan starters are connected to P266E type controls, you must provide an external Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) AC supply to power the fan starters. Temperature: -40 to 60C (-40 to 140F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F) Temperature: -40 to 85C (-40 to 185F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
1/4 in. Quick-Connect terminals, 30 m (100 ft) maximum wiring runs
P266SNR-x Pressure Transducer: 5 VDC for 0.5 to 4.5 VDC ratiometric analog signal
NEMA 3R, IP54
Aluminum die casting
UV Stabilized Polycarbonate
159 x 177 x 70 mm (6-1/4 x 7 x 2-3/4 in.)
Heaviest model weight: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb) Approximate shipping weight: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb)
North America: cULus, File E244421; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class A limits
Europe: CE Mark  Johnson Controls, Inc., declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC.
Australia: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-139

Motor Speed Controls

Code No. LIT-1900622

P66/S66 Series Controls to P266 Series Controls Replacement Guide

P66/S66 to P266 Series Controls

Cross-Reference (Part 1 of 4)

Product Operating ETR Start Replacement

Code Number

Range (psig)

(psig) Voltage Control1

(%)

(see notes)

P66AAB-1 190/250 60

10

P66AAB-2 190/250 60

10

P66AAB-3 180/240 60

16

P66AAB-4 135/165 30

10

P66AAB-5 90/120 30

16

P66AAB-6 170/230 60

16

P66AAB-7 85/115 30

16

P66AAB-8 190/250 60

16

P66AAB-9 170/230 60

40

P66AAB-10 190/250 60

16

P66AAB-11 140/200 60

16

P66AAB-12 220/280 60

16

P66AAB-13 60/90

30

16

P66AAB-14 220/280 60

40

P66AAB-15 190/250 60

40

P66AAB-16 140/170 30

40

P66AAB-17 160/190 30

40

P66AAB-18 180/240 60

10

P66AAB-19 115/145 30

40

P66AAB-20 220/280 60

16

P66AAB-21 220/280 60

16

P66AAB-22 140/170 30

40

P66AAB-23 160/190 30

40

P66AAB-24 160/190 30

10

P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3

Transducer Sold Separately (see notes) P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4

P66/S66 to P266 Series Controls

Cross-Reference (Part 2 of 4)

Product Code Number

Operating ETR Start Replacement

Range (psig)

(psig) Voltage Control1

(%)

(see notes)

P66AAB-25 180/240 60

10

P66AAB-26 220/280 60

40

P66AAB-27 85/115 30

40

P66AAB-28 135/165 30

10

P66AAB-29 190/250 60

10

P66AAB-30 170/230 60

16

P66AAB-31 115/145 30

40

P66AAB-32 140/200 60

40

P66AAB-33 115/215 60

40

P66AAB-34 320/410 90

40

P66AAB-35 230/320 90

40

P66AAB-36 190/250 60

10

P66AAB-37 320/410 90

10

P66AAB-38 360/450 90

40

P66AAD-1 160/220 60

25

P66AAD-2 190/250 60

10

P66AAD-3 190/250 60

10

P66AAD-4 180/240 60

10

P66AAD-5 160/190 30

10

P66ABB-20 220/280 60

16

P66ABB-21 220/280 60

16

P66ABB-22 140/170 30

40

P66ABB-23 160/190 30

40

P66ABB-24 190/250 60

16

P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3

Transducer Sold Separately (see notes) P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-2C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-2C4 P266SNR-2C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-140

Motor Speed Controls

P66/S66 Series Controls to P266 Series Controls Replacement Guide (Continued)

P66/S66 to P266 Series Controls

Cross-Reference (Part 3 of 4)

Product Operating ETR Start Replacement

Code Number

Range (psig)

(psig) Voltage Control1

(%)

(see notes)

P66ABB-25 190/250 60

16

P66ABB-26 170/230 60

40

P66ABB-27 190/250 60

40

P66ABB-28 320/410 60

16

P66BAB-1 190/250 60

10

P66BAB-2 190/250 60

10

P66BAB-3 170/230 60

16

P66BAB-4 190/250 60

16

P66BAB-5 190/250 60

40

P66BAB-6 220/280 60

40

P66BAB-7 190/250 60

10

P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3

Transducer Sold Separately (see notes) P266SNR-1C4 P266SNR-1C4
P266SNR-1C4
P266SNR-2C4
P266SNR-1C5
P266SNR-1C5
P266SNR-1C5
P266SNR-1C5
P266SNR-1C5
P266SNR-1C5
P266SNR-1C5

P66/S66 to P266 Series Controls

Cross-Reference (Part 4 of 4)

Product Code Number

Operating ETR Start Replacement

Range (psig)

(psig) Voltage Control1

(%)

(see notes)

P66BAB-8 170/230 60

16

P66BAB-9 320/410 90

40

P66BAB-10 360/450 90

40

P66BBB-1 190/250 60

16

P66BAD-1 160/220 60

25

P66BAD-2 190/250 60

10

P66BAD-3 190/250 60

10

S66AA-1 NA

NA 50

P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3 P266ACA-100C6

Transducer Sold Separately (see notes) P266SNR-1C5
P266SNR-2C5
P266SNR-2C5
P266SNR-1C5
P266SNR-1C5
P266SNR-1C5
P266SNR-1C5
NA

S66DC-1 NA

NA 40

NR

NA

S66FA-1 NA

NA 50

P266ACA-100C6,7 NA

1. Factory default start voltage is 40%. 2. For 208/240 Volt applications 3. For 460/480 Volt applications 4. Use one transducer. 5. Use two transducers. 6. 0 to 5 VDC input, not 0 to 10 VDC 7. Hard start not available.
NA = Not applicable
NR = No replacement available

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-141

Motor Speed Controls
VFD68 Variable Frequency Drives

Code No. LIT-1900956

Description
The VFD68 Variable Frequency Drive provides three-phase motor speed control in a variety of HVAC/R applications. The VFD68 drive is designed primarily for condenser fan speed control on HVAC and refrigeration condensing units, but can also be set up to control a variety of pumps, blowers, and fans.
The VFD68 drive accepts an input signal from P499 Electronic Pressure Transducer, or other devices that provide a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA signal.
The application-specific design of the VFD68 drive provides a simple interface, which makes the drive easy to understand and operate.
You can quickly and easily reconfigure the VFD68 drive to control variable speed pumps in cooling and heating applications, or to control variable speed supply fans in VAV applications.
The VFD68 drive is an RS485, RTUcompliant ModBus® subordinate device and can be integrated into a ModBus network.
Refer to the VFD68 Variable Frequency Drives Product Bulletin (LIT-12012068) for important product application information.
Features
· Selectable input types allows use with 0 to 5 VDC (ratiometric), 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA input signals from transducers, sensors, and controllers.
· High input signal selection of two similar inputs (230 or 460 volt models only) provides fan speed control of dual circuit condensing units, based on the highest pressure circuit.
· Compact design provides for easy and flexible installation.
· Three-phase, 230, 460, or 575 VAC models can control a wide variety of three-phase motors ranging up to 10hp.
· Simple and advanced end-user settings provide quick and simple application setup and operation, as well as advanced setup parameters for custom applications.

Applications
The VFD68 drive accepts input signals from a variety of pressure transducers, temperature sensors, and low-voltage controllers to provide continuous response to changing condenser load conditions.
The VFD68 drive allows the system to:
· maintain optimum condenser head pressure
· operate in low ambient temperature
conditions down to -40ºC (-40ºF)
· reduce short-cycling, which occurs when using
· use On/Off fan controls · maintain a more stable evaporator
temperature · operate more efficiently, reducing
electricity cost. The VFD68 drive can also:
· help optimize compressor operation, reduce wear, and extend compressor life by stabilizing the condenser head pressures
· reduce motor repair and replacement costs by eliminating the condenser fan short-cycling
· extend refrigerated product life and provide more consistent comfort cooling by stabilizing evaporator temperatures
Selecting a Motor
IMPORTANT: When selecting the motor, do not exceed the maximum output current rating of the VFD68 drive
Motors used with the VFD68 drive must:
· be AC induction three-phase motors that are UL Recognized and CSA Certified, or equivalent
· be rated for: 230 VAC at 50/60 Hz; 460 VAC at 50/60 Hz; or 575 VAC at 60 Hz
· have an Inverter Rating (460 VAC motors) · have Insulation Class F or better The VFD68 drive is intended for use with variable speed motors that are rated for 40:1 operation.

VFD68BBB Variable Frequency Drive
A VFD68 drive can control multiple motors wired in parallel; however, the sum of the Full Load Amperes (FLA) ratings for the motors must not exceed the maximum output current rating of the VFD68 drive, including any de-rating due to altitude, temperature, or a combination of both.
IMPORTANT: Do not control both single-phase and three-phase motors with the same VFD68 drive.
Repair Information
If the VFD68 Variable Frequency Drive fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement VFD68 Drive, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-142

Motor Speed Controls
VFD68 Variable Frequency Drives (Continued)

Selection Charts

230 VAC ±10% Production Models

Product Code

Description

Number

VFD68BBB-2C

VFD68 Drive; 0.1 kw (1/8 hp); 128 x 68 x 81 mm (5 x 2-11/16 x 3-3/16 in.)

VFD68BCB-2C

VFD68 Drive; 0.2 kw (1/4 hp); 128 x 68 x 81 mm (5 x 2-11/16 x 3-3/16 in.)

VFD68BDC-2C

VFD68 Drive; 0.4 kw (1/2 hp); 128 x 68 x 113 mm (5 x 2-11/16 x 4-7/16 in.)

VFD68BFD-2C

VFD68 Drive; 0.75 kw (1 hp); 128 x 68 x 133 mm (5 x 2-11/16 x 5-1/4 in.)

VFD68BGG-2C

VFD68 Drive; 0.5 kw (2 hp); 128 x 108 x 136 mm (5 x 4-1/4 x 5-5/16 in.)

VFD68BHG-2C

VFD68 Drive; 2.2 kw (3 hp); 128 x 108 x 136 mm (5 x 4-1/4 x 5-5/16 in.)

VFD68BJK-2C

VFD68 Drive; 3.7 kw (5 hp); 128 x 170 x 142 mm (5 x 6-11/16 x 5-5/8 in.)

VFD68BKL-2C

VFD68 Drive; 5.5 kw (7-1/2 hp); 150 x 220 x 155 mm (5-15/16 x 8-11/16 x 6-1/8 in.)

VFD68BLL-2C

VFD68 Drive; 7.5 kw (10 hp); 150 x 220 x 155 mm (5-15/16 x 8-11/16 x 6-1/8 in.)

VFD68BMP-2C

VFD68 Drive; 11 kw (15 hp); 260 x 220 x 190 (10-1/4 x 8-11/16 x 7-1/2)

VFD68BNP-2C

VFD68 Drive; 15 kw (20 hp); 260 x 220 x 190 (10-1/4 x 8-11/16 x 7-1/2)

460 VAC ±10% Production Models

Product Code

Description

Number

VFD68CDF-2C

VFD68 Drive; 0.4 kw (1/2 hp); 128 x 108 x 130 mm (5 x 4-1/4 x 5-1/8 in.)

VFD68CFF-2C

VFD68 Drive; 0.75 kw (1 hp); 128 x 108 x 130 mm (5 x 4-1/4 x 5-1/8 in.)

VFD68CGG-2C

VFD68 Drive; 1.5 kw (2 hp); 128 x 108 x 136 mm (5 x 4-1/4 x 5-5/16 in.)

VFD68CHH-2C

VFD68 Drive; 2.2 kw (3 hp); 128 x 108 x 156 mm (5 x 4-1/4 x 6-1/8 in.)

VFD68CJJ-2C

VFD68 Drive; 3.7 kw (5 hp); 128 x 108 x 166 mm (5 x 4-1/4 x 6-1/2 in.)

VFD68CKL-2C

VFD68 Drive; 5.5 kw (7-1/2 hp); 150 x 220 x 155 mm (5-15/16 x 8-11/16 x 6-1/8 in.)

VFD68CLL-2C

VFD68 Drive; 7.5 kw (10 hp); 150 x 220 x 155 mm (5-15/16 x 8-11/16 x 6-1/8 in.)

VFD68CMP-2C

VFD68 Drive; 11 kw (15 hp); 260 x 220 x 190 (10-1/4 x 8-11/16 x 7-1/2)

VFD68CNP-2C

VFD68 Drive; 15 kw (20 hp); 260 x 220 x 190 (10-1/4 x 8-11/16 x 7-1/2)

575 VAC +5/-10% Production Models

Product Code

Description

Number

VFD68DFM-2C

VFD68 Drive; 0.75 kw (1 hp); 150 x 140 x 136 mm (5-15/16 x 5-1/2 x 5-5/16 in.)

VFD68DGM-2C

VFD68 Drive;1.5 kw (2 hp); 150 x 140 x 136 mm (5-15/16 x 5-1/2 x 5-5/16 in.)

VFD68DHM-2C

VFD68 Drive; 2.2 kw (3 hp); 150 x 140 x 136 mm (5-15/16 x 5-1/2 x 5-5/16 in.)

VFD68DJN-2C

VFD68 Drive; 3.7 kw (5 hp); 150 x 220 x 148 mm (5-15/16 x 8-11/16 x 5-13/16 in.)

VFD68DKN-2C

VFD68 Drive; 5.5 kw (7-1/2 hp); 150 x 220 x 148 mm (5-15/16 x 8-11/16 x 5-13/16 in.)

VFD68DLN-2C

VFD68 Drive; 7.5 kw (10 hp); 150 x 220 x 148 mm (5-15/16 x 8-11/16 x 5-13/16 in.)

Accessories
Product Code Number
P499RAPS100K P499RCPS100K
P499RAPS102K P499RCPS102K
P499RAP-101K P499RCP-101K P499RAP-102C P499RAP-105K P499RCP-105K P499RAP-107K P499RCP-107K WHA-PKD3-200C WHA-PKD3-400C WHA-PKD3-400C

Description

Accessory Information

Electronic Pressure Transducer (-10 to 100 psis [sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications] Range) and WHA-PKD3-200C Wire Harness
Electronic Pressure Transducer (0 to 200 psis [sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications] Range) and one WHA-PKD3-200C Wire Harness
Electronic Pressure Transducer (0 to 100 psig Range) and WHA-PKD3-200C Wire Harness
Electronic Pressure Transducer (0 to 200 psig Range)
Electronic Pressure Transducer (0 to 500 psig Range) and WHA-PKD3-200C Wire Harness
Electronic Pressure Transducer (0 to 750 psig Range) and WHA-PKD3-200C Wire Harness
Wire Harness with Pigtail Leads, 6-1/2 ft (2 m)
Wire Harness with Pigtail Leads, 13 ft (4 m)

· Product code numbers ending in K are P499 kit models that include one P499 Pressure Transducer model and a WHA-PKD3-200C (6-1/2 ft [2 m]) Wire Harness. To order a single P499 Pressure Transducer model (without a WHA-PKD3-200C Wire Harness), replace the K with a C at the end of the P499 product code number.
· P499RxP type models are 0.5 to 4.5 VDC ratiometric pressure transducers with Packard style electrical connections.
· P499RAP type models have a 1/8 in. 27 NPT external thread (Style 49) pressure connection.
· P499RCP type models have a 1/4 in. SAE 45° flare internal thread (7/16-20 UNF) with depressor (Style 47) pressure connection.
· Refer to the P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011190) for more information on P499 Pressure Transducer models and the associated wire harnesses.

Wire Harness with Pigtail Leads, 19-5/8 ft (6 m)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-143

Motor Speed Controls
VFD68 Variable Frequency Drives (Continued)

Technical Specifications
Input Power Voltage/Frequency
Output Voltage/Frequency
Input Devices PWM Carrier Frequency Motor Requirements Overload Capacity Start/Stop Ambient Conditions
Enclosures Maximum High Voltage Wire Length Compliance
Dimensions (H x W x D) Shipping Weight

VFD68 Variable Frequency Drive
230 VAC, 50 HZ (208/230 VAC, 60 Hz); 400 VAC, 50 Hz (460 VAC, 60 Hz); 575 VAC, 50 Hz; Continuous Duty
230 VAC, 50 HZ (208/230 VAC, 60 Hz); 400 VAC, 50 Hz (460 VAC, 60 Hz); 575 VAC, 50 Hz; Continuous Duty
Johnson Controls/PENN® P499 Electronic Pressure Transducers
Adjustable 0.7 to 15 kHz
Three-phase NEMA Design B motors required; Inverter-rated motors recommended
150% of ampere rating for 1 minute
Use STF input to start or stop the motor
Storage: -40 to 65ºC (-40 to 149ºF), 0 to 95% RH noncondensing
Operating: -40 to 50ºC (-40 to 122ºF), 0 to 95% RH noncondensing
Altitude: 1,000 m (3,300 ft) maximum without derating
UL Type 1 (NEMA) fan cooled (230 VAC 1 hp and lower models do not have a fan)
Up to 100 m (328 ft) between the VFD68 drive and the motor (using the appropriate wire gauge)
North America: cULus Listed, UL 508C, CSA-C22.2 No. 14, File E244421; Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits Europe: CE Mark- Johnson Controls Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevent provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive. Australia: Regulatory Compliance Mark (RCM)
Minimum: 128 x 68 x 81 mm (5 x 2-11/16 x 3-3/16 in.) Maximum: 260 x 220 x 190 mm (10-1/4 x 8-11/16 x 7-1/2 in.)
0.5 to 3.8 kg (1.1 to 8.38 lb)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-144

Valves and Valve Accessories

Code No. LIT-1927325

V43/V243 Series Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves

Description
The V43/V243 Pressure Actuated Water Regulating Valves are designed to regulate water flow through the condenser of large refrigerated cooling systems. These pilot-operated valves open on an increase in refrigerant head pressure and provide modulating operation.
The V43/V243 water regulating valves are available for commercial and maritime applications.
V43 valves are available for non-corrosive low- and medium-pressure refrigerants such as R-134A, R-404A, R-502, and R-507. Specially designed V43 valves are also available for ammonia service (R-717).
V243 valves are available for non-corrosive high-pressure refrigerants such as R410A.
Commercial V43/V243 valves are constructed with a cast iron body, brass internal parts, and bronze seat material.

To resist the corrosive action of sea water, the V43/V243 maritime and navy models are constructed with a red brass body, bronze and monel interior parts, and monel seat material.
Refer to the V43/V243 Pressure Actuated Water Regulating Valves Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-125683) for important product information.

Features
· built-in pilot valve allows more precise throttling
· easy adjustment allows service and adjustment without breaking line connections
· drain plug allows water to be drained during shutdown to reduce the possibility of freeze-up
· mesh monel screen protects pilot valve from items such as dirt and scale and is easily removed for cleaning and servicing without breaking any line connections

V43 Pressure Actuated Valve
Selection Charts
When ordering V43 valves, specify the complete product code number including an optional companion flange and gasket kit. A companion flange and gasket kit is required to mount the water lines to commercial type V43/V243 water-regulating valves.

Valve Construction and Pressure Type

Designator

Construction and Pressure Type

A

Commercial Service with Iron Body, Open on Pressure Increase, V43

B

Maritime Service with Brass Body, Open on Pressure Increase, V43

C

Navy Service with Brass Body, Open on Pressure Increase, V43

G

Commercial Service with Iron Body, Open on Pressure Increase, V243

H

Maritime Service with Brass Body, Open on Pressure Increase, V243

Flange Size Designator
S T V W

Flange Size
2 in. 2-1/2 in. 3 in. 4 in.

V43 Series Pressure Actuated Water Valves (except NAVSEA valves)

Product Code Number

Pipe Size (in.) Inlet and Outlet

Opening Point Adjustment Range psig (kPa)

Commercial Type  Non-Corrosive Refrigerants (R)

V43AS-1C

2

Four Hole ASME Flanged

70 to 150 (483 to 1,034)

V43AS-2C

160 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)

V43AT-1C

2-1/2

70 to 150 (483 to 1,034)

V43AT-2C

140 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)

V43AV-1C

3

70 to 150 (483 to 1,034)

V43AV-2C

160 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)

V43AW-2C

4

Eight Hole ASME Flanged

Commercial Type - Ammonia (R)

V43AV-5C

3

160 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)

Maritime Type  Non-Corrosive Refrigerants (R)

V43BS-6C

2

Four Hole ASME Flanged

70 to 150 (483 to 1,034)

V43BS-7C

160 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)

V43BT-6C

2-1/2

70 to 150 (483 to 1,034)

V43BT-7C

140 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)

V43BV-10C

3

70 to 150 (483 to 1,034)

V43BV-7C

140 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)

Shipping Wt. lb (kg)
59 (26.76) 65 (29.48) 90 (40.82) 90 (40.82) 142 (64.41) 90 (40.82) 59 (26.76) 65 (29.48) 90 (40.82)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-145

Valves and Valve Accessories
V43/V243 Series Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

Selection Charts (Continued)

V43 Series Pressure Actuated Water valves, Navy NAVSEA Certified

Product Code Pipe Size

Number

(in.)

Inlet and Outlet

Pressure Connector

Opening Point Adjustment Shipping Wt, lb (kg) Range  psig (kPa)

V43BS-3C V43CS-1C V43CS-2C V43BT-3C V43CT-2C V43BV-4C V43CV-1C V43CV-2C V43BW-7C V43BW-2C

2 2-1/2 3 4

Navy NAVSEA Certified  Non-Corrosive Refrigerants (R)
Four Hole ASME Flange 1/4 in. External Flared Connector 70 to 150 (483 to 1,034) Six Hole Navy Flange
Internal Sweat Connector Four Hole ASME Flange 1/4 in. External Flared Connector Six Hole Navy Flange Four Hole ASME Flange Internal Sweat Connector Eight Hole Navy Flange 1/4 in. External Flared Connector
Internal Sweat Connector Eight Hole ASME Flange 1/4 in. External Flared Connector
140 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)

59 (26.76) 65 (29.48) 90 (40.82) 142 (64.41)

V243 Series Pressurized Actuated Water Valves

Product Code Pipe Size

Number

(in.)

Inlet and Outlet

Opening Point Adjustment Range  psig (kPa)

Shipping Weight, lb (kg)

Commercial Type  High Pressure Refrigerants

V243GS-1C

2

Four Hole ASME Flange

200 to 400 (1,379 to 2,758)

59 (26.76)

V243GT-1C

2-1/2

65 (29.48)

V243GV-1C

3

90 (40.82)

V243GW-1C

4

Eight Hole ASME Flange

142 (64.41)

Maritime Type  High Pressure Refrigerants

V243HS-1C

2

Four Hole ASME Flange

200 to 400 (1,379 to 2,758)

59 (26.76)

V243HT-1C

2-1/2

65 (29.48)

V243HV-1C

3

90 (40.82)

V243HW-1C

4

Eight Hole ASME Flange

142 (64.41)

Accessories Kit Code Number

Water Valve Size (in.)

KIT14A-6131, 2

2

KIT14A-6141, 2

2-1/2

FLG15A-6001, 3

3

FLG15A-6011, 3

4

1. Commercial valves only. 2. These are the parts included in the flange and gasket kit for the 2-inch and 2-1/2 inch valves. 3. These are the parts included in the flange and gasket kit for the 3-inch and 4-inch valves.

Shipping Weight, lb (kg)
11.8 (5.4) 16.5 (7.5) 20 (9.1) 34 (15.4)

A companion flange and gasket kit is required to mount the water lines to commercial type V43/V243 water-regulating valves.

Cast Iron

Ring

Flange (Two)

Gasket (Two)

Hex

Machine

Nut (Eight) Bolt (Eight)

KIT14A

Cast Iron Flange (Two) Machine Bolt (Eight)
Hex Nut (Eight)
FLG15A

FIG:FLG15A

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-146

Valves and Valve Accessories
V43/V243 Series Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

Repair and Replacement Information
If a V43/V243 Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valve fails to operate within its specifications, replacement sensing elements, internal parts, and diaphragms are available for valve repair.
To obtain replacement parts, kits, instructions, and details, contact your nearest Johnson Controls® distributor at http://cgproducts.johnsoncontrols.com/dist_locate/locateDIST.asp.
For replacement parts, see Repair Parts and Parts Kits.

Repair Parts (Part 1 of 2)

Model

Diaphragm

Kit

V43AS-1C V43AS-2C V43AS-5C V43AT-1C V43AT-2C V43AT-5C V43AV-1C V43AV-2C V43AV-5C V43AW-1C V43AW-2C V43AW-5C V43BS-1C1 V43BS-2C1 V43BS-3C V43BS-6C V43BS-7C V43BT-1C1 V43BT-2C1 V43BT-3C V43BT-6C V43BT-7C V43BV-1C1 V43BV-2C1 V43BV-4C V43BV-5C1 V43BV-6C1 V43BV-7C V43BV-8C V43BV-9C V43BV-10C V43BW-1C V43BW-2C V43BW-5C V43BW-6C V43BW-7C V43CS-1C V43CS-2C V43CS-3C V43CT-1C V43CT-2C V43CV-1C V43CV-2C

DPM18A-600R DPM18A-600R DPM18A-600R DPM18A-601R DPM18A-601R DPM18A-601R DPM18A-602R DPM18A-602R DPM18A-602R DPM18A-603R DPM18A-603R DPM18A-603R DPM18A-600R DPM18A-600R
DPM18A-600R DPM18A-600R DPM18A-600R DPM18A-601R DPM18A-601R
DPM18A-601R DPM18A-601R DPM18A-601R DPM18A-602R DPM18A-602R
DPM18A-602R DPM18A-602R
DPM18A-602R
DPM18A-602R DPM18A-602R DPM18A-602R DPM18A-602R DPM18A-603R DPM18A-603R DPM18A-603R DPM18A-603R DPM18A-603R DPM18A-600R DPM18A-600R DPM18A-600R DPM18A-601R DPM18A-601R DPM18A-602R DPM18A-602R

Seat Disc and Seat Repair Diaphragm Kit Kit

DSC16A-600R DSC16A-600R DSC16A-600R DSC16A-601R DSC16A-601R DSC16A-601R DSC16A-602R DSC16A-602R DSC16A-602R DSC16A-603R DSC16A-603R DSC16A-603R DSC16A-600R DSC16A-600R

STT19A-602R STT19A-602R STT19A-602R STT19A-603R STT19A-603R STT19A-603R STT19A-606R STT19A-606R STT19A-606R STT19A-608R STT19A-608R STT19A-608R STT19A-602R STT19A-602R

DSC16A-600R DSC16A-600R DSC16A-600R DSC16A-601R DSC16A-601R

STT19A-600R STT19A-600R STT19A-600R STT19A-603R STT19A-603R

DSC16A-601R DSC16A-601R DSC16A-601R DSC16A-602R
DSC16A-602R

STT19A-605R STT19A-605R STT19A-605R STT19A-606R STT19A-606R

DSC16A-602R DSC16A-602R DSC16A-602R

STT19A-607R STT19A-606R STT19A-606R

DSC16A-602R DSC16A-602R DSC16A-602R DSC16A-602R DSC16A-603R DSC16A-603R DSC16A-603R DSC16A-603R DSC16A-603R DSC16A-600R DSC16A-600R DSC16A-600R DSC16A-601R DSC16A-601R DSC16A-602R DSC16A-602R

STT19A-607R STT19A-607R STT19A-607R STT19A-607R STT19A-609R STT19A-609R STT19A-609R STT19A-609R STT19A-609R STT19A-600R STT19A-600R STT19A-600R STT19A-605R STT19A-605R STT19A-607R STT19A-607R

Screen Repair Kit
SCN10A-600R SCN10A-600R SCN10A-600R SCN10A-600R SCN10A-600R SCN10A-600R SCN10A-600R SCN10A-600R SCN10A-600R SCN10A-600R SCN10A-600R SCN10A-600R SCN10A-601R SCN10A-601R
SCN10A-601R SCN10A-601R SCN10A-601R SCN10A-601R
SCN10A-601R
SCN10A-601R SCN10A-601R SCN10A-601R SCN10A-601R
SCN10A-601R
SCN10A-601R SCN10A-601R
SCN10A-601R
SCN10A-601R SCN10A-601R SCN10A-601R SCN10A-601R SCN10A-601R SCN10A-601R SCN10A-601R SCN10A-601R SCN10A-601R SCN10A-601R SCN10A-601R SCN10A-601R SCN10A-601R SCN10A-601R SCN10A-601R SCN10A-601R

Push Rod Kit1
ROD18A-600R ROD18A-600R ROD18A-600R ROD18A-601R ROD18A-601R ROD18A-601R ROD18A-601R ROD18A-601R ROD18A-601R ROD18A-602R ROD18A-602R ROD18A-602R ROD18A-602R
ROD18A-602R
ROD18A-602R ROD18A-602R ROD18A-602R ROD18A-603R ROD18A-603R
ROD18A-603R ROD18A-603R ROD18A-603R ROD18A-603R
ROD18A-603R
ROD18A-603R ROD18A-603R
ROD18A-603R
ROD18A-603R ROD18A-603R ROD18A-603R ROD18A-603R ROD18A-602R ROD18A-602R ROD18A-602R ROD18A-602R ROD18A-602R ROD18A-602R ROD18A-602R ROD18A-604R ROD18A-603R ROD18A-603R ROD18A-603R ROD18A-603R

Sensing Element Kit
SEP88A-600R SEP88A-601R SEP87A-600R SEP88A-600R SEP88A-601R SEP87A-600R SEP88A-600R SEP88A-601R SEP87A-600R SEP88A-600R SEP88A-601R SEP87A-600R SEP88A-600R
SEP88A-601R SEP88A-600R SEP88A-600R SEP88A-601R SEP88A-600R
SEP88A-601R SEP88A-600R SEP88A-600R SEP88A-601R SEP88A-600R
SEP88A-601R SEP88A-600R SEP88A-600R
SEP88A-601R SEP88A-601R SEP88A-600R SEP88A-601R SEP88A-600R SEP88A-600R SEP88A-601R SEP88A-600R SEP88A-601R SEP88A-600R SEP88A-600R SEP88A-600R SEP88A-600R SEP88A-600R SEP86A-600R SEP86A-600R SEP88A-600R

Disc Body Kit
DBK11A-600R DBK11A-600R DBK11A-600R DBK11A-601R DBK11A-601R DBK11A-601R DBK11A-602R DBK11A-602R DBK11A-602R DBK11A-603R DBK11A-603R DBK11A-603R DBK11A-600R DBK11A-600R
DBK10A-600R DBK10A-600R DBK10A-600R DBK11A-601R DBK11A-601R
DBK10A-602R DBK10A-602R DBK10A-602R DBK11A-602R DBK11A-602R
DBK10A-601R DBK11A-602R DBK11A-602R
DBK10A-601R DBK10A-601R DBK10A-601R DBK10A-601R DBK10A-603R DBK10A-603R DBK10A-603R DBK10A-603R DBK10A-603R DBK10A-600R DBK10A-600R DBK10A-600R DBK10A-602R DBK10A-602R DBK10A-601R DBK10A-601R

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-147

Valves and Valve Accessories
V43/V243 Series Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

Repair Parts (Part 2 of 2)

Model

Diaphragm

Kit

Seat Disc and Seat Repair Screen

Diaphragm Kit Kit

Repair Kit

V243GS-1C

DPM18A-600R DSC16A-600R STT19A-602R SCN10A-600R

V243GT-1C

DPM18A-601R DSC16A-601R STT19A-603R SCN10A-600R

V243GV-1C

DPM18A-602R DSC16A-602R STT19A-606R SCN10A-600R

V243GW-1C

DPM18A-603R DSC16A-603R STT19A-608R SCN10A-600R

V243HS-1C

DPM18A-600R DSC16A-600R STT19A-600R SCN10A-601R

V243HT-1C

DPM18A-601R DSC16A-601R STT19A-605R SCN10A-601R

V243HV-1C

DPM18A-602R DSC16A-602R STT19A-607R SCN10A-601R

V243HW-1C

DPM18A-603R DSC16A-603R STT19A-609R SCN10A-601R

1. Replacement push rod kit requires a seat repair kit and/or a diaphragm kit when replaced.

Push Rod Kit1
ROD18A-600R ROD18A-601R ROD18A-601R ROD18A-600R ROD18A-602R ROD18A-603R ROD18A-603R ROD18A-602R

Sensing Element Kit
SEP90A-600R SEP90A-600R SEP90A-600R SEP90A-600R SEP90A-600R SEP90A-600R SEP90A-600R SEP90A-600R

Disc Body Kit
DBK11A-600R DBK11A-601R DBK11A-602R DBK11A-603R DBK10A-600R DBK10A-601R DBK10A-602R DPK10A-603R

Parts Kits
The following valves, manufactured after date code 8702, contain monel interior trim. Order replacement kits as listed in Repair Parts or V43xx and V243xx Series Repair Parts Kits Technical Bulletin (LIT-121690).

Parts Kits Valve Model
V43BS-1C V43BS-2C V43BT-1C V43BT-2C V43BV-1C V43BV-2C V43BV-5C V43BV-6C

Order Parts Kits for:
V43BS-6C V43BS-7C V43BT-6C V43BT-7C V43BV-10C V43BV-7C V43BV-10C V43BV-9C

Dimensions

Symbol
A1 B C D E F2 F3 G H

2 Inch
9-1/2 in. (241 mm) 7-1/2 in. (191 mm) 4-3/4 in. (121 mm) 6 in. (152 mm) 2-1/8 in. (54 mm) 15-1/4 in. (387 mm) 15-29/32 in. (404 mm) 3/4 in. (19 mm) Diameter (Four) 3-5/8 in. (92 mm)

2-1/2 Inch
10-3/4 in.(273 mm) 8 in. (203 mm) 5-1/2 in. (140 mm) 7 in. (178 mm) 2-5/8 in. (67 mm) 15-9/16 in. (395 mm) 16-7/32 in. (412 mm) 3/4 in. (19 mm) Diameter (Four) 3-15/16 in. (100 mm)

1. Flange face to flange face. 2. These are the measurements for the V43 valves. 3. These are the measurements for the V243 valves.

3 Inch
11-3/4 in. (298 mm) 9 in. (229 mm) 6 in. (152 mm) 7-1/2 in. (191 mm) 3-1/8 in. (80 mm) 16-9/16 in. (421 mm) 17-7/32 in. (437 mm) 3/4 in. (19 mm) Diameter (Four) 4-1/4 in. (108 mm)

4 Inch
14 in. (356 mm) 10-3/4 in. (273 mm) 7-1/2 in. (191 mm) 9 in. (229 mm) 4-1/8 in. (105 mm) 18-7/32 in. (462 mm) 18-7/8 in. (479 mm) 3/4 in. (19 mm) Diameter (Eight) 5-1/16 in. (128 mm)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-148

Valves and Valve Accessories
V43/V243 Series Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

Six- and EightFlange Hole Configurations
E G
D

F E

D C G

G H

E D

A

B

V43/V243 Pressure Actuated Water Regulating Valves Dimensions

FIG:Dimensions

V43 Capacity Flow Charts

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise Above Valve Opening Point (psig)

CAPACITY CHART FOR 2 in. VALVE
Low Pressure Refrigerants

50 40

Water Pressure Available Across Valve (psi)

10

20 30 50

40 30
30 20
20
10 10

00 50
Medium Pressure Refrigerants

100 150 200 250 300 Water Flow (GPM)

350 400 450

CAPACITY CHART FOR 2-1/2 in. VALVE
Low Pressure Refrigerants

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise Above Valve Opening Point (psig)

50 40

Water Pressure Available Across Valve (psi)

10

20 30

50

40 30
30 20
20
10 10

00

50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450

Water Flow (GPM)

Medium Pressure Refrigerants

CAPACITY CHART FOR 3 in. VALVE
Low Pressure Refrigerants

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise Above Valve Opening Point (psig)

50 40

Water Pressure Available Across Valve (psi)

10 20 30

50

40 30
30 20
20
10 10

00

100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 Water Flow (GPM)

Medium Pressure Refrigerants

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise Above Valve Opening Point (psig)

CAPACITY CHART FOR 4 in. VALVE
Low Pressure Refrigerants

50 40

Water Pressure Available Across Valve (psi)

5

10 20 30

50

40 30
30 20
20
10 10

00

150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 Water Flow (GPM)

Medium Pressure Refrigerants

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-149

Valves and Valve Accessories
V43/V243 Series Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise Above Valve Opening Point (psig)

V243 Capacity Flow Charts
CAPACITY CHART FOR 2 in. VALVE
Water Pressure Available Across Valve (psi) 2 5 10 14.5 20 25 30 40 50 60
60
40
20
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 Water Flow (GPM)
CAPACITY CHART FOR 2-1/2 in. VALVE
Water Pressure Available Across Valve (psi)
2 5 1014.5 20 2530 40 50 60
60
40
20
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 Water Flow (GPM)

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise Above Valve Opening Point (psig)

CAPACITY CHART FOR 3 in. VALVE
Water Pressure Available Across Valve (psi)
2 5 10 14.5 20 25 30 40 50 60
60
40
20
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 Water Flow (GPM)

CAPACITY CHART FOR 4 in. VALVE

Water Pressure Available Across Valve (psi)

2

5

10 14.5 20 25 30

40

50

60

60

40

20

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300
Water Flow (GPM)

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise Above Valve Opening Point (psig)

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise Above Valve Opening Point (psig)

Technical Specifications

V43/V243 Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves

Maximum Water Supply Pressure

150 psig (1,034 kPa)

V43 Maximum Head Pressure

300 psig (2,068 kPa)

V243 Maximum Head Pressure

630 psig (4,344 kPa)

Head Pressure Range (Opening Points)

V43

Low Pressure

Refrigerants

R-134A  70 to 150 psig (482 to 1,034 kPa)

Medium Pressure R-22, R-502, R404A  160 to 260 psig (1,103 to 1,793 kPa) Refrigerants

Ammonia

160 to 260 psig (1,103 to 1,793 kPa)

V243

High Pressure

200 to 400 psig (1,379 to 2,758 kPa)

Factory Settings1

V43

Low Pressure

Refrigerants

90 psig (621 kPa)

Medium Pressure 180 psig (1,241 kPa) Refrigerants

Ammonia

180 psig (1,241 kPa)

V243

High Pressure

200 psig (1,379 kPa)

Maximum Water Supply Temperature

160°F (71°C)

Valve Body Material

Commercial

Cast iron

Maritime

Red brass

Internal Parts Material

Commercial

Brass

Maritime

Bronze, Monel

Seat Material

Pilot

Monel

Main Valve

Commercial  Bronze, Maritime  Monel

Seat Disc Material

Buna NTM

Packing  Bellows Assembly

Brass stem, stainless steel spring, synthetic rubber boot

Pressure Connection Refrigerant Side

Non-Corrosive

1/4 in. SAE External Flare

Ammonia

1/4 in. FNPT

1. Factory opening setpoint for the valve is adjustable.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-150

Valves and Valve Accessories

Code No. LIT-1927350

V46 Series Pressure Actuated Water Regulating Valve

Description
The V46 is a pressure actuated modulating valve that is suitable for use either on closed or open systems. Direct acting valves open on pressure increase. This type of valve is primarily used to regulate the flow of water or glycol to a water cooled condenser on a refrigeration system.
Refer to the V46 Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valve Product Bulletin (LIT-125687) for important product application information.

Features
· no close fitting or sliding parts in water passages · minimizes chatter or water hammer · free movement of all parts provides smooth pressure
modulation · refrigerant adjustment is not affected by water pressure · withstands high hydraulic shock without damage · range spring does not come in contact with cooling water · easy manual flushing, if required · 3/8, 1/2, and 3/4 in. valves may be disassembled and
reassembled without detaching from the refrigeration system or without pumping down
Applications
This valve is designed to modulate flow of water or glycol to a water cooled condenser on a refrigeration system.

V46AA-1 Water Regulating Valve

V46AT-1 Water Regulating Valve

Repair Information
If the V46 Series Pressure Actuated Water Regulating Valve fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement valve, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

· ice machines

· ice cream machines

· computer room air conditioning units · refrigeration cases

Selection Chart

Product Code Pipe

Number1

Size (In.)

V46AA-1C

3/8 NPT

Inlet and Outlet
Threaded

Opening Point Range  psig (kPa)

Pressure Element Style2

Seat Repair Kit

Commercial Type, Standard Flow - Non-Corrosive Refrigerant
70 to 260 (483 to 1,793) 30 in Capillary; 1/4 in. Flare Nut (Style 45) STT14A-600R

V46AA-50C V46AB-1C

1/2 NPT

1/4 in. External Flare Fitting (Style 5) 30 in Capillary; 1/4 in. Flare Nut (Style 45) STT15A-602R

V46AB-25C V46AC-1C

3/4 NPT

1/4 in. External Flare Fitting (Style 5) 30 in Capillary; 1/4 in. Flare Nut (Style 45) STT16A-601R

V46AC-26C V46AD-1C

1 NPT

1/4 in. External Flare Fitting (Style 5) 30 in Capillary; 1/4 in. Flare Nut (Style 45) STT17A-609R

V46AD-13C V46AE-1C

1 1/4 NPT

1/4 in. External Flare Fitting (Style 5) 30 in Capillary; 1/4 in. Flare Nut (Style 45) STT17A-610R

V46AE-17C V46AJ-2C V46EK-2C V46AL-2C V46AM-2C V46AR-1C
V46AR-10C V46AS-1C V46AS-2C V46AT-1C V46AT-2C

1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1 1/2
2 2 2-1/2 2-1/2

Union
Four Hole ASME Flange

1/4 in. External Flare Fitting (Style 5) 48 in Capillary; 1/4 in. Flare Nut (Style 46) STT15A-602R
STT16A-601R STT17A-609R STT17A-610R 30 in Capillary; 1/4 in. Flare Nut (Style 45)

70 to 170 (483 to 1,172)

1/4 in. External Flare Fitting (Style 5)

160 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793) (see Note below) 70 to 170 (483 to 1,172)

160 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)

STT18A-600R STT18A-601R

Replacement Power Elements
SEP91A-600R and SEC99AA-36C3 SEP91A-600R SEP91A-602R and SEC99AA-36C3 SEP91A-602R SEP91A-601R and SEC99AA-36C3 SEP91A-601R SEP91A-603R and SEC99AA-36C3 SEP91A-603R SEP91A-603R and SEC99AA-36C3 SEP91A-603R SEP77A-605R SEP127A-600R SEP107A-602R
SEP91A-603R and SEC99AA-36C3 SEP91A-603R SEP81A-602R SEP81A-601R SEP81A-602R SEP81A-601R

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-151

Valves and Valve Accessories
V46 Series Pressure Actuated Water Regulating Valve (Continued)

Product Code Pipe

Number1

Size (In.)

Inlet and Outlet

V46DA-2C

3/8 NPT Threaded

Opening Point Range  psig (kPa)

Pressure Element Style2

Seat Repair Kit

Commercial Type, Low Flow - Non-Corrosive Refrigerants4
70 to 260 (483 to 1,793) 30 in Capillary; 1/4 in. Flare Nut (Style 45) STT14A-603R

Commercial Type - Ammonia

V46AC-8C

3/4 NPT Threaded

100 to 200 (690 to 1,379) 1/4 in. Internal NPT (Style 15)

STT16A-601R

V46AD-4C

1 NPT

STT17A-609R

V46AE-4C

1-1/4 NPT

STT17A-610R

V46AR-2C V46AS-3C

1-1/2 2

Four Hole ASME Flange

STT18A-600R

V46AT-3C

2 1/2

STT18A-601R

Maritime Type - Non-Corrosive Refrigerants

V46BA-2C V46BB-2C

3/8 NPT Threaded 1/2 NPT

70 to 260 (483 to 1,793)

30 in. Capillary with Sweat Connection (Style 34)

STT14A-601R STT15A-603R

V46BC-2C

3/4 NPT

STT17A-613R

V46BD-2C

1 NPT

STT17A-611R

V46BE-2C

1-1/4 NPT

STT17A-612R

V46BS-4C V46BT-4C

2 2-1/2

Four Hole ASME Flange

160 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)

STT18A-602R

NAVSEA Certified  Non-Corrosive Refrigerants

V46CG-1C

3/8

V46CH-2C

3/8

Threaded Sweat Connector

70 to 260 (483 to 1,793)

30 in. Capillary with Sweat Connection (Style 34)

STT14A-601R

V46CH-4C

3/8

V46CH-5C

3/8

V46CJ-2C

1/2

Sweat Connector

STT15A-603R

V46CN-2C

3/4

V46CP-2C

1

Four Hole Navy Flange

STT17A-613R STT17A-611R

V46CQ-2C

1-1/4

STT17A-612R

V46BR-2C

1-1/2

Four Hole ASME Flange

V46CR-2C

1-1/2

Six Hole Navy Flange

V46BS-3C

2

Four Hole ASME Flange

70 to 170 (483 to 1,172)

STT18A-602R

V46CS-3C

2

Six Hole Navy Flange

V46CS-4C

2

160 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)

V46BT-3C

2-1/2

Four Hole ASME Flange

70 to 170 (483 to 1,172)

V46CT-3C

2-1/2

Six Hole Navy Flange

V46CT-4C

2-1/2

160 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)

1. Refer to V46 Series Valve Sizing Information -- 90% Open Method (LIT-1927400). Then specify the code number from this chart. Refer to the Accessories chart on the following page for companion flange kit code numbers.
2. Standard capillary length on Style 45 and Style 34 elements is 30 inches 3. Replacement element supplied with 1/4 in. external SAE connector. Order SEC99AA Capillary Kit with 2 flare nuts separately, if needed. 4. Low water flow valve - 2.5 GPM max. 5. Replacement element supplied with 1/4 in. external SAE connector. Order SEC99AA Capillary Kit with 2 flare nuts separately, if needed.

Replacement Power Elements
SEP91A-600R and SEC99AA-36C5 SEP70A-601R SEP70A-604R
SEP70A-605R
SEP13A-602R SEP13A-600R SEP13A-603R SEP50A-600R SEP50A-601R
SEP13A-602R
SEP13A-600R SEP13A-603R SEP50A-600R
SEP50A-601R

Note: Use only on valves specified.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-152

Valves and Valve Accessories
V46 Series Pressure Actuated Water Regulating Valve (Continued)

Accessories (Companion Flanges and Gaskets)

Product Code Number Flange Gasket (One Gasket per Package)
246-423
246-424
246-425
1. For commercial valves only

Companion Flange Kit (See Diagram)
KIT14A-6121 KIT14A-6131 KIT14A-6141

Note: Flange has NPT (National Pipe Thread)

Water Valve Size (in.)
1-1/2 in. 2 in. 2-1/2 in.

Cast Iron

Ring

Flange (Two)

Gasket (Two)

Hex

Machine

Nut (Eight) Bolt (Eight)

Companion Flange Kit

Technical Specifications

Maximum Water Temperature Valve Body Commercial
Navy and Maritime

V46 Series Pressure Actuated Water Regulating Valves
170°F (77°C) 3/8 to 3/4 in. cast brass, 1 in. and larger cast iron with a special finish Cast naval bronze with Monel® interior parts

Pressure Range Specification Refrigerant

Opening Point Range1 - psig Maximum Permissible Pressure

(kPa)

psig (kPa)

V46A B, C, D

Water

Static

P Across Valve

Non-Corrosive Refrigerants (R12, R22, R134a, R502, R404a, R507)

All Range Valve

70 to 260 (483 to 1,793)

150 (1,034) 60 PST

All Range with High Overpressure

3/8 in. Extended All Range

70 to 300 (483 to 2,068)

Valves 2 in. or Larger

R12, R134a - 2 and 2-1/2 in. Low Range

70 to 170 (483 to 1,172)

150 (1,034) 60 PST

R22, R502, R404a, R507 - 2 and 2-1/2 in. High Range

160 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)

Other Refrigerants

Ammonia R717

100 to 200 (690 to 1,379)

150 (1,034) 60 PST

1. Direct acting valve ranges indicate the valve opening point.

Refrigerant
320 (2,206) 370 (2,551) 440 (3,034)
230 (1,586) 320 (2,206)
320 (2,206)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-153

Valves and Valve Accessories
V46N Series Reverse Acting Valve

Description
The V46N Series are reverse acting pressure actuated modulating valves used on either open or closed loop coolant systems. Reverse acting valves open on a refrigerant pressure decrease. They are generally used in parallel with a direct acting valve for heat pump applications or for bypass operation.
Refer to the V46 Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Product Bulletin (LIT-125687) for important product application information.

Applications
· bypass systems · water cooled heat pumps in parallel with
direct acting valve
Repair Information
If the V46N Series Reverse Acting Valve fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement valve, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Code No. LIT-1927335

V46 Series Reverse Acting Valve

Selection Chart

Product Code Pipe Size Inlet and Opening Point

Number1

In.

Outlet Range psig (kPa)

Pressure Element Style

Seat Repair Kit

Replacement Power Elements

V46NA-1C V46NA-4C V46NB-1C V46NB-2C V46NC-1C V46NC-2C V46ND-1C V46ND-2C

3/8 NPT 1/2 NPT 3/4 NPT 1 NPT

Threaded

Commercial Type  Non-Corrosive Refrigerants (R)

90 to 280 (621 to 1,931) 30 in. capillary with 40 to 1003 (276 to 690) 1/4 in. flare nut

STT14A-600R

90 to 280 (621 to 1,931) + Schrader 40 to 1003 (276 to 690) Valve depressor

STT15A-602R

90 to 280 (621 to 1,931) (Style 45) 40 to 1003 (276 to 690)

STT16A-601R

90 to 280 (621 to 1,931) 40 to 1003 (276 to 690)

STT17A-609R

SEP91A-600R & SEC99AA-36C2 SEP91A-602R & SEC99AA-36C2 SEP91A-601R & SEC99AA-36C2 SEP91A-603R & SEC99AA-36C2

V46NE-1C V46NE-2C

1-1/4 NPT

90 to 280 (621 to 1,931) 40 to 1003 (276 to 690)

STT17A-610R

1. Refer to V46 Series Valve Sizing Information -- 90% Open Method (LIT-1927400), and then specify the code number from this chart. 2. Maximum bellows overpressure is 320 psig (2,206 kPa). Replacement element provided with 1/4 in. external SAE connector. Order SEC37A capillary kit with
two flare nuts, separately if needed. Use only on valves specified. 3. For heat pump application.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-154

Valves and Valve Accessories

Code No. LIT-1927400

V46 Series Valve Sizing Information--90% Open Method

To Select Water Valve Size:
See the Flow Chart for selection of water valves. Carefully follow the steps as outlined below.
1 Determine maximum water flow required. The manufacturer of the condensing unit will usually provide tables, or calculations can be made from the following: a Maximum Btu per hour to be removed. (Be sure to add heat gains in refrigeration equipment and heat of compression. If figures are not available, it is customary to add 25% to the load for these heat gains.) b Incoming water temperature at time of maximum load. c Outlet water temperature; this must be lower than condensing temperature of the refrigerant - use condensing unit manufacturer's data, or assume 10° difference. d Flow (gallons/min) =
(Tons of Refrigeration x 15,000 Btu/h)
500 x (Outlet Temperature - Inlet Temperature)
2 Draw horizontal line across upper half of flow chart through flow required as determined by Step 1d above.
3 Determine the available system pressure for use with the valve by the following appropriate method: Open System: Available System Pressure = Inlet Pressure condenser pressure drop - friction losses in piping. Closed System: Available System Pressure = Inlet Pressure static head - condenser pressure drop - friction losses in piping. The available system pressure is represented by the curve in the lower half of the flow chart.
4 Draw a horizontal line from 55 psi head pressure rise above opening point (valve approximately 90% open) to the available system pressure. If the point falls between two curves, use the curve to the left (this gives an automatic safety factor).
5 From the point where the horizontal line intersects the available system pressure curve, draw a vertical line upwards until it intersects with the horizontal line from Step 2.
6 If the intersection falls on a valve size curve, this is the valve size.
7 If the intersection falls between two curves, use the curve to the left for the required valve size.

v46size.eps
Water Flow In Gallons/Minute

Refrig. Head Press. Above Opening PT. (PSI)

Water Flow In Liters/Minute

300 200
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
20

Valve Size
3/8 in. thru 1-1/2 in. 2 in., 2-1/2 in.

Flow Chart Refrigerant
All-range R-12, R-500, R-22, R-502, Ammonia, R-12, R-500

10 9 8 7 6 5 4
3
2

1 60

50

2

5

10

(14)

(34)

(69)

40

2-1/2 2
1-1/2 1-1/4 1 3/4
1/2 3/8

1136 757
379 341 303 256 227 189 151 114
76
38 34 30 26 23 19 15 11
7

3.8 414

20 (138)

30 (207)

40 (276)

50 (345)

6 (414)

345

276

Refrig. Head Press. Above Opening PT. (kPa)

30

207

20

138

10
0 Water Pressure Drop Through Valve PSI (kPa) Flow Chart, V46 Valve

69
0
flowch1

Example:
1 The required flow of an R404A system is found to be 40 GPM (151 l/m). City water pressure is 40 psig (276 kPa) and manufacturer's table gives drop through condenser and accompanying piping and valves at 15 psi (103 kPa) drop through installed piping approximately 5 psi (35 kPa), leaving a net pressure drop available of 20 psi.
2 Draw a line through 40 GPM (151 l/m) - see dotted line, upper half of flow chart. 3 Size valves at 55 psi head pressure rise above opening point (valve is
approximately 90% open). 4 Draw a line through 55 psi (375 kPa) - see dotted line, lower half of flow chart.

5 Available water pressure drop through valve = 40 - 20 = 20 psi (276 - 137 = 137 kPa).
6 Draw vertical line upward from this point to flow line - circle on flow chart marks this intersection.
7 Since the intersection falls between curves for 1 in. and 1-1/4 in. valves, choose the larger size. A 1-1/4 in. valve is required.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-155

Valves and Valve Accessories
V46 Series Valve Dimensions

Code No. LIT-1927410

Roughing-in Dimensions
Commercial Service: V46 Threaded Connection Dimensions

(A)

Valve

Dimensions in Inches

Size

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

3/8 in.

2-5/8

6-3/4

3-1/8

1-1/2 1-1/4 13/32 3-7/32

1/2 in.

3-1/8 (3-1/4)1

7-13/32 3-3/8 1-27/32 1-1/2 13/32 3-5/8

3/4 in.

3-3/8 (3-5/8)1

7-7/8

3-7/8 2-1/32 1-3/4 13/32 3-21/32

1 in.

4-1/2 (4-7/8)1

10-3/4 5-1/2 2-25/32

2

1/2

4-3/4

1-1/4 in.

4-7/8

11-1/8

5-3/4

2-5/8 2-3/8 1/2 4-29/32

(E)

1. Values in parenthesis are for maritime valves. All other dimensions remain the same.

(D) (F) (C)
(B)

(G)

(A) (D)

(E) (G)
(H)

V46 Series Threaded Type Valves

(C)

(B)

(F)

(I)

v46tbfg5.eps v46tbfg4.eps

Flange Type Valves

Commercial Service: V46 Flange Connection Dimensions

Valve

Dimensions in Inches

Size

A

B

C

D

E

F

1-1/2 in. 5-5/16 11-1/8 5-3/4

9/16

5

1-7/8

2 in.

6-5/8

13

6-15/32

5/8

6

2-1/4

2-1/2 in.

6-3/4 13-1/2 6-3/8

3/4

7 2-23/32

G
2-5/8 3-1/2 3-1/2

H
1/2 1/2 1-1/32

I
4-29/32 6-1/8 6-3/32

V46 Flange Specifications

No. of Holes Hole Size

Bolt Circle

4

5/8

3-7/8

4

3/4

4-3/4

4

3/4

5-1/2

Maritime Service: ASME Flange Connection Dimensions

Valve

Dimensions in Inches

Size

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

ASME Flange Specifications

I

No. of Holes Hole Size

Bolt Circle

1-1/2 in. 5-5/16 10-1/2 5-5/8

9/16

5

1-7/8 2-5/8 1/2

5

4

5/8

3-7/8

2 in.

6-3/8 13-1/8 6-1/2

1/2

6

2-3/4 3-1/2 5/8

6

4

3/4

4-3/4

2-1/2 in.

6-3/4 13-1/8 6-1/2

11/16

7

2-3/4 3-1/2 5/8

6

4

3/4

5-1/2

Navy BuShips Service: Navy Flange Connection Dimensions

Valve

Dimensions in Inches

Size

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

3/4 in.

4-3/16 7-3/4

4

7/16 3-13/16 1-1/8 2-1/32 1/2 3-5/16

1 in

5-5/16

9

4-1/2 1/2 4-1/4 1-1/4 2-5/8 1/2

4

1-1/4 in. 5-5/16 9-11/32 4-11/16 1/2 4-1/2 1-5/8 2-5/8 1/2 4-5/32

1-1/2 in. 5-5/16 10-7/32 5-3/4 1/2 5-1/16 1-7/8 2-5/8 1/2

4

2 in.

6-3/8 14-1/8 6-13/32 1/2 5-9/16 2-3/4 3-1/2 7/16 7-9/32

2-1/2 in.

6-3/8 14-5/16 6-1/2

1/2

6-1/8 2-3/4 3-1/2 5/8 7-3/16

Navy Flange Specifications

No. of Holes

Hole Size

Bolt Circle

4

9/16

2-11/16

4

9/16

3-1/8

4

9/16

3-3/8

6

9/16

3-15/16

6

9/16

4-7/16

6

9/16

5

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-156

Valves and Valve Accessories

Code No. LIT-1927330

V47 Series Temperature Actuated Modulating Valve

Description
The V47 is a temperature actuated modulating valve that regulates the flow of water or glycol to maintain a desired temperature. Three temperature ranges for each valve size are available.
Many valves come with a removable bypass plug that can be replaced by the bypass orifice provided separately with each valve. Valve action is open on temperature increase. For open on temperature decrease models, contact Application Engineering.
Refer to the V47 Series Temperature Actuated Modulating Water Valves Product Bulletin (LIT-125690) for important product application information.

Features
· no close fitting sliding parts in water passages
· range spring does not come in contact with the cooling water
· easy manual flushing, if required · valve design minimizes chatter and water
hammer
Repair Information
If the V47 Series Temperature Actuated Modulating Valve fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement valve, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart

V47 Series Valve

Product Code Pipe Range

Bulb Size, in. Std Bypass Seat Repair Kit Replacement

Bulb Well Number

Number1

Size, in. (Opening Point) °F (Dia. length) Orifice Dia., in.

Sensing Element Order Separately

V47AA-1C

3/8

115 to 180 Heating

11/16 x 3-1/4 0.062

STT14A-600R SET29A-622R

WEL18A-602R

V47AA-2C

3/8

160 to 230 Heating

11/16 x 3-1/4 0.062

STT14A-600R SET29A-623R

WEL18A-602R

V47AA-3C

3/8

V47AA-26C2

3/8

V47AB-2C

1/2

75 to 135 Cross Ambient 20 to 65 Cross Ambient 75 to 135 Cross Ambient

11/16 x 6 11/16 x 63
11/16 x 103

0.062  

STT14A-600R STT14A-600R STT15A-602R

SET29A-601R  SET29A-602R

WEL17A-601R WEL17A-601R WEL17A-600R

V47AB-3C

1/2

115 to 180 Heating

11/16 x 3-1/4 0.062

STT15A-602R SET29A-624R

WEL18A-602R

V47AB-4C

1/2

160 to 230 Heating

11/16 x 3-1/4 0.062

STT15A-602R

SET29A-625R

WEL18A-602R

V47AB-5C

1/2

V47AB-27C4

1/2

75 to 135 Cross Ambient 11/16 x 10 40 to 85 Cross Ambient 11/16 x 103

0.062 Yes5

STT15A-602R STT15A-602R

SET29A-602R 

WEL17A-600R WEL17A-600R

V47AC-3C

3/4

115 to 180 Heating

11/16 x 3-1/4 0.062

STT16A-601R SET29A-626R

WEL18A-602R

V47AC-4C

3/4

160 to 230 Heating

11/16 x 3-1/4 0.062

STT16A-601R SET29A-627R

WEL18A-602R

V47AC-6C

3/4

75 to 135 Cross Ambient 11/16 x 10

0.062

STT16A-601R SET29A-604R

WEL17A-600R

V47AC-8C

3/4

V47AC-40C

3/4

75 to 135 Heating

11/16 x 3-1/4

40 to 85 Cross Ambient 11/16 x 10

 Yes5

STT16A-601R STT16A-601R

SET98A-621R 

WEL18A-602R WEL17A-600R

V47AD-1C

1

75 to 135 Cross Ambient 11/16 x 16-1/4 0.093

STT17A-609R SET29A-605R



V47AD-2C

1

115 to 180 Heating

11/16 x 6

0.093

STT17A-609R SET29A-629R

WEL17A-601R

V47AD-3C

1

160 to 230 Heating

11/16 x 6

0.093

STT17A-609R SET29A-630R

WEL17A-601R

V47AD-19C

1

40 to 85 Cross Ambient 11/16 x 16-1/4 0.093

STT17A-609R 



V47AE-1C

1-1/4

75 to 135 Cross Ambient 11/16 x 16-1/4 0.093

STT17A-610R SET29A-605R



V47AE-2C

1-1/4

115 to 180 Heating

11/16 x 6

0.093

STT17A-610R SET29A-629R

WEL17A-601R

V47AE-3C V47AE-13C V47AR-1 V47AR-2 V47AR-3 V47AS-1 V47AS-2 V47AS-3 V47AS-13C V47AT-1 V47AT-2 V47AT-3

1-1/4
1-1/4 1-1/26 1-1/26 1-1/26 26 26 26 26 2-1/26 2-1/26 2-1/26

160 to 230 Heating 40 to 85 Cross Ambient 75 to 135 Cross Ambient 115 to 180 Heating 160 to 230 Heating 115 to 160 Heating 160 to 205 Heating 75 to 115 Cross Ambient 40 to 85 Cross Ambient 115 to 160 Heating 160 to 205 Heating 75 to 115 Cross Ambient

11/16 x 6 11/16 x 16-1/4 11/16 x 16-1/4 11/16 x 6 11/16 x 6 11/16 x 10 11/16 x 10 11/16 x 43 11/16 x 43 11/6 x 10 11/6 x 10 11/16 x 43

0.093 Yes5 0.093 0.093 0.093 0.125 0.125 0.125 Yes5 0.125 0.125 0.125

STT17A-610R STT17A-610R STT17A-610R STT17A-610R STT17A-610R STT18A-600R STT18A-600R STT18A-600R STT18A-600R STT18A-601R STT18A-601R STT18A-601R

SET29A-630R  SET29A-605R SET29A-629R SET29A-630R SET29A-632R SET29A-633R SET29A-606R  SET29A-632R SET29A-633R SET29A-606R

WEL17A-601R   WEL17A-601R WEL17A-601R WEL17A-600R WEL17A-600R   WEL17A-600R WEL17A-600R 

1. Standard capillary is 6 ft (Style 4) 2. 2 ft capillary 3. Style 1 bulb (does not include 1/2 in. external NPT fitting) 4. 4 ft capillary

5. Solid plug installed, orifice available separately 6. ASME Flange
Note: For more information on Bulb Wells, refer to Bulb Wells (LIT-1922135).

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-157

Valves and Valve Accessories
V47 Series Temperature Actuated Modulating Valve (Continued)

Accessories (Companion Flanges and Gaskets)

Product Code Number Flange Gasket (One Gasket per Package)
246-423 246-424 246-425

Companion Flange Kit (See Diagram)
KIT14A-612 KIT14A-613 KIT14A-614

Note: Flanges have NPT (National Pipe Thread).

Water Valve Size (in.)
1-1/2 in. 2 in. 2-1/2 in.

Technical Specifications

V47 Series Temperature Actuated Modulating Valves

Maximum Bulb Temperature

20F° (-6.7 C°) above temperature range

Maximum Water Temperature

170°F (77°C)

Maximum Supply Water Pressure Capillary

150 psig (1,034 kPa) Nylon Armor1

Temperature Bulb Style 42 (pictured)

(1/2 in. NPT closed tank immersion)

1. For capillary length, refer to the selection chart on the previous page. 2. V47AA-26, V47AB-2, V47AB-27 -- Temperature Bulb Style 1 (no 1/2 in. NPT external fitting)

Cast Iron

Ring

Flange (Two)

Gasket (Two)

Hex

Machine

Nut (Eight) Bolt (Eight)

Companion Flange Kit

Metric Conversion °F
20 to 65 40 to 85 75 to 115 75 to 135 115 to 160 115 to 180 160 to 205 160 to 230

°C
-6 to 18 4 to 29 24 to 46 24 to 57 46 to 71 46 to 82 71 to 96 71 to 110

V47 Valve Sizing Information
To Select Water Valve Size, see the flow chart for selection of water valves. Carefully follow the steps as outlined below.
1 Determine the maximum water flow required. Draw a horizontal line through this flow across the upper half of the flow chart.
2 Use the following method to determine the temperature rise above the opening point. a Valve closing point is the highest temperature at which it is desired to have no flow through the valve. b Valve opening point is about 5F° above the closing point. c Determine the temperature the valve is to maintain, this is the operating temperature. d Subtract the opening temperature from the operating temperature. This is the temperature rise above the opening point.
3 Determine the available system pressure for use with the valve by the following appropriate method: Open System: Available System Pressure = Inlet Pressure condenser pressure drop - friction losses in piping. Closed System: Available System Pressure = Inlet Pressure static head - condenser pressure drop-friction losses in piping. The available system pressure is represented by the curve in the lower half of the flow chart.
4 In the lower half of the flow curve, draw a horizontal line from the temperature above the opening point (Step 2d) to the available system pressure (Step 3). If the point falls between two pressure drop curves, use the curve to the left (this gives an automatic factor of safety).
5 From this point, draw a vertical line until it intersects the flow line from Step 1.
6 If the intersection falls on a valve size curve, this is the valve size.
7 If the intersection falls between two curves, use the curve to the left for the required valve size.

300
200
100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30
20 Water Flow Gal. / Min.
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
2

36

30

Temperature

Rise Above

24

Open(ionFg)Point

18

12

6

0

2

5

10

(14)

(34)

(69)

2-1/2 2

1136 757

1-1/2 1-1/4 1 3/4 1/2
3/8

379 349 303 265 227 189 151
114
76
Water Flow L/Min.
38 34 30 26 23 19 15
11

7

20 (138)

3.8

50

2

30

40 (345)

(207) (276)

-1

60 (414)

Temperature -4 Rise
Above Open(ionCg)Point
-8

-11

-14

-18
Flow Chart, V47 Valve

v47_flowchart.eps

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-158

Valves and Valve Accessories
V47N Series Reverse Acting Valve

Description
The V47N Series are reverse-acting, temperature-actuated, modulating valves that regulate the flow of water or glycol to maintain a desired temperature. Reverse-acting valves open on a drop in temperature. They are generally used in parallel with direct-acting valves for hand pump applications or for bypass operation.
Refer to the V47 Series Temperature Actuated Modulating Water Valves Product Bulletin (LIT-125690) for important product application information.

Applications
· bypass systems · water-cooled heat pumps in parallel with a
direct-acting valve

Code No. LIT-1900107

V47N Series Reverse Acting Valve

Selection Charts

V47N Series Reverse Acting Valve

Product Code

Pipe Size & Connector

Number1

Opening Point Range

Factory-set Opening Point

Bulb Size, In.

Standard Bypass Orifice

V47NB-1C

1/2 in. Screw

85 to 155°F

105°F

11/16 x 3-1/4

--

V47NC-1C

3/4 in. Screw

V47NR-1C

1-1/2 in. Flange

45 to 85°F

55°F

11/16 x 16-1/4

1. Refer to sizing information in V47 Series Temperature Actuated Modulating Valve (LIT-1927330), then specify the code number from this chart.

Repair Parts and Accessories

Parts For:

Product Code Number

Seat Repair Kit

V47NB-1C V47NC-1C V47NR-1C

STT15A-602R STT16A-601R STT17A-610R

Replacement Sensing Element
--
SET29A-605R

Bulb Well Number (Order Separately)
WEL18A-602R (Brass)
--

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-159

Valves and Valve Accessories
V48 Series Three-Way Water Regulating Valve

Code No. LIT-1927345

Description

Applications

V48 Series valves are designed specifically for condensing units cooled either by atmospheric or forced draft cooling towers.

V48 Series valves are used on single or multiple condenser hook-ups to the tower to provide the most economical and efficient use of the tower.

Refer to the V48 Series 3-Way Water Regulating Valves for Cooling Tower Systems Product Bulletin (LIT-121705) for important product application information.

Repair Information
If the V48 Series Three-Way Water Regulating Valve fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement valve, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

V48 Series Three-Way Water Regulating Valve

Selection Chart (Non-Corrosive Refrigerants)

Product Code Number

Pipe Size, In.

Range Opening Point of Normally Closed Side psi (kPa)

Pressure Element Style

Water Inlet Supply and Pressure Outlet
Ports

Max

Seat Repair

Bellows

Kit

Overpressure

V48AB-1C 1/2 V48AB-2C 1/2

85 to 110 (586 to 758)
145 to 190 (1,000 to 1,310)

30 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut (Style 45)1

150 psig Threaded (1,034 kPa)

230 psig (1,586 kPa)
320 psig (2,206 kPa)

STT15A-605R

V48AC-1C 3/4

85 to 110 (586 to 758)

230 psig (1,586 kPa)

STT16A-604R

V48AC-2C 3/4

145 to 190 (1,000 to 1,310)

320 psig (2,206 kPa)

V48AD-1C 1

85 to 110 (586 to 758)

230 psig (1,586 kPa)

STT17A-616R

V48AD-2C 1

145 to 190 (1,000 to 1,310)

320 psig (2,206 kPa)

V48AE-1C 1-1/4

85 to 110 (586 to 758)

230 psig (1,586 kPa)

STT17A-617R

V48AE-2C 1-1/4

145 to 190 (1,000 to 1,310)

320 psig (2,206 kPa)

V48AF-1C 1-1/2

85 to 110 (586 to 758)

1/4 in. External Flare Fitting (Style 5)

230 psig (1,586 kPa)

STT17A-604R

V48AF-2C 1-1/2

145 to 190 (1,000 to 1,310)

320 psig (2,206 kPa)

V48AJ-2C 1/2

30 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut (Style 45)

Union

320 psig (2,206 kPa)

STT15A-605R

V48EK-2C 3/4
V48AL-2C 1 V48AM-2C 1-1/4

30 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut (Style 46)

370 psig (2,551 kPa)
320 psig (2,206 kPa)

STT16A-604R
STT17A-616R STT17A-617R

1. Standard capillary length on Style 45 elements is 30 inches 2. Replacement element supplied with 1/4 in. external SAE connector. Order SEC99AA capillary kit with two flare nuts separately if needed.
Use only on valves specified.

Replacement Sensing Element
SEP91A-602R SEC99AA-36C2
SEP91A-601R SEC99AA-36C2
SEP91A-603R SEC99AA-36C2
SEP81A-602R SEP81A-601R SEP77A-605R SEP127A-600R SEP107A-602R

Technical Specifications
V48 Series Factory Settings Refrigerant (R)
Low Pressure (R-12, R134a, etc.) Medium Pressure (R-22, R404A, etc.)

Factory Settings psig (kPa) Opening Press. Port 1 to Port 2
95 (655) 165 (1,138)

Closing Press. Port 1 to Port 3
120 (896)
215 (1,482)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-160

Valves and Valve Accessories

Code No. LIT-1900163

V146 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves

Description
The V146 Series Two-Way PressureActuated Water-Regulating Valves regulate water flow to control refrigerant head pressure in systems with water-cooled condensers. The V146 valves are ideal for applications with system water pressures of up to 350 psig (24.1 bar), such as high-rise buildings.
V146EK and V146AL valves have an adjustable opening point in a refrigerant pressure range of 70 to 260 psi (4.8 to 17.9 bar). V146EK and V146AL valves are available in a 3/4 in. and 1 in. size. Use these valves with standard, non-corrosive refrigerants.
V146GK1 and V146GL1 valves have an adjustable opening point in a refrigerant pressure range of 200 to 400 psi (13.8 to 27.6 bar). The V146GK1 and V146GL1 valves are available in 3/4 in. and 1 in. size for use with standard, non-corrosive, high-pressure refrigerants.
Refer to the V146 Series 2-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves Product Bulletin (LIT-121709) for important product application information.

Features
· no close-fitting or sliding parts in water passages
· high-pressure design · pressure-balanced design · corrosion-resistant material for internal
parts · accessible range spring · take-apart construction
Applications
Each application is unique and requires specific engineering data to properly size and design a system to fulfill the appropriate requirements. Typically, a valve is replaced with another valve of the same size in a properly sized and engineered system.

V146 Series Valve

A

B

D C

Port 1

Port 2 E

A

B

Port 1

D C
Port 2 E

FIG:V146_rnddim FIG:V146GK_dim

Pressure connection and capillary as specified
3/4 in. V146EK Valves

High Refrigerant Pressure 3/4 in. V146GK1 Valves

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-161

Valves and Valve Accessories
V146 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

Valve Dimensions, Inches (Millimeters)

Product Code

Nominal Valve

Number

Size

V146EK-1C

3/4 in.

V146GK1-001C

3/4 in.

V146AL-1C

1 in.

V146GL1-001C

1 in.

A
3-3/8 (86) 3-3/8 (86) 4-3/4 (121) 4-3/4 (121)

A

B

B
2-3/16 (55) 2-3/16 (55) 2-13/16 (72) 2-13/16 (72)

C
7-3/16 (183) 8 (204) 10 (254)
10-1/2 (267)
A

D
4-3/16 (106) 4-3/16 (106) 5-15/16 (151) 5-15/16 (151)

E
3 (76) 3-13/16 (98) 4-1/16 (103) 4-9/16 (116)

B

Port 1

D C
Port 2 E

Port 1

D C
Port 2 E

FIG:V146GL_dim

FIG:V146AL_dim

Pressure connection and capillary as specified.
1 in. V146AL Valves

High Refrigerant Pressure 1 in. V146GL1 Valves

Selection
To make a rough field estimate of the size of valve for an application, find the valve size by locating a point on a flow chart that satisfies these requirements:
· water flow required by the condenser (Flow) · refrigerant head pressure rise (PRISE) · available water pressure (PAVAIL) Follow these steps, and use the information obtained to locate a point on one of the flowcharts that satisfies all three steps.
1. Take the water flow required by the condenser (Flow) from information provided by the manufacturer of the condensing unit. If the manufacturer's information is unavailable, use the following information to make a rough approximation of maximum water flow in gallons per minute (gpm) (cubic meters per hour [m3/hr]):
· System Capacity (Tons of Refrigeration) · Outlet Water Temperature (Temp. Outlet) · Inlet Water Temperature (Temp. Inlet)

Calculate the flow using the following formula:
Flow = Tons of Refrigeration x 30
(Temp.Outlet - Temp.Inlet )
Flow Required
Note: If the outlet temperature is unknown, assume it to be 10F (5.6C) above the inlet temperature. 2. Determine refrigerant head pressure rise above the valve opening
point (PRISE) using the following steps: a. The Valve Closing Pressure (PCLOSE) is equal to the refrigerant
pressure at the highest ambient temperature the refrigeration equipment experiences in the Off cycle. Use a Pressure-Temperature Chart for the refrigerant selected to find this pressure. b. To approximate the Valve Opening Pressure (POPEN), add about 7 psi (0.5 bar) for EK and AL models or 10 psi (0.7 bar) for GL1 or GK1 models to the Valve Closing Pressure.

FIG:flw_eqn

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-162

Valves and Valve Accessories

V146 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

FIG:V14x_eqn_opn_prssr

POPEN = PCLOSE +7 psi (0.5 bar)
POPEN = PCLOSE +10 psi (0.7 bar)
Valve Opening Pressure, EK and AL Models (Top) or GK1 and GL1 Models (Bottom)

c. From the Pressure-Temperature Chart for the refrigerant selected, read the Refrigerant Condensing Pressure (PCOND) (operating head pressure) corresponding to the selected condensing temperature.
d. Subtract the Valve Opening Pressure from the Refrigerant Condensing Pressure. This gives the head pressure rise.

FIG:eqn_hd_prssr_rs

P = P - P RISE

COND

OPEN

Figure 1: Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise

The maximum recommended differential water pressure across a valve is 60 psi (4.1 bar).

Flow (gpm)
45

40

60

35

50

40 30
30
25 20

20

15

10

FIG:V146EK_chrt

10 Pressure Drop Through Valve (psi)
5

0 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise (psi)

3/4 in. V146EK Valve

3. Determine the available water pressure to the valve (PAVAIL) using the following steps. This is the actual water pressure available to force water through the valve. a. Determine the minimum inlet pressure (PIN). This is the water pressure from city water mains, pumps, or other sources. b. Pressure drop through condenser (PCOND) is the difference in water pressure between the condenser inlet and the condenser outlet. Obtain this information from the condenser manufacturer. c. Estimate or calculate the pressure drop through all associated piping (PLOSS). d. Subtract the PCOND and PLOSS from PIN. The result is PAVAIL.
Cooling Tower

FIG:2wy_prss_drp

P
Loss 2

Pump

2-Way

Valve

P2

P1

Condenser

P
IN
P
Loss 1

Flow (gpm)

75

60

70

50

65 60

40

55

30

50

45

20

40

35

30

10

25

FIG:V146AL_chrt

20

15

10

Pressure Drop Through Valve (psi)

5

0 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise (psi)

1 in. V146AL Valve

PCOND =

P
1

-

P2

P= LOSS

P+
Loss 1

P + ...
Loss 2

P = AVAIL PIN - (PCOND + PLOSS)

Available Water Pressure

4. Select the proper valve size from the flowcharts by locating a point on a chart that satisfies the flow, the head pressure rise above opening point, and the pressure drop across the valve.
Use these equations to convert between U.S. and S.I. units.
· 1 dm3/s = 3.6 m3/h = 15.9 U.S. gal. /min. = 13.2 U.K. gal. /min. · 1 bar = 100 kPa = 0.1 MPa  1.02 kg/cm2 = 0.987 atm  14.5 psi

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-163

Valves and Valve Accessories

V146 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

0.7 Flow (GPM)
45
40
35
30 25
20
15 10
5
0 10

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise (bar)

1.7

2.7

3.7

4.7

5.7

Pressure Drop Through Valve, psi (bar)

6.7
60 (4.1) 50 (3.4) 40 (2.8) 30 (2.1) 25 (1.7) 20 (1.4)

Flow (m3/hr) 10
8
6

10 (0.7) 4

5 (0.3)

2 (0.1)

2

FIG:V146GK1_chrt

0

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise (psig)

High Refrigerant Pressure 3/4 in. V146GK1 Valves

Flow GPM
70 60
50 40
30 20
10
0 10

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise (bar)

1.3

2.3

3.3

4.3

5.3

6.3

7.3

Flow m3/hr

60 (4.1) 16.2
50 (3.4) 14.2
40 (2.8) 30 (2.1) 12.2
25 (1.7) 10.2
20 (1.4)

20

30

8.2

10 (1.0) 6.2

5 (0.3) 4.2
2 (0.1)

2.2 Pressure Drop Through Valve psig (m3/hr)

0.2

40

50

60

70

80

90

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise (psig)

FIG:V146GL_chrt

High Refrigerant Pressure 1 in. V146GL1 Valves

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-164

Valves and Valve Accessories
V146 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

Style 5

Style 46

Selection Chart Product Code Number
V146EK-1C V146GK1-001C V146AL-1C V146GL1-001C

1/4-in. SAE External Flare Connector

Copper Capillary with 1/4-in. SAE Internal Flare Connector
(Includes Valve Stem Depressor)

Pressure Connection Styles

Nominal Valve Size
3/4 in. 3/4 in. 1 in. 1 in.

Inlet and Outlet Ports
Union (Sweat) Union (Sweat) Union (Sweat) Union (Sweat)

Pressure Connection Style
46 5 46 5

Shipping Weight, lb (kg)
4.3 (2.0) 4.3 (2.0) 9.3 (4.0) 9.3 (4.0)

Repair Information
If the V146 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valve fails to operate within its specifications, refer to the V146 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves Product Bulletin (LIT-1201709) for a list of repair parts available.

Technical Specifications

Maximum Refrigerant Pressure Maximum Working Pressure Opening Point Adjustment Range Factory-Set Opening Point Media

V146 Series 2-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves
V146EK: 370 psi (25.5 bar) V146AL: 320 psi (22.1 bar)
V146GK1, V146GL1: 630 psi (43.4 bar)
V146EK, V146AL: 70 to 260 psi (4.8 to 17.9 bar) V146GK1, V146GL1: 200 to 400 psi (13.8 to 27.6 bar)
V146EK, V146AL: 165 psi (11.4 bar) V146GK1, V146GL1: 275 psi (19.0 bar)
350 psi (24.1 bar) maximum, -4F to 170F (-20C to 77C) glycol/water or liquids with low freezing points that are compatible with valve materials

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-165

Valves and Valve Accessories

Code No. LIT-1900164

V148 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves

Description
The V148 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves regulate water flow to control refrigerant head pressure in systems with single or multiple water-cooled condensers. The V148 valves are designed for applications with system water pressures of up to 350 psi (24.1 bar), such as high-rise buildings.
V148EK and V148AL valves have an adjustable opening point in a refrigerant pressure range of 145 to 190 psi (10.0 to 13.1 bar). V148EK and V148AL valves are available in 3/4 in. and 1 in. sizes. Use these valves with standard, non-corrosive refrigerants.
V148GK1 and V148GL1 valves have an adjustable opening point in a refrigerant pressure range of 200 to 400 psi (13.8 to 27.6 bar). The V148GK1 and V148GL1 Valves are available in 3/4 in. and 1 in. sizes for use with standard, non-corrosive, high-pressure refrigerants.
Refer to the V148 Series 3-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves Product Bulletin (LIT-121712) for important product application information.

Features
· no close-fitting or sliding parts in water passages
· high water pressure design · pressure-balanced design · corrosion-resistant material for internal
parts · accessible range spring · take-apart construction
Applications
Each application is unique and requires specific engineering data to properly size and design a system to fulfill the appropriate requirements. Typically, a valve is replaced with another valve of the same size in a properly sized and engineered system.

A

B

A

V148 Series Valve B

Port 1 Port 3

C D
Port 2
E
Plugged F

Port 1 Port 3

C D
Port 2
E
Plugged F

FIG:V148EK_075_dim FIG:V148AL_100_dim

Pressure connection and capillary as specified
3/4 in. V148EK Valve

Pressure connection and capillary as specified
1 in. V148AL Valve

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-166

Valves and Valve Accessories
V148 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

Valve Dimensions, Inches (Millimeters)

Model

Nominal

A

Valve Size

V148EK-1C

3/4 in.

3-3/8 (86)

V148GK1-001C

3/4 in.

3-3/8 (86)

V148AL-1C

1 in.

4-3/4 (121)

V148GL1-001C

1 in.

4-3/4 (121)

B
2-3/16 (56) 2-3/16 (56) 2-3/4 (71) 2-3/4 (71)

A

B

C
9 (229) 9-13/16 (249)
12 (305) 12-1/2 (318)

D
4-3/16 (106) 4-3/16 (106) 5-15/16 (151) 5-15/16 (151)
A

E
1-3/4 (44) 1-3/4 (44)
2 (51) 2 (51)

F
3 (76) 3-13/16 (97)
4 (102) 4-1/2 (115)

B

Port 1 Port 3

C D
Port 2
E
Plugged F

Port 1 Port 3

C D
Port 2
E
Plugged F

FIG:V148GL1_100_dim

FIG:V148GK1_075_dim

3/4 in. High Refrigerant Pressure V148GK1 Valves

1 in. High Refrigerant Pressure V148GL1 Valves

Selection
To make a rough field estimate of the size of valve for an application, find the valve size by locating a point on a flow chart that satisfies these requirements:
· water flow required by the condenser (Flow) · refrigerant head pressure rise (PRISE) · available water pressure (PAVAIL) Follow these steps, and use the information obtained to locate a point on one of the flowcharts that satisfies all three steps.
1. Take the water flow required by the condenser (Flow) from information provided by the manufacturer of the condensing unit. If the manufacturer's information is unavailable, use the following information to make a rough approximation of maximum water flow in gallons per minute (gpm) (cubic meters per hour [m3/hr]):
· System Capacity (Tons of Refrigeration) · Outlet Water Temperature (Temp. Outlet) · Inlet Water Temperature (Temp. Inlet)

Calculate the flow using the following formula:
Flow = Tons of Refrigeration x 30
(Temp.Outlet - Temp.Inlet )
Flow Required
Note: If the outlet temperature is unknown, assume it to be 10F (5.6C) above the inlet temperature. 2. Determine refrigerant head pressure rise above the valve opening
point (PRISE) using the following steps: a. The Valve Closing Pressure (PCLOSE) is equal to the
refrigerant pressure at the highest ambient temperature the refrigeration equipment experiences in the Off cycle. Use a Pressure-Temperature Chart for the refrigerant selected to find this pressure. b. To approximate the Valve Opening Pressure (POPEN), add about 7 psi (0.5 bar) for EK and AL models or 10 psi (0.7 bar) for GK1 and GL1 models to the Valve Closing Pressure.

FIG:flw_eqn

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-167

Valves and Valve Accessories

V148 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

POPEN = PCLOSE +7 psi (0.5 bar)

Use these equations to convert between U.S. and S.I. units.
· 1 dm3/s = 3.6 m3/h = 15.9 U.S. gal. /min. = 13.2 U.K. gal. /min. · 1 bar = 100 kPa = 0.1 MPa  1.02 kg/cm2 = 0.987 atm  14.5 psi

FIG:V14x_eqn_opn_prssr

POPEN = PCLOSE +10 psi (0.7 bar)
Valve Opening Pressure, EK and AL Models (Top) or GK1 and GL1 Models (Bottom)
c. From the Pressure-Temperature Chart for the refrigerant selected, read the Refrigerant Condensing Pressure (PCOND) (operating head pressure) corresponding to the selected condensing temperature.
d. Subtract the Valve Opening Pressure from the Refrigerant Condensing Pressure. This gives the head pressure rise.

FIG:eqn_hd_prssr_rs

P = P - P RISE

COND

OPEN

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise

Flow (gpm)
30 25 20 15 10 5

30
20 15 10 7
Pressure Drop Through Valve (psi)

FIG:V148EK_chrt

3. Determine the available water pressure to the valve (PAVAIL) using the following steps. This is the actual water pressure available to force water through the valve. a. Determine the minimum inlet pressure (PIN). This is the water pressure from city water mains, pumps, or other sources. b. Pressure drop through condenser (PCOND) is the difference in water pressure between the condenser inlet and the condenser outlet. Obtain this information from the condenser manufacturer. c. Estimate or calculate the pressure drop through all associated piping (PLOSS). d. Subtract the PCOND and PLOSS from PIN. The result is PAVAIL.
Cooling Tower

FIG:3wy_prss_drp

Pump

P
Loss 2

3-Way

Valve

P2

P1

Condenser

P
IN
P
Loss 1

Balancing Valve

Bypass Line

PCOND =

P
1

-

P2

P= LOSS

P+
Loss 1

P + ...
Loss 2

P = AVAIL PIN - (PCOND + PLOSS)

0 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise (psi)
3/4 in. V148EK Valve

Flow (gpm)
55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0
10

30 20 15 10 7
Pressure Drop Through Valve (psi)
15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise (psi)

1 in. V148AL Valve

FIG:V148AL_chrt

Available Water Pressure

4. Select the proper valve size from the flowcharts by locating a point on a chart that satisfies the flow, the head pressure rise above opening point, and the pressure drop across the valve.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-168

Valves and Valve Accessories
V148 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

0.7 Flow (GPM)
45 40
35
30
25
20
15
10 5
0 10

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise (bar)

1.7

2.7

3.7

4.7

5.7

Pressure Drop Through Valve
psi (bar)

6.7 Flow (m3/hr)
10 60 (4.1)
50 (3.4) 8
40 (2.8) 30 (2.1) 25 (1.7) 6 20 (1.4)

10 (0.7) 4

5 (0.3)

2 (0.1)

2

FIG:V148GK1

0

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise (psig)

High Refrigerant Pressure 3/4 in. V148GK1 Valve

Flow GPM
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0 10

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise (bar)

1.3

2.3

3.3

4.3

5.3

6.3

7.3

Flow

60 (4.1) m3/hr

50 (3.4) 16.2

40 (2.8) 30 (2.1) 25 (1.7)

14.2 12.2

20 (1.4) 10.2

8.2 10 (1.0)
6.2 5 (0.3) 2 (0.1) 4.2

Pressure Drop Through Valve psig (m3/hr)

2.2

0.2 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise (psig)

FIG:V148GL_chrt

High Refrigerant Pressure 1 in. V148GL1 Valve

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-169

Valves and Valve Accessories

V148 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

Style 5

Style 46

Copper Capillary with 1/4-in. SAE External Flare Connector 1/4-in. SAE Internal Flare Connector
(Includes Valve Stem Depressor)
Pressure Connection Styles

Selection Chart Product Code Number
V148EK-1C V148GK1-001C V148AL-1C V148GL1-001C

Nominal Valve Size
3/4 in. 3/4 in. 1 in. 1 in.

Inlet and Outlet Ports
Union (Sweat) Union (Sweat) Union (Sweat) Union (Sweat)

Pressure Connection Style Shipping Weight, lb (kg)

46

7 (3.2)

5

7 (3.2)

46

12 (5.4)

5

12 (5.4)

Repair Information
If the V148 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valve fails to operate within its specifications, refer to the V148 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves Product Bulletin (LIT-121712) for a list of repair parts available.

Technical Specifications
Maximum Refrigerant Pressure
Maximum Working Pressure Factory-Set Opening Point (Port 1 to Port 2) Opening Point Adjustment Range (Port 1 to Port 2) Throttling Range
Media

V148 Series 3-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves
V148EK: 370 psig (25.5 bar) V148AL: 320 psig (22.1 bar)
V148GK1, V148GL1: 630 psig (43.4 bar)
V148EK, V148AL: 165 psig (11.4 bar) V148GK1, V148GL1: 275 psig (19.0 bar)
V148EK, V148AL: 145 to 190 psi (10.0 to 13.1 bar) V148GK1, V148GL1: 200 to 400 psi (13.8 to 27.6 bar)
V148EK, V148AL: 70 psig (4.8 bar) V148GK1, V148GL1: 100 psig (6.9 bar)
350 psi (24.1 bar) maximum, -4F to 170F (-20C to 77C) glycol/water or liquids with low freezing points that are compatible with valve materials

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-170

Valves and Valve Accessories

Code No. LIT-1900575

V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants

Description
The V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants come in two types of control action: direct acting and reverse acting. V246 valves regulate water flow to control refrigerant head pressure in systems with water-cooled condensers.
The V246 Series Valves are available in 3/8 in. through 2 in. sizes and have a maximum allowable water pressure of 150 psig (10.3 bar). Direct acting V246 valves have an adjustable opening point in a refrigerant pressure range of 200 to 400 psi (13.8 to 27.6 bar), and reverse acting valves have a range of 135 to 300 psi (9.3 to 20.7 bar). V246 valves may be used with standard non-corrosive refrigerants.
Maritime models, which have nickel copper (Monel®) internal parts, are available for applications where the media may be corrosive to the internal parts.
Selection Charts

Refer to the V246 Series 2-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants Product Bulletin (LIT-12011514) for important product application information.
Features
· no close fitting or sliding parts in water passages
· accessible range spring · take-apart construction · pressure-balanced design · corrosion-resistant material for internal
parts
Repair Information
If the V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valve for High Pressure Refrigerants fails to operate within its specifications, refer to the V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High Pressure Refrigerants Product Bulletin (LIT-12011514) for a list of repair parts available.

North American Standard Production Models Product Code Number Construction

Valve Size and Connection

V246GA1-001C V246GB1-001C V246GC1-001C V246GD1-001C V246GE1-001C V246GM1-001C V246GR1-001C V246GS1-001C V246HA1-001C V246HB1-001C V246HC1-001C V246HD1-001C V246HE1-001C V246HR1-001C V246HS1-001C V246KA1-001C
V246NA1-001C V246NB1-001C V246NC1-001C V246ND1-001C

Direct Acting1, Commercial Direct Acting1, Commercial Direct Acting1, Commercial Direct Acting1, Commercial Direct Acting1, Commercial Direct Acting1, Commercial Direct Acting1, Commercial Direct Acting1, Commercial Direct Acting1, Maritime Direct Acting1, Maritime Direct Acting1, Maritime Direct Acting1, Maritime Direct Acting1, Maritime Direct Acting1, Maritime Direct Acting1, Maritime Direct Acting1, Commercial, Low Flow Reverse Acting2, Commercial Reverse Acting2, Commercial Reverse Acting2, Commercial Reverse Acting2, Commercial

1. The range is 200 to 400 psi (13.8 to 27.6 bar). 2. The range is 135 to 300 psi (9.3 to 20.7 bar).

European Standard Production Models (Part 1 of 2) Product Code Number Construction

3/8 in. NPT Screw 1/2 in. NPT Screw 3/4 in. NPT Screw 1 in. NPT Screw 1-1/4 in. NPT Screw 1-1/4 in. Union Sweat 1-1/2 in. Flange 2 in. Flange 3/8 in. NPT Screw 1/2 in. NPT Screw 3/4 in. NPT Screw 1 in. NPT Screw 1-1/4 in. NPT Screw 1-1/2 in. ASME Flange 2 in. ASME Flange 3/8 in. NPT Screw
3/8 in. NPT Screw 1/2 in. NPT Screw 3/4 in. NPT Screw 1 in. NPT Screw
Valve Size and Connection

V246GA1A001C V246GB1A001C V246GC1A001C V246GD1B001C V246GE1B001C

Direct Acting, Commercial Direct Acting, Commercial Direct Acting, Commercial Direct Acting, Commercial Direct Acting, Commercial

3/8 in. BSPP Screw, ISO 228 1/2 in. BSPP Screw, ISO 228 3/4 in. BSPP Screw, ISO 228 1 in. BSPT Screw, ISO 7 1-1/4 in. BSPT Screw, ISO 7

V246 Series Water-Regulating Valve

Element Style Shipping Weight, lb (kg)

Style 5

1.8 (0.8)

Style 5

3.0 (1.4)

Style 5

3.7 (1.7)

Style 5

9.3 (4.2)

Style 5

10 (4.5)

Style 5

10 (4.5)

Style 5

13.6 (6.2)

Style 5

27 (12.3)

Style 5

1.8 (0.8)

Style 5

3.0 (1.4)

Style 5

4.3 (2.0)

Style 5

9.5 (4.3)

Style 5

10.3 (4.7)

Style 5

13.6 (6.2)

Style 5

27 (12.3)

Style 5

1.8 (0.8)

Style 5 Style 5 Style 5 Style 5

1.8 (0.8) 3.0 (1.4) 3.7 (1.7) 9.3 (4.2)

Element Style Shipping Weight, kg (lb)

Style 5

0.8 (1.8)

Style 5

1.4 (3.0)

Style 5

1.7 (3.7)

Style 5

4.2 (9.3)

Style 5

4.5 (10)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-171

Valves and Valve Accessories

V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

European Standard Production Models (Part 2 of 2) Product Code Number Construction

Valve Size and Connection

Element Style Shipping Weight, kg (lb)

V246GR1B001C V246GS1B001C V246HA1B001C V246HB1B001C V246HC1B001C V246HD1B001C V246HE1B001C V246HR1B001C V246HS1B001C

Direct Acting, Commercial Direct Acting, Commercial Direct Acting, Maritime Direct Acting, Maritime Direct Acting, Maritime Direct Acting, Maritime Direct Acting, Maritime Direct Acting, Maritime Direct Acting, Maritime

1-1/2 in. Flange, DIN2533 2 in. Flange, DIN2533 3/8 in. BSPP Screw, ISO 228 1/2 in. BSPP Screw, ISO 228 3/4 in. BSPP Screw, ISO 228 1 in. BSPP Screw, ISO 228 1-1/4 in. BSPP Screw, ISO 228 1-1/2 in. Flange, DIN86021 2 in. Flange, DIN86021

Style 5 Style 5 Style 5 Style 5 Style 5 Style 5 Style 5 Style 5 Style 5

6.2 (13.6) 12.3 (27) 0.8 (1.8) 1.4 (3.0) 2.0 (4.3) 4.3 (9.5) 4.7 (10.3) 6.2 (13.6) 12.3 (27)

Valve Sizing Information
Each application is unique and requires specific engineering data to properly size and design a system to fulfill the appropriate requirements. Typically, a valve is replaced with another valve of the same size in a properly sized and engineered system. In North America, contact Johnson Controls/PENN® Refrigeration Application Engineering at 1-800-275-5676 to obtain specific engineering data. In other areas, contact the local Johnson Controls® sales office to obtain specific engineering data.
To make a rough field estimate of the size of valve for an application, find the valve size needed by locating a point on a flow chart that satisfies these requirements:
· water flow required by the condenser (Flow) · refrigerant head pressure rise (PRISE) · available water pressure (PAVAIL) Follow these steps, and use the information obtained to locate a point on one of the flowcharts that satisfies all three steps.
1. Take the water flow required by the condenser (Flow) from information provided by the manufacturer of the condensing unit. If the manufacturer's information is unavailable, use the following information to make a rough approximation of water flow in gallons per minute (gpm) [cubic meters per hour (m3/hr)]:
· System Capacity (Tons of Refrigeration) · Outlet Water Temperature (Temp. Outlet) · Inlet Water Temperature (Temp. Inlet) Calculate the flow using the following formula:
Tons of Refrigeration x 30 Flow =
(Temp.Outlet - Temp.Inlet)
Flow Required
Note: If the outlet temperature is unknown, assume it to be 10F (6C) above the inlet temperature. 2. Determine refrigerant head pressure rise above the valve opening
point (PRISE) using the Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise figure and the following steps: a. The Valve Closing Pressure (PCLOSE) is equal to the
refrigerant pressure at the highest ambient temperature the refrigeration equipment experiences in the Off cycle. Use a Pressure-Temperature Chart for the refrigerant selected to find this pressure. b. To approximate the Valve Opening Pressure (POPEN), add about 10 psi (0.7 bar) to the Valve Closing Pressure. Note: Add about 20 psi (1.4 bar) for 3/8 in. valves.

FIG:flw_eqn

FIG:eqn_opn_prs

.
POPEN = PCLOSE +10 psi (0.7 bar)
Valve Opening Pressure
c. From the Pressure-Temperature Chart for the refrigerant selected, read the Refrigerant Condensing Pressure (PCOND) (operating head pressure) corresponding to the selected condensing temperature.
d. Subtract the Valve Opening Pressure from the Refrigerant Condensing Pressure. This gives the head pressure rise.

FIG:eqn_hd_prssr_rs

P = P - P RISE

COND

OPEN

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise
3. Determine the available water pressure to the valve (PAVAIL) using the following steps. This is the actual water pressure available to force water through the valve.
a. Determine the inlet pressure (PIN). This is the water pressure from city water mains, pumps, or other sources.
b. Pressure drop through condenser (PCOND) is the difference in water pressure between the condenser inlet and the condenser outlet. Obtain this information from the condenser manufacturer.
c. Estimate or calculate the pressure drop through all associated piping (PLOSS).
d. Subtract the PCOND and PLOSS from PIN. The result is PAVAIL.

Cooling Tower

FIG:2wy_prss_drp

P
Loss 2

Pump

2-Way

Valve

P2

P1

Condenser

P
IN
P
Loss 1

P= COND

P
1

- P2

P= LOSS

P+
Loss 1

P + ...
Loss 2

P = AVAIL PIN - (PCOND + P ) LOSS

Available Water Pressure

4. Select the proper valve size from the flowcharts by locating a point on a chart that satisfies the flow, the head pressure rise above opening point, and the pressure drop across the valve.

Metric Conversions

Use these equations to convert between U.S. and S.I. units.
· 1 dm3/s = 3.6 m3/h = 15.9 U.S. gal. /min. = 13.2 U.K. gal. /min. · 1 bar = 100 kPa = 0.1 MPa  1.02 kg/cm2 = 0.987 atm  14.5 psi

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-172

Valves and Valve Accessories

V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

V246 Flowcharts
The maximum recommended differential water pressure across a valve is 60 psig (4.1 bar).

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( bar )

0.7

1.4

2.1

2.8

3.5

4.2

4.9

5.5

6.2

6.9

7.6

8.3

Flow 3.0 (gpm)

Flow (m3/hr)

60 (4.1)

2.5

50 (3.4) 0.6

40 (2.8)

2.0

0.5

30 (2.1)

FIG:V246_3.8 in. Low graph

1.5

20 (1.4) 0.3

14.5 (1.0)

10 (0.7)

1.0

0.2

5 (0.3)

0.5

2 (0.1) 0.1

PAvail Pressure Drop Through Valve psig (bar)

0.0

0.0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100 110 120 130

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )

3/8 in. Direct Acting Low-Flow Valve Flowchart

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( bar )

0.7

1.4

2.1

2.8

3.5

4.2

4.9

5.5

6.2

6.9

7.6

8.3

Flow 18 (gpm)

Flow (m3/hr)

16

3.6

60 (4.1)

14

3.2

50 (3.4)

12

40 (2.8) 2.7

30 (2.1)

10

2.3

20 (1.4)

8

1.8

14.5 (1.0)

6

10 (0.7) 1.4

4

5 (0.3) 0.9

2 (0.1)

2

0.5

PAvail Pressure Drop Through Valve psig (bar)

0

0.0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100 110 120 130

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )

3/8 in. Direct Acting Valve Flowchart

FIG:V246_3.8 in. graph

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-173

Valves and Valve Accessories
V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( bar )

0.7

1.4

2.1

2.8

3.5

4.2

4.9

5.5

6.2

6.9

7.6

8.3

Flow 30 (gpm)

Flow (m3/hr)

60 (4.1)

25

50 (3.4) 5.7

40 (2.8)

20

4.5

30 (2.1)

20 (1.4)

15

3.4

14.5 (1.0)

10 (0.7)

10

2.3

5 (0.3)

5

2 (0.1) 1.1

FIG:V246_0.5 in. graph

PAvail Pressure Drop Through Valve psig (bar)

0

0.0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110 120 130

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )

1/2 in. Direct Acting Valve Flowchart

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( bar )

0.7

1.4

2.1

2.8

3.5

4.2

4.9

5.5

6.2

6.9

7.6

8.3

Flow 35 (gpm)

60 (4.1)

Flow (m3/hr)

30

50 (3.4) 6.8

40 (2.8)

25

5.7

30 (2.1)

20

4.5

20 (1.4)

14.5 (1.0)

15

3.4

10 (0.7)

10

5 (0.3) 2.3

2 (0.1)

5

1.1

PAvail Pressure Drop Through Valve psig (bar)

0

0.0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100 110 120 130

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )
3/4 in. Direct Acting Valve Flowchart

FIG:V246_0.75 in. graph

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-174

Valves and Valve Accessories
V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

FIG:V246_1.0 in. graph

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( bar )

0.7

1.4

2.1

2.8

3.5

4.2

4.9

5.5

6.2

6.9

7.6

8.3

Flow

(gpm)

Flow (m3/hr)

60

60 (4.1) 13.6

50 (3.4)

50

11.4

40 (2.8)

30 (2.1)

40

9.1

20 (1.4)

30

6.8 14.5 (1.0)

10 (0.7)

20

4.5

5 (0.3)

10

2 (0.1) 2.3

PAvail Pressure Drop Through Valve psig (bar)

0

0.0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110 120 130

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )
1 in. Direct Acting Valve Flowchart

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( bar )

0.7

1.4

2.1

2.8

3.5

4.2

4.9

5.5

6.2

6.9

7.6

8.3

Flow (gpm)

Flow (m3/hr)

120

60 (4.1) 27.3

50 (3.4)

100

22.7

40 (2.8)

30 (2.1)

80

18.2

20 (1.4)

60

13.6

14.5 (1.0)

10 (0.7)

40

9.1

5 (0.3)

20

2 (0.1) 4.5

PAvail Pressure Drop Through Valve psig (bar)

0

0.0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110 120 130

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )

1-1/4 in. Direct Acting Valve Flowchart

FIG:V246_1.25 in. graph

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-175

Valves and Valve Accessories
V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( bar )

0.7

1.4

2.1

2.8

3.5

4.2

4.9

5.5

6.2

6.9

7.6

8.3

Flow

(gpm)

Flow (m3/hr)

120

27.3

60 (4.1)

50 (3.4)

100

22.7

40 (2.8)

30 (2.1)

80

18.2

20 (1.4)

60

13.6

14.5 (1.0)

10 (0.7)

40

9.1

5 (0.3)

20

2 (0.1) 4.5

PAvail Pressure Drop Through Valve psig (bar)

0

0.0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100 110 120 130

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )

1-1/2 in. Direct Acting Valve Flowchart

FIG:V246_1.5 in. graph

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( bar )

0.7

1.4

2.1

2.8

3.5

4.2

4.9

5.5

6.2

6.9

7.6

8.3

Flow 120 (gpm)

27.3 Flow (m3/hr)

60 (4.1)

100

50 (3.4) 22.7

40 (2.8)

80

30 (2.1) 18.2

20 (1.4)

60

13.6

14.5 (1.0)

10 (0.7)

40

9.1

5 (0.3)

20

2 (0.1) 4.5

PAvail

Pressure Drop Through Valve psi (bar)

0

0.0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100 110 120 130

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )

2 in. Direct Acting Valve Flowchart

FIG:V246_2 in. graph

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-176

Valves and Valve Accessories

V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

Dimensions

B

A

B

Port 1

D C
Port 2 E

D C
E

FIG:V246_thrdd FIG:V246_anglbdy

V246 Screw Connection Valves Dimensions

A V246 Angle-Body Screw Connection Valves Dimensions

V246 Screw Connection Valves Dimensions Valve Size

A

3/8 in.

2-5/8 (67)

1/2 in.

3-1/16 (78)

3/4 in.

3-3/8 (86)

1 in.

4-3/4 (121)

1-1/4 in.

4-3/4 (121)

Dimensions in Inches (Millimeters)

B

C

1-5/8 (41)

6-1/2 (166)

2 (51)

7-3/16 (182)

2-3/16 (55)

8 (203)

2-13/16 (71)

10-1/2 (267)

2-13/16 (71)

10-7/8 (276)

V246 Angle-Body Screw Connection Valves Dimensions

Valve Size

Dimensions in Inches (Millimeters)

A

B

C

3/8 in.

2-3/4 (70)

1-5/8 (41)

6-15/16 (176)

1/2 in.

3-1/8 (80)

2 (51)

7-1/2 (191)

3/4 in.

3-9/16 (90)

2-1/8 (55)

8-9/16 (217)

D
3-1/2 (89) 3-13/16 (96) 4-3/16 (106) 5-15/16 (151) 6-1/8 (156)
D
3-5/8 (92) 3-7/8 (98) 4-5/16 (110)

E
3 (77) 3-3/8 (86) 3-13/16 (98) 4-9/16 (116) 4-3/4 (121)
E
3-1/8 (80) 3-1/2 (88)
4 (101)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-177

Valves and Valve Accessories
V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

A

B

Port 1

D C
Port 2 E

FIG:V246_unnbdy

V246 Union Sweat Connection Valves Dimensions

V246 Union Sweat Connection Valves Dimensions Valve Size

Dimensions in Inches (Millimeters)

A

B

C

D

1-1/4 in.

4-3/4 (121)

2-13/16 (71)

10-7/8 (276)

6-1/8 (156)

A

F

B

G

E
4-3/4 (121)

C

E

H

D

FIG:flng_bdy

V246 Flange Valve Dimensions

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-178

Valves and Valve Accessories
V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

V246 Flange Valve, Commercial Service - Dimensions

Valve

Size

A

B

C

Dimensions in Inches (Millimeters)

D

E

1-1/2 in.

5-5/16 (135)

9/16

6-1/8

(14)

(156)

4-3/4 (121)

10-7/8 (276)

2 in.

6-5/8 (168)

5/8

7-1/8

(16)

(181)

6-1/8 (156)

13-1/4 (336)

1. The dimensions on the European versions are 5-29/32 in. (150 mm). 2. The dimensions on the European versions are 6-1/2 in. (165 mm).

F
5-1/4 (133)1 6-3/16 (157)2

V246 Flange Valve, Commercial Service - Flange Specifications

Valve Size Regional Version

Number of Holes

1-1/2 in.

North American

4

2 in.

1-1/2 in.

European, DIN2533 Flanges

4

2 in.

Hole Size
5/8 in. (16 mm) 3/4 in. (19 mm) 18 mm

V246 Flange Valve, Maritime Service - Dimensions

Valve

Size

A

B

C

Dimensions in Inches (Millimeters)

D

E

1-1/2 in.

5-5/16 (135)

9/16

6-1/8

(14)

(156)

4-3/4 (121)

10-7/8 (276)

2 in.

6-3/8 (162)

5/8

7-1/8

(16)

(181)

6-1/8 (156)

13-1/4 (337)

1. The dimensions on the European versions are 5-29/32 in. (150 mm). 2. The dimensions on the European versions are 6-1/2 in. (165 mm).

F
5-1/4 (133)1
6 (152)2

V246 Flange Valve, Maritime Service - Flange Specifications

Valve Size Regional Version

Number of Holes

1-1/2 in.

North American

4

2 in.

1-1/2 in.

European, DIN86021 Flanges

4

2 in.

Hole Size
5/8 in. (16 mm) 3/4 in. (19 mm) 18 mm

G
2-5/8 (67)
3-1/2 (89)

H
1-7/8 (48)
2-1/4 (57)

Bolt Circle
3-7/8 in. (98 mm) 4-3/4 in. (121 mm) 110 mm 125 mm

G
2-5/8 (67)
3-1/2 (89)

H
1-7/8 (48)
2-3/4 (70)

Bolt Circle
3-7/8 in. (98 mm) 4-3/4 in. (121 mm) 110 mm 125 mm

Materials

North American V246 Materials Nominal Valve Size:

Material

Body

Seat

Disc

Disc Cup

Disc Stud

Stem/Extension Sleeve

Diaphragms

Refrigerant Contact

Pressure Element

Cup Bellows

Bellows Ring

3/8 in. to 3/4 in. (Commercial)
Cast brass Aluminum Bronze BUNA-N Brass Brass Brass Nylon reinforced BUNA-N
300 Series stainless steel 300 Series stainless steel Steel/nickel plated

1 in. to 2 in. (Commercial)
Cast iron/rust resisting finish Aluminum bronze BUNA-N Brass Brass Brass Nylon reinforced BUNA-N
300 Series stainless steel 300 Series stainless steel Steel/nickel plated

Maritime (All Sizes)
Cast bronze Monel BUNA-N Monel Monel Monel Nylon reinforced BUNA-N
300 Series stainless steel 300 Series stainless steel Steel/nickel plated

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-179

Valves and Valve Accessories

V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

European V246 Materials Nominal Valve Size: Material
Body Seat Disc Disc Cup Disc Stud Stem/Extension Sleeve Diaphragms
Pressure Element Cup Bellows Bellows Ring

3/8 in. to 3/4 in. (Commercial)

1 in. to 2 in. (Commercial)

Hot forged brass

Cast iron/rust resisting finish

Aluminum bronze

Aluminum bronze

BUNA-N

BUNA-N

Brass

Brass

Brass

Brass

Brass

Brass

Nylon reinforced BUNA-N

Nylon reinforced BUNA-N

Refrigerant Contact

300 Series stainless steel

300 Series stainless steel

300 Series stainless steel

300 Series stainless steel

Steel/nickel plated

Steel/nickel plated

Maritime (All sizes)
Cast bronze Monel BUNA-N Monel Monel Monel Nylon reinforced BUNA-N
300 Series stainless steel 300 Series stainless steel Steel/nickel plated

Technical Specifications

V246 Series 2-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants

Factory-Set Opening Point

Direct Acting 200 psig (13.8 bar), Reverse Acting 165 psig (11.4 bar)

Maximum Working Pressure

630 psig (43.4 bar)

Opening Point Adjustment Range

Direct Acting 200 to 400 psi (13.8 to 27.6 bar), Reverse Acting 135 to 300 psi (9.3 to 20.7 bar)

Media

150 psig (10.3 bar) Maximum, -4F to 170F (-20C to 77C) glycol/water or liquids with low freezing points that are compatible with valve materials

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-180

Valves and Valve Accessories

Code No. LIT-1900576

V248 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants

Description
The V248 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants regulate water flow and control refrigerant head pressure in systems with single or multiple water-cooled condensers.
V248 valves have an adjustable opening point in a refrigerant pressure range of 200 to 400 psi (13.8 to 27.6 bar). V248 valves are available in 1/2 in. through 1-1/2 in. size for use with standard, non-corrosive, high-pressure refrigerants.
Maritime models, which have nickel copper (Monel®) internal parts, are available for applications where the media may be corrosive to the internal parts.
Refer to the V248 Series 3-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants Product Bulletin (LIT-12011515) for important product application information.

Features
· no close fitting or sliding parts in water passages
· accessible range spring · take-apart construction · pressure-balanced design · corrosion-resistant material for internal
parts
Repair Information
If the V248 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants fails to operate within its specifications, refer to the V248 Series 3-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants Product Bulletin (LIT-12011515) for a list of repair parts available.

Selection Charts

North American Standard Production Models - Range 200 to 400 psi

Product Code Number Construction

Valve Size and Connection

V248GB1-001C

Direct Acting, Commercial

1/2 in. NPT Screw

V248GC1-001C

Direct Acting, Commercial

3/4 in. NPT Screw

V248GD1-001C

Direct Acting, Commercial

1 in. NPT Screw

V248GE1-001C

Direct Acting, Commercial

1-1/4 in. NPT Screw

V248GF1-001C

Direct Acting, Commercial

1-1/2 in. NPT Screw

V248GK1-001C

Direct Acting, Commercial

3/4 in. Union Sweat

V248GL1-001C

Direct Acting, Commercial

1 in. Union Sweat

V248GM1-001C

Direct Acting, Commercial

1-1/4 in. Union Sweat

European Standard Production Models - Range 13.8 to 27.8 bar

Product Code Number Construction

Valve Size and Connection

V248GB1B001C

Direct Acting, Commercial

1/2 in. BSPT Screw, ISO 7

V248GC1B001C

Direct Acting, Commercial

3/4 in. BSPT Screw, ISO 7

V248GD1B001C

Direct Acting, Commercial

1 in. BSPT Screw, ISO 7

V248GE1B001C

Direct Acting, Commercial

1-1/4 in. BSPT Screw, ISO 7

V248GF1B001C

Direct Acting, Commercial

1-1/2 in. BSPT Screw, ISO 7

V248HC1B001C

Direct Acting, Maritime

3/4 in. BSPP Screw, ISO 228

V248 Screw Connection Valve

Element Style Shipping Weight, lb (kg)

Style 5

5.0 (2.3)

Style 5

6.5 (3.0)

Style 5

12.0 (5.4)

Style 5

16.0 (7.2)

Style 5

25.0 (11.3)

Style 5

7.0 (3.2)

Style 5

12.0 (5.4)

Style 5

13.7 (6.2)

Element Style Shipping Weight, lb (kg)

Style 5

5.0 (2.3)

Style 5

6.5 (3.0)

Style 5

12.1 (5.5)

Style 5

16.0 (7.2)

Style 5

25.0 (11.3)

Style 5

6.5 (3.0)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-181

Valves and Valve Accessories

V248 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

Applications
Each application is unique and requires specific engineering data to properly size and design a system to fulfill the appropriate requirements. Typically, a valve is replaced with another valve of the same size in a properly sized and engineered system. In North America, contact Johnson Controls/PENN® Refrigeration Application Engineering at 1-800-275-5676 to obtain specific engineering data. In other areas, contact the local Johnson Controls® sales office to obtain specific engineering data.
To make a rough field estimate of the size of valve for an application, find the valve size needed by locating a point on a flow chart that satisfies these requirements:
· water flow required by the condenser (Flow) · refrigerant head pressure rise (PRISE) · available water pressure (PAVAIL) Follow these steps, and use the information obtained to locate a point on one of the flowcharts that satisfies all three steps.
1. Take the water flow required by the condenser (Flow) from information provided by the manufacturer of the condensing unit. If the manufacturer's information is unavailable, use the following information to make a rough approximation of water flow in gallons per minute (gpm) [cubic meters per hour (m3/hr)]:
· System Capacity (Tons of Refrigeration) · Outlet Water Temperature (Temp. Outlet) · Inlet Water Temperature (Temp. Inlet) Calculate the flow using the following formula:
Tons of Refrigeration x 30 Flow =
(Temp.Outlet - Temp.Inlet)
Flow Required
Note: If the outlet temperature is unknown, assume it to be 10F (6C) above the inlet temperature. 2. Determine refrigerant head pressure rise above the valve opening
point (PRISE) using the following steps: a. The Valve Closing Pressure (PCLOSE) is equal to the
refrigerant pressure at the highest ambient temperature the refrigeration equipment experiences in the Off cycle. Use a Pressure-Temperature Chart for the refrigerant selected to find this pressure. b. To approximate the Valve Opening Pressure (POPEN), add about 10 psig (0.7 bar) to the Valve Closing Pressure.
POPEN = PCLOSE +10 psi (0.7 bar)

FIG:flw_eqn

P = P - P RISE

COND

OPEN

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise
3. Determine the available water pressure to the valve (PAVAIL) using the following steps. This the actual water pressure available to force water through the valve. a. Determine the minimum inlet pressure (PIN). This is the water pressure from city water mains, pumps, or other sources. b. Pressure drop through condenser (PCOND) is the difference in water pressure between the condenser inlet and the condenser outlet. Obtain this information from the condenser manufacturer. c. Estimate or calculate the pressure drop through all associated piping (PLOSS). d. Subtract the PCOND and PLOSS from PIN. The result is PAVAIL.

Cooling Tower

FIG:3wy_prss_drp

Pump

P
Loss 2

3-Way

Valve

P2

P1

Condenser

P
IN
P
Loss 1

Balancing Valve

Bypass Line

P= COND

P
1

- P2

P= LOSS

P+
Loss 1

P + ...
Loss 2

P = AVAIL PIN - (PCOND + P ) LOSS

Available Water Pressure

4. Select the proper valve size from the flowcharts by locating a point on a chart that satisfies the flow, the head pressure rise above opening point, and the pressure drop across the valve.

Metric Conversions
Use these equations to convert between U.S. and S.I. units. · 1 dm3/s = 3.6 m3/h = 15.9 U.S. gal. /min. = 13.2 U.K. gal. /min. · 1 bar = 100 kPa = 0.1 MPa  1.02 kg/cm2 = 0.987 atm  14.5 psig

FIG:eqn_hd_prssr_rs

FIG:eqn_opn_prssr

Valve Opening Pressure
c. From the Pressure-Temperature Chart for the refrigerant selected, read the Refrigerant Condensing Pressure (PCOND) (operating head pressure) corresponding to the selected condensing temperature.
d. Subtract the Valve Opening Pressure from the Refrigerant Condensing Pressure. This gives the head pressure rise.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-182

Valves and Valve Accessories

V248 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

V248 Flowcharts
The maximum recommended differential water pressure across a valve is 20 psig (1.4 bar).

0.7

1.4

2.1

Flow

(gpm) 18

Pressure Drop 15 Through Valve,
psig (bar)

12

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise (bar)

2.8

3.5

4.1

4.8

5.5

6.2

9

6

3

6.9

4.1

Flow (m³/hr)

20 (1.4)

3.4 14.5 (1.0)

10 (0.7) 2.7

5 (0.3) 2.0 1.4
2 (0.1) 0.7

FIG:V248_0.5 in. gr aph

0

0.0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )

1/2 in. Direct Acting Valve Flowchart

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise (bar)

0.7

1.4

2.1

2.8

3.5

4.1

4.8

5.5

6.2

Flow (gpm)

25

Pressure Drop 20 Through Valve,
psig (bar)

15

10

5

6.9

20 (1.4)

5.7

Flow (M³/hr)

14.5 (1.0) 4.5
10 (0.7) 3.4
5 (0.3) 2.3
2 (0.1) 1.1

FIG:V248_0.75 in. graph

0

0.0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )

3/4 in. Direct Acting Valve Flowchart

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-183

Valves and Valve Accessories
V248 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

FIG:V248_1.0 in. graph

0.7

1.4

2.1

Flow (gpm)

50

Pressure Drop 40 Through Valve,
psig (bar)

30

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise (bar)

2.8

3.5

4.1

4.8

5.5

6.2

20

10

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )

1 in. Direct Acting Valve Flowchart

6.9 20 (1.4)

11.4

Flow (m³/hr)

9.1 14.5 (1.0)

10 (0.7) 6.8

5 (0.3) 4.5
2 (0.1) 2.3

0.0

100

110

0.7

1.4

2.1

Flow (gpm)

70

Pressure Drop

60 Through Valve,

psig (bar) 50

40

30

20

10

0

10

20

30

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise (bar)

2.8

3.5

4.1

4.8

5.5

6.2

40

50

60

70

80

90

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )

1-1/4 in. Direct Acting Valve Flowchart

6.9 20 (1.4)
14.5 (1.0) 10 (0.7)

15.9

Flow (m³/hr)

13.6

11.4

9.1

5 (0.3) 6.8

2 (0.1) 4.5

2.3

0.0

100

110

FIG:V248_1.25 in. graph

Flow (gpm)

0.7 80
70 60

1.4

2.1

Pressure Drop Through Valve,
psig (bar)

50

40

30

20

10

0

10

20

30

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise (bar)

2.8

3.5

4.1

4.8

5.5

6.2

40

50

60

70

80

90

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )

1-1/2 in. Direct Acting Valve Flowchart

6.9
20 (1.4) 14.5 (1.0)
10 (0.7)

18.2

Flow (m³/hr)

15.9

13.6

11.4

5 (0.3) 9.1 6.8
2 (0.1) 4.5

2.3

0.0

100

110

FIG:V248_1.5 in. graph

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-184

Valves and Valve Accessories

V248 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

A

B

A

B

Port 1 Port 3

D Port 2 C
E
Plugged F

Port 1 Port 3

C D
Port 2
E
Plugged F

FIG:V248_thdd FIG:V248_unbdy

V248 1/2 in. Through 1-1/4 in. Screw Connection Valves Dimensions

V248 Union Sweat Connection Valves Dimensions

E
PORT 2

PORT 3 PORT 1

FIG:V248_3 way valve

V248 1-1/2 in. Screw Connection Valves Dimensions

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-185

Valves and Valve Accessories

V248 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

V248 1/2 in. Through 1-1/4 in. Screw Connection Valves Dimensions

Valve Size

Dimensions in Inches (Millimeters)

A

B

C

D

1/2 in.

3-1/16 (78)

2 (51)

8-11/16 (220)

3-13/16 (96)

3/4 in.

3-3/8 (86)

2-3/16 (55)

9-3/4 (248)

4-3/16 (106)

1 in.

4-3/4 (121)

2-13/16 (71)

12-1/2 (318)

5-15/16 (151)

1-1/4 in.

4-3/4 (121)

2-13/16 (71)

13-1/4 (336)

6-1/8 (156)

V248 Union Sweat Connection Valves Dimensions Valve Size

A

B

3/4 in.

3-3/8 (86)

2-3/16 (55)

1 in.

4-3/4 (121)

2-13/16 (71)

1-1/4 in.

4-3/4 (121)

2-13/16 (71)

Dimensions in Inches (Millimeters)

C

D

9-3/4 (248)

4-3/16 (106)

12-1/2 (318)

5-15/16 (151)

13-1/4 (336)

6-1/8 (156)

V248 1-1/2 in. Screw Connection Valves Dimensions Valve Size

A

B

1-1/2 in.

6 (152)

3-1/2 (89)

Dimensions in Inches (Millimeters)

C

D

15-1/4 (382)

8 (203)

E
1-1/2 (38) 1-3/4 (44) 2-1/16 (52) 2-3/8 (60)
E
1-3/4 (44) 2-1/16 (52) 2-3/8 (60)
E
9-5/16 (237)

F
3-3/8 (86) 3-13/16 (98) 4-1/2 (114) 4-3/4 (121)
F
3-13/16 (98) 4-1/2 (114) 4-3/4 (121)
F
6-7/8 (175)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-186

Valves and Valve Accessories

V248 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

Materials
North American V248 Materials Nominal Valve Size: Material
Body Seat Disc Disc Cup Disc Stud Stem/Extension Sleeve Diaphragms

Pressure Element

Cup Bellows Bellows Ring

European V248 Materials Nominal Valve Size: Material
Body Seat Disc Disc Cup Disc Stud Stem/Extension Sleeve Diaphragms Refrigerant Contact Pressure Element Cup
Bellows Bellows Ring

3/8 in. to 3/4 in. (Commercial)

1 in. to 1-1/2 in. (Commercial)

Cast brass

Cast iron/rust resisting finish

Aluminum bronze

Aluminum bronze

BUNA-N

BUNA-N

Brass

Brass

Brass

Brass

Brass

Brass

Nylon reinforced BUNA-N

Nylon reinforced BUNA-N

Refrigerant Contact

300 Series stainless steel

300 Series stainless steel

300 Series stainless steel

300 Series stainless steel

Steel/nickel plated

Steel/nickel plated

3/8 in. to 3/4 in. (Commercial)
Hot forged brass Aluminum bronze BUNA-N Brass Brass Brass Nylon reinforced BUNA-N
300 Series stainless steel 300 Series stainless steel Steel/nickel plated

1 in. to 1-1/2 in. (Commercial)
Cast iron/rust resisting finish Aluminum bronze BUNA-N Brass Brass Brass Nylon reinforced BUNA-N
300 Series stainless steel 300 Series stainless steel Steel/nickel plated

Maritime (All Sizes)
Cast bronze Monel BUNA-N Monel Monel Monel Nylon reinforced BUNA-N
300 Series stainless steel 300 Series stainless steel Steel/nickel plated
Maritime (All Sizes)
Cast bronze Monel BUNA-N Monel Monel Monel Nylon reinforced BUNA-N
300 Series stainless steel 300 Series stainless steel Steel/nickel plated

Technical Specifications

V248 Series Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants

Maximum Working Pressure

630 psig (43.4 bar)

Factory-Set Opening Point (Port 1 to 275 psig (19.0 bar) Port 2)

Opening Point Adjustment Range (Port 1 to Port 2)

200 to 400 psi (13.8 to 27.6 bar)

Throttling Range

120 psi (8.3 bar) for 1/2 in. size 100 psi (6.9 bar) for 3/4 in., 1 in., and 1-1/4 in. sizes 140 psi (9.6 bar) for 1-1/2 in. size

Media

150 psig (10.3 bar) maximum, -4F to 170F (-20C to 77C) glycol/water or liquids with low freezing points that are compatible with valve materials

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-187

Valves and Valve Accessories

Code No. LIT-1927340

STT Water Valve Renewal Kit for V46, V47, and V48 Series Valves

Description
These renewal kits include a seat, disc, diaphragms, and all additional internal parts required to recondition the valves.

Selection Chart

Valve Size (in.)
3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2

Commercial Kit

For Series V46A, V46N, V47A, For Series V48 V47N Product Code Numbers Product Code Numbers

STT14A-600R



STT15A-602R

STT15A-605R

STT16A-601R

STT16A-604R

STT17A-609R

STT17A-616R

STT17A-610R

STT17A-617R STT17A-604R

STT18A-600R



STT18A-601R



Monel Kit For Series V46B, V46C, V47B, V47C Product Code Number
STT14A-601R STT15A-603R STT17A-613R STT17A-611R
STT17A-612R
STT18A-602R

Diaphragm Kits Only for All Types
   DPM17A-600R
DPM17A-601R

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-188

Valves and Valve Accessories

Code No. LIT-1900112

Companion Flanges and Gaskets for V43, V46, and V47 Series Valves

Description
Companion flanges and gaskets are sold individually or in kits. The kits contain two flange gaskets, two cast iron flanges with NPT (National Pipe Thread), eight hex nuts, and eight machine bolts.

Cast Iron

Flange

Flange (Two)

Gasket (Two)

Hex

Machine

Nut (Eight) Bolt (Eight)

Companion Flange Kit

Selection Chart

Valve Size

Valve Series

V43 Series

V46 Series

V47 Series

Flange Gaskets (One gasket per package)

1-1/2 in.

--

246-423

2 in.

246-424

2-1/2 in.

246-425

1-1/2 in. 2 in. 2-1/2 in. 3 in. 4 in.

Companion Flange Kits (See diagram)

--

KIT14A-6121

KIT14A-612

KIT14A-6131

KIT14A-6131

KIT14A-613

KIT14A-6141

KIT14A-6141

KIT14A-614

FLG15A-6001

--

--

FLG15A-6011

--

--

1. Commercial valves only

Repair Information
If the Companion Flanges and Gaskets for V43, V46, and V47 Series Valves fail to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement flange or gasket, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-189

Relays and Transformers

Code No. LIT-1922175

Y63, Y64, Y65, Y66, and Y69 Series Transformers

Description
The Y63, Y64, Y65, Y66, and Y69 Series Transformers provide 24 VAC power for loads of 40 VA through 300 VA. These transformers are designed for use on digital controllers, gas controls, ignition systems, motor actuators, staging controls, and most other 24 VAC HVAC/R control systems.
The Y6x Series meets the requirements of UL 1585, UL 506, and CSA C22.2 No. 66, providing compliance in both the United States and Canada. The Y63, Y64, Y65, and Y66 transformers are listed as Class 2 transformers (UL 1585, CSA C22.2 No. 66). The Y69 is listed as a general purpose transformer (UL 506, CSA C22.2 No. 66).
Refer to the Series Y63, Y64, Y65, Y66, and Y69 Transformers Product Bulletin (LIT-125755) for important product application information.

Features
· split-bobbin design provides best primary/secondary isolation
· multi-tap primaries reduce stocking requirements and offer application flexibility
· choice of foot, plate, or conduit hub mounting provides mounting flexibility
· choice of primary voltages meets a wide range of power requirements from 24 VAC through 480 VAC
· color-coded lead wires provide simplicity and standardization
· cULus listed or cURus recognized meets US and Canadian requirements for Class 2 transformers (Y63, Y64, Y65, and Y66) and general purpose transformers (Y69)
· built-in, easy-reset circuit breakers eliminate replacement time and cost caused by burn-out (Y63, Y64, Y66, and Y69)
· open frame Y65 models serve as ideal models when end bells are not required

Y65 Series Transformer
Repair Information
Do not make any field repairs to transformers. For a replacement transformer, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® distributor or sales representative.

Selection Chart

Y63, Y64, Y65, Y66, and Y69 Series Transformers (Part 1 of 2)

Product Code Primary Secondary Primary

Number

Voltage Voltage

Connection

VAC

VAC

Secondary Connection

Mounting

40 VA Capacity Transformers with Energy Limiting Type Overload Protection

Y65G13-0

24

24

External Fitting 8 in. primary leads

External Fitting 30 in. secondary leads

Foot

Y65A13-0

120

24

External Fitting 8 in. primary leads

External Fitting 30 in. secondary leads

Foot

Y65A21-0

120

24

End bell holes 8 in. primary leads

Three screw terminals (one is blind)

4 in. x 4 in. plate

Y65T31-0

120/208/240 24

External Fitting 8 in. primary leads

Three screw terminals (one is blind)

Foot 4 in. x 4 in. plate1

Y65T42-0

120/208/240 24

Common External Fitting Common External Fitting Hub

8 in. primary leads

8 in. secondary leads

4 in. x 4 in. plate1

Y65T54-0

120/208/240 24

8 in. primary leads

8 in. secondary leads

Foot-skeleton

Y65S13-0

208/240

24

External Fitting 8 in. primary leads

External Fittings 30 in. secondary leads

Foot

Y65F13-0

277/480

24

External Fitting 8 in. primary leads

External Fitting 30 in. secondary leads

Foot

Y65F42-0

277/480

24

Common External Fitting Common External Fitting Hub

8 in. primary leads

8 in. secondary leads

4 in. x 4 in. plate1

50 VA Capacity Transformers with Circuit Breakers

Y63T22-0

120/208/240 24

End bell Hole 8 in. primary leads

End bell Hole 8 in. secondary leads

4 in. x 4 in. plate

Y63T31-0

120/208/240 24

External Fitting 8 in. primary leads

Three screw terminals (one is blind)

Foot 4 in. x 4 in. plate1

Y63F22-0

277/480

24

End bell Hole 8 in. primary leads

End bell Hole 8 in. secondary leads

4 in. x 4 in. plate

Agency Requirement
cULus Class 2 cULus Class 2 cULus Class 2 cULus Class 2 cURus Class 2 cURus Class 2 cULus Class 2 cULus Class 2 cURus Class 2
cURus Class 2 cULus Class 2 cURus Class 2

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-190

Relays and Transformers
Y63, Y64, Y65, Y66, and Y69 Series Transformers (Continued)

Y63, Y64, Y65, Y66, and Y69 Series Transformers (Part 2 of 2)

Product Code Primary Secondary Primary

Number

Voltage Voltage

Connection

VAC

VAC

Secondary Connection

Mounting

75 VA Capacity Transformers with Circuit Breakers

Y66T12-0

120/208/240 24

Common External Fitting Common External Fitting Foot

8 in. primary leads

8 in. secondary leads

Y66T13-0

120/208/240 24

External Fitting 8 in. primary leads

External Fitting 30 in. secondary leads

Foot

Y66F12-0

277/480

24

Common External Fitting Common External Fitting Foot

8 in. primary leads

8 in. secondary leads

Y66F13-0

277/480

24

External Fitting 8 in. primary leads

External Fitting 30 in. secondary leads

Foot

92 VA Capacity Transformers with Circuit Breakers

Y64T15-0

120/208/240 24

External Fitting 8 in. primary leads

Internal Fitting 30 in. secondary leads

Foot

Y64T21-0

120/208/240 24

End bell holes 8 in. primary leads

Three screw terminals (one is blind)

Plate

Y64T22-0

120/208/240 24

End bell Hole 8 in. primary leads

End bell Hole 8 in. secondary leads

Plate

300 VA Capacity Transformers with Circuit Breakers

Y69T15-0

120/208/240 24

External Fitting 8 in. primary leads

Internal Fitting 30 in. secondary leads

Foot

1. 4 in. x 4 in. plate and nut packed with transformer.

Agency Requirement
cURus Class 2 cULus Class 2 cURus Class 2 cULus Class 2
cULus Class 2 cULus Class 2 cURus Class 2
cULus Power Transformer

Technical Specifications
Input Power Requirements Full Load Secondary Voltage Open Circuit Secondary Voltage (No Load) Full Load Secondary VA Rating
Finish Ambient Operating Temperature Ambient Storage Temperature Shipping Weight
Agency Compliance

Series Y63, Y64, Y65, Y66, Y69 Transformers

24 to 480 VAC at 60 Hz

23.5 VAC (Nominal)

27.0 VAC (Nominal)

Series Y63 Y64 Y65 Y66 Y69

Volt-Amperes 50 VA 92 VA 40 VA 75 VA 300 VA

End bells, frame, feet, and mounting plates are corrosion resistant

-40 to 104°F (-40 to 40°C)

-40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C)

Y63

3.0 lb/1.4 kg

Y64

4.0 lb/1.8 kg

Y65

2.0 lb/0.9 kg

Y66

3.0 lb/1.4 kg

Y69

11.0 lb/5.0 kg

UL Listed Y63, Y64, Y65, Y66; File E95575, CCN's XOKV (US) and XOKV7 (Canada) UL Recognized Y63, Y64, Y65, Y66; File E95575, CCN's XOKV2 (US) and XOKV8 (Canada) UL Listed Y69; File E95138, CCN's XPTQ (US) and XPTQ7 (Canada) All transformers are Class 2 except the Y69 (300 VA), which is listed as a power transformer.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-191

System 450 Control Series
System 450TM Series Modular Controls

Code No. LIT-1900549

Description
System 450TM is a family of modular, digital electronic controls that is easily assembled and set up to provide reliable temperature, pressure, and humidity control for a wide variety of HVAC/R applications, commercial process applications, and industrial process applications.
The System 450 control system is designed to replace System 350TM and System 27 control systems, and to provide many additional features and benefits with fewer than twenty model variations.
System 450 control modules provide a field-configurable out-of-the-box solution. Most System 450 control modules can control temperature, pressure, and humidity systems simultaneously.
System 450 Control Modules with Communications enable you to connect System 450 control systems to Modbus® or Ethernet networks for remote monitoring and setup. The Modbus communications control module is an RS485, RTU-compliant subordinate device. The Ethernet communications control module has an integral web server that can deliver web pages by means of a direct connection, on your LAN, or across the Internet.
System 450 Reset Control Modules provide many of the features of the standard models for temperature and humidity control. In addition, these modules provide setpoint reset, real-time setback scheduling, and run-time balancing (equal run time) capability.
The System 450 Control Module with Hybrid Analog Output has a single self-selecting analog output to optimize and extend the controlled speed range of variable speed electronically commutated (EC) motors.
Refer to the following documents for important product application information.
· System 450TM Series Modular Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011458)
· System 450TM Series Modular Control Systems with Standard Control Modules Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011459)
· System 450TM Series Modular Control Systems with Reset Control Modules Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011842)
· System 450TM Series Modular Control Systems with Communications Control Modules Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011826)
Features
· durable, compact, interchangeable modular components with plug-together connectors and DIN rail or direct wall mount capability eliminate field wiring between modules and allow you to quickly and easily design, assemble, install, and upgrade your control systems.
· versatile, multipurpose, field-configurable control modules and expansion modules designed for global use allow you to create a wide variety of application-specific control systems capable of controlling temperature, pressure, or humidity, or all three conditions simultaneously, with only a small suite of module models.
· up to three hard-wired input sensors and up to ten relay or analog outputs (in any combination) per control system allow you to build complex custom control systems while reducing your control system cost to only the cost of the required components.
· control Modules with bright backlit LCDs and four-button touch pad user interfaces provide quick, clear, visual status of your System 450 control system inputs and outputs with the touch of a button and enable you to quickly and easily set up and adjust your control system.

System 450 Control System with a Control, Power, and Expansion Module
· multipurpose, all-in-one control modules enable simple stand-alone, single-module control systems that are temperature, pressure, and humidity capable out of the box and easy to set up in the field to replace a wide variety of OEM HVAC/R and process controls.
· an extensive suite of compatible temperature and humidity sensors, and pressure transducers allows you to monitor and control a wide range of HVAC/R and process conditions in a variety of standard and global units of measurement.
· high input signal selection enables your control system to monitor a temperature, pressure, or humidity condition with two or three sensors (of the same type) and control your system outputs based on the highest condition value sensed by the referenced sensors.
· differential control enables your control system to monitor and maintain a temperature, pressure, or humidity differential between two sensor points within a system, process, or space.
The Reset Control modules have additional features:
· adjustable minimum and maximum setpoint temperatures (reset control modules only) enable compliance with the manufacturer's specifications for your controlled HVAC/R and process equipment.
· selectable shutdown-high and shutdown-low temperature settings (reset control modules only) saves you energy by shutting down controlled equipment when the ambient temperature either rises or drops to a point where heating or cooling is no longer required.
· real time clock and adjustable setback temperature (reset control modules only) save you energy by setting back heating, cooling, or humidity setpoints during scheduled unoccupied periods (24-hour day, 7-day week schedule).
· user-defined reset control capability (reset control modules only) saves you energy in a wide variety of temperature and humidity reset control applications by adjusting the temperature or humidity control loop, based on changes in ambient outdoor temperature or other uncontrolled condition.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-192

System 450 Control Series
System 450TM Series Modular Controls (Continued)

The Control Modules with Communications have additional features:
· Ethernet communication capability through a built-in web server (Ethernet Control Modules only) allows you to monitor your control system status and set up or change the parameters by means of a direct Ethernet cable connection, through a LAN connection, or over the Internet. The built in web server delivers user-friendly web pages to client browsers on a desktop, laptop, tablet, or smart device.
· The Web page server on Ethernet communication modules provides a simple, intuitive web interface for easy remote monitoring, setup, adjustment and remote monitoring of your control systems across Ethernet networks.
· RS485, RTU-compliant Modbus® network communication capability (Modbus control modules only) enables a head-end RS485 Modbus master controller to read and write control system status and setup parameters to the System 450 Modbus communication control module.
· Password protection for local access (Ethernet and Modbus control modules only) and password protection for remote access (Ethernet control module only) deters unauthorized changes to the control system settings, but allows local and remote monitoring of your control system status.
· Analog output signal limiting features (communication control modules only) allow you to select the rate and condition range at which the control updates the analog output signal, potentially reducing wear on the controlled equipment.
· Binary input with time delay (communication control modules only) allows you to use an external set of dry contacts and selectable time delays to control relay outputs.
Applications
You can create a wide variety of custom, application-specific control systems with System 450 modules. The following are some common control application examples:
· Temperature control · Pressure control · Humidity control · Multipurpose control · Reset and setback control · High input-signal selection · Differential control
Temperature Control
· Temperature monitoring and alarming · On/Off staged control of boilers and chillers · Proportional stage control of boilers and chillers · Boiler and chiller pump control · Heating and cooling control with deadband · Floating temperature control of damper and valve actuators · Cooling tower fan speed/stage control based on water
temperature · Supply, make-up, and mixed air temperature control · Temperature actuated valve control · Supply and make-up air damper and fan control · Condenser fan staging or speed control based on condenser
temperature

Refrigerant Pressure Control
· Condenser fan cycling and stage control · Multispeed condenser fan control · Floating pressure control of damper and valve actuators · Condenser fan speed and damper control · High and low pressure cutout control · Staged compressor control · Cooling tower fan speed control based on high-side pressure · Direct speed control of electronically commutated (EC) condenser
fan motors (C450CPW-100 model)
Other Pressure Control
· Relief damper and fan control for building pressurization · Constant static pressure control
Humidity Control
· On/Off humidification and dehumidification control · Proportional humidification and dehumidification control · Multistage humidification and dehumidification control · Humidity monitoring and alarming
Multipurpose Control
· Temperature and pressure based refrigeration rack control · Temperature and humidity control of wine cellars and greenhouses · Temperature, humidity, and static pressure control of clean rooms
and greenhouses · Dehumidification with reheat control
Reset Control
· Boiler supply water temperature reset control based on outside air temperature
· Chiller supply water temperature reset control based on outside air temperature
· VAV zone temperature control based on outside air temperature · Humidity reset based on outside air temperature · Staged applications with runtime balancing · Real-time Occupied/Unoccupied Setback
High Input Signal Selection
· Pressure-based fan speed or fan cycling control on multi-circuit condensers
· Temperature-based fan speed or fan cycling control on multi-circuit condensers
Differential Control
· Air and fluid pump-flow monitoring and alarming · Air and fluid filter status monitoring and alarming · Chiller barrel flow monitoring, control, and alarming · Solar air and water heating applications
Note: Communications modules add network communication to any application of your choosing, except those requiring reset, setback, or EC motor control.
Repair Information
If a System 450 module fails to operate within its specifications, replace the module. For a replacement module, contact your Johnson Controls® representative.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-193

System 450 Control Series
System 450TM Series Modular Controls (Continued)

System 450 Control Module Capabilities Control by ________

System 450 Control Modules

Standard

Communications

C450CPN-3C C450CQN-3C C450CBN-3C C450CCN-3C

C450CEN-1C C450CRN-1C

Controlled Condition

Temperature Pressure Humidity Combination of Conditions

















Control Capabilities

On/Off Relay Control





Analog Proportional Control (Direct and Reverse Action)





Analog Proportional Plus Integral Control (Direct





and Reverse Action)

Combination of On/Off Relay and Analog Output





Control

Stand-Alone Control



-

Multi-Stage Control (Relay or Analog)





Network Communications

-



High Input Signal Selection





Differential Control





Output Signal Limiting Output Signal Update Rate Output Signal Deadband

-



Binary Input Control for Relay Outputs

-



On/Off Duration Time Control

-



Temperature and Humidity Reset Control

-

-

Scheduling and Temperature Setback Control

-

-

Reset Setpoint Control

-

-

Setback Scheduling

-

-

Run-Time Balancing

-

-

Hybrid Analog Output Control

-

-

1. Only on output OUTA1.

Reset
C450RBN-3C C450RCN-3C

Hybrid C450CPW-100C





-



































-

-

-



-



-

-

-

-

-

-



-



-



-



-



-

-

1

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-194

System 450 Control Series
System 450TM Series Modular Controls (Continued)

Selection Charts

System 450 Modules and Accessories Ordering Information

Product Code

Product Description

Number

C450CBN-3C

Standard Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, and Relay Output; provides one relay output (SPDT line-voltage relay) for SPDT control.

C450CCN-3C

Standard Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, and Relay Output; provides two relay outputs (SPDT line-voltage relays) for SPDT control.

C450CEN-1C

Control Module with Ethernet Communications, LCD, and Four-Button Touchpad UI. (No onboard outputs available on control modules with network communications capabilities.)

C450CPN-3C

Standard Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, and Analog Output; provides one analog output (0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA self-selecting signal) for proportional control.

C450CPW-100C

Hybrid Analog Output Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, Hybrid Analog Output and Optional High Input Signal Select; provides one hybrid analog output and optional high input signal select primarily used for variable-speed EC motor speed control.
Only Analog Output 1 (OUTA1) can be configured as a hybrid analog output and/or use the High Input Signal Selection feature. These features are not available for any of the other outputs in a System 450 control system that uses the C450CPW-100C as the control module.

C450CQN-3C

Standard Control Module with LCD and Four-Button Touchpad UI, and Analog Output; provides two analog outputs (0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA self-selecting signals) for proportional control.

C450CRN-1C

Control Module with RS485 Modbus Communications, LCD, and Four-Button Touchpad UI. (No onboard outputs available on control modules with network communications capabilities.)

C450RBN-3C

Reset Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, and SPDT relay output; provides one SPDT output relay. One A99BC-25C temperature sensor with 0.25 m (9-1/4 in.) silicon leads and one A99BC-300C temperature sensor with 3 m (9 ft 10 in.) silicon leads are included in the box with the Reset Control Module.

C450RCN-3C

Reset Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, and SPDT relay output; provides two SPDT output relays. One A99BC-25C temperature sensor with 0.25 m (9-1/4 in.) silicon leads and one A99BC-300C temperature sensor with 3 m (9 ft 10 in.) silicon leads are included in the box with the Reset Control Module.

C450SBN-3C

Relay Output Expansion Module; provides one SPDT line-voltage relay output.

C450SCN-3C

Relay Output Expansion Module; provides two SPDT line-voltage relay outputs.

C450SPN-1C

Analog Output Expansion Module; provides one analog output (0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA self-selecting signal) for proportional control.

C450SQN-1C

Analog Output Expansion Module; provides two analog outputs (0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA self-selecting signals) for proportional control.

C450YNN-1C

Power Module; provides 24 V to System 450 Module Assembly; 120 VAC or 240 VAC supply power input terminals.

BKT287-1R

DIN Rail; 0.30 m (12 in.) long

BKT287-2R

DIN Rail; 1 m (39-1/3 in.) long

BKT287-3R

DIN Rail; 0.61 m (24 in.) long

BKT287-4R

DIN Rail; 0.36 m (14 in.) long

PLT344-1R

DIN Rail End Clamps (2 clamps)

WHA-C450-100C

System 450 module connection extension cable, 100 cm (3.3 ft) long

System 450 Compatible A99B Temperature Sensors and Accessories Ordering Information1 (Part 1 of 2)

Product Code

Product Description

Number

A99BA-200C

PTC Silicon Sensor with Shielded Cable; Cable Length 2 m (6-1/2 ft); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Temperature Range: -40 to 100°C (-40 to 212°F)

A99BB-25C

PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable Length 0.25 m (9-3/4 in.); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Temperature Range: -40 to 100°C (-40 to 212°F)

A99BB-200C

PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable Length 2 m (6-1/2 ft); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Temperature Range: -40 to 100°C (-40 to 212°F)

A99BB-300C

PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable Length 3 m (9-3/4 ft); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Temperature Range: -40 to 100°C (-40 to 212°F)

A99BB-500C

PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable Length 5 m (16-3/8 ft); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Temperature Range: -40 to 100°C (-40 to 212°F)

A99BB-600C

PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable Length 6 m (19-1/2 ft); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Temperature Range: -40 to 100°C (-40 to 212°F)

A99BC-25C

PTC Silicon Sensor with High Temperature Silicon Cable; Cable Length 0.25 m (9-3/4 in.); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Rated for Full Sensor Temperature Range.

A99BC-300C

PTC Silicon Sensor with High Temperature Silicon Cable; Cable Length 3 m (9-3/4 ft) Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Rated for Full Sensor Temperature Range.

A99BC-1500C

PTC Silicon Sensor with High Temperature Silicon Cable; Cable Length 15 m (49 ft) Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Rated for Full Sensor Temperature Range.

BOX10A-600R

PVC Enclosure for A99 Sensor; Includes Wire Nuts and Conduit Connector (for Outdoor Sensor)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-195

System 450 Control Series
System 450TM Series Modular Controls (Continued)

System 450 Compatible A99B Temperature Sensors and Accessories Ordering Information1 (Part 2 of 2)

Product Code

Product Description

Number

WEL11A-601R

Immersion Well for A99 Sensor Liquid Sensing Applications

A99-CLP-1

Mounting Clip for A99 Temperature Sensor

ADP11A-600R

Conduit Adaptor, 1/2 in. Snap-Fit EMT Conduit Adaptor (box of 10)

TE-6001-1

Duct Mounting Hardware with Handy Box for A99 Sensor

TE-6001-11

Duct Mounting Hardware without Handy Box for A99 Sensor

SHL10A-603R

Sun Shield (for Use with Outside A99 Sensors in Sunny Locations)

1. Refer to the A99B Series Temperature Sensors Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-125186) on the Johnson Controls® Product Literature website for more information.

System 450 Compatible TE-6000 Series 1,000 Ohm Nickel Temperature Sensors and Accessories Ordering Information

Product Code

Product Description

Number

TE-6000-x

TE6000 Series 1,000 ohm at 70F nickel temperature sensors (only). Only the TE-6000-6 sensor can be used for the entire HIC and HIF temperature range. Different sensing element packages are available for various applications. For a complete list of compatible 1,000 ohm nickel sensors, including sensor descriptions, technical specifications, and mounting accessories, refer to the TE-6000 Series Temperature Sensing Elements Product Bulletin (LIT-216288). (System 450 Sensor Types HIC and HIF)

System 450 Compatible TE-6300 Series 1,000 Ohm Nickel Temperature Sensors and Accessories Ordering Information

Product Code

Product Description

Number

TE-631xx-x

TE6300 Series 1,000 ohm at 70F nickel averaging and 1,000 ohm thin-film nickel temperature sensors (only). For a complete list of compatible 1,000 ohm nickel averaging and thin-film nickel sensors, including sensor descriptions, technical specifications, and mounting accessories, refer to the TE-6300 Series Temperature Sensors Product Bulletin (LIT-216320). (System 450 Sensor Types HIC and HIF)

System 450 Compatible TE-68NT-0N00S 1,000 Ohm Nickel Temperature Sensor Ordering Information

Product Code

Product Description

Number

TE-68NT-0N00S

TE6800 Series 1,000 ohm nickel temperature sensor for wall-mount applications. For more information, including sensor description, technical specifications, and mounting accessories, refer to the TE-6800 Series Temperature Sensors Product Bulletin (LIT-12011542). (System 450 Sensor Types HIC and HIF)

System 450 Compatible HE67S3 Type Humidity Sensors with Integral A99B Temperature Sensor Ordering Information1

Product Code

Product Description

Number

HE-67S3-0N0BT

Wall Mount Humidity Sensor with A99B Type Temperature Sensor: 10 to 90% RH; 0 to 60C (32 to 140F)

HE-67S3-0N00P

Duct Mount Humidity Sensor with A99B Type Temperature Sensor: 10 to 90% RH; 0 to 60C (32 to 140F)

1. The HE-67S3 sensors require 24 VAC input and must use the 05 VDC output. Refer to the TrueRH Series HE-67xx Humidity Element with Temperature Sensors Product Bulletin (LIT-216245) on the Johnson Controls Product Literature website for more information, including technical specifications and mounting accessories.

System 450 Compatible HE6800 Series Humidity Transmitters with Temperature Sensor Ordering Information1

Product Code

Product Description

Number

HE-68N2-0N00WS Wall Mount Humidity Transmitter with Nickel Temperature Sensor: 10 to 90 ±2% RH; 0 to 55C (32 to 131F)

HE-68N3-0N00WS Wall Mount Humidity Transmitter with Nickel Temperature Sensor: 10 to 90 ±3% RH; 0 to 55C (32 to 131F)

1. The HE-6800 transmitters require 24 VAC input and must use the 05 VDC output. Refer to the HE-6800 Series Humidity Transmitters with Temperature Sensor Product Bulletin (LIT-12011625) on the Johnson Controls Product Literature website for more information, including technical specifications and mounting accessories.

System 450 Compatible Low Pressure Differential Transducer Ordering Information1 2

Product Code

Product Description

Number

DPT2650-R25B-AB

Low Pressure Differential Transducer: -0.25 to 0.25 in. W.C. (System 450 Sensor Type: P 0.25)3

DPT2650-0R5D-AB Low Pressure Differential Transducer: 0 to 0.5 in. W.C. (System 450 Sensor Type: P 0.5)

DPT2650-2R5D-AB Low Pressure Differential Transducer: 0 to 2.5 in. W.C. (System 450 Sensor Type: P 2.5)

DPT2650-005D-AB

Low Pressure Differential Transducer: 0 to 5.0 in. W.C. (System 450 Sensor Type: P 5)

DPT2650-10D-AB

Low Pressure Differential Transducer: 0 to 10 in. W.C. (System 450 Sensor Type: P 10)

1. Refer to the Setra Systems Model DPT265 Very Low Differential Pressure Transducer Catalog Page on the Johnson Controls Product Literature website for more information.
2. The DPT265 sensors require 24 VAC input and must use the 05 VDC output. Refer to the Setra Systems Model DPT265 Very Low Differential Pressure Transducer Catalog Page on the Johnson Controls Product Literature website for more information.
3. Used only with Communications Control Modules.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-196

System 450 Control Series
System 450TM Series Modular Controls (Continued)

System 450 Compatible P499 Series Transducers with 1/4 in. SAE 45 Flare Internal Thread with Depressor (Style 47) Ordering Information1
Product Code Product Description Number

P499RCP-401C

-1 to 8 bar; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RCP-402C

-1 to 15 bar; order WH A-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RCP-404C

0 to 30 bar; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RCP-405C

0 to 50 bar; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RCPS100C -10 to 100 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RCPS100K -10 to 100 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included

P499RCPS102C 0 to 200 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RCPS102K 0 to 200 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included

P499RCP-101C

0 to 100 psi; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RCP-101K

0 to 100 psi; WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included

P499RCP-105C

0 to 500 psi; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RCP-105K

0 to 500 psi; WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included

P499RCP-107C

0 to 750 psi; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RCP-107K

0 to 750 psi; WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included

1. The P499 sensors must be powered with the +5 VDC and C terminals and the output is 0.5 to 4.5 VDC. Refer to the P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011190) on the Johnson Controls Product Literature website for more information.

System 450 Compatible P499 Series Transducers with 1/8 in. 27 NPT External Thread (Style 49) Ordering Information1 Product Code Product Description Number

P499RAPS100C -10 to 100 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RAPS100K -10 to 100 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included

P499RAPS102C 0 to 200 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RAPS102K 0 to 200 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included

P499RAP-101C

0 to 100 psi; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RAP-101K

0 to 100 psi; WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included

P499RAP-102C

0 to 200 psi; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RAP-105C

0 to 500 psi; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RAP-105K

0 to 500 psi; WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included

P499RAP-107C

0 to 750 psi; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RAP-107K

0 to 750 psi; WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included

1. The P499 sensors must be powered with the +5 VDC and C terminals and the output is 0.5 to 4.5 VDC. Refer to the P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011190) on the Johnson Controls Product Literature website for more information.

WHA-PKD3 Wire Harnesses Ordering Information1 Product Code Product Description Number

WHA-PKD3-200C Plug and Three-Wire Harness for P499 Electronic Pressure Transducers: 2.0 m (6-1/2 ft) cable

WHA-PKD3-400C Plug and Three-Wire Harness for P499 Electronic Pressure Transducers: 4.0 m (13 ft) cable

WHA-PKD3-600C Plug and Three-Wire Harness for P499 Electronic Pressure Transducers: 6.0 m (19-5/8 ft) cable

1. Refer to the P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011190) on the Johnson Controls Product Literature website for more information.

Technical Specifications

Product
Power Consumption Supply Power

C450CPN-3C and C450CQN-3C Control Modules with Analog Output (Part 1 of 2)
C450CPN-3C and C450CQN-3C: System 450 Control Module models are sensing controls and operating controls with LCD, four-button touchpad, and SPDT analog output C450CPN-3C: Control Module with one analog output C450CQN-3C: Control Module with two analog outputs
C450CPN-3C: 1.3 VA maximum using 0 to 10 V out; 1.5 VA maximum using 4 to 20 mA out C450CQN-3C: 2.0 VA maximum using 0 to 10 V out; 2.4 VA maximum using 4 to 20 mA out
Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-197

System 450 Control Series
System 450TM Series Modular Controls (Continued)

C450CPN-3C and C450CQN-3C Control Modules with Analog Output (Part 2 of 2)

Ambient Operating Conditions

Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) when using 010 VDC outputs; -40 to 40C (-40 to 104F) when using 420 mA outputs
Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)

Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions

Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)

Input Signal

0 to 5 VDC for humidity sensors and static pressure transducers 0.5 to 4.5 VDC for ratiometric pressure transducers 1,035 ohms at 25C (77F) for A99 PTC temperature sensors 1,000 ohms at 21.1C (70F) for TE-6xxx Nickel temperature sensors

Analog Output

Voltage Mode (010 VDC): 10 VDC maximum output voltage 10 mA maximum output current Requires an external load of 1,000 ohms or more The AO operates in Voltage Mode when connected to devices with impedance greater than 1,000 ohms. Devices that fall below 1,000 ohms may not operate as intended with Voltage Mode applications.

Current Mode (420 mA): Requires an external load between 0 to 300 ohms The AO operates in Current Mode when connected to devices with impedance less than 300 ohms. Devices that rise above 300 ohms may not operate as intended with Current Mode applications.

Analog Input Accuracy

Resolution: 14 bits

Control Construction

Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.

Dimensions (H x W x D)

127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)

Weight

C450CPN-3C: 195 g (0.43 lb) C450CQN-3C: 195 g (0.43 lb)

Compliance

North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits

Europe: CE Mark  Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.

Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

Product
Supply Power
Ambient Operating Conditions Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions Input Signal Analog Input Accuracy Control Construction Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Compliance

C450CEN-1C Control Module with Ethernet Communications
C450CEN: System 450 control modules are sensing controls and operating controls with LCD and four-button touchpad UI, Ethernet communications capability, and no outputs. C450CEN-1C: Control module with Ethernet communications capability
Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.
Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
0 to 5 VDC; 1,035 ohms at 25C (77F) for an A99 PTC Temperature Sensor
Resolution: 16 bits
Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
127 x 63 x 63 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
C450CEN-1C: 207 g (0.46 lb)
North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
Europe: CE Mark  Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive; Low Voltage Directive; CISPR22, class B.
Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-198

System 450 Control Series
System 450TM Series Modular Controls (Continued)

Product Supply Power
Ambient Operating Conditions
Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions Input Signal Analog Input Accuracy Control Construction Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Compliance

C450CRN-1C Control Module with RS485 Modbus Communications
C450CRN-1C: System 450 control modules are sensing controls and operating controls with LCD and four-button touchpad UI and no outputs. This control module is an RS485, RTU compliant Modbus subordinate device. Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.
Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
0 to 5 VDC; 1,035 ohms at 25C (77F) for an A99 PTC Temperature Sensor
Resolution: 16 bits
Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
127 x 63 x 63 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
C450CRN-1C: 207 g (0.46 lb)
North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734: FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
Europe: CE Mark  Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive; Low Voltage Directive; CISPR22, class B
Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

Product Power Consumption Supply Power
Ambient Operating Conditions Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions Input Signal
Analog Output
Analog Input Accuracy Control Construction Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight

C450CPW-100C Control Module with Hybrid Analog Output (Part 1 of 2)
C450CPW-100C System 450 control module is a sensing control and operating control with LCD, four-button touchpad, and analog output with pulse-width modulation capability.
C450CPW-100C: 1.3 VA maximum using 0 to 10 V out; 1.5 VA maximum using 4 to 20 mA out
Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.
Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) when using 0 to 10 VDC outputs; -40 to 40C (-40 to 104F) when using 4 to 20 mA outputs Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
0 to 5 VDC for humidity sensors and static pressure transducers 0.5 to 4.5 VDC for ratiometric pressure transducers 1,035 ohms at 25C (77F) for A99 PTC temperature sensors 1,000 ohms at 21.1C (70F) for TE-6xxx Nickel temperature sensors
Voltage Mode (010 VDC): 10 VDC maximum output voltage 10 mA maximum output current Requires an external load of 1,000 ohms or more The AO operates in Voltage Mode when connected to devices with impedance greater than 1,000 ohms. Devices that fall below 1,000 ohms may not operate as intended with Voltage Mode applications.
Current Mode (420 mA): Requires an external load between 0 to 300 ohms The AO operates in Current Mode when connected to devices with impedance less than 300 ohms. Devices that rise above 300 ohms may not operate as intended with Current Mode applications.
Resolution: 14 bits
Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
C450CPW-100C: 195 g (0.43 lb)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-199

System 450 Control Series
System 450TM Series Modular Controls (Continued)

Compliance

C450CPW-100C Control Module with Hybrid Analog Output (Part 2 of 2)
North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
Europe: CE Mark  Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.
Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

Product
Power Consumption Supply Power
Ambient Operating Conditions Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions Input Signal
Output Relay Contacts
Analog Input Accuracy Control Construction Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Compliance

C450CBN-3C and C450CCN-3C Control Modules with Relay Output

C450CBN-3C and C450CCN-3C: System 450 Control Module models are sensing controls and operating controls with LCD, four-button touchpad, and SPDT relay output C450CBN-3C: Control Module with one SPDT output relay C450CCN-3C: Control Module with two SPDT output relays

C450CBN-3C: 0.9 VA maximum C450CCN-3C: 1.3 VA maximum

Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.

Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)

Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)

0 to 5 VDC for humidity sensors and static pressure transducers 0.5 to 4.5 VDC for ratiometric pressure transducers 1,035 ohms at 25C (77F) for A99 PTC temperature sensors 1,000 ohms at 21.1C (70F) for TE-6xxx Nickel temperature sensors

General: 1/2 HP at 120/240 VAC, SPDT

Specific: AC Motor Ratings

120 VAC

208/240 VAC

AC Full-load Amperes:

9.8 A

4.9 A

Locked-Rotor Amperes: 58.8 A

29.4 A

_____________________________________

10 Amperes AC Non-inductive at 24/240 VAC

Pilot Duty: 125 VA at 24/240 VAC

Resolution: 14 bits

Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.

127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)

C450CBN-3C: 209 g (0.46 lb) C450CCN-3C: 222 g (0.49 lb)

North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B; Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits

Europe: CE Mark  Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.

Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

C450RBN-3C and C450RCN-3C Reset Control Modules with Real-Time Clock and Relay Output (Part 1 of 2)

Product

C450RBN-3C and C450RCN-3C: System 450 Reset Control Module models are sensing controls and operating controls with LCD, four-button touchpad, and SPDT relay output C450RBN-3C: Control Module with one SPDT output relay C450RCN-3C: Control Module with two SPDT output relays

Power Consumption

C450RBN-3C: 0.9 VA maximum C450RCN-3C: 1.3 VA maximum

Supply Power

Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.

Ambient Operating Conditions

Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)

Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions

Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-200

System 450 Control Series
System 450TM Series Modular Controls (Continued)

C450RBN-3C and C450RCN-3C Reset Control Modules with Real-Time Clock and Relay Output (Part 2 of 2)

Input Signal

0 to 5 VDC for humidity sensors 1,035 ohms at 25C (77F) for A99 PTC temperature sensors

Output Relay Contacts

General: 1/2 HP at 120/240 VAC, SPDT

Specific: AC Motor Ratings

120 VAC

208/240 VAC

AC Full-load Amperes:

9.8 A

4.9 A

AC Locked-Rotor Amperes: 58.8 A

29.4 A

_____________________________________

10 Amperes AC Non-inductive at 24/240 VAC

Pilot Duty: 125 VA at 24/240 VAC

Clock Accuracy

±4 minutes per year

Clock Backup Power

12 hours (capacitor reserve)

Setback Events

One occupied and one unoccupied event per day; 7 day schedule

Analog Input Accuracy

Resolution: 14 bits

Control Construction

Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.

Dimensions (H x W x D)

127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)

Weight

C450RBN-3C: 209 g (0.46 lb) C450RCN-3C: 222 g (0.49 lb)

Compliance

North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B; Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits

Europe: CE Mark  Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.

Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

Product Power Consumption Supply Power
Ambient Operating Conditions Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions Analog Output
Control Construction Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Compliance

C450SPN-1C and C450SQN-1C Expansion Modules with Analog Output
C450SPN-1C: System 450 Expansion Module with one Analog output C450SQN-1C: System 450 Expansion Module with two Analog outputs
C450SPN-1C: 1.1 VA max using 0 to 10 V out; 1.3 VA maximum using 4 to 20 mA out C450SQN-1C: 1.8 VA max using 0 to 10 V out; 2.2 VA maximum using 4 to 20 mA out
Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.
Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) when using 0 to 10 VDC outputs; -40 to 40C (-40 to 104F) when using 4 to 20 mA outputs Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Voltage Mode (0 to 10 VDC): 10 VDC maximum output voltage 10 mA maximum output current Requires an external load of 1,000 ohms or more The AO operates in Voltage Mode when connected to devices with impedance greater than 1,000 ohms. Devices that drop below 1,000 ohms may not operate as intended with Voltage Mode applications.
Current Mode (4 to 20 mA): Requires an external load between 0 to 300 ohms The AO operates in Current Mode when connected to devices with impedances less than 300 ohms. Devices that exceed 300 ohms may not operate as intended with Current Mode applications.
Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
C450SPN-1C: 150 g (0.33 lb) C450SQN-1C: 150 g (0.33 lb)
North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734, Vol. 1; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
Europe: CE Mark - Johnson Controls, Inc., declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the Low Voltage Directive and the EMC Directive.
Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-201

System 450 Control Series
System 450TM Series Modular Controls (Continued)

Product Power Consumption Supply Power
Ambient Operating Conditions Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions Output Relay Contacts
Control Construction Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Compliance
Product Supply Power Secondary Power Ambient Operating Conditions Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions Control Construction Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Compliance

C450SBN-3C and C450SCN-3C Expansion Modules with Relay Output

C450SBN-3C: System 450 Expansion Module with one SPDT output relay C450SCN-3C: System 450 Expansion Module with two SPDT output relays

C450SBN-3C: 0.8 VA maximum C450SCN-3C: 1.2 VA maximum

Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.

Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)

Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)

General: 1/2 HP at 120/240 VAC, SPDT

Specific: AC Motor Ratings

120 VAC

208/240 VAC

AC Full-Load Amperes:

9.8 A

4.9 A

AC Locked-Rotor Amperes: 58.8 A

29.4 A

_____________________________________

10 Amperes AC Noninductive at 24/240 VAC

Pilot Duty: 125 VA at 24/240 VAC

Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.

127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)

C450SBN-3C: 172 g (0.38 lb) C450SCN-3C: 186 g (0.41 lb)

North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits

Europe: CE Mark  Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.

Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module
C450YNN-1C: System 450 Power Supply Module; 120 or 240 VAC stepdown to 24 VAC Class 2 (North America) or SELV (Europe)
110/120 VAC or 220/240 VAC at 50/60 Hz (100 mA maximum)
24 VAC, 10 VA
Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F) Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct
mounting to a hard, even surface.
127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
C450YNN-1C: 390 gm (0.86 lb)
North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734: FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
Europe: CE Mark  Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.
Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-202

System 450 Control Series

Code No. LIT- 1900861

System 450TM Series Control Module with Network Communications

Description
System 450TM is a family of modular, digital electronic controls that is easily assembled and set up to provide reliable temperature, pressure, and humidity control for a wide variety of HVAC/R applications, commercial process applications, and industrial process applications.
The System 450 control system is designed to replace System 350TM and System 27 control systems and to provide many additional features and benefits with fewer than twenty model variations.
System 450 control modules provide a field-configurable out-of-the-box solution. Most System 450 control modules can control temperature, pressure, and humidity systems simultaneously.
A single C450 control module can be set up as a stand-alone control or connected to expansion modules to control up to ten On/Off relay and proportional analog outputs, based on any of the three available inputs.
System 450 Control Modules with Communications enable you to connect System 450 control systems to Modbus® or Ethernet networks for remote monitoring and setup. The Modbus communications control module is an RS485, RTU-compliant subordinate device. The Ethernet communications control module has an integral web server that can deliver web pages through a direct connection, on your LAN, or across the Internet.
Refer to the following documents for important product application information, as well as detailed information on designing, installing, setting up, and troubleshooting:
· System 450TM Series Modular Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011458)
· System 450TM Series Modular Control Systems with Communications Control Modules Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011826)
· System 450TM Series Control Module with RS485 Modbus® Communications Installation Instructions (Part No. 24-7664-2926)
· System 450TM Series Control Module with Ethernet Communications Installation Instructions (Part No. 24-7664-2934)
Features
· Durable, compact, interchangeable modular components with plug-together connectors and DIN rail or direct wall mount capability eliminate field wiring between modules and allow you to quickly and easily design, assemble, install, and upgrade your control systems.
· Versatile, multipurpose, field-configurable control modules and expansion modules designed for global use allow you to create a wide variety of application-specific control systems capable of controlling temperature, pressure, or humidity, or all three conditions simultaneously, with only a small suite of module models.
· Up to three hard-wired input sensors and up to ten relay or analog outputs (in any combination) per control system allow you to build complex custom control systems while reducing your control system cost to only the cost of the required components.
· Control modules with bright backlit LCDs and four-button touch pad user interfaces provide quick, clear, visual status of your System 450 control system inputs and outputs with the touch of a button and enable you to quickly and easily set up and adjust your control system.
· An extensive suite of compatible temperature and humidity sensors, and pressure transducers allows you to monitor and control a wide range of HVAC/R and process conditions in a variety of standard and global units of measurement.
· High input signal selection enables your control system to monitor a temperature, pressure, or humidity condition with two or three sensors (of the same type) and control your system outputs based on the highest condition value sensed by the referenced sensors.

C450CEN Control Module with Communication
· Differential control enables your control system to monitor and maintain a temperature, pressure, or humidity differential between two sensor points within a system, process, or space.
· Ethernet communication capability through a built-in web server (Ethernet control modules only) allows you to monitor your control system status and set up or change the parameters by means of a direct Ethernet cable connection, through a LAN connection, or over the Internet. The built in web server delivers user-friendly web pages to client browsers on a desktop, laptop, tablet, or smart device.
· The web page server on Ethernet communication modules provides a simple, intuitive web interface for easy remote monitoring, setup, adjustment and remote monitoring of your control systems across Ethernet networks.
· RS485, RTU-compliant Modbus® network communication capability (Modbus control modules only) enables a head-end RS485 Modbus master controller to read and write control system status and setup parameters to the System 450 Modbus communication control module.
· Password protection for local access (Ethernet and Modbus control modules only) and password protection for remote access (Ethernet control module only) deters unauthorized changes to the control system settings, but allows local and remote monitoring of your control system status.
· Analog output signal limiting features (communication control modules only) allow you to select the rate and condition range at which the control updates the analog output signal, potentially reducing wear on the controlled equipment.
· Binary input with time delay (communication control modules only) allows you to use an external set of dry contacts and selectable time delays to control relay outputs.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-203

System 450 Control Series

System 450TM Series Control Module with Network Communications (Continued)

Selection Chart

Refer to the System 450 Compatible Sensors, Transducers, and Accessories Catalog Page (LIT-1900662) for temperature sensors, humidity sensors, and pressure transducers compatible with the System 450 Control Modules.

Communications System 450 Modules and Accessories Ordering Information

Product Code

Product Description

Number

C450CEN-1C

Control Module with Ethernet Communications, LCD, and Four-Button Touchpad UI. (No onboard outputs available on control modules with network communications capabilities.)

C450CRN-1C

Control Module with RS485 Modbus Communications, LCD, and Four-Button Touchpad UI. (No onboard outputs available on control modules with network communications capabilities.)

BKT287-1R

DIN Rail; 0.30 m (12 in.) long

BKT287-2R

DIN Rail; 1 m (39-1/3 in.) long

BKT287-3R

DIN Rail; 0.61 m (24 in.) long

BKT287-4R

DIN Rail; 0.36 m (14 in.) long

PLT344-1R

DIN Rail End Clamps (Two clamps)

WHA-C450-100C

System 450 module connection extension cable, 100 cm (3.3 ft) long

Repair Information
If the System 450TM Control Module with Ethernet or RS485 Modbus Communication fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement System 450TM Control Module, contact a Johnson Controls® representative.

Technical Specifications
Product
Supply Power
Ambient Operating Conditions Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions Input Signal Analog Input Accuracy Control Construction Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Compliance

C450CEN-1C Control Module with Ethernet Communications
C450CEN: System 450 control modules are sensing controls and operating controls with LCD and four-button touchpad UI, Ethernet communications capability, and no outputs. C450CEN-1C: Control module with Ethernet communications capability
Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.
Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
0 to 5 VDC; 1,035 ohms at 25C (77F) for an A99 PTC Temperature Sensor
Resolution: 16 bits
Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
127 x 63 x 63 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
C450CEN-1C: 207 g (0.46 lb)
North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
Europe: CE Mark  Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive; Low Voltage Directive; CISPR22, class B.
Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-204

System 450 Control Series

System 450TM Series Control Module with Network Communications (Continued)

Product Supply Power
Ambient Operating Conditions
Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions Input Signal Analog Input Accuracy Control Construction Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Compliance

C450CRN-1C Control Module with RS485 Modbus Communications
C450CRN-1C: System 450 control modules are sensing controls and operating controls with LCD and four-button touchpad UI and no outputs. This control module is an RS485, RTU compliant Modbus subordinate device. Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.
Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
0 to 5 VDC; 1,035 ohm at 25C (77F) for an A99 PTC Temperature Sensor
Resolution: 16 bit
Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
127 x 63 x 63 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
C450CRN-1C: 207 g (0.46 lb)
North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734: FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
Europe: CE Mark  Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive; Low Voltage Directive; CISPR22, class B
Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-205

System 450 Control Series

Code No. LIT-1900658

System 450TM Reset Control Modules with Real-Time Clock and Relay Output

Description
System 450TM is a family of modular, digital electronic controls that is easily assembled and set up to provide reliable temperature, pressure, and humidity control for a wide variety of HVAC/R applications, commercial process applications, and industrial process applications.
System 450 Reset Control Modules provide many of the features of the standard models for temperature and humidity control. In addition, these modules provide setpoint reset, real-time setback scheduling, and run-time balancing (equal run time) capability.
The System 450 control system is designed to replace System 350TM and System 27 control systems, and to provide many additional features and benefits with fewer than twenty model variations.
System 450 control modules provide a field-configurable out-of-the-box solution. Most System 450 control modules can control temperature, pressure, and humidity systems simultaneously.
A single C450 control module can be set up as a stand-alone control or connected to expansion modules to control up to ten On/Off relay and proportional analog outputs, based on any of the three available inputs.
Refer to the following documents for important product application information:
· System 450TM Series Modular Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011458)
· System 450TM Series Modular Control Systems with Reset Control Modules Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011842)
· System 450TM Series Reset Control Modules with Real-Time Clock and Relay Output Installation Instructions (Part No. 24-7664-2888)
Features
· Durable, compact, interchangeable modular components with plug-together connectors and DIN rail or direct wall mount capability eliminate field wiring between modules and allow you to quickly and easily design, assemble, install, and upgrade your control systems.
· Versatile, multipurpose, field-configurable control modules and expansion modules designed for global use allow you to create a wide variety of application-specific control systems capable of controlling temperature, pressure, or humidity, or all three conditions simultaneously, with only a small suite of module models.
· Up to three hard-wired input sensors and up to ten relay or analog outputs (in any combination) per control system allow you to build complex custom control systems while reducing your control system cost to only the cost of the required components.
· Control Modules with bright backlit LCDs and four-button touch pad user interfaces provide quick, clear, visual status of your System 450 control system inputs and outputs with the touch of a button and enable you to quickly and easily set up and adjust your control system.
· Multipurpose, all-in-one control modules enable simple stand-alone, single-module control systems that are temperature, pressure, and humidity capable out of the box and easy to set up in the field to replace a wide variety of OEM HVAC/R and process controls.
· An extensive suite of compatible temperature and humidity sensors, and pressure transducers allows you to monitor and control a wide range of HVAC/R and process conditions in a variety of standard and global units of measurement.
· High input signal selection enables your control system to monitor a temperature, pressure, or humidity condition with two or three sensors (of the same type) and control your system outputs based on the highest condition value sensed by the referenced sensors.

C450RCN-3 Reset Control Module with Real-Time Clock and Relay Output
· Differential control enables your control system to monitor and maintain a temperature, pressure, or humidity differential between two sensor points within a system, process, or space.
Reset Control Features
· Adjustable minimum and maximum setpoint temperatures (reset control modules only) enable compliance with the manufacturer's specifications for your controlled HVAC/R and process equipment.
· Selectable shutdown-high and shutdown-low temperature settings (reset control modules only) saves you energy by shutting down controlled equipment when the ambient temperature either rises or drops to a point where heating or cooling is no longer required.
· Real time clock and adjustable setback temperature (reset control modules only) save you energy by setting back heating, cooling, or humidity setpoints during scheduled unoccupied periods (24-hour day, 7-day week schedule).
· User-defined reset control capability (reset control modules only) saves you energy in a wide variety of temperature and humidity reset control applications by adjusting the temperature or humidity control loop, based on changes in ambient outdoor temperature or other uncontrolled condition.
Repair Information
If the System 450 Reset Control Module fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement System 450 Reset Control Module, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-206

System 450 Control Series

System 450TM Reset Control Modules with Real-Time Clock and Relay Output (Continued)

Selection Chart

Refer to the System 450 Compatible Sensors, Transducers, and Accessories Catalog Page (LIT-1900662) for temperature sensors and humidity sensors compatible with the System 450 Reset Control Modules. Reset Control Modules control temperature and humidity, but not pressure.

Reset System 450 Modules and Accessories Ordering Information

Product Code

Product Description

Number

C450RBN-3C

Reset Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, and SPDT relay output; provides one SPDT output relay. One A99BC-25C temperature sensor with 0.25 m (9-1/4 in.) silicon leads and one A99BC-300C temperature sensor with 3 m (9 ft 10 in.) silicon leads are included in the box with the Reset Control Module.

C450RCN-3C

Reset Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, and SPDT relay output; provides two SPDT output relays. One A99BC-25C temperature sensor with 0.25 m (9-1/4 in.) silicon leads and one A99BC-300C temperature sensor with 3 m (9 ft 10 in.) silicon leads are included in the box with the Reset Control Module.

BKT287-1R

DIN Rail; 0.30 m (12 in.) long

BKT287-2R

DIN Rail; 1 m (39-1/3 in.) long

BKT287-3R

DIN Rail; 0.61 m (24 in.) long

BKT287-4R

DIN Rail; 0.36 m (14 in.) long

PLT344-1R

DIN Rail End Clamps (Two clamps)

WHA-C450-100C

System 450 module connection extension cable, 100 cm (3.3 ft) long

Technical Specifications

C450RBN-3C and C450RCN-3C Reset Control Modules with Real-Time Clock and Relay Output

Product

C450RBN-3C and C450RCN-3C: System 450 Reset Control Module models are sensing controls and operating controls with LCD, four-button touchpad, and SPDT relay output C450RBN-3C: Control Module with one SPDT output relay C450RCN-3C: Control Module with two SPDT output relays

Power Consumption

C450RBN-3C: 0.9 VA maximum C450RCN-3C: 1.3 VA maximum

Supply Power

Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.

Ambient Operating Conditions

Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)

Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)

Input Signal

0 to 5 VDC for humidity sensors 1,035 ohms at 25C (77F) for A99 PTC temperature sensors

Output Relay Contacts

General: 1/2 HP at 120/240 VAC, SPDT

Specific: AC Motor Ratings

120 VAC

208/240 VAC

AC Full-load Amperes:

9.8 A

4.9 A

AC Locked-Rotor Amperes: 58.8 A

29.4 A

_____________________________________

10 Amperes AC Non-inductive at 24/240 VAC

Pilot Duty: 125 VA at 24/240 VAC

Clock Accuracy

±4 minutes per year

Clock Backup Power

12 hours (capacitor reserve)

Setback Events

One occupied and one unoccupied event per day; 7 day schedule

Analog Input Accuracy

Resolution: 14 bits

Control Construction

Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.

Dimensions (H x W x D)

127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)

Weight

C450RBN-3C: 209 g (0.46 lb) C450RCN-3C: 222 g (0.49 lb)

Compliance

North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B; Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits

Europe: CE Mark  Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.

Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-207

System 450 Control Series

Code No. LIT-1900656

System 450TM Control Modules with Analog Output

Description

System 450TM is a family of modular, digital electronic controls that is easily assembled and set up to provide reliable temperature, pressure, and humidity control for a wide variety of HVAC/R applications, commercial process applications, and industrial process applications.

The System 450 control system is designed to replace System 350TM and System 27 control systems, and to provide many additional features and benefits with fewer than twenty model variations.

System 450 control modules provide a field-configurable out-of-the-box solution. Most System 450 control modules can control temperature, pressure, and humidity systems simultaneously.

A single C450 control module can be set up as a stand-alone control or connected to expansion modules to control up to ten On/Off relay and proportional analog outputs, based on any of the three available inputs.

Refer to the following documents for important product application information:

· System 450TM Series Modular Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011458)
· System 450TM Series Modular Control Systems with Standard Control Modules Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011459)
· System 450TM Series Control Modules with Analog Outputs Installation Instructions (Part No. 24-7664-2853)
Features
· Durable, compact, interchangeable modular components with plug-together connectors and DIN rail or direct wall mount capability eliminate field wiring between modules and allow you to quickly and easily design, assemble, install, and upgrade your control systems.
· Versatile, multipurpose, field-configurable control modules and expansion modules designed for global use allow you to create a wide variety of application-specific control systems capable of controlling temperature, pressure, or humidity, or all three conditions simultaneously, with only a small suite of module models.
· Up to three hard-wired input sensors and up to ten relay or analog outputs (in any combination) per control system allow you to build complex custom control systems while reducing your control system cost to only the cost of the required components.
· Control Modules with bright backlit LCDs and four-button touch pad user interfaces provide quick, clear, visual status of your System 450 control system inputs and outputs with the touch of a button and enable you to quickly and easily set up and adjust your control system.

C450CPN-3C Control Module with Analog Output
· Multipurpose, all-in-one control modules enable simple stand-alone, single-module control systems that are temperature, pressure, and humidity capable out of the box and easy to set up in the field to replace a wide variety of OEM HVAC/R and process controls.
· An extensive suite of compatible temperature and humidity sensors, and pressure transducers allows you to monitor and control a wide range of HVAC/R and process conditions in a variety of standard and global units of measurement.
· High input signal selection enables your control system to monitor a temperature, pressure, or humidity condition with two or three sensors (of the same type) and control your system outputs based on the highest condition value sensed by the referenced sensors.
· Differential control enables your control system to monitor and maintain a temperature, pressure, or humidity differential between two sensor points within a system, process, or space.
Repair Information
If the System 450TM Control Module with Analog Outputs fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement System 450TM Control Module with Analog Outputs, contact your Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart

Refer to the System 450 Compatible Sensors, Transducers, and Accessories Catalog Page (LIT-1900662) for temperature sensors, humidity sensors, and pressure transducers compatible with the System 450 Control Modules with Analog Outputs.

Standard System 450 Modules and Accessories Ordering Information

Product Code

Product Description

Number

C450CPN-3C

Standard Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, and Analog Output; provides one analog output (0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA self-selecting signal) for proportional control.

C450CQN-3C

Standard Control Module with LCD and Four-Button Touchpad UI, and Analog Output; provides two analog outputs (0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA self-selecting signals) for proportional control.

BKT287-1R

DIN Rail; 0.30 m (12 in.) long

BKT287-2R

DIN Rail; 1 m (39-1/3 in.) long

BKT287-3R

DIN Rail; 0.61 m (24 in.) long

BKT287-4R

DIN Rail; 0.36 m (14 in.) long

PLT344-1R

DIN Rail End Clamps (Two clamps)

WHA-C450-100C

System 450 module connection extension cable, 100 cm (3.3 ft) long

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-208

System 450 Control Series
System 450TM Control Modules with Analog Output (Continued)

Technical Specifications

C450CPN-3C and C450CQN-3C Control Modules with Analog Output

Product

C450CPN-3C and C450CQN-3C: System 450 Control Module models are sensing controls and operating controls with LCD, four-button touchpad, and SPDT analog output C450CPN-3C: Control Module with one analog output C450CQN-3C: Control Module with two analog outputs

Power Consumption

C450CPN-3C: 1.3 VA maximum using 0 to 10 V out; 1.5 VA maximum using 4 to 20 mA out C450CQN-3C: 2.0 VA maximum using 0 to 10 V out; 2.4 VA maximum using 4 to 20 mA out

Supply Power

Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.

Ambient Operating Conditions

Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) when using 0 to 10 VDC outputs; -40 to 40C (-40 to 104F) when using 4 to 20 mA outputs
Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)

Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)

Input Signal

0 to 5 VDC for humidity sensors and static pressure transducers 0.5 to 4.5 VDC for ratiometric pressure transducers 1,035 ohms at 25C (77F) for A99 PTC temperature sensors 1,000 ohms at 21.1C (70F) for TE-6xxx Nickel temperature sensors

Analog Output

Voltage Mode (010 VDC): 10 VDC maximum output voltage 10 mA maximum output current Requires an external load of 1,000 ohms or more The AO operates in Voltage Mode when connected to devices with impedance greater than 1,000 ohms. Devices that fall below 1,000 ohms may not operate as intended with Voltage Mode applications.

Current Mode (420 mA): Requires an external load between 0 to 300 ohms The AO operates in Current Mode when connected to devices with impedance less than 300 ohms. Devices that rise above 300 ohms may not operate as intended with Current Mode applications.

Analog Input Accuracy

Resolution: 14 bits

Control Construction

Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.

Dimensions (H x W x D)

127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)

Weight

C450CPN-3C: 195 g (0.43 lb) C450CQN-3C: 195 g (0.43 lb)

Compliance

North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits

Europe: CE Mark  Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.

Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-209

System 450 Control Series

Code No. LIT-1900657

System 450TM Control Modules with Relay Output

Description

System 450TM is a family of modular, digital electronic controls that is easily assembled and set up to provide reliable temperature, pressure, and humidity control for a wide variety of HVAC/R applications, commercial process applications, and industrial process applications.

The System 450 control system is designed to replace System 350TM and System 27 control systems, and to provide many additional features and benefits with fewer than twenty model variations.

System 450 control modules provide a field-configurable out-of-the-box solution. Most System 450 control modules can control temperature, pressure, and humidity systems simultaneously.

A single C450 control module can be set up as a stand-alone control or connected to expansion modules to control up to ten On/Off relay and proportional analog outputs, based on any of the three available inputs.

Refer to the following documents for important product application information:

· System 450TM Series Modular Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011458)
· System 450TM Series Modular Control Systems with Standard Control Modules Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011459)
· System 450TM Series Control Modules with Relay Outputs Installation Instructions (Part No. 24-7664-2896)
Features
· Durable, compact, interchangeable modular components with plug-together connectors and DIN rail or direct wall mount capability eliminate field wiring between modules and allow you to quickly and easily design, assemble, install, and upgrade your control systems.
· Versatile, multipurpose, field-configurable control modules and expansion modules designed for global use allow you to create a wide variety of application-specific control systems capable of controlling temperature, pressure, or humidity, or all three conditions simultaneously, with only a small suite of module models.
· Up to three hard-wired input sensors and up to ten relay or analog outputs (in any combination) per control system allow you to build complex custom control systems while reducing your control system cost to only the cost of the required components.
· Control Modules with bright backlit LCDs and four-button touch pad user interfaces provide quick, clear, visual status of your System 450 control system inputs and outputs with the touch of a button and enable you to quickly and easily set up and adjust your control system.

C450CCN-3C Control Module with Relay Output
· Multipurpose, all-in-one control modules enable simple stand-alone, single-module control systems that are temperature, pressure, and humidity capable out of the box and are easy to set up in the field to replace a wide variety of OEM HVAC/R and process controls.
· An extensive suite of compatible temperature and humidity sensors and pressure transducers allows you to monitor and control a wide range of HVAC/R and process conditions in a variety of standard and global units of measurement.
· High input signal selection enables your control system to monitor a temperature, pressure, or humidity condition with two or three sensors (of the same type) and control your system outputs based on the highest condition value sensed by the referenced sensors.
· Differential control enables your control system to monitor and maintain a temperature, pressure, or humidity differential between two sensor points within a system, process, or space.
Repair Information
If the System 450TM Control Module with Relay Outputs fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement System 450TM Control Module with Relay Outputs, contact a Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart

Refer to the System 450 Compatible Sensors, Transducers, and Accessories Catalog Page (LIT-1900662) for temperature sensors, humidity sensors, and pressure transducers compatible with the System 450 Control Modules with Relay Outputs.

Standard System 450 Modules and Accessories Ordering Information

Product Code

Product Description

Number

C450CBN-3C

Standard Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, and Relay Output; provides one relay output (SPDT line-voltage relay) for SPDT control.

C450CCN-3C

Standard Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, and Relay Output; provides two relay outputs (SPDT line-voltage relays) for SPDT control.

BKT287-1R

DIN Rail; 0.30 m (12 in.) long

BKT287-2R

DIN Rail; 1 m (39-1/3 in.) long

BKT287-3R

DIN Rail; 0.61 m (24 in.) long

BKT287-4R

DIN Rail; 0.36 m (14 in.) long

PLT344-1R

DIN Rail End Clamps (Two clamps)

WHA-C450-100C

System 450 module connection extension cable, 100 cm (3.3 ft) long

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-210

System 450 Control Series
System 450TM Control Modules with Relay Output (Continued)

Technical Specifications

C450CBN-3C and C450CCN-3C Control Modules with Relay Output

Product

C450CBN-3C and C450CCN-3C: System 450 Control Module models are sensing controls and operating controls with LCD, four-button touchpad, and SPDT relay output C450CBN-3C: Control Module with one SPDT output relay C450CCN-3C: Control Module with two SPDT output relays

Power Consumption

C450CBN-3C: 0.9 VA maximum C450CCN-3C: 1.3 VA maximum

Supply Power

Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.

Ambient Operating Conditions

Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)

Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)

Input Signal

0 to 5 VDC for humidity sensors and static pressure transducers 0.5 to 4.5 VDC for ratiometric pressure transducers 1,035 ohms at 25C (77F) for A99 PTC temperature sensors 1,000 ohms at 21.1C (70F) for TE-6xxx Nickel temperature sensors

Output Relay Contacts

General: 1/2 HP at 120/240 VAC, SPDT

Specific: AC Motor Ratings

120 VAC

208/240 VAC

AC Full-load Amperes:

9.8 A

4.9 A

Locked-Rotor Amperes: 58.8 A

29.4 A

_____________________________________

10 Amperes AC Non-inductive at 24/240 VAC

Pilot Duty: 125 VA at 24/240 VAC

Analog Input Accuracy

Resolution: 14 bits

Control Construction

Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.

Dimensions (H x W x D)

127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)

Weight

C450CBN-3C: 209 g (0.46 lb) C450CCN-3C: 222 g (0.49 lb)

Compliance

North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B; Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits

Europe: CE Mark  Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.

Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-211

System 450 Control Series

Code No. LIT-1900806

System 450TM Control Module with Hybrid Analog Output

Description

System 450TM is a family of modular, digital electronic controls that is easily assembled and set up to provide reliable temperature, pressure, and humidity control for a wide variety of HVAC/R applications, commercial process applications, and industrial process applications.

System 450 control modules provide a field-configurable out-of-the-box solution. Most System 450 control modules can control temperature, pressure, and humidity systems simultaneously.

A single C450 control module can be set up as a stand-alone control or connected to expansion modules to control up to ten On/Off relay and proportional analog outputs, based on any of the three available inputs.

The System 450 Control Module with Hybrid Analog Output has a single self-selecting analog output to optimize and extend the controlled speed range of variable speed electronically commutated (EC) motors.

Refer to the following documents for important product application information:

· System 450TM Series Modular Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011458)
· System 450TM Series Modular Control Systems with Standard Control Modules Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011459)
· System 450TM Series Control Module with Hybrid Analog Output and High Input Signal Selection Installation Instructions (Part No. 24-7664-2802)
Features
· Durable, compact, interchangeable modular components with plug-together connectors and DIN rail or direct wall mount capability eliminate field wiring between modules and allow you to quickly and easily design, assemble, install, and upgrade your control systems.
· Versatile, multipurpose, field-configurable control modules and expansion modules designed for global use allow you to create a wide variety of application-specific control systems capable of controlling temperature, pressure, or humidity, or all three conditions simultaneously, with only a small suite of module models.
· Up to three hard-wired input sensors and up to ten relay or analog outputs (in any combination) per control system allow you to build complex custom control systems while reducing your control system cost to only the cost of the required components.
· Control Modules with bright backlit LCDs and four-button touch pad user interfaces provide quick, clear, visual status of your System 450 control system inputs and outputs with the touch of a button and enable you to quickly and easily set up and adjust your control system.
· Multipurpose, all-in-one control modules enable simple stand-alone, single-module control systems that are temperature, pressure, and humidity capable out of the box and easy to set up in the field to replace a wide variety of OEM HVAC/R and process controls.

C450CPW-100 Control Module with Hybrid Analog Output
· An extensive suite of compatible temperature and humidity sensors, and pressure transducers allows you to monitor and control a wide range of HVAC/R and process conditions in a variety of standard and global units of measurement.
· High input signal selection enables your control system to monitor a temperature, pressure, or humidity condition with two or three sensors (of the same type) and control your system outputs based on the highest condition value sensed by the referenced sensors.
· Differential control enables your control system to monitor and maintain a temperature, pressure, or humidity differential between two sensor points within a system, process, or space.
Repair Information
If the System 450TM Control Module with Hybrid Analog Output fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement System 450TM Control Module with Hybrid Analog Output, contact a Johnson Controls® representative.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-212

System 450 Control Series
System 450TM Control Module with Hybrid Analog Output (Continued)

Selection Chart

Refer to the System 450 Compatible Sensors, Transducers, and Accessories Catalog Page (LIT-1900662) for temperature sensors, humidity sensors, and pressure transducers compatible with the System 450 Control Modules.

Hybrid System 450 Modules and Accessories Ordering Information

Product Code

Product Description

Number

C450CPW-100C

Hybrid Analog Output Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, Hybrid Analog Output and Optional High Input Signal Select; provides one hybrid analog output and optional high input signal select primarily used for variable-speed EC motor speed control.
Only Analog Output 1 (OUTA1) can be configured as a hybrid analog output and/or use the High Input Signal Selection feature. These features are not available for any of the other outputs in a System 450 control system that uses the C450CPW-100C as the control module.

BKT287-1R

DIN Rail; 0.30 m (12 in.) long

BKT287-2R

DIN Rail; 1 m (39-1/3 in.) long

BKT287-3R

DIN Rail; 0.61 m (24 in.) long

BKT287-4R

DIN Rail; 0.36 m (14 in.) long

PLT344-1R

DIN Rail End Clamps (Two clamps)

WHA-C450-100C

System 450 module connection extension cable, 100 cm (3.3 ft) long

Technical Specifications
Product Power Consumption Supply Power
Ambient Operating Conditions Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions Input Signal
Analog Output
Analog Input Accuracy Control Construction Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Compliance

C450CPW-100C Control Module with Hybrid Analog Output
C450CPW-100C System 450 control module is a sensing control and operating control with LCD, four-button touchpad, and analog output with pulse-width modulation capability.
C450CPW-100C: 1.3 VA maximum using 0 to 10 V out; 1.5 VA maximum using 4 to 20 mA out
Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (2030 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/ 60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.
Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) when using 0 to 10 VDC outputs; -40 to 40C (-40 to 104F) when using 4 to 20 mA outputs Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
0 to 5 VDC for humidity sensors and static pressure transducers 0.5 to 4.5 VDC for ratiometric pressure transducers 1,035 ohms at 25C (77F) for A99 PTC temperature sensors 1,000 ohms at 21.1C (70F) for TE-6xxx Nickel temperature sensors
Voltage Mode (010 VDC): 10 VDC maximum output voltage 10 mA maximum output current Requires an external load of 1,000 ohms or more The AO operates in Voltage Mode when connected to devices with impedance greater than 1,000 ohms. Devices that fall below 1,000 ohms may not operate as intended with Voltage Mode applications.
Current Mode (420 mA): Requires an external load between 0 to 300 ohms The AO operates in Current Mode when connected to devices with impedance less than 300 ohms. Devices that rise above 300 ohms may not operate as intended with Current Mode applications.
Resolution: 14 bits
Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
C450CPW-100C: 195 g (0.43 lb)
North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
Europe: CE Mark  Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.
Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-213

System 450 Control Series

Code No. LIT-1900659

System 450TM Expansion Modules with Analog Output

Description
System 450 expansion modules allow you to increase the number of outputs in your control system to meet your application requirements. The following models are available:
· C450SPN-1C: Analog Expansion Module with one analog output (each 0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA)
· C450SQN-1C: Analog Expansion Module with two analog outputs (each 0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA)
Refer to the following documents for important product application information:
· System 450TM Series Modular Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011458)
· System 450TM Series Expansion Modules with Analog Outputs Installation Instructions (Part No. 24-7664-2799)

Features
· Durable, compact, interchangeable modular components with plug-together connectors and DIN rail or direct wall mount capability eliminate field wiring between modules and allow you to quickly and easily design, assemble, install, and upgrade your control systems.
· Versatile, multipurpose, field-configurable control modules and expansion modules designed for global use allow you to create a wide variety of application-specific control systems capable of controlling temperature, pressure, or humidity, or all three conditions simultaneously, with only a small suite of module models.
· Up to three hard-wired input sensors and up to ten relay or analog outputs (in any combination) per control system allow you to build complex custom control systems while reducing your control system cost to only the cost of the required components.

C450SQN-1C Expansion Module with Analog Output
Repair Information
If the System 450TM Expansion Module with Analog Output fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement System 450TM Expansion Module with Analog Output, contact a Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart

Product Code Number
C450SPN-1C C450SQN-1C BKT287-1R BKT287-2R BKT287-3R BKT287-4R PLT344-1R WHA-C450-100C

Product Description
Analog Output Expansion Module; provides one analog output (0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA self-selecting signal) for proportional control. Analog Output Expansion Module; provides two analog outputs (0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA self-selecting signals) for proportional control. DIN Rail; 0.30 m (12 in.) long DIN Rail; 1 m (39-1/3 in.) long DIN Rail; 0.61 m (24 in.) long DIN Rail; 0.36 m (14 in.) long DIN Rail End Clamps (Two clamps) System 450 module connection extension cable, 100 cm (3.3 ft) long

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-214

System 450 Control Series
System 450TM Expansion Modules with Analog Output (Continued)

Technical Specifications

Product Power Consumption Supply Power
Ambient Operating Conditions Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions Analog Output
Control Construction Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Compliance

C450SPN-1C and C450SQN-1C Expansion Modules with Analog Output
C450SPN-1C: System 450 Expansion Module with one analog output C450SQN-1C: System 450 Expansion Module with two analog outputs
C450SPN-1C: 1.1 VA maximum using 0 to 10 V out; 1.3 VA maximum using 4 to 20 mA out C450SQN-1C: 1.8 VA maximum using 0 to 10 V out; 2.2 VA maximum using 4 to 20 mA out
Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.
Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) when using 0 to 10 VDC outputs; -40 to 40C (-40 to 104F) when using 4 to 20 mA outputs Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Voltage Mode (0 to 10 VDC): 10 VDC maximum output voltage 10 mA maximum output current Requires an external load of 1,000 ohms or more The AO operates in Voltage Mode when connected to devices with impedance greater than 1,000 ohms. Devices that drop below 1,000 ohms may not operate as intended with Voltage Mode applications.
Current Mode (4 to 20 mA): Requires an external load between 0 to 300 ohms The AO operates in Current Mode when connected to devices with impedances less than 300 ohm. Devices that exceed 300 ohms may not operate as intended with Current Mode applications.
Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
C450SPN-1C: 150 g (0.33 lb) C450SQN-1C: 150 g (0.33 lb)
North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734, Vol. 1; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
Europe: CE Mark - Johnson Controls, Inc., declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the Low Voltage Directive and the EMC Directive.
Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-215

System 450 Control Series

Code No. LIT-1900660

System 450TM Expansion Modules with Relay Output

Description
System 450 expansion modules allow you to increase the number of outputs in your control system to meet your application requirements. The following models are available:
· C450SBN-3C: Relay Expansion Module with one relay output · C450SCN-3C: Relay Expansion Module with two relay outputs
Refer to the following documents for important product application information:
· System 450TM Series Modular Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011458)
· System 450TM Series Expansion Modules with Relay Outputs Installation Instructions (Part No. 24-7664-2896)

Features
· Durable, compact, interchangeable modular components with plug-together connectors and DIN rail or direct wall mount capability eliminate field wiring between modules and allow you to quickly and easily design, assemble, install, and upgrade your control systems.
· Versatile, multipurpose, field-configurable control modules and expansion modules designed for global use allow you to create a wide variety of application-specific control systems capable of controlling temperature, pressure, or humidity, or all three conditions simultaneously, with only a small suite of module models.
· Up to three hard-wired input sensors and up to ten relay or analog outputs (in any combination) per control system allow you to build complex custom control systems while reducing your control system cost to only the cost of the required components.

C450SCN-3C Expansion Module with Relay Output
Repair Information
If the System 450TM Expansion Module with Relay Output fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement System 450TM Expansion Module with Relay Output, contact a Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart

Product Code Number
C450SBN-3C
C450SCN-3C
BKT287-1R BKT287-2R BKT287-3R BKT287-4R PLT344-1R WHA-C450-100C

Product Description
Reset Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, and SPDT relay output; provides one SPDT output relay. One A99BC-25C temperature sensor with 0.25 m (9-1/4 in.) silicon leads and one A99BC-300C temperature sensor with 3 m (9 ft 10 in.) silicon leads are included in the box with the Reset Control Module. Reset Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, and SPDT relay output; provides two SPDT output relays. One A99BC-25C temperature sensor with 0.25 m (9-1/4 in.) silicon leads and one A99BC-300C temperature sensor with 3 m (9 ft 10 in.) silicon leads are included in the box with the Reset Control Module. DIN Rail; 0.30 m (12 in.) long DIN Rail; 1 m (39-1/3 in.) long DIN Rail; 0.61 m (24 in.) long DIN Rail; 0.36 m (14 in.) long DIN Rail End Clamps (Two clamps) System 450 module connection extension cable, 100 cm (3.3 ft) long

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-216

System 450 Control Series
System 450TM Expansion Modules with Relay Output (Continued)

Technical Specifications

Product Power Consumption Supply Power
Ambient Operating Conditions Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions Output Relay Contacts
Control Construction Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Compliance

C450SBN-3C and C450SCN-3C Expansion Modules with Relay Output

C450SBN-3C: System 450 Expansion Module with one SPDT output relay C450SCN-3C: System 450 Expansion Module with two SPDT output relays

C450SBN-3C: 0.8 VA maximum C450SCN-3C: 1.2 VA maximum

Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.

Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)

Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)

General: 1/2 HP at 120/240 VAC, SPDT

Specific: AC Motor Ratings

120 VAC

208/240 VAC

AC Full-Load Amperes:

9.8 A

4.9 A

AC Locked-Rotor Amperes: 58.8 A

29.4 A

_____________________________________

10 Amperes AC Noninductive at 24/240 VAC

Pilot Duty: 125 VA at 24/240 VAC

Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.

127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)

C450SBN-3C: 172 g (0.38 lb) C450SCN-3C: 186 g (0.41 lb)

North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits

Europe: CE Mark  Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.

Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-217

System 450 Control Series
System 450TM Power Module

Code No. LIT-1900661

Description
System 450TM modules require 24 VAC, Class 2 power. In applications where 24 VAC power is not available, the C450YNN-1C Power Module provides a convenient modular solution for transforming 120/240 VAC to 24 VAC power for your System 450 control systems.
Refer to the following documents for important product application information:
· System 450TM Series Modular Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011458)
· System 450TM Series Power Module Installation Instructions (Part No. 24-7664-2691)
Features
· Durable, compact, interchangeable modular components with plug-together connectors and DIN rail or direct wall mount capability eliminate field wiring between modules and allow you to quickly and easily design, assemble, install, and upgrade your control systems.
Repair Information
If the System 450 Power Module fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement System 450 Power Module, contact a Johnson Controls® representative.

C450YNN-1C Power Module

Selection Chart

Product Code Number
C450YNN-1C BKT287-1R BKT287-2R BKT287-3R BKT287-4R PLT344-1R WHA-C450-100C

Product Description
Power Module; provides 24 V to System 450 Module Assembly; 120 VAC or 240 VAC supply power input terminals. DIN Rail; 0.30 m (12 in.) long DIN Rail; 1 m (39-1/3 in.) long DIN Rail; 0.61 m (24 in.) long DIN Rail; 0.36 m (14 in.) long DIN Rail End Clamps (Two clamps) System 450 module connection extension cable, 100 cm (3.3 ft) long

Technical Specifications
Product
Supply Power Secondary Power Ambient Operating Conditions
Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions Control Construction
Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Compliance

C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module
C450YNN-1C: System 450 Power Supply Module; 120 or 240 VAC stepdown to 24 VAC Class 2 (North America) or SELV (Europe)
110/120 VAC or 220/240 VAC at 50/60 Hz (100 mA maximum)
24 VAC, 10 VA
Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F) Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct
mounting to a hard, even surface.
127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
C450YNN-1C: 390 gm (0.86 lb)
North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734: FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
Europe: CE Mark  Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.
Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-218

System 450 Control Series

Code No. LIT-1900662

System 450TM Compatible Sensors, Transducers, and Accessories

Description
System 450 control modules are designed to operate with a variety of compatible sensors and transducers. The System 450 compatible sensors and transducers cover a wide range of temperature, pressure, and humidity conditions, allowing you to select the sensor or transducer that best fits your control system requirements.
For ease of installation and setup, the Sensor Type that you select in the UI for a sensor or transducer automatically determines the sensed condition, unit of measurement, minimum differential, setup value ranges, and the default setup values for each control system output that references the sensor or transducer.
Refer to the System 450TM Series Modular Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011458) for important product application information on System 450 Controls.
Refer to the following documents for important product application information on sensors used with System 450 Controls:
· A99B Series Temperature Sensors Product Technical Bulletin (LIT-125186)
· TrueRHTM Series HE-67xx Humidity Element with Temperature Sensors Product Bulletin (LIT-216245)
· HE-6800 Series Humidity Transmitters with Temperature Sensor Product Bulletin (LIT-12011625)
· P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011190)
· TE-6000 Series Temperature Sensing Elements Product Bulletin (LIT-216288)
· TE-6300 Series Temperature Sensors Product Bulletin (LIT-216320)
· TE-6800 Series Temperature Sensors Product Bulletin (LIT-12011542)
· Setra Systems Model DPT265 Very Low Differential Pressure Transducer Catalog Page

Wall-Mount HE67S3 Humidity Sensor
DPT265 Series Low Pressure Differential Pressure Transducers
A99 Temperature Sensors

Duct-Mount HE67S3 Humidity Sensor

TE-6300 Series Temperature Sensors

TE-6000-1 Temperature Sensing Element

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-219

System 450 Control Series
System 450TM Compatible Sensors, Transducers, and Accessories (Continued)

TE-6800 Series Wall Mount Temperature Sensors and HE-6800 Series Humidity Transmitters with Temperature Sensors

P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers

Selection Charts

Use these tables to order System 450 compatible sensors, transducers, and accessories.

System 450 Compatible A99B Temperature Sensors and Accessories Ordering Information1 Product Code Number Product Description

A99BA-200C

PTC Silicon Sensor with Shielded Cable; Cable Length 2 m (6-1/2 ft); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Temperature Range: -40 to 100°C (-40 to 212°F)

A99BB-25C

PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable Length 0.25 m (9-3/4 in.); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Temperature Range: -40 to 100°C (-40 to 212°F)

A99BB-200C

PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable Length 2 m (6-1/2 ft); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Temperature Range: -40 to 100°C (-40 to 212°F)

A99BB-300C

PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable Length 3 m (9-3/4 ft); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Temperature Range: -40 to 100°C (-40 to 212°F)

A99BB-500C

PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable Length 5 m (16-3/8 ft); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Temperature Range: -40 to 100°C (-40 to 212°F)

A99BB-600C

PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable Length 6 m (19-1/2 ft); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Temperature Range: -40 to 100°C (-40 to 212°F)

A99BC-25C

PTC Silicon Sensor with High Temperature Silicon Cable; Cable Length 0.25 m (9-3/4 in.); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Rated for Full Sensor Temperature Range.

A99BC-300C

PTC Silicon Sensor with High Temperature Silicon Cable; Cable Length 3 m (9-3/4 ft) Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Rated for Full Sensor Temperature Range.

A99BC-1500C

PTC Silicon Sensor with High Temperature Silicon Cable; Cable Length 15 m (49 ft) Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Rated for Full Sensor Temperature Range.

BOX10A-600R

PVC Enclosure for A99 Sensor; Includes Wire Nuts and Conduit Connector (for Outdoor Sensor)

WEL11A-601R

Immersion Well for A99 Sensor Liquid Sensing Applications

A99-CLP-1

Mounting Clip for A99 Temperature Sensor

ADP11A-600R

Conduit Adaptor, 1/2 in. Snap-Fit EMT Conduit Adaptor (box of 10)

TE-6001-1

Duct Mounting Hardware with Handy Box for A99 Sensor

TE-6001-11

Duct Mounting Hardware without Handy Box for A99 Sensor

SHL10A-603R

Sun Shield (for Use with Outside A99 Sensors in Sunny Locations)

1. Refer to the A99B Series Temperature Sensors Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-125186) on the Johnson Controls® Product Literature website for more information.

System 450 Compatible TE-6000 Series 1,000 Ohm Nickel Temperature Sensors and Accessories Ordering Information Product Code Number Product Description

TE-6000-x

TE6000 Series 1,000 ohm at 70F nickel temperature sensors (only). Only the TE-6000-6 sensor can be used for the entire HIC and HIF temperature range. Different sensing element packages are available for various applications.For a complete list of compatible 1,000 ohm nickel sensors, including sensor descriptions, technical specifications, and mounting accessories, refer to the TE-6000 Series Temperature Sensing Elements Product Bulletin (LIT-216288). (System 450 Sensor Types HIC and HIF)

System 450 Compatible TE-6300 Series 1,000 Ohm Nickel Temperature Sensors and Accessories Ordering Information Product Code Number Product Description

TE-631xx-x

TE6300 Series 1,000 ohm at 70F nickel averaging and 1,000 ohm thin-film nickel temperature sensors (only). For a complete list of compatible 1,000 ohm nickel averaging and thin-film nickel sensors, including sensor descriptions, technical specifications, and mounting accessories, refer to the TE-6300 Series Temperature Sensors Product Bulletin (LIT-216320). (System 450 Sensor Types HIC and HIF)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-220

System 450 Control Series

System 450TM Compatible Sensors, Transducers, and Accessories (Continued)

System 450 Compatible TE-68NT-0N00S 1,000 Ohm Nickel Temperature Sensor Ordering Information Product Code Number Product Description

TE-68NT-0N00S

TE6800 Series 1,000 ohm nickel temperature sensor for wall-mount applications. For more information, including sensor description, technical specifications, and mounting accessories, refer to the TE-6800 Series Temperature Sensors Product Bulletin (LIT-12011542). (System 450 Sensor Types HIC and HIF)

System 450 Compatible HE67S3 Type Humidity Sensors with Integral A99B Temperature Sensor Ordering Information1 Product Code Number Product Description

HE-67S3-0N0BT

Wall Mount Humidity Sensor with A99B Type Temperature Sensor: 10 to 90% RH; 0 to 60C (32 to 140F)

HE-67S3-0N00P

Duct Mount Humidity Sensor with A99B Type Temperature Sensor: 10 to 90% RH; 0 to 60C (32 to 140F)

1. The HE-67S3 sensors require 24 VAC input and must use the 0 to 5 VDC output. Refer to the TrueRH Series HE-67xx Humidity Element with Temperature Sensors Product Bulletin (LIT-216245) on the Johnson Controls Product Literature website for more information, including technical specifications and mounting accessories.

System 450 Compatible HE6800 Series Humidity Transmitters with Temperature Sensor Ordering Information1 Product Code Number Product Description

HE-68N2-0N00WS

Wall Mount Humidity Transmitter with Nickel Temperature Sensor: 10 to 90 ±2% RH; 0 to 55C (32 to 131F)

HE-68N3-0N00WS

Wall Mount Humidity Transmitter with Nickel Temperature Sensor: 10 to 90 ±3% RH; 0 to 55C (32 to 131F)

1. The HE-6800 transmitters require 24 VAC input and must use the 0 to 5 VDC output. Refer to the HE-6800 Series Humidity Transmitters with Temperature Sensor Product Bulletin (LIT-12011625) on the Johnson Controls Product Literature website for more information, including technical specifications and mounting accessories.

System 450 Compatible Low Pressure Differential Transducer Ordering Information1 2

Product Code Number Product Description

DPT2650-R25B-AB

Low Pressure Differential Transducer: -0.25 to 0.25 in. W.C. (System 450 Sensor Type: P 0.25)3

DPT2650-0R5D-AB

Low Pressure Differential Transducer: 0 to 0.5 in. W.C. (System 450 Sensor Type: P 0.5)

DPT2650-2R5D-AB

Low Pressure Differential Transducer: 0 to 2.5 in. W.C. (System 450 Sensor Type: P 2.5)

DPT2650-005D-AB

Low Pressure Differential Transducer: 0 to 5.0 in. W.C. (System 450 Sensor Type: P 5)

DPT2650-10D-AB

Low Pressure Differential Transducer: 0 to 10 in. W.C. (System 450 Sensor Type: P 10)

1. Refer to the Setra Systems Model DPT265 Very Low Differential Pressure Transducer Catalog Page on the Johnson Controls Product Literature website for more information.
2. The DPT265 sensors require 24 VAC input and must use the 0 to 5 VDC output. Refer to the Setra Systems Model DPT265 Very Low Differential Pressure Transducer Catalog Page on the Johnson Controls Product Literature website for more information.
3. Used only with Communications Control Modules.

System 450 Compatible P499 Series Transducers with 1/4 in. SAE 45 Flare Internal Thread with Depressor (Style 47) Ordering Information1
Product Code Number Product Description

P499RCP-401C

-1 to 8 bar; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RCP-402C

-1 to 15 bar; order WH A-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RCP-404C

0 to 30 bar; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RCP-405C

0 to 50 bar; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RCPS100C

-10 to 100 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RCPS100K

-10 to 100 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included

P499RCPS102C

0 to 200 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RCPS102K

0 to 200 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included

P499RCP-101C

0 to 100 psi; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RCP-101K

0 to 100 psi; WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included

P499RCP-105C

0 to 500 psi; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RCP-105K

0 to 500 psi; WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included

P499RCP-107C

0 to 750 psi; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RCP-107K

0 to 750 psi; WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included

1. The P499 sensors must be powered with the +5 VDC and C terminals and the output is 0.5 to 4.5 VDC. Refer to the P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011190) on the Johnson Controls Product Literature website for more information.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-221

System 450 Control Series

System 450TM Compatible Sensors, Transducers, and Accessories (Continued)

System 450 Compatible P499 Series Transducers with 1/8 in. 27 NPT External Thread (Style 49) Ordering Information1 Product Code Number Product Description

P499RAPS100C

-10 to 100 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RAPS100K

-10 to 100 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included

P499RAPS102C

0 to 200 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RAPS102K

0 to 200 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included

P499RAP-101C

0 to 100 psig; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RAP-101K

0 to 100 psig; WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included

P499RAP-102C

0 to 200 psig; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RAP-105C

0 to 500 psig; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RAP-105K

0 to 500 psig; WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included

P499RAP-107C

0 to 750 psig; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately

P499RAP-107K

0 to 750 psig; WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included

1. The P499 sensors must be powered with the +5 VDC and C terminals and the output is 0.5 to 4.5 VDC. Refer to the P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011190) on the Johnson Controls Product Literature website for more information.

WHA-PKD3 Wire Harnesses Ordering Information1 Product Code Number Product Description

WHA-PKD3-200C

Plug and Three-Wire Harness for P499 Electronic Pressure Transducers: 2.0 m (6-1/2 ft) cable

WHA-PKD3-400C

Plug and Three-Wire Harness for P499 Electronic Pressure Transducers: 4.0 m (13 ft) cable

WHA-PKD3-600C

Plug and Three-Wire Harness for P499 Electronic Pressure Transducers: 6.0 m (19-5/8 ft) cable

1. Refer to the P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011190) on the Johnson Controls Product Literature website for more information.

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-222

Cross-Reference
Ranco® Refrigeration Cross-Reference

Code No. LIT-1900120

Temperature Controls (Part 1 of 2)

Product #

Range

Differential

Ranco PENN

ETC111000-000 -30/220F

A419ABC-1C

-30/212F

1/30F ADJ 1/30F ADJ

Ranco PENN

3130-101 A11B-1C

35/45F 35/45F

12F FXD 12F FXD

Ranco PENN

3130-201 A11A-1C

35/45F 35/45F

Manual Manual

Ranco PENN

3311-651 A70BA-17C

37F FXD 35/80F ADJ

Manual Manual

Ranco PENN

3311-701 A70AA-15C

30F FXD -10/65F ADJ

15F FXD 4/40F ADJ

Ranco PENN

A22-2237 A11E-6C

41F FXD 35/45F

6F FXD 12F FXD

Ranco PENN

O10-1010 A11B-1C

0/55F 35/45F

7/55F ADJ 12F FXD

Ranco PENN

O10-1409 A19ABA-1C

0/55F -30/50F

3/20F ADJ 5/20F ADJ

Ranco PENN

O10-1410 A19ABA-4C

25/75F 20/80F

3/20F ADJ 3.5/14F ADJ

Ranco PENN

O10-1416 A11B-1C

0/55F 35/45F

3/20F ADJ 12F FXD

Ranco PENN

O10-1418 A19BBA-1C

0/55F -30/50F

3/20F ADJ 5/20F ADJ

Ranco PENN

O10-1473 A19ABA-1C

0/55F -30/50F

7/55F ADJ 5/20F ADJ

Ranco PENN

O10-1490 A19ABA-1C

0/55F -30/50F

2F FXD 5/20F ADJ

Ranco PENN

O10-1491 A19ABA-4C

25/75F 20/80F

2F FXD 3.5/14F ADJ

Ranco PENN

O10-1802 A19BAC-1C

25/75F 30/110F

3/20F ADJ 3.5F FXD

Ranco PENN

O10-301 A19BAA-5C

30/95F 30/110F

2F FXD 3.5F FXD

Ranco PENN

O16-104 A19ABC-24C

0/55F -30/100F

3/20F ADJ 3/12F ADJ

Ranco PENN

O16-111 A11E-6C

0/55F 35/45F

3/20F ADJ 12F FXD

Ranco PENN

O16-165 A19BAC-1C

30/90F 30/110F

2.5F FXD 3.5F FXD

Ranco PENN
PENN

O16-263 A19ACC-6C
A70BA-17C

0/55F -30/100F
35/80F

Manual Manual
Manual

Ranco PENN
PENN

O16-264 A11D-1C
A70BA-18C

0/55F 35/45F
15/55F

Manual Manual
Manual

Ranco PENN
PENN

O16-588 A11E-6C
A70AA-16C

-15/40F 35/45F
15/55F

1.5F FXD 12F FXD
5F FXD

Ranco PENN

O16-594 A19BBC-2C

0/55F -30/100F

2F FXD 3/12F ADJ

Ranco PENN

O16-595 A19ABC-4C

50/100F 50/130F

3/20F ADJ 3.5/14F ADJ

Ranco PENN
PENN

O16-601 A19ABC-2C
A70AA-15C

22.5/47.5F 20/80F
-10/65F ADJ

2.5F FXD 3.5/14F ADJ
10F FXD

Ranco PENN
PENN

O20-7041 A72AA-3C
A72AA-2C

0/100F 50/90F
15/55F

6/20F ADJ ADJ
ADJ

Switch
SPDT SPDT
Open LO Open LO
Open LO Open LO
Open LO Open LO
Open LO Open LO
Open HI SPDT
Open LO Open LO
Open LO Open LO
Open LO Open LO
Open LO Open LO
Open LO Open LO
Open LO Open LO
Open LO Open LO
Open LO Open LO
Open LO SPDT
Open LO Open LO
SPDT SPDT
SPDT SPDT
SPDT SPDT
SPDT SPDT Open LO
SPDT SPDT Open LO
SPDT SPDT Open LO
SPDT SPDT
SPDT SPDT
SPDT SPDT Open LO
DPST Open LO DPST Open LO DPST Open LO

Capillary
96" Lead 78" Lead
None 48"
None 48"
180" 72"
120" 72"
None 48"
None 48"
72" 72"
72" 72"
None 48"
None None
72" 72"
72" 72"
72" 72"
None None
None None
72" 96"
None 48"
None None
72" 72" 72"
None 48" None
None 48" None
None None
96" 96"
36" 72" 72"
96" 72" 72"

Bulb
0.5x2 0.5X2
240" 240"
240" 240"
0.5x4.25 3/8x3
3/8x6.5 3/8x3
48" 240"
48" 240"
Yes 3/8x4
Yes 3/8x5
72" 240"
Coiled Coiled
Yes 3/8x4
Yes 3/8x4
Yes 3/8x5
Coiled Coiled
Coiled Coiled
Yes 3/8x4
72" 240"
Coiled Coiled
Yes 3/8x4 3/8x3
96" 240" 240"
72" 240" 240"
Coiled Coiled
3/8x6 3/8x5
3/8x6 3/8x5 3/8x3
3/8x6 11/16x6 3/4 3/8x3

Cover
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1

Notes
(14)
(1) (1)
(1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
(1) (12) (12) (1) (1) (1) (1) (12)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-223

Cross-Reference
Ranco® Refrigeration Cross-Reference (Continued)

Temperature Controls (Part 2 of 2)

Product #

Range

Differential

Ranco PENN

O52-6910 A19PRC-1C

30/95F 30/110F

2F FXD 3/12F ADJ

Ranco PENN

O60-100 A19ABC-24C

-35/95F -30/100F

4/50F ADJ 3/12F ADJ

Ranco PENN

O60-101 A19BBC-2C

-35/95F -30/100F

4/50F ADJ 3/12F ADJ

Ranco PENN

O60-1072 A19BBA-1C

-15/40F -30/50F

3/20F ADJ 5/20F ADJ

Ranco PENN

O60-120 A19ABC-36C

-35/95F -30/100F

4/50F ADJ 3/12F ADJ

Ranco PENN

O60-1408 A19ABA-1C

-15/40F -30/50F

3/20F ADJ 5/20F ADJ

Ranco PENN

O60-200 A19ABC-12C

95/240F 100/240F

6/50F ADJ 6/24F ADJ

Switch
SPDT SPDT
SPDT SPDT
SPDT SPDT
Open LO Open LO
SPDT SPDT
Open LO Open LO
SPDT SPDT

Defrost/Fan Delay Temperature Controls

Product #

Range

Differential

Ranco PENN

F25-107 A19ZBC-2C

40/75F 45/85

20F FXD 25F ADJ

Ranco PENN

F25-114 A19ZBC-2C

43/73F 45/85

24F FXD 25F ADJ

Switch
SPDT SPDT
SPDT SPDT

Capillary
None None
96" 96"
None None
None None
240" 240"
72" 72"
96" 96"

Bulb
Coiled Coiled
3/8x6 3/8x4
Coiled Coiled
Coiled Coiled
3/8x6 3/8x4
Yes 3/8x4
3/8x6 .29x2.5

Capillary
60" 72"
60" 72"

Bulb
3/8x4 0.3x3.125
3/8x4 0.3x3.125

Cover
NEMA 4X NEMA 4X
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1

Notes
(1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1)

Cover
Open NEMA 1
Open NEMA 1

Notes
(10) (10)

Pressure Controls (Ranco Series 3126-3161, G20-G23, and O10-O20) (Part 1 of 3)

Product #

Range

Differential Switch

Capillary

Connection

Ranco 3126-116

7/125

25 FXD

SPDT

60"

PENN P20EB-1C

7/150

29/32 FXD

SPDT

36"

Sweat Sweat

Ranco PENN

3126-117 P70AB-2C

7/27 20"/100

12 FXD

SPDT

60"

7/50 ADJ

Open LO

36"

Sweat w/ Flare

Ranco PENN

3126-216 P70BA-1C

7/125 20"/100

Manual Manual

Open LO

60"

Open LO

36"

Sweat w/ Flare

Ranco 3126-412

7/77

23/70

SPDT

60"

PENN P20EB-1C

7/150

29/32 FXD

SPDT

36"

Sweat Sweat

Ranco 3127-140

125/450

70 FXD

Open HI

60"

PENN P20EB-2C

100/425

60/77 FXD

SPDT

36"

Sweat Sweat

Ranco PENN

3127-220 P70DA-1C

125/450 50/450

Manual Manual

SPDT

60"

Open HI

36"

Sweat w/ Flare

Ranco 3127-414

150/450

70/125

SPDT

60"

PENN P20EB-2C

100/425

60/77 FXD

SPDT

36"

Sweat Sweat

Ranco 3160-012

5/110

25 FXD

SPDT

60"

PENN P20EB-1C

7/150

29/32 FXD

SPDT

36"

Sweat Sweat

Ranco PENN

3160-014 P20EB-1C

5/125 7/150

25 FXD

Open LO

60"

29/32 FXD

SPDT

36"

Sweat Sweat

Ranco PENN

3160-212 P70BA-1C

5/110 20"/100

Manual Manual

Open LO

60"

Open LO

36"

Sweat w/ Flare

Ranco 3160-406

5/125

12/50

SPDT

60"

PENN P20EB-1C

7/150

29/32 FXD

SPDT

36"

Sweat Sweat

Ranco 3161-002

200/475

75 FXD

Open HI

60"

PENN P20EB-2C

100/425

60/77 FXD

SPDT

36"

Sweat Sweat

Ranco 3161-003

200/475

110 FXD

Open HI

60"

PENN P20EB-2C

100/425

60/77 FXD

SPDT

36"

Sweat Sweat

Ranco 3161-004

200/475

50 FXD

Open HI

60"

PENN P20EB-2C

100/425

60/77 FXD

SPDT

36"

Sweat Sweat

Ranco 3161-009

125/285

50 FXD

SPDT

60"

PENN P20EB-2C

100/425

60/77 FXD

SPDT

36"

Sweat Sweat

Cover
Open Open
Open NEMA 1
Open NEMA 1
Open Open
Open Open
Open NEMA 1
Open Open
Open Open
Open Open
Open NEMA 1
Open Open
Open Open
Open Open
Open Open
Open Open

Notes
(6) (5)(4) (5)(4) (6) (6) (5)(4) (6) (6) (6) (5)(4) (6) (6) (6) (6) (6)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-224

Cross-Reference
Ranco® Refrigeration Cross-Reference (Continued)

Pressure Controls (Ranco Series 3126-3161, G20-G23, and O10-O20) (Part 2 of 3)

Product #

Range

Differential Switch

Capillary

Connection

Ranco PENN

3161-201 P70DA-1C

200/475 50/450

Manual Manual

SPDT

60"

Open HI

36"

Sweat w/ Flare

Cover
Open NEMA 1

Notes
(5)(4)

Ranco PENN

3161-205 P70DA-1C

125/285 50/450

Manual Manual

Open HI

60"

Open HI

36"

w/ Flare w/ Flare

NEMA 1

Open (5)

Ranco 3161-403

200/475

50/150

SPDT

60"

PENN P20EB-2C

100/425

60/77 FXD

SPDT

36"

Sweat Sweat

Open

Open

(6)

Ranco PENN

G20-4050 P70AB-2C

7/27 20"/100

12 FXD

Open LO

60"

7/50 ADJ

Open LO

36"

Sweat w/ Flare

Open NEMA 1

(5)(4)

Ranco PENN

G20-4051 P20EB-1C

7/77 7/150

19/70

Open LO

60"

29/32 FXD

SPDT

36"

Sweat Sweat

Open

Open

(6)

Ranco PENN

G20-4412 P70BA-1C

7/70 20"/100

Manual Manual

Open LO

60"

Open LO

36"

Sweat w/ Flare

Open NEMA 1

(5)(4)

Ranco G23-5052

150/450

50/125

Open HI

60"

PENN P20EB-2C

100/425

60/77 FXD

SPDT

36"

Sweat Sweat

Open

Open

(6)

Ranco PENN

G23-5253 P70DA-1C

50/450 50/450

Manual Manual

Open HI

60"

Open HI

36"

Sweat w/ Flare

Open NEMA 1

(5)(4)

Ranco PENN

O10-1093 P70AB-2C

10"/100 20"/100

10/40 7/50

Open LO

48"

Open LO

36"

w/ Flare w/ Flare

NEMA 1

NEMA 1

Ranco O10-1401

12"/50

5/35

PENN P170AB-12C

12"/80

5/35

Open LO Open LO

None None

External Flare External Flare

NEMA 1

NEMA 1

Ranco O10-1402

12"/50

535

PENN P70AB-12C

12"/80

5/35

Open LO

36"

Open LO

36"

w/ Flare w/ Flare

NEMA 1

NEMA 1

Ranco PENN

O10-1483 P70AB-2C

10"/100 20"/100

10/40 7/50

Open LO

36"

Open LO

36"

w/ Flare w/ Flare

NEMA 1

NEMA 1

Ranco PENN

O10-1807 P70AA-151C

100/250 50/300

20/100 20/120

Open LO Open LO

None None

External Flare External Flare

NEMA 1

NEMA 1

Ranco PENN

O10-1831 P70AB-12C

10"/100 12"/80

10/40 5/35

Open LO Open LO

None 36"

External Flare w/ Flare

NEMA 1 NEMA 1

Ranco O10-1842

12"/50

5/35

PENN P70AB-12C

12"/80

5/35

Open LO

48"

Open LO

36"

w/ Flare w/ Flare

NEMA 1 NEMA 1

Ranco PENN

O10-2000 P70AA-3C

100/250 100/300

20/100 25/75

Open LO

48"

Open LO

36"

w/ Flare w/ Flare

NEMA 1 NEMA 1

Ranco PENN

O10-2054 P70AA-118C

100/400 100/400

40/150 35/200

Open LO

36"

Open LO

36"

w/ Flare w/ Flare

NEMA 1 NEMA 1

Ranco PENN

O11-1711 P70CA-3C

150/450 50/450

40/150 60/150

Open HI

36"

Open HI

36"

w/ Flare w/ Flare

NEMA 1 NEMA 1

Ranco PENN

O11-1713 P70CA-2C

150/450 50/450

40/150 60/150

Open HI Open HI

None None

External Flare External Flare

NEMA 1 NEMA 1

Ranco PENN

O11-1799 P170CA-1C

10"/100 20"/100

10/40 6/70

Open HI Open HI

None None

External Flare External Flare

NEMA 1 NEMA 1

Ranco PENN

O11-3099 P70CA-1C

10"/100 20"/100

10/40 6/70

Open HI

36"

Open HI

36"

w/ Flare w/ Flare

NEMA 1 NEMA 1

Ranco PENN

O16-107 P70EA-10C

10"/100 20"/100

10/40 ADJ 5 FXD

SPDT SPDT

None None

External Flare External Flare

NEMA 1 NEMA 1

Ranco PENN

O16-120 P70EA-10C

12"/50 20"/100

5/35 ADJ 5 FXD

SPDT SPDT

None None

External Flare External Flare

NEMA 1 NEMA 1

Ranco O16-142

100/400

17 FXD

SPDT

36"

PENN P70EA-6C

100/300

14 FXD

SPDT

36"

w/ Flare Sweat

NEMA 1

NEMA 1

(4)

Ranco PENN

O16-166 P70GA-2C

50/150 20"/100

10/40 7/50

SPDT

36"

NO/NC

36"

w/ Flare w/ Flare

NEMA 1

NEMA 1

(12)

Ranco O16-200

150/450

Manual

SPDT

48"

PENN P70KA-1C

50/450

Manual

NO/NC

36"

w/ Flare w/ Flare

NEMA 1

NEMA 1

(12)

Ranco PENN

O16-209 P170KA-1C

150/450 50/450

Manual Manual

SPDT NO/NC

None None

External Flare

NEMA 1

External Flare

NEMA 1

(12)

Ranco O16-261

10"/100

Manual

SPDT

48"

PENN P70HA-2C

20"/100

Manual

NO/NC

36"

w/ Flare w/ Flare

NEMA 1

NEMA 1

(12)

Ranco PENN

O16-503 P70JA-18C

150/450 50/450

40/150 60/150

SPDT NO/NC

None None

External Flare

NEMA 1

External Flare

NEMA 1

(12)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-225

Cross-Reference
Ranco® Refrigeration Cross-Reference (Continued)

Pressure Controls (Ranco Series 3126-3161, G20-G23, and O10-O20) (Part 3 of 3)

Product #

Range

Differential Switch

Capillary

Connection

Ranco PENN

O16-527 P70EA-10C

10"/100 20"/100

10/40 ADJ 5 FXD

SPDT SPDT

36" None

w/ Flare External Flare

Ranco PENN

O16-557 P70EA-10C

12"/50 20"/100

5/35 ADJ 5 FXD

SPDT SPDT

36" None

w/ Flare External Flare

Ranco PENN

O16-585 P70HA-3C

10"/100 20"/100

Manual Manual

SPDT NO/NC

None None

External Flare Internal NPT

Ranco PENN

O20-1894 P170AA-118C

100/400 100/400

40/150 35/200

Open LO Open LO

None None

External Flare External Flare

Ranco O20-7002

12"/50

5/35

PENN P72AA-1C

20"/100

7/50

DPST-LO

36"

DPST-LO

36"

w/ Flare w/ Flare

Ranco PENN

O20-7006 P72AA-27C

100/400 100/400

40/150 35/200

DPST-LO

36"

DPST-LO

36"

w/ Flare w/ Flare

Cover
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1

Notes
(3) (3) (4)(12)

Pressure Controls (Ranco Series 3100, MPF, MPH, and MPL) (Part 1 of 3)

Product #

Cut-Out

Cut-In

Range

Switch

Electrical

Ranco 3100-001

15

40

None

SPST

30" Leads

PENN P100AA-1C

10

40

None

SPST

48" Leads

Ranco 3100-002

5

30

PENN P20EB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None 7/150

SPST SPDT

72" Leads Arkles

Ranco 3100-003

20

45

PENN P20EB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None 7/150

SPST SPDT

72" Leads Arkles

Ranco 3100-004

35

60

None

SPST

QC

PENN P100AA-2C

35

60

None

SPST

48" Leads

Ranco PENN

3100-005 P70AB-1C

15" VAC

17.5

ADJ.

N/A

None 20"/100

SPDT SPST

QC Screw Terms.

Ranco 3100-006

48

80

PENN P20EB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None 7/150

SPDT SPDT

36" Leads Arkles

Ranco 3100-007

15

40

None

SPST

30" Leads

PENN P100AA-1C

10

40

None

SPST

48" Leads

Ranco 3100-009

0

20

PENN P70AB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None 20"/100

SPST SPST

QC Screw Terms.

Ranco 3100-010

45

70

PENN P20EB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None 7/150

SPDT SPDT

QC Arkles

Ranco 3100-050

10

30

None

SPST

18" Leads

PENN P100AA-1C

10

40

None

SPST

48" Leads

Ranco 3100-051

25

80

PENN P20EB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None 7/150

SPST SPDT

18" Leads Arkles

Ranco 3100-052

40

80

None

SPST

18" Leads

PENN P100AA-2C

35

60

None

SPST

48" Leads

Ranco 3100-075

85

135

PENN P70AA-119C

ADJ.

N/A

None 50/300

SPDT SPST

QC Screw Terms.

Ranco 3100-076

108

135

PENN P20EB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None 7/150

SPST SPDT

QC Arkles

Ranco 3100-077

115

165

PENN P170AA-118C ADJ.

N/A

None 100/400

SPST SPST

QC Screw Terms.

Ranco 3100-078

135

185

PENN P170AA-118C ADJ.

N/A

None 100/400

SPDT SPST

QC Screw Terms.

Ranco 3100-079

165

215

None

SPST

QC

PENN P100AA-4C

170

250

None

SPST

48" Leads

Ranco 3100-080

200

240

PENN P170AA-118C ADJ.

N/A

None 100/400

SPDT SPST

QC Screw Terms.

Ranco 3100-081

250

300

PENN P170AA-118C ADJ.

N/A

None 100/400

SPDT SPST

QC Screw Terms.

Ranco 3100-100

425

325

None

SPST

72" Leads

PENN P100CA-2C

425

325

None

SPST

48" Leads

Ranco 3100-101

400

300

None

SPST

18" Leads

PENN P100CA-1C

400

300

None

SPST

48" Leads

Pressure
1/4" Sweat 1/4" Internal Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 1/4" Internal Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 1/4" External Flare
1/4" Sweat 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 1/4" Internal Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 1/4" External Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 1/4" Internal Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 1/4" Internal Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 1/4" Internal Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 1/4" External Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 1/4" External Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 1/4" Internal Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 1/4" External Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 1/4" External Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 1/4" Internal Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 1/4" Internal Flare

Notes
(4)(5)(6)(7)(8) (4)(5)(6)(7)(8) (8) (4)(5)(7)(8) (4)(5)(6)(7)(8)
(4)(5)(7)(8) (4)(5)(6)(7)
(4)(5)(6)(7)(8)
(5)(7)(8)(12) (4)(5)(6)(7)(12) (4)(5)(7)(8) (4)(5)(7)(8)(12) (8) (4)(5)(7)(8)(12) (4)(5)(7)(8)(12)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-226

Cross-Reference
Ranco® Refrigeration Cross-Reference (Continued)

Pressure Controls (Ranco Series 3100, MPF, MPH, and MPL) (Part 2 of 3)

Product #

Cut-Out

Cut-In

Range

Switch

Electrical

Ranco 3100-102

220

170

None

SPST

QC

PENN P100CA-2C

425

325

None

SPST

48" Leads

Ranco 3100-103

410

PENN P100DA-1C

410

Manual Manual

None None

SPST SPST

42" Leads 48" Leads

Ranco PENN

3100-104 P70DA-1C

420 ADJ.

Manual Manual

None 50/450

SPST SPST

48" Leads Screw Terms.

Ranco PENN

3100-105 P70DA-1C

440 ADJ.

Manual Manual

None 50/450

SPST SPST

36" Leads Screw Terms.

Ranco 3100-106

475

PENN P100DA-2C

475

Manual Manual

None None

SPST SPST

42" Leads 48" Leads

Ranco PENN

3100-107 P70DA-1C

232 ADJ.

Manual Manual

None 50/450

SPST SPST

84" Leads Screw Terms.

Ranco PENN

3100-108 P20EB-2C

280 ADJ.

Manual N/A

None 100/425

SPST SPDT

12" Leads Arkles

Ranco 3100-110

375

275

PENN P20EB-2C

ADJ.

N/A

None 100/425

SPDT SPDT

QC Arkles

Ranco 3100-111

375

275

PENN P20EB-2C

ADJ.

N/A

None 100/425

SPST SPDT

QC Arkles

Ranco 3100-112

275

175

PENN P20EB-2C

ADJ.

N/A

None 100/425

SPST SPDT

24" Leads Arkles

Ranco 3100-113

395

295

PENN P20EB-2C

ADJ.

N/A

None 100/425

SPST SPDT

QC Arkles

Ranco 3100-115

350

250

PENN P20EB-2C

ADJ.

N/A

None 100/425

SPDT SPDT

36" Leads Arkles

Ranco 3100-116

213

113

PENN P20EB-2C

ADJ.

N/A

None 100/425

SPST SPDT

QC Arkles

Ranco 3100-117

140

190

PENN P20EB-2C

ADJ.

N/A

None 100/425

SPST SPDT

12" Leads Arkles

Ranco 3100-118

295

395

PENN P20EB-2C

ADJ.

N/A

None 100/425

SPST SPDT

QC Arkles

Ranco 3100-120

420

320

PENN P20EB-2C

ADJ.

N/A

None 100/425

SPST SPDT

QC Arkles

Ranco 3100-121

426

272

PENN P20EB-2C

ADJ.

N/A

None 100/425

SPST SPDT

QC Arkles

Ranco 3100-150

350

250

PENN P20EB-2C

ADJ.

N/A

None 100/425

SPST SPDT

18" Leads Arkles

Ranco 3100-151

400

300

None

SPST

18" Leads

PENN P100CA-1C

400

300

None

SPST

48" Leads

Ranco 3100-152

400

200

None

SPST

18" Leads

PENN P100CA-1C

400

300

None

SPST

48" Leads

Ranco 3100-153

450

250

PENN P20EB-2C

ADJ.

N/A

None 100/425

SPST SPDT

18" Leads Arkles

Ranco 3100-154

500

400

PENN P70LB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None 100/500

SPST SPST

18" Leads Screw Terms.

Ranco 3100-155

500

300

PENN P70LB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None 100/500

SPST SPST

18" Leads Screw Terms.

Ranco MPF-7006

75

120

PENN P20EB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None 7/150

SPST SPDT

18" Leads Arkles

Ranco MPF-7007

110

170

PENN P20EB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None 7/150

SPST SPDT

18" Leads Arkles

Ranco MPF-7008

150

225

None

SPST

18" Leads

PENN P100AA-3C

150

225

None

SPST

48" Leads

Ranco MPF-7009

190

275

PENN P20EB-2C

ADJ.

N/A

None 100/425

SPST SPDT

18" Leads Arkles

Ranco MPF-7010

300

400

PENN P20EB-2C

ADJ.

N/A

None 100/425

SPST SPDT

18" Leads Arkles

Ranco MPH-7101

250

180

PENN P20EB-2C

ADJ.

N/A

None 100/425

SPST SPDT

18" Leads Arkles

Pressure
1/4" Internal Flare 1/4" Internal Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 1/4" Internal Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Flare
.093 Cap. Tube 36" Cap, Flare
1/4" Sweat w/ Cap. 1/4" Internal Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Flare
1/4" NPTF 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Sweat 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Sweat 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Sweat 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat
.093 Cap. Tube 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Sweat 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 1/4" Internal Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 1/4" Internal Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 1/4" External Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat

Notes
(8)
(4)(5)(7)(8) (4)(5)(7)(8) (4) (4)(5)(7)(8) (4)(5)(6)(7)(8) (4)(5)(6)(7) (4)(5)(6)(7) (4)(5)(6)(7)(8) (4)(5)(6)(7) (4)(5)(6)(7)(8) (4)(5)(6)(7) (4)(5)(6)(7)(8) (4)(5)(6)(7) (4)(5)(6)(7) (4)(5)(6)(7) (4)(5)(6)(7)(8)
(4)(5)(6)(7)(8) (4)(5)(7)(8)(9) (4)(5)(7)(8)(9) (6)(7)(8) (6)(7)(8)
(6)(7)(8) (6)(7)(8) (6)(7)(8)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-227

Cross-Reference
Ranco® Refrigeration Cross-Reference (Continued)

Pressure Controls (Ranco Series 3100, MPF, MPH, and MPL) (Part 3 of 3)

Product #

Cut-Out

Cut-In

Range

Switch

Electrical

Ranco MPH-7102

270

200

PENN P20EB-2C

ADJ.

N/A

None 100/425

SPST SPDT

18" Leads Arkles

Ranco MPH-7103

300

200

PENN P20EB-2C

ADJ.

N/A

None 100/425

SPST SPDT

18" Leads Arkles

Ranco MPH-7104

325

225

PENN P20EB-2C

ADJ.

N/A

None 100/425

SPST SPDT

18" Leads Arkles

Ranco MPH-7105

350

250

PENN P20EB-2C

ADJ.

N/A

None 100/425

SPST SPDT

18" Leads Arkles

Ranco MPH-7106

375

275

PENN P20EB-2C

ADJ.

N/A

None 100/425

SPST SPDT

18" Leads Arkles

Ranco MPH-7107

400

300

None

SPST

18" Leads

PENN P100CA-1C

400

300

None

SPST

48" Leads

Ranco MPH-7108

425

325

None

SPST

18" Leads

PENN P100CA-2C

425

325

None

SPST

48" Leads

Ranco MPL-7001

5

PENN P100AC-1C

5

20

None

SPST

18" Leads

20

None

SPST

48" Leads

Ranco MPL-7002

15

35

None

SPST

18" Leads

PENN P100AA-1C

10

40

None

SPST

48" Leads

Ranco MPL-7003

25

80

PENN P20EB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None 7/150

SPST SPDT

18" Leads Arkles

Ranco MPL-7004

35

60

None

SPST

18" Leads

PENN P100AA-2C

35

60

None

SPST

48" Leads

Ranco MPL-7005

45

60

PENN P20EB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None 7/150

SPST SPDT

18" Leads Arkles

Ranco MPL-7011

10

25

PENN P20EB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None 7/150

SPST SPDT

18" Leads Arkles

Ranco MPL-7012

20

45

PENN P20EB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None 7/150

SPST SPDT

18" Leads Arkles

Ranco MPL-7014

40

80

PENN P20EB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None 7/150

SPST SPDT

18" Leads Arkles

Pressure
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 1/4" External Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 1/4" External Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 1/4" External Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 1/4" External Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 1/4" External Flare
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat
1/4" Internal Flare 36" Cap, Sweat

Notes
(6)(7)(8) (6)(7)(8) (6)(7)(8) (6)(7)(8) (6)(7)(8)
(6)(7)(8)
(6)(7)(8) (6)(7)(8) (6)(7)(8) (6)(7)(8)

Dual Pressure Controls (Part 1 of 2)

Product #

LO Side

Differential

Ranco O12-1502

12"/50

5/35

PENN P70LB-6C

12"/80

5/35

HI Side
150/450 100/500

Differential
70 FXD 60 FXD

Capillary
36" 36"

Connection
W/ Flare W/ Flare

Notes

Ranco O12-1505

12"/50

5/35

PENN P170LB-6C

12"/80

5/35

100/250 100/500

50 FXD 60 FXD

None None

External Flare External Flare

Ranco O12-1506

12"/50

5/35

PENN P70LB-6C

12"/80

5/35

100/250

50 FXD

36"

100/500

60 FXD

36"

W/ Flare W/ Flare

Ranco PENN

O12-1549 P70LB-1C

10"/100 20"/100

10/40 7/50

150/450

70 FXD

36"

100/500

60 FXD

36"

W/ Flare W/ Flare

Ranco PENN

O12-1550 P170LB-1C

10"/100 20"/100

10/40 7/50

150/450 100/500

70 FXD 60 FXD

None None

External Flare External Flare

Ranco O12-1554

12"/50

5/35

PENN P70LB-6C

12"/80

5/35

100/250

50 FXD

48"

100/500

60 FXD

36"

W/ Flare W/ Flare

Ranco PENN

O12-1594 P70NA-1C

10"/100 20"/100

Manual Manual

150/450

Manual

36"

100/500

Manual

36"

W/ Flare W/ Flare

Ranco O12-4139

12"/50

5/35

PENN P170LB-6C

12"/80

5/35

150/450 100/500

70 FXD 60 FXD

None None

External Flare External Flare

Ranco O12-4833

12"/50

5/35

PENN P70SA-1C

12"/80

5/35

150/450 100/500

70 FXD/Man 48"

60 FXD

36"

W/ Flare W/ Flare

Ranco PENN

O12-4834 P70SA-1C

10"/100 12"/80

10/40 5/35

150/450 100/500

70 FXD/Man 48"

60 FXD

36"

W/ Flare W/ Flare

Ranco O12-4842

12"/50

5/35

PENN P170SA-1C

12"/80

5/35

150/450 100/500

70 FXD/Man None

60 FXD

None

External Flare External Flare

Ranco PENN

O12-4846 P170SA-1C

10"/100 12"/80

10/40 5/35

150/450 100/500

70 FXD/Man None

60 FXD

None

External Flare External Flare

Ranco PENN

O22-7702 P72LB-1C

12"/50

5/35

20"/100

7/50

100/250 100/500

50 FXD/Man 36"

60 FXD

36"

W/ Flare

W/ Flare

(2)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-228

Cross-Reference
Ranco® Refrigeration Cross-Reference (Continued)

Dual Pressure Controls (Part 2 of 2)

Product #

LO Side

Differential

Ranco PENN

O22-7706 P72LB-1C

10"/100 20"/100

10/40 7/50

HI Side
150/450 100/500

Differential
70 FXD 60 FXD

Capillary
36" 36"

Connection
W/ Flare W/ Flare

Low Pressure Cutout with Time Delay

Product #

Range

Differential

Ranco PENN

3341-161 P29NC-38C

0/100 20"/100

5 FXD 2.2 FXD

Time Delay
120 Secs. 120 Secs.

Capillary
36" 36"

Connection
W/ Flare W/ Flare

Cover
NEMA 1 NEMA 1

Lube Oil Pressure Controls

Product #

Range

Ranco PENN

3321-001 P128AA-**C

9 FXD 8/70 ADJ

Ranco PENN

3321-009 P28AA-**C

5 FXD 8/70 ADJ

Ranco PENN

3321-010 P28AA-**C

9 FXD 8/70 ADJ

Ranco PENN

3321-014 P28AA-**C

15 FXD 8/70 ADJ

Ranco PENN

3321-015 P28AA-**C

30 FXD 8/70 ADJ

Ranco PENN

P30-3601 P28AA-2C

8/60 ADJ 8/70 ADJ

Ranco PENN

P30-3701 P28AA-1C

8/60 ADJ 8/70 ADJ

Ranco PENN

P30-3801 P28AA-17C

8/60 ADJ 8/70 ADJ

Ranco PENN

P30-5826 P45NCA-12C

9 FXD 9 FXD

Ranco PENN

P30-5827 P145NCA-12C

9 FXD 9 FXD

Reset
Manual Manual
Manual Manual
Manual Manual
Manual Manual
Manual Manual
Manual Manual
Manual Manual
Manual Manual
Manual Manual
Manual Manual

Delay
45,60,90,120 Note (11)
45,60,90,120 Note (11)
45,60,90,120 Note (11)
45,60,90,120 Note (11)
45,60,90,120 Note (11)
60 60
90 90
120 120
120 120
120 120

Capillary
None None
36" 36"
36" 36"
36" 36"
36" 36"
36" 36"
36" 36"
36" 36"
36" 36"
None None

Connection
External Flare External Flare
W/ Flare W/ Flare
W/ Flare W/ Flare
W/ Flare W/ Flare
W/ Flare W/ Flare
W/ Flare W/ Flare
W/ Flare W/ Flare
W/ Flare W/ Flare
W/ Flare W/ Flare
External Flare External Flare

Cover
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1

Lube Oil Pressure Controls without Time Delay

Product #

Range

Differential Cut-In

Ranco PENN

3311-101 P74AA-1C

14 FXD 8/70 ADJ

5 FXD 8/30 ADJ

9 FXD ADJ

Ranco PENN

3311-103 P74EA-8C

4/6 ADJ

5/6

9/12

2/26 ADJ

3.5 FXD

N/A

Ranco PENN

3311-111 P74EA-8C

4/6 FXD

5/6

9/12

2/26 ADJ

3.5 FXD

N/A

Ranco PENN

3311-115 P74BA-1C

6 FXD 8/70 ADJ

5 FXD 7/30 ADJ

11 FXD ADJ

Ranco PENN

3311-118 P74BA-1C

40 FXD 8/70 ADJ

5 FXD 7/30 ADJ

45 FXD ADJ

Ranco PENN

3311-201 P74AB-1C

7 FXD 8/70 ADJ

Manual Manual

Manual Manual

Ranco PENN

3315-101 P74AA-1C

14 FXD 8/70 ADJ

5 FXD 8/30 ADJ

9 FXD ADJ

Ranco PENN

3315-801 P74BA-1C

11/14 ADJ 8/70 ADJ

5 FXD 7/30 ADJ

16/19 ADJ

Switch
SPDT Open Hi
SPDT SPDT
SPDT SPDT
Open LO Open LO
Open LO Open LO
SPDT Open Hi
SPDT Open Hi
SPDT Open LO

Capillary
36" 36"
24" 36"
84" 36"
24" 36"
25" & 24" 36"
49" & 72" None
36" 36"
None 36"

Connection
1/4" Internal Flares 1/4" Internal Flares
W/1/4" Sweats 1/4" Internal Flares
1/4" Internal Flares 1/4" Internal Flares
1/4" Internal Flares 1/4" Internal Flares
W/1/4" Sweats 1/4" Internal Flares
W/1/4" Sweats 1/4" Internal NPT
1/4" Internal Flares 1/4" Internal Flares
External Flares 1/4" Internal Flares

Notes
(2)
Notes
Notes
(11) (11) (11) (11) (11)
Notes
(12) (4)
(4) (4)(12) (12) (4)(12)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-229

Cross-Reference

Ranco® Refrigeration Cross-Reference (Continued)

Transformers

Product #

VA

Ranco 620-205

20

PENN Y65A13-0

40

Ranco 620-206

20

PENN Y65T31-0

40

Ranco 620-403

40

PENN Y65T31-0

40

Ranco 620-404

40

PENN Y65T31-0

40

Ranco 620-405

40

PENN Y65A13-0

40

Ranco 620-406

40

PENN Y65T31-0

40

Ranco 620-482

40

PENN Y65A13-0

40

PENN Y65T31-0

40

Ranco 620-502

50

PENN Y63T22-0

50

Ranco 620-752

75

PENN Y66T12-0

75

Ranco 620-758

75

PENN Y66F12-0

75

Prim. Volt.
120 120
208/240 120/208/240
120 120/208/240
208/240 120/208/240
120 120
208/240 120/208/240
120/208/240 120 120/208/240
120/208/240 120/208/240
120/208/240 120/208/240
480 277/480

Prim. Lead
8" Leads 8" Leads
8" Leads 8" Leads
8" Leads 8" Leads
8" Leads 8" Leads
8" Leads 8" Leads
8" Leads 8" Leads
8" Leads 8" Leads 8" Leads
8" Leads 8" Leads
8" Leads 8" Leads
8" Leads 8" Leads

Sec. Volt.
24 24
24 24
24 24
24 24
24 24
24 24
24 24 24
24 24
24 24
24 24

Sec. Lead
8" Leads 30" Leads
8" Leads 3 Terminals
8" Leads 3 Terminals
8" Leads 3 Terminals
8" Leads 30" Leads
8" Leads 3 Terminals
8" Leads 30" Leads 3 Terminals
8" Leads 8" Leads
8" Leads 8" Leads
8" Leads 8" Leads

Notes:

(1) Can use A419ABC-1, -30/212F range, 1/30F differential, SPDT, 78" lead, 0.25 x 2 PTC sensor, NEMA 1.

(2) Convertible

(3) Add Ecosafe hose.

(4) Different pressure element.

(5) Not as compact.

(6) Differential depends on setting.

(7) Not an encapsulated switch as Ranco's is.

(8) Different electrical connection.

(9) Dual control, ignore lo side.

(10) Range is Defrost Termination for both.

(11) Choose correct one below based on timing required and pressure connection:

P28AA-1

8/70

P28AA-2

8/70

P28AA-17

8/70

P28AA-18

8/70

P128AA-1

8/70

P128AA-2

8/70

P128AA-17

8/70

90 Secs. 60 Secs. 120 Secs. 45 Secs. 90 Secs. 60 Secs. 120 Secs.

36" 36" 36" 36" None None None

W/ Flare W/ Flare W/ Flare W/ Flare External Flare External Flare External Flare

(12) Different switch.

(13) Choose which transformer based on primary voltage desired.

(14) May be extended up to 800 feet.

Mounting
Foot Foot w/ Hubs
Foot Universal
Universal Universal
Universal Universal
Foot Foot w/ Hubs
Foot Universal
Foot Foot w/ Hubs Universal
Universal Universal
Foot Foot
Foot Foot

Notes
(8) (8) (8)
(8) (13) (13) (13)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-230

Cross-Reference
ALCO® Cross Reference

Code No. LIT-1900211

Temperature Controls

Product #

Range

ALCO TF115-S2 AE00 -20/60F

ALCO PENN

TSI-X2E 30/40 -20/60F

A19BBC-2C

-30/100F

PENN A19BBC-6C

-30/100F

ALCO
ALCO PENN PENN

TF115-S3 AE00
TSI-X3E 64/48 A19BBC-2C A19BBC-6C

15/95F
15/95F -30/100F -30/100F

ALCO
ALCO PENN PENN

TF115-S4 AF10
TSI-X4F 32/41 A19ABC-24C A19ABC-36C

-20/95F
-20/95F -30/100F -30/100F

Differential Switch

3/30F ADJ

SPDT

3/30F ADJ 3/12F ADJ

SPDT SPDT

3/12F ADJ SPDT

3/30F ADJ
3/30F ADJ 3/12F ADJ 3/12F ADJ

SPDT
SPDT SPDT SPDT

5/35F ADJ
5/35F ADJ 3/12F ADJ 3/12F ADJ

SPDT
SPDT SPDT SPDT

Capillary

Bulb

NONE

COILED

NONE None

COILED Coiled

None

Coiled

NONE
NONE None None

COILED
COILED Coiled Coiled

120"
120" 96" 240"

3/8x2-3/4
3/8x2-3/4 3/8x4 3/8x4

Cover
NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1

Notes: (1) Can use A419ABC-1, -30/212F range, 1/30F differential, SPDT, 78" lead, 0.25 x 2 PTC sensor, NEMA 1. (2) Knob assembly/concealed adjustment packed separately.

Notes
(1) (1)(2)
(1) (1)(2)
(1) (1)

Pressure Controls

Product #

ALCO FF115-S1 BAK

ALCO PENN

PS1-X1K 7/15 P70AB-12C

Range
24"/42 24"/42 12"/80

ALCO
ALCO PENN

FF115-S3 BAK
PS1-X3K 50/65 P70AB-2C

15"/100
15"/100 20"/100

ALCO
ALCO PENN

FF115-S3 BAA
PS1-X3A 50/65 P170AB-2C

15"/100
15"/100 20"/100

ALCO ALCO PENN PENN

FF115-S4 BAK 15/290

PS1-X4K 115/145 15/290

P70AA-2C

0/150

P70AA-3C

100/300

ALCO ALCO PENN PENN

FF115-S5 BAK 90/450

PS1-X5K 230/290 90/450

P70AA-118C

100/400

P70CA-3C

50/450

ALCO ALCO PENN PENN

FF115-S5 BAA 90/450

PS1-X5A 140/280 90/450 P170AA-118C 100/400

P170CA-3C

50/450

ALCO ALCO PENN PENN

FF115-S5 BRK 90/450

PS1-Y5K 230/290 90/450

P70DA-1C

50/450

P70KA-1C

50/450

ALCO
ALCO PENN

FF115-S5 BRA 90/450

PS1-Y5A 330/390 90/450

P170DA-1C

50/450

Differential
3/30 ADJ 3/30 ADJ 5/35 ADJ

Switch
SPDT SPDT Open LO

7/70 ADJ
7/70 ADJ 7/50 ADJ

SPDT
SPDT Open LO

7/70 ADJ
7/70 ADJ 7/50 ADJ

SPDT
SPDT Open LO

15/145 ADJ 15/145 ADJ 12/40 ADJ 25/75 ADJ

SPDT SPDT Open LO Open LO

30/220 30/220 35/200 60/150

SPDT SPDT Open LO Open HI

30/220 30/220 35/200 60/150

SPDT SPDT Open LO Open HI

Manual Manual Manual Manual

SPDT SPDT Open HI M-Block

Manual
Manual Manual

SPDT
SPDT Open HI

Capillary
36" 36" 36"
36" 36" 36"
None None None
36" 36" 36" 36"
36" 36" 36" 36"
None None None None
36" 36" 36" 36"
None None None

Notes: (3) Main opens HI, auxilliary opens LO (primarily used for alarm circuit).

Connection
w/ Flare w/ Flare w/ Flare
w/ Flare w/ Flare w/ Flare
External Flare External Flare External Flare
w/ Flare w/ Flare w/ Flare w/ Flare
w/ Flare w/ Flare w/ Flare w/ Flare
External Flare External Flare External Flare External Flare
w/ Flare w/ Flare w/ Flare w/ Flare
External Flare External Flare External Flare

Cover
NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1

Notes
(3)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-231

Cross-Reference

ALCO® Cross Reference (Continued)

Dual Pressure Controls

Product #

ALCO FF215-S9 BAUK

ALCO PENN

PS2-Y9K P70SA-1C

LO Side
24"/42
24"/42 12"/80

ALCO
ALCO PENN

FF215-S7 BAUK
PS2-Y7K P70SA-1C

15"/100
15"/100 12"/80

ALCO
ALCO PENN

FF215-S7 BAUA
PS2-Y7A P170SA-1C

15"/100
15"/100 12"/80

Differential
3/30 3/30 5/35
7/70 7/70 5/35
7/70 7/70 5/35

HI Side
90/450 90/450 100/500
90/450 90/450 100/500
90/450 90/450 100/500

Differential
60 FXD 60 FXD 60 FXD
60 FXD 60 FXD 60 FXD
60 FXD 60 FXD 60 FXD

Capillary
48" 48" 36"
48" 48" 36"
None None None

Connection
W/ Flare W/ Flare W/ Flare
W/ Flare W/ Flare W/ Flare
External Flare External Flare External Flare

Notes

Lube Oil Pressure Controls

Product #

Range

ALCO PENN PENN PENN

FD113-ZUK P28AA-**C P45NCA-12C P45NCA-82C

4/65 ADJ 8/70 ADJ 9.0 FXD 6.5 FXD

ALCO PENN PENN PENN

FD113-ZU P128AA-**C P145NCA-12C P145NCA-82C

4/65 ADJ 8/70 ADJ 9.0 FXD 6.5 FXD

Reset
Manual Manual Manual Manual
Manual Manual Manual Manual

Delay
20-150 secs. Note (4) 120 secs. 45 secs.
20-150 secs. Note (4) 120 secs. 45 secs.

Capillary
36" 36" 36" 36"
None None None None

Connection
W/ Flare W/ Flare W/ Flare W/ Flare
External Flare External Flare External Flare External Flare

Cover
NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1
NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1

Notes: (4) Choose correct control below based on timing required and desired pressure connection:

P28AA-1 P28AA-2 P28AA-17 P28AA-18 P128AA-1 P128AA-2 P128AA-17

8/70# 8/70# 8/70# 8/70# 8/70# 8/70# 8/70#

90 Secs. 60 Secs. 120 Secs. 45 Secs. 90 Secs. 60 Secs. 120 Secs.

36" 36" 36" 36" None None None

W/ Flare W/ Flare W/ Flare W/ Flare External Flare External Flare External Flare

(5) Verify timing specifications.

Notes
(4) (5) (5)
(4) (5) (5)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Johnson Controls, Inc. shall not be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc.

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-232

NOTES
R-233

NOTES
R-234

NOTES
R-235

NOTES
R-236

Johnson Controls offers a broad line of innovative, high performing and energy-saving
HVAC and refrigeration controls

REFRIGERATION CONTROLS

VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES

VALVES

ACTUATORS

SENSORS & THERMOSTATS

HVAC CONTROL PANEL PRODUCTS

DAMPERS, LOUVERS & AIR MEASURING PRODUCTS

PNEUMATICS

We are in the business of building efficiency. We create buildings and environments that help people achieve and enterprises succeed. We do that by delivering energy savings. Operational savings. And sustainable solutions. In fact, PENN commercial refrigeration controls by Johnson Controls have been serving the cooling needs of millions of customers
worldwide for more than 95 years.
For more information, or to purchase Johnson Controls products, call 1-800-275-5676 or 1-800-482-2778.
Johnson Controls, the Johnson Controls logo and the PENN by Johnson Controls logo are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc. in the United States of America and other countries. Other trademarks used herein may be trademarks or registered trademarks of other companies. © 2015 Johnson Controls, Inc. P.O. Box 423, Milwaukee, WI 53201 Printed in USA PUBL-5510 (Rev. 10/15) www.johnsoncontrols.com
Acrobat Distiller 11.0 (Windows)